Calypso C-M-M-GUIDE

CALYPSO
Metrology Software
Users Guide
This manual must not be circulated or copied, or its contents utilized and disseminated, without our express written permission. Persons misusing this manual are subject to prosecution. All rights reserved, especially in cases of granting a patent or registering a design. The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. Carl Zeiss makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this manual, including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Carl Zeiss shall not be liable for errors contained herein or direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual. Brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.
Carl Zeiss Industrial Metrology Division D-73446 Oberkochen Germany
CALYPSO Users Guide Revision: 3.5 Date: 04/02 Order number: 61212-2010102
Preface
The Calypso Users Guide is designed for users who want to learn to use Calypso or have a task to complete and want to find out how to accomplish it in Calypso. This Guide contains examples and step-bystep instructions. Consequently, it enables new and experienced users to find the information they need. The reference information on windows and dialog boxes is in the Calypso dialog reference in Online Help.
Overview of Topics
Included in this Users Guide: Chapter 1 Introduction on page 1-1 Hints for working with Windows NT, and provides background information illustrating Calypsos basic procedures and general concepts. Chapter 2 The Dynalog Control Panel on page 2-1 Describes how to operate Calypso using the Dynalog control panel. Chapter 3 Working with the CAD Window on page 3-1 Describes the possibilities of the CAD window and how to use them. You also get information on how to work with CAD data. Chapter 4 Preparing the Measurement Plan on page 4-1 Describes how to open a measurement plan and the prerequisites necessary before you can run a measurement plan automatically. Chapter 5 Defining Features on page 5-1 Describes the definition of the measurement features (e.g. a plane or cylinder), explains how to create a measurement strategy and how to work with scanning. Chapter 6 Defining Characteristics on page 6-1 Describes the principles of the fitting methods that Calypso uses and shows how to define characteristics. Chapter 7 Editing the Measurement Plan on page 7-1 Explains how to manage a test measurement plan, work with the toolbox options, customize presentation protocols and work with the routes of the CMM. Additionally, this chapter describes the use of the probe changer and audiovisual user information. Chapter 8 Running a Measurement Plan on page 8-1 Describes how to start CNC runs and how to work with the measurement results.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Preface
Chapter 9 Viewing, Presenting and Editing Measurement Results on page 9-1 Describes which types of protocols are available and how to work with them. It also describes how to save the measurement results as files of different formats. Chapter 10 The Duplex Mode on page 10-1 Contains the instructions for preparing, performing and evaluating measurements with dual horizontal-arm CMMs. Chapter 11 Managing Calypso on page 11-1 Shows how to install Calypso, how to view and modify all of Calypsos system settings. Chapter 12 The Auto-Run Interface on page 12-1 Explains how the system administrator sets up an Auto-Run interface and how users work with Auto-Run. Chapter 13 DMIS Import (Option) on page 13-1 Explains the basics and the procedure for importing DMISprogrammed measurements into Calypso. Chapter 14 Parameter-coded Measurements (Option) on page 14-1 Explains the basics of the PCM programming language. It also provides directions for and examples of using PCM with Calypso, with formulas, input and output parameters, conditions and loops. Chapter 15 Curve Measurement (Option) on page 15-1 Contains the basics of curve measuring, how to set up curve features and characteristics, and how to operate on the results. Chapter 16 Qualifying the RDS with CAA (Option) on page 16-1 Describes how to calibrate an RDS on a system with the RDS-CAA option (Computer Aided Accuracy). A small number of physical probings is all that is needed to calibrate all 20 736 possible angular positions of an RDS.
Recommended Reading
Simply Measure And what you should know to do it right, A metrology primer Carl Zeiss, Industrial Metrology Division, Germany Order No.: 612302-9102
Preface
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
The Zeiss Training Block

You can order the training block from Carl Zeiss, Industrial Metrology Division, D-73446 Oberkochen, Germany. Order No.: 600331-8052-000
Notational Conventions
This User's Guide uses the following conventions: Example Features Comment C:\windows\w.ini Description Textual element of graphical user interface. The Comment button on the screen. The file w.ini in the directory windows on drive C:\.
Guide your actions... A passage containing important information. Welcome to Cross-reference. If the book is displayed Calypso on page 1-2 online, you can click on the cross-reference to follow the link. CNC Run CNC Run Ctrl-a The CNC Run item in the Run submenu of the CNC menu. Press and hold down the Ctrl key and press lowercase letter a.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Preface
Symbols
This User's Guide uses three types of symbols for providing important information. These symbols appear on the left-hand side of the page; the appropriate text is directly next to the symbol.
hss
! !
Warning Special care is necessary. This symbol calls attention to a procedure, practice, or the like, which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in personal injury or loss of life. Do not proceed beyond a Warning symbol until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met. Caution This symbol calls attention to a procedure, practice, or the like, which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in damage to or destruction of some or all equipment, invalid measurement results, or loss of data. The NOTE symbol calls attention to important and useful additional information.
hss
NOTE
hss
Preface
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction
Welcome to Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 How to Start Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 The Calypso User Desk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Important terms in Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Measurement plan-oriented Measuring with Calypso . . . 1-9
Chapter 2
The Dynalog Control Panel

The Dynalog Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 How to Configure Calypso for Dynalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Operating Calypso via Dynalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
How to Use the Touchpad of the Dynalog Control Panel . . . . . . . 2-5 Using the Toolboxes with Dynalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 The Function Keys of the Dynalog Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Example: The Sequence of Operation with the Dynalog Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Chapter 3
Working with the CAD Window

Basics about the CAD Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 The Buttons in the CAD Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Chapter 4
Preparing the Measurement Plan

Measurement Plan Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
How to Create a New Measurement Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 How to Open an Existing Measurement Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
The List of Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Contents
Homing the CMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

How to Establish the Connection to the CMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 How to Move the CMM to the Home Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Installing and Qualifying Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

How to Install a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Preparing Probes and Styli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Qualifying Styli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 Determining the Reference Sphere Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 How to Print the Probe Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Setting the Base / Start Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Part Alignment Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 How to Load an Existing Base Alignment/Start Alignment . . . . . . 4-33 How to Create a New Base / Start Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 How to Update a Base / Start Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 Example: How to adapt a base alignment in an iterative process with abortion condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 How to Edit an Existing Base / Start Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 Moving or Rotating the Base / Start Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 Rotate Reference Axis by Secondary Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47 How to Delete a Base Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52 How to set a base alignment to zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53 Alternative Alignment Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Prerequisites for the Rotary Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58

Determining the RT Axis and RT Prealignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59 RT Clearance Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65 How to Control the Rotary Table Directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66 Measuring Features with Rotary Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67 Rotational pattern of a feature with rotary table coupling . . . . . . 4-70
Defining the Clearance Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72

How to Define the Clearance Planes with the CMM . . . . . . . . . . 4-73 How to Define the Clearance Planes Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74 How to Define the Clearance Planes by Probing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74 How to Generate the Clearance Planes Automatically . . . . . . . . . 4-75 How to Test the Clearance Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Contents
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
How to Close Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Edit Measurement Plan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78

How to Edit Measurement Plan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Editing the Measurement Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80 Temperature Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81

How to Activate Temperature Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82 How to Determine the Temperatures by Manual Probing . . . . . . 4-84 How to Automatically Configure the Temperature Probing (CNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85 How to Enter Temperatures Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Chapter 5
Defining Features
Defining Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
The Definition Template for Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 How to Define a Feature Using Definition Templates . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 How to Define Features Using Automatic Feature Recognition . . . 5-5 Importing Features from CAD Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 How to Import Features from the CAD Model to the Measurement Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Copying Properties of Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Color-Coding of Features Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Tips and Tricks for Defining Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Details on Specific Part Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

The Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 The Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 The Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 The 2-D Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 The 3-D Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 The Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 The Cone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 The Sphere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 The Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 The 3D Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 The Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) Contents
The Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 The Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 The Offset Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 The Symmetry Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33 The Radius Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 The Sphere Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 The Angle Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 The General Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 The General Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Linking Features in Constructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

How to Define Constructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 Defining Features by Recalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40 The Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42 The Perpendicular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53 The Symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54 The Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55 Average-Feature Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56 The Edge Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56 Cone Addition Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57 The Maximum Coordinate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59 The Minimum Coordinate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59 The Maximum Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59 The Minimum Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60 The Plane with Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
Defining a Measurement Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

How to Use the Shortcut Menu of the Strategy List . . . . . . . . . . 5-63 The Points List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64 Alternative Probing Methods (Self-Centering Probing) . . . . . . . . 5-65
Path Generation Automatically Measuring Features . . 5-68

How to Add a Path Generation Method to the Strategy List . . . . 5-69 General Settings for the Path Generation Method . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70 Features you can Measure with Path Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Contents
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Chapter 6
Defining Characteristics
Basics about Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Calculation of Geometric Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
The Fit Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Defining Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

How to Insert Characteristics into the Measurement Plan . . . . . . . 6-7 The Characteristic Definition Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 The Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Connecting a Characteristic to a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 How to Assign Characteristics to Certain Features . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 How to Define Nominals and Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 Defining Custom Tolerance Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 Filtration and Outliers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26 How to Set and Activate a Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 How to Eliminate Outliers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31 Copying Properties of Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32 About the Color-Coding of Characteristics Buttons . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Details on Specific Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35

Basics About GDT Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40 How to Check Wall Thickness and Wall Deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42 Basics about Best Fit of Bore Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Chapter 7
Editing the Measurement Plan

Managing Measurement Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
How to Save a Measurement Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 How to Rename a Measurement Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 How to Copy a Measurement Plan to a Floppy Disk . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 How to Delete a Measurement Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Combining Several Measurement Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Editing the Measurement Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
The Toolboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

Creating and Using Custom Toolboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 How to Work with a Custom Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Contents
Deleting a Custom Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 Sizing and Moving Toolboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Editing a Measurement Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

Example: Checking and Changing the Operating Mode in the Settings Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Editing the Probe Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22

About Probe Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22 Clearance Planes/Clearance Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 Checking the Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 Editing Routes between Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26 Editing Routes within a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Using the Probe Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33

Renishaw MCR20 Probe Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33 SCR200 Probe Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34 Probe Changer for RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36 Defining the RDS Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36 Setting up the Initial Probe Changer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38 Defining the Master Probe Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39 Adding Holders to the Probe Changer Configuration . . . . . . . . . 7-40 The Approach Parameters for the Probe Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41 How to Define the Position of a Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43 How to Define the Holder Positions of an MCR20 . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44 How to Define the Holder Positions of an SCR200 . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46 How to Assign a Probe to a Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48 How to Perform an Automatic Probe Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49 How to Perform a Semiautomatic Probe Change . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49 How to Change the Probe Assigned to a Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Multimedia User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51

How to Add User Information to a Measurement Plan . . . . . . . . 7-51 How to View User Information for a Measurement Plan . . . . . . . 7-52
Contents
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Chapter 8
Running a Measurement Plan

Defining the Scope of Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Entering Printout Header Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Starting a Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
How to Start a CNC Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 How to Start a Manual Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Monitoring Measurement Plan Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Reaction Following a Collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Chapter 9
Viewing, Presenting and Editing Measurement Results

Result Printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
How to View the Default Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 How to View the Compact Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
How to View the Custom Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 How to Print the Measurement Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Set up Custom Printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

The Structure of a Custom Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 How to Define the Output of the Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Designing Custom Printouts with the Header Editor . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
How to Display Variations Graphically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

How to Activate a Form Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 About the Form Plot Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Saving Measurement Results to Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

How to Save the Measurement Results as Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Copying the Measurement Results File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Converting Measurement results for qs-STAT . . . . . . . . 9-32

How to save Calypso Measurement Results in QDAS Format . . . 9-34 Controlling the Conversion with QDASCONV.CON . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Contents
Chapter 10
The Duplex Mode

Duplex Operation with Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Preparing the Duplex Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Files for Duplex Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Establishing the Connection and Coupling the Measuring Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Using Duplex Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

Measuring with a Dual Arm CMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Chapter 11
Managing Calypso
Installing Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Installing Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Installing a Service Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

How to Decompress the Service Pack Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 How to Install the Program Files Contained in the Service Pack . . 11-7
If a Software Error Occurs the Error Report . . . . . . . . . 11-8

How to Use the Error Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11

Settings You Can View or Modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Chapter 12
The Auto-Run Interface

Basics About Auto-Run Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Important Auto-Run Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 The Layout of the Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 Basics about Measurement Plan Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 Basics about Desks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 Basics about Branches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5 Basics about Pallets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Auto-Run for System Administrators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6

Configuring Auto-Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 Mapping the Measuring Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 How to Create Branches between Desks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Contents
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Mapping a Pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12 Defining Measuring Runs for a Pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 Preparing for Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17 Administrating Auto-Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
Auto-Run for Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23

Your User Privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23 Preparing a Measurement Start for Auto-Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24 Monitoring Measuring Runs in Auto-Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27
Chapter 13
DMIS Import (Option)

Basics about DMIS Measurement Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Which DMIS Commands are Supported? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Special Features of Measurement Plans Imported from DMIS . . . 13-3
Configuring DMIS Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Importing Measurement Plan from DMIS . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
How to Import and Start a DMIS Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Evaluating Reports about the DMIS Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Chapter 14
Parameter-coded Measurements (Option)

Introduction to PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Using PCM in Calypso First Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Variable Measurement Plans in PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Parameter Files for Measurement Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 Conditions and Parameters for the Run Structure of Calypso . . . 14-7
Variables, Parameters and Formulas in Calypso . . . . . . . 14-9

Formulas and Functions in PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10 Programming with PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Entering Parameters and Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15

How to Enter Parameters for a Measurement Plan Directly . . . . 14-16 How to Enter Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17 Setting Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
Inserting Loops in PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Contents
Basics about Input and Output Parameters in PCM . . . . . . . . . . 14-27 Basics about the Point Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-30 How to Test a PCM Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-32
Examples for PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-33

Example for PCM: Using Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-33 Example for PCM: Condition with Alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-34 Example for PCM: Principle of Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-35 Example for PCM: Loading Parameter Values into a Curve . . . . 14-37 Example for PCM: Defining Curve Using Cosine Function . . . . . 14-38 Example for PCM: Rechecking Characteristic after Tolerance Excursion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-38 Example for PCM: Parameterizing a Coordinate System . . . . . . 14-40 Example for PCM: Loading PCM File Using Dialog . . . . . . . . . . 14-40 Example for PCM: Defining Loop with Linear Offset . . . . . . . . . 14-41 Example for PCM: Nested Loop for Field (Array) . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-42 Example for PCM: Parts Family and Variant Control . . . . . . . . . 14-44 Example for PCM: ASCII Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-46
PCM Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-47

PCM Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-47 Variables in PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-48 Arithmetic and Comparative Operators in PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-49 Mathematical functions in PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-49 Character Chain Functions in PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-51 PCM Functions: Input and Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-52 PCM Functions: File Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-54 PCM Functions: Measurement-specific Functions . . . . . . . . . . . 14-55 PCM Functions: CMM Movement Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-58 PCM Functions: Custom Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-59 Overview: Conditions in PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-60 Overview: Loops in PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-61
Tips and Tricks for Working with PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-63

Enhancing the Speed of Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-63 How to Test PCM Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-63 Two-button vs. Three-button Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-64
Contents
10
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Chapter 15
Curve Measurement (Option)

Basics about Curve Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Performing Curve Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Defining the Curve Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5

2D Curves, 3D Curves and Lift Curves The Differences . . . . . . . 15-6 Defining Nominal Data for a Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7 How to Import the Files for Nominal Definition of a Curve . . . . . 15-8 How to Generate a Curve with the Points Generator . . . . . . . . . 15-9 Creating Nominal Values of a Curve by Digitizing . . . . . . . . . . 15-10 How to Enter Nominal Data of the Curve Point by Point . . . . . . 15-19 How to Adopt Nominal Data of the Curve from the CAD Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-20 How to Change the Nominal Vectors of the Curve . . . . . . . . . 15-21
Working with Curve Nominal Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22 Checking the Clearance Planes of a Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-25
Defining Tolerances for a Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26

How to Define Tolerance for the Whole Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26 How to Define Tolerances for Individual Segments . . . . . . . . . . 15-28 How to Define Jump Tolerance for the Whole Curve . . . . . . . . 15-29
Using Curves in the CAD Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-31

The Commands in the Shortcut Menu for Curves . . . . . . . . . . 15-31
The Measuring Strategy for the Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-33

Options for Displaying Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-33 How to Work with the Point List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-34
Scanning a Known Contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-38

Scanning Methods for Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-38 How to Divide a Curve into Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-39
Defining Curve Form Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-43

About the Curve Form Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-43 How to Define Tolerance for Segments Separately . . . . . . . . . . 15-45
Working with the Results of Curve Measurement . . . . 15-46

Basics about Curve Deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-46 How to Calculate the Deviations of a Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-47 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) Contents
11
How to Optimize the Coordinate System with Best-Fit Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-48 How to Calculate the Curve's Center of Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-50 How to Obtain a Best Fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-50 How to Define a Reference Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-52 How to Limit Search Distances during Curve Evaluation . . . . . . 15-53 Smoothing a Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-54 Sorting the Points in a Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-56 Limiting the Evaluation of the Curve Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-57 How to Eliminate Outliers from a Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-58 How to Format the Printout for the Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-59 Graphical Evaluation of Form Deviations for Curves . . . . . . . . . 15-60
Chapter 16
Qualifying the RDS with CAA (Option)

Basics of RDS-CAA Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2 Qualification of the RDS on the CMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Establishing the Preconditions for Qualification of the RDS on the CMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4 How to Perform Fitting Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
Qualifying Probes with RDS-CAA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7

General Information about Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7 Defining Probes and Styli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7 Qualifying Probes and Styli with RDS-CAA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
Contents
12
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
1
1
61212-2010102
Chapter
.................................................................................................................................
Introduction
It is well worth recalling what you learnt in the Calypso Basics course before you start work. The most important points are starting Calypso, an overview of the Calypso User Desk and a short explanation of important terms you need for measuring with Calypso.
Included in this chapter:

Welcome to Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 How to Start Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 The Calypso User Desk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Important terms in Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Measurement plan-oriented Measuring with Calypso . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
1- 1
Introduction
Welcome to Calypso
From now on, Calypso will be the tool you use for fast, accurate and convenient measuring. Calypso was developed to make the job of measuring easier for you. To this end it utilizes the entire know-how pool of Carl Zeiss, the technology leader in the world of metrology.
Straightforward programming
Calypso automatically recognizes the geometric elements you probe and responds by generating probing paths and strategies, retract movements and routes between the elements. In contrast to conventional software, the probes are calibrated with the aid of CNC programs. As a consequence you need only perform the first probing of the reference sphere manually, Calypso will perform all of the remaining steps for you. In Calypso you enter the measurement parameters in accordance with a predefined structure, which means that nothing can be inadvertently omitted. You will find, for example, that the parameters in the input menus offer you default values. There are only a few items that call for manual input, and they are highlighted to draw your attention to them right away. Logical sequences, indicators, prompts for confirmation, and plausibility checks matching the individual characteristics are all in place to make sure that you omit nothing and to make measuring as straightforward as possible.
You see what you're measuring
Calypso offers you a clear view of the workpiece at all times. The CAD model is right in front of you on the screen and you can follow every detail as measurement proceeds. Of course, you also have the option of directly importing CAD data so that you can quickly generate errorfree measuring programs of your own. You can be sure that you'll have the results of measurement without delay, and afterwards you can still depend on Calypso to help. You can customize measurement logs to suit your needs and preferences, for example you can assign colors to tolerance overshoots or select full-graphics display modes for the results. If you want to import the results into other mainstream Windows applications, Calypso can export the result files, so you can present the data as graphics or in table form, or in presentation programs whatever your customer wants.
Versatile measurement logs
1-2
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
How to Start Calypso
How to Start Calypso

Follow these steps to start and log into Calypso: 1 Turn on your computer. 2 Log in to Windows. You do this by pressing Ctrl, Alt and Del in response to the system prompt. 3 Wait for the Windows desktop to appear and double-click on the Calypso icon. If the icon does not appear on the desktop, select Start Programs Zeiss Calypso. Calypso begins loading. Before Calypsos first screen is displayed, the programs Visual Works and ACIS 3D Toolkit are loaded and you will see their respective windows displayed briefly. These programs are necessary for Calypso to run.
NOTE
hss
Never close Visual Works and ACIS 3D Toolkit when Calypso is running. The Log In dialog box appears on the screen.
NOTE
hss
If you click on Memos, the Memo Editor window will open in which you may find information left for you by the operator on the previous shift. 4 Select your user name from the User Name list. 5 Type in your password and click on OK. When you log in for the first time, Calypso prompts you to confirm your password:
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
1-3
Introduction
6 Type in your password again and click on OK. Once you have logged in, the Calypso User Desk appears on the screen.
NOTE
hss
Consult your system administrator if you encounter problems when logging in.
1-4
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
The Calypso User Desk
The Calypso User Desk

The Calypso User Desk appears on your screen once you have logged in. This graphic the Calypso User Desk with an open measurement plan. The CAD window contains the model of the workpiece.
Main Menu Task bar
Features List Measurement CAD Window
CAD Icons
The User Desk and its principal fields are described briefly below: Main menu options The main menu options contain pull down sub-menus with the basic commands for working with Calypso. Icons list These icons also let you choose the basic commands for working with Calypso. The use of icons often combines several menu options. This saves you from having to use menus and pull-down sub-menus. Measurement plan area Three main windows can be displayed alternately by using the measurement plan icons: Prerequisites This is where you find the dialogs for preparing the measurement plan.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
1-5
Introduction
Features This is where you create lists of the features and work on their templates. Characteristics This is where you define the characteristics in the order in which they are carried on in the CNC run out and where you work on their templates. CAD window The CAD window contains a three-dimensional image of the workpiece and each feature. The representation is constantly updated when you define new features or edit existing ones. CAD symbols The symbols start functions and commands with which you can edit the features in the CAD window.
1-6
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Important terms in Calypso
Important terms in Calypso

Features
There are two types of feature: A physical element of a part, such as a plane, slot or hole. A constructed feature that does not physically exist. Features of this nature are needed for lines of intersection and cylinder axes, for example.
Automatic feature recognition
Calypso automatically recognizes most geometric features as you move the CMM stylus to probe them. The softwares measurement algorithm is smart and takes into account the location of measurement points as well as the probing direction. For example, if you take measurements at three points on a part, Calypso will determine whether the feature is a line, plane or circle depending on the probing direction and where the measurement points are located.
Characteristics
An engineering drawing requirement. A characteristic includes nominal and tolerance values for a specified evaluation along with any applicable datum reference frame. Characteristics evaluate the size, form or location of features. Examples of engineering drawing requirements or characteristics are the diameter of a hole, the perpendicularity of a bore to a plane and the distance between two planes.
Measurement plans
A measurement plan is Calypsos version of what you might be familiar with as a part program or control data. A measurement plan contains the information the system needs to perform a measurement, for example: the names of the stylus configurations the part alignment the clearance planes around the workpiece the sequence of the characteristics and their tolerances the features user-defined video clips, if applicable.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
1-7
Introduction
There are two ways of generating measurement plans: You can begin by using the CMM to define the parts features that you want to measure and the characteristics to evaluate for those features. Or you can create the characteristics first and then measure all the requisite features. Once youve created a measurement plan, you can run it to automatically evaluate the characteristics on a specified part. A list containing the icons for the individual characteristics, along with their names, appears on the Calypso User Desk. You can also edit the measurement plan to change what characteristics to evaluate and in what order. A typical measurement plan might include information necessary to measure and evaluate the diameter of a hole at the parts upper left corner and the flatness of the parts top surface. The measurement plan is shown as a series of icons that represent the characteristics to be evaluated.
Part alignment
The part alignment is the user-defined coordinate reference for your measurement plan. The part alignment locates the part on the table for the CMM and Calypso. Calypsos CAD geometry has an origin to which all locations (along the X, Y and Z axes) are relative. The part alignment links this origin with the coordinate system of the machine, thus forming a reference for CMM movements during measurements. The CMM then knows where to move when Calypso sends it a location based on its CAD geometry.
Clearance cuboid
Six planes form a clearance that defines a safe area around a part and any associated fixture where the stylus can move without risk of collision. Outside the cuboid formed by these planes the probe can be moved without risk of collision. Calypso includes a simple way to quickly generate the clearance planes. Using only two positions, Calypso determines the parts clearance planes for the positive boundaries in X, Y and Z and the negative boundaries in X, Y and Z.
1-8
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Measurement plan-oriented Measuring with Calypso
Measurement plan-oriented Measuring with Calypso

Calypso is used for quality assurance and is a powerful tool for measuring workpieces quickly and reliably. When you measure with Calypso you begin by creating a measurement plan containing all the requisite tolerances and nominals in the form of characteristics and all the requisite geometric data in the form of features. Your measurement determines how you define the characteristics and features. You can adopt the values Calypso suggests as standard for the respective nominals and tolerances when probing the workpiece. Alternatively, you can import data directly into the measurement plan from a CAD file or enter the values manually. Calypso supports you through these steps with automatic feature recognition and an extensive library of tolerance tables. These functions make it easy to generate a measurement plan away from the machine. Common to all these procedures is the fact that the characteristics and features, once defined, are grouped in the measurement plan. This means that random samples taken from series production can be measured automatically without any need for manual probing. The measuring results are output in standardized printouts. The results can also be exported from Calypso and edited in other applications (e. g. statistics programs).
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
1-9
Introduction
This User's Guide takes you through the process step-by-step, all the way up to the measured results. The diagram below illustrates the path we are going to follow.
Drawing
CAD data
workpiece
Defining Features page 5-2 Defining Characteristics page 6-7 Preparation
Preparing the Measurement Plan page 4-1 Editing the Measurement Plan page 7-1 Running a Measurement Plan page 8-1
Quality control
Viewing, Presenting and Editing Measurement Results page 9-1
1-10
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
2
2
61212-2010102
Chapter
.................................................................................................................................
Your measuring tasks are generally done with two separate units: a control panel and a PC. With the control panel you directly control the CMM. With the PC, you work on the design of your measurement plan via Calypso. The Dynalog control panel connects these two units into one. You have full functionality and maximum user friendliness in one place. You will find a description of Dynalog in the manual that was supplied with your Dynalog control panel. This documentation only describes how to configure Calypso using the Dynalog control panel. The instructions in this User's Guide are based on a standard control panel and a PC.

The Dynalog Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 How to Configure Calypso for Dynalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Operating Calypso via Dynalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
2- 1

The controls on the Dynalog control panel are explained below.
Vertical function keys
Display
Horizontal function keys F1-F12 Touchpad Keyboard
The functions of the individual elements are as follows: Display: Functions as a PC monitor. Here you can see Calypso. Keyboard: Functions as a PC keyboard. Function keys: The function keys of the Dynalog control panel are divided into 2 groups. The horizontal function keys are F1 to F12. Each key has a defined, unalterable function (see The Function Keys of the Dynalog Control Panel on page 2-7). The vertical function keys. These keys will be assigned after you have defined a toolbox. Each function key will be assigned an element from the toolbox (see Using the Toolboxes with Dynalog on page 2-6). Touchpad: The touchpad replaces the mouse that you would normally have connected to your PC (see How to Use the Touchpad of the Dynalog Control Panel on page 2-5).
2-2
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
How to Configure Calypso for Dynalog
How to Configure Calypso for Dynalog

In the System Set Up, you have to perform a one-time initialization of Calypso for using Dynalog. Calypso will only assign the relevant functions to the function keys of Dynalog after this initialization. After this one-time installation, you can operate Calypso fully via Dynalog. To install Dynalog: 1 Start Calypso and log in. After that you will now be in the User Desk of Calypso. 2 Select Extras Workroom CMM. This opens the window for the CMM-specific settings. 3 Click on the Panel bookmark. You will see the window for the choice of the Control panel.
4 Choose Dynalog from the Panel group. 5 Click on the Control tab. 6 Click on Connect. 7 Click on OK to save the setting and close the dialog box. You are returned to the Calypso User Desk.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
2-3
8 Select Extras Workroom Environment. This opens the window for the Environment settings.
9 Click on the Dynalog tab and check the Dynalog keys check box. 10 Click on Apply and OK. You are returned to the Calypso User Desk. At this point the installation of the Dynalog control panel is complete. You can now operate Calypso via Dynalog.
2-4
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Operating Calypso via Dynalog

Use of Calypso with the Dynalog control panel follows the same basic principles covered in this User's Guide. You will therefore be able to follow all the instructions with ease as soon you have familiarized yourself with the touchpad. Dynalog offers you a simplification: Commands F1 to F12 are assigned to the function keys as shortcuts for working with windows and navigating from window to window. These keys will also perform important Calypso operations.
How to Use the Touchpad of the Dynalog Control Panel

The touchpad fully replaces the mouse. You move the pointer on the screen by moving a finger of your hand instead of moving the mouse. To work with the touchpad: 1 Place the tip of your finger on the touchpad and watch the pointer on the monitor. 2 Move your finger over the control area of the touchpad. The pointer on the monitor follows the movement of your finger. 3 You single-click by tapping on the control area once with the tip of your finger. 4 You double-click by tapping on the control area twice in quick succession with the tip of your finger. If you are working with a customized toolbox, Dynalog offers you an enhanced method of integrating the toolbox features in your test measurement plan. See Using the Toolboxes with Dynalog on page 2-6.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
2-5
Using the Toolboxes with Dynalog

Toolboxes are much easier to use with a Dynalog control panel. Once you have defined a toolbox, you can use the vertical function keys of the Dynalog control panel to pull the features from the toolbox into the measurement plan list. To make things even more straightforward, Calypso automatically assigns features from the toolbox to the vertical function keys. Press F12 on the Dynalog control panel to view the list of features assigned to the vertically arranged function keys:
You will find more information on defining toolboxes in The Toolboxes on page 7-15, and details on how Dynalog function keys are assigned in The Function Keys of the Dynalog Control Panel on page 2-7.
2-6
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
The Function Keys of the Dynalog Control Panel

On the Dynalog control panel function keys F1 to F12 are assigned special functions that make it much easier to work with Calypso when it is running on the Dynalog. The table below describes the actions you can perform with the function keys.
NOTE
hss
It is a good idea to print this table. You can then use the printout as a ready-reference guide to function-key assignments.
Function Key Function F1 F2 Help Open the menu of the marked element OK Cancel Save measurement plan Run measurement plan Open workroom/ User Desk
Action Performed Starts the Online Help system Opens the relevant input window if you have marked an element (e.g. a characteristic). Using this key is the same as a double click. Saves the settings and closes the active window. Closes the active window without saving the settings. Saves the current measurement plan. Runs the measurement plan. You must be in the User Desk of Calypso to do this. If you are in User Desk, this is how to call up the workroom. If you are in the workroom, this is how you call up the User Desk.
F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
F8 F9 F10 F11
Open measurement plan Opens the input window for the measurement plan settings. settings Show/hide default printout Delete measuring point Show toolbox Shows the default printout. Puts the default printout in the background. Deletes the last measured point while you are measuring. Lists all toolboxes defined to date. The names of the toolboxes are shown in a separate window. The last toolbox shown is active. Inserts the flags for the vertical function keys if you have defined a toolbox of your own (see Using the Toolboxes with Dynalog on page 2-6). Removes the flags for the vertical function keys.
F12
Flag insertion
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
2-7
Example: The Sequence of Operation with the Dynalog Control Panel

The following example illustrates the sequence of operation using the Dynalog. The following illustrations show how to insert the True Position characteristic into your measurement plan using a customized toolbox, and how to make further definitions using the definition template. The assumption is that your customized toolbox includes the True Position characteristic. 1 Press function key F12 to view the flags with the characteristics from your toolbox. 2 Press the vertical function key with the characteristic True Position, for example L2. The True Position characteristic is inserted into your measurement plan.
1. Function key F12
2. Function key L2
Result: The characteristic is added to the measurement
2-8
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
3 Press function key F2 to open the definition template. The definition template is opened.
3. Function key F2
Result: The definition template is opened.
4 Repeatedly press the Tab key until the Feature key is activated, so that you can define a feature.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
2-9
5 Press function key F2, to open the Selection window. The Selection window opens.
4. Tab key
5. Function key F2
Result: The Selection dialog box opens.
6 Highlight a feature using the tab key and press function key F3 to select it. The Selection window is closed. 7 Press function key F3 again to close the definition template. The characteristic has been defined and your settings saved. The measurement plan reappears on the screen.
2-10
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
3
3
61212-2010102
Chapter
Working with the CAD Window .................................................................................................................................

The CAD window shows a graphic of the workpiece and its features while you work on a measurement plan. This graphical illustration is known as the CAD model. You see each feature in the CAD window. This means you have complete control over your measurement plan because you can see it right away if you make a mistake in defining a feature. You will soon come to appreciate the CAD window as a very important and useful tool for your day-to-day work with the system.

Basics about the CAD Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 The Buttons in the CAD Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
3- 1
Basics about the CAD Window

The CAD window is where you view a CAD file containing the workpiece you want to measure. A workpiece shown in this way is called the CAD model. Among other things, you can rotate, enlarge or move this model in the CAD window depending on the view you require for the respective work step. The CAD window is only for viewing a CAD file. You cannot edit the CAD model displayed in the window; all you can do is add or remove features and probing points. Bear in mind, however, that you have the option of saving the CAD model and editing it in a CAD program. The figure shows the CAD window and buttons.
CAD Window
CAD buttons
3-2
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Basics about the CAD Window
The CAD window buttons allow you to manipulate the model of the part in the CAD window. Most of the functions, moreover, can be selected from the CAD menu on the User Desk.
Show Selected Features Show All Calypso Features Show Solid Model Use Mouse to Zoom Zoom In Zoom Out Rotate -> by increments Use Mouse to Rotate <- by increments
Switch to Feature Menu
View
Use Mouse to Pan CAD Image
Select Rotation
Render
Fit to CAD
Working away from the machine
Once you have loaded a CAD file of a workpiece, you can work your way through the preparations without having to use the CMM. You use the mouse to define features and their probing points. You can also generate an entire measurement plan on the basis of the CAD model.
Defining probing points in the CAD window
The CAD window enables you to define probing points with the mouse. You just click with the mouse on the requested CAD window. You can add additional probing points to existing features. In this case the definition template of the corresponding feature has to be open. The probing points will be added to the existing point list. You can define new features in a plane of the part alignment with probing points. To do this the list of features has to be open. The mouse takes over the function of the probe; therefore, you have the full functionally of automatic feature recognition at your disposal. (See How to Define Features Using Automatic Feature Recognition on page 5-5.)
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
3-3
The Buttons in the CAD Window

The table below lists the buttons available in the CAD window and outlines their functions. You can access additional information by opening this section in Online Help. Element Show Selected Feature(s) Only Function Shows only selected features by bringing them to the foreground and hides the rest of the model. You must first select a feature from the list of features in the measurement plan area, or by clicking directly on the feature in the CAD model.
Show All Calypso Shows all features. This button is useful if the CAD window Features shows only selected features or shows the solid or rendered model. Show Solid Model Creates a solid model by extending the features to the boundaries of the clearance planes. This solid model can then be rendered into a three-dimensional model with illuminated sides by using the Render button. To return to a view of the features of the model, click on the Show All Calypso Features button. The picklist of this button offers you the following options: Select Already Extracted Features Define Points Define a Space Point Define Circle on a Cylinder Define Line on a Plane Distance Measurement Extract Features View Changes the view of the model. You can load a view or choose one of the following views: isometric (or 3D), +X or -X (left or right sides), +Y or -Y (front or back), +Z or -Z (top or bottom). The default view is isometric. Choosing the isometric view also resets the model if it has been rotated. Zooms out to see more of the model. Each time you click on this button, the view zooms out a little further. You can click on the Zoom Out button to shrink the view of the model and then click on the Use Mouse to Pan CAD Image button to reposition the model in the CAD window. Allows you to select an area of the model to zoom in on. The Zoom button remains active until you click on the Use Mouse to Pan CAD Image or Use mouse to Rotate CAD Image button.
Zoom Out
Use Mouse to Zoom
3-4
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
The Buttons in the CAD Window
Element Zoom In
Function Zooms in for a closer view of the model. Each time you click on this button, the view zooms in a little further.
Use Mouse to Pan Allows you to move (or pan) the CAD model around the CAD CAD Image window. The Pan button remains active until you click on the Zoom or Use Mouse to Rotate CAD Image button. Select Rotation Mode Sets the rotational axis of the CAD model to X, Y, Z or free axis (which rotates the model around the center of the CAD window). To actually rotate the model, click on the Use Mouse to Rotate CAD Image button. Rotates the CAD model 10 degrees clockwise about the selected axis. Allows you to rotate the CAD model about the axis selected with the Select Rotation Mode button (X, Y, Z or free axis). Rotates the CAD model 10 degrees counterclockwise about the selected axis. Toggles the view of the CAD model as a three-dimensional solid with illuminated surfaces. If you want to create a solid model before rendering it, first click on the Show Solid Model button (which extends the features to the boundaries of the clearance planes), then click on the Render button. Fits the CAD model into the CAD window This is useful if the image is enlarged beyond the window or shifted out of the window.
Rotate -> by increments Use Mouse to Rotate CAD Image Rotate -> by increments / Mouse Click Render
Fit to CAD Window
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
3-5
3-6
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4
4
61212-2010102
Chapter
Preparing the Measurement Plan .................................................................................................................................

You have to prepare the measurement plan before you can move on to defining the features and characteristics in Calypso. Calypso shows you what to do by presenting the List of Prerequisites in the measurement plan area as soon as you open a new measurement plan. Work through the prerequisites in the order in which they appear in the list to be sure that you do not omit any of the settings you need in order to measure the part.

Measurement Plan Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 The List of Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Homing the CMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Installing and Qualifying Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Setting the Base / Start Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Prerequisites for the Rotary Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58 Defining the Clearance Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72 Edit Measurement Plan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78 Editing the Measurement Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80 Temperature Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4- 1
Measurement Plan Basics

You always define the measuring tasks in a measurement plan. A measurement plan consists of any sequence of the characteristics that you want to test on a workpiece. This includes all information from the measuring features that CMM requires to all information that is important for measuring. This information comprises probe configuration, the part alignment, the clearance planes and, if applicable, user-defined video clips. The measurement plan for Calypso is what you might call a workpiece program. There are five basic steps in creating a new measurement plan in Calypso. The table lists those steps and shows you where to refer to in this guide for detailed information. Basic Steps for Creating a Measurement Plan Step 1: Open the new measurement plan and name it. Step 2: Satisfy the prerequisites for measurement. Step 3: Define the parts features that you want to measure. Step 4: Define the characteristics that you want to evaluate on those features. Step 5: Run your measurement plan.
Refer to This Section for Details How to Create a New Measurement Plan on page 4-3 The List of Prerequisites on page 4-5 Defining Features on page 5-2 Defining Characteristics on page 6-1 Defining the Scope of Measurement on page 8-2
In order to define the features and characteristics for a measurement plan, secure the workpiece to measuring table of the CMM and probe its features. Calypso recognizes the features automatically, but you also have the convenient option of changing the default nominals and tolerance values proposed by Calypso in accordance with the specifications. Note that although it may be the most common way to first define features (step 3) and then define characteristics (step 4), Calypso does not restrict you to this order. You can also lay out the sequence of characteristics first and then begin defining features and associating them to characteristics. Once you have created a measurement plan, you can run it to evaluate automatically the defined characteristics on a specified part. You can also edit the measurement plan to change or add characteristics and features or to change the order in which characteristics are evaluated.
4-2
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Measurement Plan Basics
NOTE
hss
Another way to create measurement plans is to use the DMIS Import option. If you have purchased this option, you can import runs programmed in DMIS into Calypso and thereby convert them to a regular Calypso measurement plan (see Chapter 13 DMIS Import (Option) on page 13-1). Calypso creates evaluations for each measurement plan. You can also combine two or more measurement plans and create combined assessments (Combining Several Measurement Plans on page 7-4). The measurement plans you combine in this way need not necessarily be on the CMM - they can be created and run on CMMs at different points in the network. Each measurement plan is saved in a directory of its own in the Calypso file system; the name of the directory always contains the name of the measurement plan. The measurement plans themselves all have the same name, inspection. The path to the measurement plan called cylinder block 1, therefore, is ...\cylinder block 1\inspection.
Evaluations
Measurement plans in the file system
How to Create a New Measurement Plan

The procedure for creating a measurement plan is as follows: 1 Start Calypso (see How to Start Calypso on page 1-3). 2 Click on the New File button. The Open New Measurement Plan dialog box appears on the screen.
3 Enter a name.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-3
!
hss
Caution Do not use control characters, umlauts or the letter , even if they are supported by Windows NT. Characters such as umlauts can cause problems when the measured results are saved for qs-STAT, for example. Calypso uses only lowercase letters when it saves files to the hard disk. Bear this in mind, because it means that Calypso does not distinguish between names of measurement plans that differ only in the use of uppercase and lowercase letters. 4 Click on OK to confirm. The Calypso User Desk appears on the screen. The title bar contains the name of the new measurement plan.
NOTE
hss
How to Open an Existing Measurement Plan

Once it has been saved, a measurement plan can be opened at any time and you can edit or run it. 1 Start Calypso (see How to Start Calypso on page 1-3). 2 Click on the Open File button.
3 Go to the directory containing the measurement plan you want to open (the name of the directory is the same as that of the measurement plan). 4 Click on inspection and then click on OK to confirm. The Calypso User Desk appears on the screen. The title bar contains the name of the measurement plan.
4-4
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
The List of Prerequisites

The list of prerequisites appears when you open a new measurement plan or click on the Prerequisites button. This window contains all the settings you should configure before you create a measurement plan or run a workpiece measurement.
The prerequisites are described in the following sections: CMM Home Position, Status: This button indicates the status of the CMM and the connection between CMM and Calypso. If the CMM has not been initialized and referenced, the button is red (see Homing the CMM on page 4-8). Probe: Click on this button to qualify the probe that is currently installed (see Installing and Qualifying Probes on page 4-10). Base / Start Alignment: Click on this button to define the part alignment for the measurement plan (see Setting the Base / Start Alignment on page 4-30).
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-5
Rotary Table: Click on this button to activate a rotary table for the current measurement plan and to define the settings for rotary table operation (see Prerequisites for the Rotary Table on page 4-58). Clearance Planes: Click this button to define a clearance zone around the workpiece for CMM movements. This is required only for CMMs with CNC capability (see Defining the Clearance Planes on page 4-72). Measurement Plan Settings: Click on this button to check and edit the settings for the result logs (see Edit Measurement Plan Settings on page 4-78). Measurement Plan Editor Features: Click on this button to open the measurement plan editor for features (see Editing the Measurement Plan on page 4-80). Temperature Compensation: Click on this button to have Calypso include the temperature of the workpiece and the X, Y and Z scales of the CMM in the calculations (see Temperature Compensation on page 4-81). The buttons in the list of prerequisites are color-coded to indicate their status: Red: The preparations must be completed before you can continue with creating the measurement plan. Manual measurements, however, can be performed. Yellow: This prerequisite has not been completed as yet. However, you can proceed with creating the measurement plan (the system will use default settings). Green: The prerequisite is satisfied. The Prerequisites button itself is also color-coded to reflect the combined status of the individual prerequisites buttons: Red: One or more buttons are red. You must complete the prerequisites in question before you can run the measurement plan. Manual measurements, however, can be performed. Yellow: One or more buttons are yellow. You can still work, however. Green:All prerequisites are satisfied.
4-6
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
If you are performing measurements manually (for example, doing a quick measurement of the diameter of a cylinder), you can often proceed with first having satisfied all the prerequisites. The CMM needs to be homed and the currently installed probe must be properly qualified, but you will not need to define the base alignment or set up clearance planes (so if their prerequisite buttons are red, you can ignore them). You do not have to define clearance planes unless you want to run measurement plans automatically with Calypso. Whether or not you include the measurement plan settings and temperature compensation depends on the intended application.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-7
Homing the CMM

When you first power up the CMM, a machine zero position or home position must be established. This home position is usually the upper, rear left corner of the measuring range when viewed from the operators normal position. Typically, the CMM automatically homes itself to this position upon startup. The CMM Home Position or Status button on the list of prerequisites indicates whether the CMM has been homed and whether the connection between CMM and Calypso has been established: Green: The CMM has already been homed and initialized and there is a proper connection between Calypso and the CMM. This prerequisite has been completed. Red: You must initialize or restart the connection between the CMM and Calypso or home the CMM.
After homing the CMM

Reference sphere position
Whenever the CMM is homed, you should also redefine the position of the reference sphere. Even if the reference sphere did not move, homing might have resulted in a shift of a few micrometers in the machine coordinate system. This shift could result in an error of similar magnitude in measurements with different stylus configurations. You can dispense with redefining the position of the reference sphere only when you merely install a new stylus and you are certain that this stylus will not be used in conjunction with styli qualified beforehand. (See Determining the Reference Sphere Position on page 4-24.)
Rotary table axis
If you use a rotary table: You must redefine the rotary table axis after the CMM has been homed. (See Prerequisites for the Rotary Table on page 4-58).
How to Establish the Connection to the CMM

You have to set up a connection to the controller before you can work with the CMM. The procedure for connecting to the CMM is as follows: 1 Select Extras Workroom CMM. 2 Click on the Connect button. 3 Click on OK. This closes the CMM notebook.
4-8
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Homing the CMM
How to Move the CMM to the Home Position

This home position is usually the upper, rear left corner of the measuring range when viewed from the operators normal position. Follow these steps to home the CMM: 1 Click on the CMM Home Position or Status button. If a valid home position exists, the CMM does not move to it again. If the CMM has not been homed since switch-on, the system prompts you to move the probe to a clear position. 2 If necessary, use the joysticks to move the CMM stylus to a position higher than the highest obstruction on the table to avoid collisions. 3 Click on OK. The CMM moves to the home position. The CMM Home Position or Status button should now be green.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-9
Installing and Qualifying Probes

When setting up a measurement plan, you must make certain that the appropriate probe is installed and qualified. In qualifying a probe, you indicate which probe you are using and then initiate a routine in which the probe measures the reference sphere. If the Probes button is green, the probe beside the button has already been qualified. Here is important information about qualifying probes: You must install and qualify probes within a measurement plan, but the probe information is global to all of Calypso. If you define a probe and its stylus is calibrated while creating one measurement plan, that probe will then be available in all other measurement plans. The probe that you use to set up a measurement plan must be the same one that you use each time you run the measurement plan. Calypso saves the probe configuration that you used and detects a mismatch if you try to run the plan with a different probe configuration.
NOTE
hss
If the original probe can no longer be used but you have a probe with exactly the same configuration, select Prerequisites Select Probe for this Measurement Plan to select the appropriate probe. The probe name listed next to the Probes button of the prerequisites is the most recently installed probe. If you have loaded an existing measurement plan, the probe currently installed is not necessarily the one required for the measurement plan. To see which probe is required, choose Prerequisites Select Probe for this Measurement Plan. The probe configuration required is listed in the window.
4-10
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
How to Install a Probe

You have to open a measurement plan and define the position of the reference sphere before a probe can be used. Follow these steps to install a probe into a Zeiss probe head:
NOTE
hss
These instructions do not apply to Renishaw systems. 1 Select Prerequisites Manual Probe Change. The Manual Probe Change Stop Light Name dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Click on the red arrow of the Probe Down area. The Probe will be released in 5 seconds (OK) message appears on the screen:
3 Click on OK and carefully grip the probe that is about to be released. After a five-second countdown, the CMM will release the probe. If it is a triggering probe, you must disengage it carefully to remove it from the holder.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-11
!
hss
Caution Measuring probe heads are released fully automatically, i.e you must have the probe in your hand at this point. 4 Click on the red Up arrow on the right-hand side. The Insert probe! prompt appears on the screen. Do not click OK at this time. 5 Insert the new probe. Make sure the notch in the adapter plate is aligned with the pin on the underside of the probe head. 6 Click on OK. You should hear the electromagnet of the probe head seat the probe. If you do not, gently grasp the probe to assure a proper seat. A pop-up menu appears listing available, already defined probe names. 7 Click on New or select the appropriate name, if the probe has already been defined and qualified. If you have just installed a reference probe, select MasterProbe (not for HAMs = Horizontal Arm Machines; where the first probe position is taken as the reference). 8 If you have selected New, you must name the probe in the Create new Stylus dialog box. 9 Click on OK to close the Manual Probe Change window. The Calypso User Desk will be displayed again. If you install a probe that has already been qualified, the probes name appears in the list of prerequisites alongside the Probe button. If the name does not appear, you must qualify the probe.
Using the Probe Changer with the TP20 or TP200

Automatic probe change
The TP20 from Renishaw is designed for automatic probe changes with the MCR20 probe-changer module, and the same is true of the TP200 with the SCR200 module (see Renishaw MCR20 Probe Changer on page 7-33 and SCR200 Probe Changer on page 7-34). On a VISTA, the TP200 can be secured with a PH6 or a PH1 in the quill. On an Eclipse, the TP200 can be secured in the quill with a PH10.
Manual probe change
Bear in mind that you can also change probes manually on the TP20 and the TP200 (see the User data on the TP20 / TP200 and RDS).
4-12
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
!
hss
Caution Risk of damage to the RDS plate. When you change probes manually without the measuring system, the retaining solenoid is deenergized immediately. In order to avoid damage, you must be holding the probe in your hand at this time. If there is no measuring system in the TP20 and you are preparing to change the probe at RDS plate manually, remember that the retaining solenoid for the RDS plate will be deenergized immediately, because the switch contact is open. There is a consequent risk of the RDS plate dropping out and suffering damage.
Preparing Probes and Styli

In Calypso, each probe and stylus is given its own unique name. Styli are also assigned numbers. Calypso uses these names and numbers to identify the probes and styli and saves their data. This means that each probe and each stylus has to be defined in Calypso before it can be qualified (see How to Define new Probes on page 4-14). You must first define the stylus before you can proceed to qualify it. You can qualify these styli manually just as you would for normal styli (see How to Qualify a Stylus on page 4-22).
Styli of an RDS
When you use a RDS, the CMM can probe the workpiece from a large number of directions by adjusting the angles A and B. Every RDS setting that you want to use for probing is considered a stylus and must be qualified separately (exception: you have the RDS-CAA option installed, see Chapter 16 Qualifying the RDS with CAA (Option) on page 16-1). Another possibility is to create a list with the angle settings for the probe head, which defines the styli. During qualification, the CMM recognizes the styli in question, and you do not have to qualify these manually. You can learn how to create this list under How to Create a Stylus List for RDS on page 4-16 Afterwards, you begin the qualification of the probe with the Automatic Qualification symbol.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-13
How to Define new Probes

Before you can qualify a new probe, you have to tell Calypso the name of the probe in question and its styli. To define a new probe: 1 In the list of prerequisites, click on the Probe button. The Probe Qualification Window dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Click on the Define New Probe button. The Create New Probe dialog box appears on the screen.
4-14
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
3 Enter the names for the new probe and the first stylus. Internally, Calypso does not distinguish between upper and lower case characters. 4 Click OK to close the dialog box. The name of the probe and the stylus are displayed in the Probe name and Stylus name / Number picklists. If the probe has other styli, you now have to add them in Calypso (see How to Add Styli to a Probe on page 4-15).
How to Add Styli to a Probe

If a probe has more than one stylus, Calypso must be informed of the other styli. After defining a new probe or modifying an existing probe, therefore, you must add the additional styli, if any, and qualify them. To add a stylus: 1 In the list of prerequisites, click on the Probe button. The Probe Qualification Window dialog box appears on the screen. 2 Click on the Create New Stylus button. The Create New Stylus dialog box appears on the screen.
If you are adding a stylus to a probe that was defined beforehand, the Stylus Number box automatically shows the next sequential number in the series. 3 Enter a name for the new stylus in the Stylus field. Internally, Calypso does not distinguish between upper and lower case characters. 4 In the Stylus Number field select the number of the stylus. 5 Click OK to close the dialog box. The name of the stylus will now appear in the selection list Stylus name / Number. 6 If you wish to add another stylus, repeat steps 2 through 5. You now have to qualify each new stylus (see How to Qualify a Stylus on page 4-22).
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-15
How to rename a Stylus

You can change the name of a stylus whenever you want, but you cannot change the number. You might find it necessary to change a name when you add new styli to a probe, for example. To rename a stylus: 1 In the list of prerequisites, click on the Probe button. The Probe Qualification Window dialog box appears on the screen. 2 Select the stylus whose name you want to change from the Stylus name / Number picklist. 3 Click on the Rename Stylus button. The New Name Input dialog box appears on the screen.
4 Enter the new name for the stylus. Internally, Calypso does not distinguish between upper and lower case characters. 5 Click OK to close the dialog box. If you see Stylus name / Number in the list, the stylus has now been renamed. It is not necessary to requalify a stylus after renaming it.
How to Create a Stylus List for RDS

To automatically generate and qualify the styli that correspond to the various angle settings of a RDS, you can create a list that contains the desired angle settings. Each list is saved as a file and corresponds to a probe. You must provide Calypso with the dimensions and the orientation of the reference probe in order for this to work:
4-16
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
1 Select Extras Workroom CMM Reference Probe. This takes you to the Reference probe tab.
2 Enter the allocation of the sensor system to the machine system: Machine COLUMNS Orientation, arm 1 Orientation, arm 2 XS = XM YS = -ZM ZS = YM BRIDGES XS = X M YS = -YM ZS = -ZM 3 Enter the dimensions (length) of the reference probe. 4 Open the Control tab and click on Connect. This activates your settings. XS = -XM YS = -ZM XS = -YM
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-17
To create a stylus list for a RDS: 1 In the list of prerequisites, click on the Probe button. The Probe Qualification Window dialog box appears on the screen.
2 In the upper menu bar, click on the Probe Administration button. The Probe Administration dialog will open.
4-18
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
3 Click on the Catalog tab to bring the tabbed page with the catalog to the front, and select in the menu Edit (lower right) the menu point Create List. The Create List dialog box appears on the screen.
4 Enter the data for your probe, for the reference probe and for the reference sphere. For more information, see Create List in the Calypso Online Help. Calypso takes the data for the reference sphere (radius, shaft direction, shaft radius) from the Reference sphere notebook (Reference Sphere Administration button in the qualification window). 5 Enter a name for the probe.
!
hss
Caution Never use the name of the currently active probe. 6 In the Stylus List, enter the stylus name and the corresponding positions of the RDS (angles A and B in degrees): You can insert rows and delete individual rows or the whole table from the popup menu. We recommend using stylus names that contain the angle positions that helps you choose the correct stylus later.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-19
!
hss
Caution Avoid RDS angle positions in which probe shaft directions are close to the shaft direction of the reference sphere, as there is a relatively large risk of shaft probing in this case. 7 Click on the Save button. The data you entered is saved in an ASCII file and a new probe is created in the probe catalog. Each row of the probe list creates a separate stylus. The path and file name are assigned by default and can be changed. 8 Close the Probe Administration dialog. You can now click on the Probe Qualification WindowAutomatic Qualification symbol and begin the qualification of the RDS positions.
How to Edit a Stylus List for RDS

You can load a stylus list whenever you want and make changes to it. The procedure for editing a stylus list is as follows: 1 In the list of prerequisites, click on the Probe button. The Probe Qualification Window appears on the screen. 2 In the upper menu bar, click on the Probe Administration button. The Probe Administration dialog will open. 3 Click on the Catalog tab to bring the tabbed page with the catalog to the front, and select in the menu Edit (lower right) the menu point Create List. The Create List appears on the screen. 4 Click on the Load button and select the file where the probe is saved. 5 Edit the data that must be changed. 6 Click on the Save button. After you have confirmed your choice, the edited file will be saved; the previous data will be overwritten.
NOTE
hss
The modified data will first be available after the probe is selected once more.
4-20
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Qualifying Styli
The probe must be calibrated: If you have installed a new probe that has not been qualified. If you want to requalify a probe that is already installed, for example after a collision or due to thermal changes. On an RDS you can qualify all the angular positions of the RDS automatically and in a single process, if you have installed the RDSCAA (Computer Aided Accuracy) option (see Qualifying the RDS with CAA (Option) on page 16-1). Before you qualify styli, make sure that you have opened a measurement plan and that Calypso knows the position of the reference sphere (see Determining the Reference Sphere Position on page 4-24). You qualify probes in the Probe Qualification dialog box:
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-21
How to Qualify a Stylus

To qualify a stylus, instruct Calypso to use this stylus to probe the reference sphere, mounted on the measurement table, in a special manner. To qualify a stylus: 1 In the list of prerequisites, click on the Probe button. The Probe Qualification Window appears on the screen. 2 Select the name of the probe from the Probe Name picklist if it is not already shown. 3 Select the name of the stylus you want to qualify from the Stylus name / Number picklist. 4 Under Geometry, select the form or function of the stylus point (standard is sphere). Select Temperature Probe to qualify a temperature probe and Cylinder to qualify a cylinder probe. 5 From the Mode list, select the Qualification Mode: Select Tensor if you wish to use the stylus for scanning or for trigger-only measurements with high requirements for precision (available only on systems such as HSS and VAST). Select Six points if you want to wish to qualify the stylus by the automatic default method. Select Manual if you wish to or must perform the qualification manually. For example, you would select this mode to qualify a temperature probe or for the first qualification of a cylinder probe (a cylinder probe can also be subsequently requalified, even during the CNC run).
NOTE
hss
If the styli you use are very short, reduce the value for Sphere Coverage accordingly. The smaller the coverage, the smaller is the section of the surface of the sphere which is probed for qualification. 6 Click on the Probe Definition button. 7 If you want to perform stylus definition in the Tensor mode, enter the measuring force that you want to use subsequently with the stylus. 8 If you perform the stylus qualification in the Tensor or Six Points mode: When prompted, position the stylus over the north pole of the reference sphere and probe it in the direction of the shank (If your stylus is vertical, therefore, position it over the north pole of the sphere and probe once vertically downwards).
4-22
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
9 If you perform the stylus qualification in Manual mode: Manually create the probing points and return points in the desired order (these points are assigned to the respective stylus).
NOTE
hss
When a cylinder probe is qualified, the first three points must lie on a circle on the probe cylinder and the following three points must lie on a circle that is shifted with respect to the first circle. Afterward, you can perform any additional probings.
5 4 3 1 2 6
In the Stylus Qualification dialog, you will see the total number of probing and return points. With Delete, you can remove the points backwards one after the other. If you do not set a return point after the last probing point, a return will be set automatically during the CNC run later. If the sum of the projection angles is greater than 15 degrees, a dialog box automatically appears during the run. You can change the angles and confirm the change with OK in this dialog box. This allows you to adjust the values, so that the shaft direction of the probe is as close to perpendicular as possible with respect to the calculated equatorial plane of the reference sphere and shaft probings are avoided. Calypso qualifies the probe according to the selected mode. The results are shown in the R, S, X, Y, and Z fields (see About the Results of Stylus Qualification on page 4-24). 10 Repeat steps 2 through 9 if you want to qualify another stylus. 11 Click on OK to return to the User Desk. The styli are now qualified and the color of the Probes button is green. The calibrated probe can now be used by all Calypso users.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-23
About the Results of Stylus Qualification

There is no one correct answer for how good the standard deviation of a probe qualification should be. Acceptable deviation depends on many factors: the resolution and accuracy of the CMM, the length and rigidity of the stylus, the quality of the probe, the quality of the stylus tip, and the cleanliness of the environment, among other things. The standard deviation should normally lie in the range of a few micrometers, however. In order to decide whether the qualification result is acceptable, further factors have to be taken into account (among other things, the size of the tolerances to be determined with the stylus). You can, however, use the standard deviation as a basis for your decision. If the standard deviation is insignificant relative to the part tolerances and the radius looks to be correct, then it is probably okay to proceed even though you may have got a 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) standard deviation. If in doubt, check the probe cluster for stability and correct assembly in accord with the probe documentation. You can also clean the stylus and the reference sphere and repeat qualification, aiming at better results. If the results are stable, it probably means that you have reached the limit based on all of the factors mentioned above. In this case, you can regroup the probes and thereby possibly increase the rigidity. You can determine any systematic errors of the CMM by qualification with a short, rigid stylus (the MasterProbe, for example).
Determining the Reference Sphere Position

The reference sphere of the CMM is a sphere of known diameter on a metal extension, known as the stem, mounted on the measuring table. Calypso must know the exact position of this reference sphere for orientation and in order to analyze the qualification measurements correctly. You must use a reference stylus for this purpose: This reference stylus is generally identified by a red dot on the head. The reference stylus for measuring and trigger probe heads is a vertical 8 mm stylus of known length and having a ruby of known diameter. It is important to use a defined angular setting for Renishaw probe/stylus systems and RDS.
!
hss
Caution Never use the reference stylus for a normal measurement during operation.
4-24
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Preconditions
The preconditions that have to be satisfied before you can define the reference sphere are as follows: You have opened a measurement plan. The reference probe is installed. The procedure for installing the reference probe is described in the section entitled How to Install a Probe on page 4-11.
How to Determine the Position of the Reference Sphere

You must always probe the reference sphere with the reference stylus if the reference sphere is moved, if thermal conditions have changed since the position was last determined, or if the CMM was moved to the home position. To determine the position of the reference sphere: 1 In the list of prerequisites, click on the Probe button. The Probe Qualification Window appears on the screen.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-25
2 Make sure that the radius of the reference sphere and the serial number displayed on the screen match the radius and the serial number on the qualification certificate of the reference sphere. These values were entered by the Zeiss Customer Services engineer. If they do not match the data on the certificate, proceed as described in How to Change the Data of the Reference Sphere on page 4-27 3 Check that the reference probe is displayed in the Probes picklist. 4 Click on the Ref. Sphere Position button. Calypso asks whether the reference probe has been inserted. 5 Click on Yes. If you click on No, Calypso will use the data of the last probe that was qualified. In either case, you will be prompted to enter the direction of the reference sphere post:
6 Define the Angle of Reference Sphere Post by clicking on the appropriate button to copy the values automatically into the input fields. When you look at the reference sphere from above (Z+ direction), so that the X axis leads to the right and the Y axis points up, the shaft of the sphere will point into one of the four quadrants of the X-Y coordinate system. 7 Probe the reference sphere once in the stylus direction. You do this by positioning the stylus over the north pole of the reference sphere probing downward. Calypso automatically measures the reference sphere for CNCcompatible CMMs. The results are shown in the R, S, X, Y and Z fields (see About the Results of Stylus Qualification on page 4-24). 8 Click on OK to close the Qualification window. The position of the reference sphere is now known to the system.
4-26
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
How to Change the Data of the Reference Sphere

If the values entered by the Zeiss Customer Service engineer do not match the data on the certificate, the settings have to be changed. The procedure for changing the data of the reference sphere is as follows: 1 In the Probe Qualification dialog box, click on the Reference Sphere Administration button. The data of the reference sphere are displayed. 2 To edit the radius: Highlight the field for the radius. Click on the number in the gray input field at the bottom edge of the dialog box. Enter the number from the qualification certificate. 3 To change the serial number: Highlight the field for the serial number. Click on the number in the gray input field at the bottom edge of the dialog box. Correct the serial number. 4 If necessary, change the clearance planes to suit the type of clamping device you are using (clearance planes for mount) and the position of the stem. The clearance distances define the clearance planes for qualifying the stylus and the probe.
NOTE
hss
Minimum clearance planes are defined even when the clearances are set to zero; the reference point is an imaginary point slightly outside the reference sphere (depending on the axial direction), not the center of the sphere. 5 Click on OK to confirm your entries. The Probe Qualification Window reappears on the screen.
NOTE
hss
The same procedure is also used to add a subsequent reference sphere.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-27
How to Print the Probe Data List

You can print your current probe data in the form of an overview. By entering information in an initialization file, you can specify what is to appear in the probe data log. To print the probe data list: 1 In the list of prerequisites, click on the Probe button. The Probe Qualification Window dialog box appears on the screen. 2 In the upper menu bar, click on the Probe Administration button. The Probe Administration dialog box will open. The Data page is on top. You can print all or part of the probe data shown here. 3 In the menu Edit (lower right), select menu point Print. The Probe printout dialog box is opened.
4 In the list, click on the data you wish to print for your probes. 5 Start printing with OK. The desired probe data are printed.
4-28
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Structure of the Ini File for Probe Printout

The initialization file probeProtocol.ini is located in the directory ...\Calypso\home\om\config\equip. It is a text file that can be edited with a conventional editor. This file is automatically created and assigned values the first time a probe data list is printed. The example below shows the structure of this file:
Version: 1.0 % typ stylusdata: stylusdata: stylusdata: stylusdata: stylusdata: stylusdata: stylusdata: stylusdata: stylusdata: stylusdata: stylusdata: stylusdata: stylusdata: stylusdata: stylusdata: stylusdata: stylusdata: stylusdata: stylusdata: % typ setting: setting: name available X 1 Y 1 Z 1 R 1 S 1 ForceX 1 ForceY 1 ForceZ 1 shaftX 1 shaftY 1 shaftZ 1 Temp 1 Date 1 geometry 0 Mode 0 Paranamest3 0 aAxis 1 bAxis 1 cncCalib 0 name value column 5 width 12
In the first block, the name of the probe datum appears under name and the key for inclusion in the report appears under available: 1 means in the report, 0 means not in the report In the second block, the setting appears under name and the corresponding value appears under value (column: number of columns in the table, width: column width).
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-29
Setting the Base / Start Alignment

The calculated alignment of a workpiece is completed in Calypso by defining a base alignment (coordinate system). If this base alignment can only be determined through time-consuming measurements or scanning, you can manually define a start alignment, which will then be used to measure the base alignment. You need to be familiar with the procedures for automatic feature recognition in order to work with base and/or start alignments (see How to Define Features Using Automatic Feature Recognition on page 5-5). The tasks that can be involved in defining the base/start alignments are as follows: How to Load an Existing Base Alignment/Start Alignment on page 4-33 If there is an existing base/start alignment that meets your requirements, you can use it for your current measurement plan. How to Create a New Base / Start Alignment on page 4-34 A measurement plan must be open before you can create a new base/start alignment. There are several ways of creating a base/start alignment, and you will have to choose one (see Alternative Alignment Methods on page 4-53). How to Update a Base / Start Alignment on page 4-37 If the position of the workpiece has changed but the part alignment is still defined, you can recalculate alignment without having to redefine the base/start alignment from scratch. How to Edit an Existing Base / Start Alignment on page 4-41 You can change the parameters (e.g. a primary reference) of an open (active) base or start alignment at any time. Moving or Rotating the Base / Start Alignment on page 4-42 You can offset or rotate a base or start alignment in order to customize it to suit the positions of features on a workpiece. How to Delete a Base Alignment on page 4-52 How to set a base alignment to zero on page 4-53 For each of these tasks, you start from the part alignment template. The part alignment template is described in full detail in Load Create Or Change Base Alignment in the Calypso Online Help.
4-30
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Part Alignment Basics

The part alignment is the user-defined coordinate system for your measurement plan. The base alignment (see also The Base Alignment on page 4-31) essentially locates the part on the table for the CMM. Why is that necessary? In its clamped position on the table, a workpiece can be tilted or out of line. The CMM still has to perform accurately, so before you start measuring you have to define (compute) the position of the workpiece relative to the axes of the CMM. This is precisely what happens when the part alignment is computed: the part alignment is virtually tilted and turned until certain geometric features of the workpiece are parallel to the CMM's axes. The part alignment needs to locate the part within the six degrees of freedom (three rotational and three translational). The part alignment is based on five references: The primary reference (rotation in space), which constrains two of the three rotational degrees of freedom; for example, the rotation about the X and Y axes. The secondary reference (rotation in plain), which constrains the third rotational degree of freedom; for example, the rotation about the X axis. Three tertiary constraints for the three translational degrees of freedom. These are the origins of X, Y and Z. With these, the part alignment is defined. You can save several part alignments within one measurement plan. You can define a new part alignment using Prerequisites Utilities Alignment or with the Tool Box.
The Base Alignment

The base alignment is a part alignment that defines the position of the workpiece on the CMM. There is only one base alignment in every measurement plan. In order to view, define or change the base alignment, please read How to Create a New Base / Start Alignment on page 4-34 The base alignment parameters correspond to the machine coordinate system. The part alignments inside a measurement plan, on the other hand, correspond either to the base alignment or to other part alignments. They are used for the correct evaluation of the measurement results.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-31
When you set the base alignment, you have to decide which features you want to use for defining the workpiece position. If these features have already been measured, the current workpiece position will be calculated and saved. Otherwise, with machine-remote programming, the workpiece position can be calculated later. This can be accomplished by loading a saved base alignment (see How to Load an Existing Base Alignment/Start Alignment on page 4-33) or by manually adapting a defined base alignment (see How to Update a Base / Start Alignment on page 4-37). It is important to differentiate between 2 processes: The assignments of the elements to the base alignment's 5 references are saved in the measurement plan. The results of the calculation of the base alignment are saved in a file.
The Start Alignment

A part alignment is defined as a start alignment, when it can be used as a preliminary base alignment. It must be possible to create by manual probing. Like the base alignment, the start alignment defines the positioning of the workpiece on the CMM. It is only permitted once in a measurement plan. You will use a start alignment certain cases only.
What is the purpose of a start alignment?
Why do you need a start alignment? A start alignment can be used, when the base alignment needed or intended for the CNC run is based on a large number of features, for example on many intersections or other constructions which require that you probe several features. In this case, you can define a simple part alignment, for example a 3-2-1-alignment, and use it as a start alignment. The start alignment can then be used to generate the base alignment so that the probing and calculations can be performed for a measurement plan. As soon as Calypso recognizes the base alignment, you can switch from the start alignment to the base alignment. If the base alignment features that are required or planned for the CNC run are to be acquired by scanning, you must use a start alignment. These features cannot be probed manually, since only the CNC run is sufficiently precise to achieve the required constant probing force.
4-32
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Define start alignment
The start alignment is defined and edited in the same manner and with the same functions as a base alignment. For this purpose, use the Start Alignment property page in the Load Create Or Change Base Alignment dialog box. It is only the CNC run that cannot be set in the start alignment.
Activate start alignment
To activate the start alignment for the current measurement plan, you must select the corresponding check box on the Start Alignment property page. For information on how to view, define or change the start alignment, please read How to Create a New Base / Start Alignment on page 4-34.
What to Bear in Mind when Defining Constraints

The features you choose to define a part alignment depend to a very large extent on the geometry of the workpiece and the measurement task you want to accomplish. Here are the basic rules: Choose at least three different physical features. They can all be planes, but they must not be the same plane. The features you choose have to compose a sensible base alignment. For example, you would not choose two surfaces that are parallel to each other, such as the top flat surface of a part and the top of a cylinder that rises above it. In this case, the second surface tells Calypso little more about the orientation of the part than the first surface did. For each feature, spread out the points as far as possible. The primary constraint must be a three-dimensional object (a plane, cylinder or cone, or a sphere, if another sphere defines all 3 tertiary origins). The secondary constraint can be two-dimensional (such as a line), but can also be three-dimensional. (Or a circle or ellipse, if another circle or ellipse defines both tertiary origins which belong to the plane of the primary axis.) The tertiary constraints are typically one-dimensional (a point), but can also be two- or three-dimensional.
How to Load an Existing Base Alignment/Start Alignment

If you have or another user has already defined a part alignment, you can use it as a base or start alignment for your current measurement plan if it satisfies your requirements.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-33
Follow these steps: 1 In the list of prerequisites, click on the Base / Start Alignment button. The Load Create Or Change Base Alignment appears on the screen. The Base Alignment property card is in front.
2 To load a start alignment: Click on the Start Alignment property card. 3 Select the option Load a Saved Base Alignment or Load Existing Start Alignment. 4 Select the name of the part alignment that you wish to load from the list. 5 Click on OK to return to the prerequisites.
NOTE
hss
At the very least, you must match the part alignment to the position of the workpiece. (See How to Update a Base / Start Alignment on page 4-37.) The Base / Start Alignment button will now be green. When loading the base/start alignment, only the workpiece position is changed, not, however, the definition of the features used. That is why the representation in the CAD window does not change.
How to Create a New Base / Start Alignment

If you prefer not to use the standard method to define a part alignment, you have a choice of three other methods: 3D Best Fit and RPS or P6 Method (see Alternative Alignment Methods on page 4-53). To create a new base / start alignment:
4-34
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
1 In the list of prerequisites, click on the Base / Start Alignment button. The Load Create Or Change Base Alignment dialog box appears on the screen. The Base Alignment property card is in front.
2 To create a new start alignment: Click on the Start Alignment property card. 3 Select either Create New Base Alignment or Create New Start Alignment. 4 From the list, select the method you want to use for alignment (see Alternative Alignment Methods on page 4-53). 5 Click on OK. The Alignment dialog box appears on the screen. This dialog box has five buttons and fields for defining the five constraints. Calypso automatically enters the information in the fields when you probe the workpiece to define the requisite features. You do not need to probe the workpiece if you have already measured the features required for the part alignment. 6 Make sure that the correct stylus is selected at the CMM control panel.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-35
7 Define a feature for the primary constraint. There are a number of possibilities: The feature already exists: Click on the appropriate button of the constraint. The Selection dialog box appears on the screen. Select the feature of your choice from the picklist. Click on OK. Calypso transfers the feature to the appropriate field. The feature does not exist in the measurement plan as yet: If you are working on the CMM: You do not have to exit the Alignment dialog box. Probe point by point. Calypsos automatic feature recognition engine automatically registers the geometry of the feature. Click on OK when you have fully defined the feature as a constraint. Calypso will automatically transfer the feature to the measurement plan. If you are working away from the machine: Click on the appropriate button of the constraint in the Alignment dialog box. The Selection dialog box appears on the screen. Select the New option. Click on the appropriate button of the feature you want to define. Click on OK. In the CAD window, either probe the necessary number of points on the feature with the mouse. - or click on one of the buttons Define a Space Point, Define Circle on a Cylinder Define 2-D Line or Extract Features to import the entire feature right away. Calypso updates the feature definition at the left-hand side of the dialog box. Click on OK to close the definition template for the feature. 8 Define the features for the other constraints. This is a matter of repeating steps 4 and 5. 9 Click on OK when you have finished defining all the constraints. The part alignment is saved and the dialog box is closed. The Base / Start Alignment button will now be green.
4-36
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Once all of the constraints have been defined, Calypso will enter the corresponding features in the appropriate fields (see the example in the illustration below).
The default name for the measuring plan is derived from the name of the newly calculated base alignment. You can, however, highlight the name and overwrite it with a name of your choice. Click on the Comment button if you want to type in and save a comment containing additional information.
How to Update a Base / Start Alignment

If the workpiece was shifted, turned or tilted out of position slightly, you will have to repeat the computed alignment. Calypso will assist you. To adjust the base / start alignment to suit a new workpiece position: 1 In the list of prerequisites, click on the Base / Start Alignment button. The Load Create Or Change Base Alignment dialog box appears on the screen. The Base Alignment property card is in front.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-37
2 To adjust a start alignment: click on the Start Alignment property card. 3 Select either Change Active Base Alignment or Change Current Start Alignment. 4 Click on OK. The Alignment dialog box appears on the screen. You can see which features were used to define the part alignment. 5 Click on the Execute Manual Run Now button. Calypso guides you through the procedure for computing alignment. The Manual CNC dialog box appears on the screen for this purpose.
The instructions in this dialog box tell you exactly which feature has to be probed and how often to ensure successful alignment.This dialog box is fully described in Manual CNC in the Calypso Online Help. 6 Using the joysticks, take the indicated number of probings on the indicated feature of the part. The information in the dialog box is updated after each probing. In this manner, you know how often you have to probe. When you take the final probing for a constraint, the window displays the feature needed for the next constraint (such as 2-D Line1). After the probing, Calypso takes a moment to update the part alignment and display the new image in the CAD window. Then you are returned to the Alignment window.
4-38
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
7 Click on OK to save this part alignment and return to the prerequisites. The Base / Start Alignment button will now be green. When adjusting the base / start alignment, only the workpiece position will be changed, not, however, the definition of the features used. That is why the representation in the CAD window does not change.
Example: How to adapt a base alignment in an iterative process with abortion condition
You can enhance precision by computing alignment of the part alignment iteratively. You do this by defining a loop in the Load Create or Change Base Alignment window. If you use a abortion condition instead of defining the end of the loop by specifying a certain number of repetitions, you can predefine the target precision for the new part alignment.
NOTE
hss
The Automatic Run check box has to be marked in the measurement plan in the definition template of the base alignment. 1 In the Load Create or Change Base Alignment dialog box, activate the radio button for the Change Active Base Alignment option.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-39
2 Click on Loop. The Loop dialog box appears on the screen.
3 Click on Add. 4 Enter 5, for example, as the number of cycles in the End field. 5 Point to the Abortion Condition field, right-click to open the shortcut menu and select Formula.... 6 In the Formula... window, enter the following expression:
baseSystem().valueA<0.05
This Boolean expression is checked at the end of each loop and when it is satisfied (value of the expression = true), the loop is stopped. The value of the valueA variable is recalculated each time the loop is run. It stands for the approximation between the measured alignment and the alignment stored in memory. In the standard protocol valueA is designated Delta. 7 Close the Formula, Loop and Load Create or Change Base Alignment dialog boxes. 8 Start the measurement plan. Alignment terminates immediately if the workpiece was not moved in the interim since the alignment was last computed. If a marginal change was made to the position of the workpiece, alignment is computed iteratively until the difference (delta) between two consecutive alignments is less than the value you specified (0.05).
4-40
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
See the default printout for information on the alignment procedure and the results, including the value for delta.
How to Edit an Existing Base / Start Alignment

When a base / start alignment is changed, the nominal values of all of the features in current measurement plan will be changed. The position of the base alignment relative to the workpiece is changed. The position of the workpiece on the CMM will also be changed if only measured features are used. To change a base / start alignment: 1 In the list of prerequisites, click on the Base / Start Alignment button. The Load Create Or Change Base Alignment dialog box appears on the screen. The Base Alignment property card is in front.
2 To change a start alignment: click on the Start Alignment property card. 3 Select either Change Active Base Alignment or Change Current Start Alignment. 4 Click on OK. The Alignment dialog box appears on the screen. It shows which features were used to define the part alignment. 5 If you want to replace a feature for a particular constraint with another feature which has already been defined:
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-41
Click on the button for the constraint in question, to open the Selection (Features) dialog box. In the list, click on the feature you want to use. Click on OK to confirm and close the Selection dialog box. The feature has now been replaced. Click on OK to return to the list of prerequisites. 6 If you want to assign a particular constraint a feature that has yet to be defined: Click on the button for the constraint in question. The Selection (Features) dialog box is opened. Select New and choose the type of feature you want to define (e.g. plane or 2D straight). Confirm by clicking OK and use the CMM to probe the necessary points of the feature. Make sure that the correct stylus is selected at the CMM control panel. As soon as you start probing, Calypso updates the feature definition at the left-hand side of the window. After probing, click on OK to close the features template. Click on OK to return to the list of prerequisites. After every change in the part alignment, the Base / Start Alignment button must be green. When a base / start alignment is changed, the nominal values of all of the features in current measurement plan will be changed. The position of the base / start alignment relative to the workpiece will be changed. The position of the workpiece on the CMM will also be changed if only measured features are used.
Moving or Rotating the Base / Start Alignment

Sometimes, the coordinate values of a workpieces features needed to define the base / start alignment are not 0, or the features are not parallel to a part alignment axis but rotated. In these situations, the base / start alignment can be moved (offset) or rotated to the desired position. In such cases, the base / start alignment is always moved first, and then rotated.
4-42
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Moving the base / start alignment
An offset also enables you to move the origin of the part alignment to a point that cannot be probed. You can define an offset in any and all of the three coordinate directions. Using the rotation function, it is possible to rotate a part alignment around a coordinate axis. There are two methods for entering the angle of rotation: Rotate by an angle: The desired angle of rotation is entered directly in degrees. Rotate by distances: The angle of rotation is entered via vector coordinates. The rotation of the reference axis by secondary reference is described separately (seeRotate Distance on page 4-49).
Rotating the base / start alignment
How to Offset a Base / Start Alignment

Shifting a part alignment is part of the Offset special function. To offset a part alignment: 1 In the list of prerequisites, click on the Base / Start Alignment button. The Load Create Or Change Base Alignment dialog box appears on the screen. The Base Alignment property card is in front. 2 To offset a start alignment: click on the Start Alignment property card. 3 Select Change Active Base Alignment or Change Current Start Alignment and click on OK. 4 Click on Special in the Base Alignment or Start Alignment dialog box. The Special Functions dialog box appears on the screen.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-43
5 Click on the Offset button. The Offset entry and input fields for the coordinates are added to the Special Functions dialog box.
6 Enter the amount by which you want to offset the origin: To do so, click on the X, Y or Z field or fields, as appropriate. Enter the corresponding value or values. 7 Once you have entered the coordinates for the origin, click on OK. The offset is saved and the window is closed. The new position of the part alignment is displayed in the CAD window.
How to Rotate a Part Alignment by an Angle

Rotating a part alignment about a selected axis is part of the Add Rotation special function. After computing alignment, you can rotate the part alignment through the desired angle. To rotate a part alignment by entering an angle: 1 In the list of prerequisites, click on the Base / Start Alignment button. The Load Create Or Change Base Alignment dialog box appears on the screen. The Base Alignment property card is in front. 2 To perform a Cartesian rotation (by distance) of a start alignment: click on the Start Alignment property card. 3 Select Change Active Base Alignment or Change Current Start Alignment and click on OK. 4 Click on the Specialbutton. The Special Functions dialog box appears on the screen.
4-44
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5 Click on the Rotate by an angle button. The Around entry and input fields for the spatial axis and the angle of rotation will appear in the Special Functions dialog box.
6 Enter the spatial axis around which you want the alignment to be rotated, and the angle: Click in the Around list and select the spatial axis of your choice. The list entry is not updated until after you have closed the window. Click in the Angle field and enter the angle of rotation (in degrees). 7 Repeat steps 6 and 5 if you want to define rotations about other spatial axes as well. 8 After you have entered all of the desired rotations, click on OK. The rotations are saved and the window is closed. The new position of the part alignment is displayed in the CAD window.
How to Rotate a Part Alignment by Distances

When a part alignment is rotated by distance (Cartesian) the angle of rotation is given using vector coordinates. To perform a Cartesian rotation (by distance) of a part alignment: 1 In the list of prerequisites, click on the Base / Start Alignment button. The Load Create Or Change Base Alignment dialog box appears on the screen. The Base Alignment property card is in front.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-45
2 To perform a Cartesian rotation (by distance) of a start alignment: click on the Start Alignment property card. 3 Select Change Active Base Alignment or Change Current Start Alignment and click on OK. 4 Click on the Special button. The Special Functions dialog box appears on the screen. 5 Click on the Rotate by distances button. The Around entry, a selection field for the spatial axis and input fields the respective complementary coordinates are added to the Special Functions window, along with a field for displaying the resulting angle of rotation.
6 Enter the spatial axis around which you want the system rotated, and the vector for rotation: In the Around list, select the corresponding spatial axis. The coordinate input fields immediately change accordingly. The list entry, however, is not updated until you have closed the window. Specify the vector with its two coordinates in the coordinate system of the plane of rotation (the plane of rotation depends on the selected axis of rotation). The associated angle will appear immediately in the display field, calculated as the arc tangent of the quotient of coordinate 2 divided by coordinate 1. 7 Repeat steps 6 and 5 if you want to define rotations about other spatial axes as well. 8 Once you have entered the rotations, click on OK.
4-46
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
The rotations are saved and the window is closed. The new position of the part alignment is displayed in the CAD window.
Rotate Reference Axis by Secondary Reference

In addition to the offset (movement) and rotation of a base / start alignment, there are other, special options for changing a base / start alignment. To access these, click on Special in the Special Functions dialog in the definition template for the workpiece coordinate system. Here you will find three options for using a secondary reference to set the reference axis. Option Rotate Distance (to a given axis) Rotate to Origin Line Function Rotates the coordinate system about a given axis so that a specific coordinate of a specified feature reaches a given size. Rotates the coordinate system about a given axis so that a line passing through the origin and the nominal coordinate intersects the tertiary reference (measured point) in the plane. After this rotation, the X-value and Y-value of the nominal point and the tertiary point have same ratio.
Rotate to equal deviation Rotates the coordinate system about a given axis until a line between a point in the plane (the nominal coordinate) and the tertiary reference has a slope of 45. After this rotation, the delta-X and delta-Y of the nominal point and the tertiary point are equal (delta-X (delta-Y) is the difference between the two X-values (Y-values)).
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-47
Rotate to Origin line

Actual point (measured)
Y act Y nom
Nominal coordinates X act X nom
Rotate to equal deviation

Actual point (measured)
Nominal coordinates
The options only appear in the Special Functions dialog box, when they would be reasonable to use and the base / start alignment satisfies certain preconditions.
Preconditions
To be able to use the Rotate reference axis by secondary reference, the following preconditions must be met: The secondary constraint of the base / start alignment was defined by either a circle, a slot, a rectangle, an ellipse or a point. For both coordinates of the plane in which the base alignment is rotated, the tertiary constraint must be defined with the same feature, or with 2 planes, or with two 2D lines, or remain unchanged in both coordinates.
4-48
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Rotate Distance
Use the Rotate Distance function to define a value (distance) separating a defined coordinate of a given feature from the part alignment. In this case, Calypso rotates the part alignment until it is set to this distance.
Example
The example below illustrates the Rotate Distance function: The zero point of the part alignment is in the bore on the left. The center of the bore on the right is 50 mm away in the X direction. The Rotate Distance function will be used to reduce this distance to the nominal 40 mm.
50
Calypso rotates the part alignment around the origin in the left bore until the distance you specified is achieved.
40
Rotate to Origin Line

The function Rotate to Origin Line can only be performed when certain conditions are met (see Rotate Reference Axis by Secondary Reference on page 4-47).
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-49
This allows rotating the coordinate system such that a line going through the coordinate origin will go through the point that was used as the third reference when the base alignment was defined. When using the Rotate to Origin Line function, Calypso rotates the part alignment until the specified line touches the defined point. In the new coordinate system, the relationships between the X-values and the Y-values for both points (the one defined by the line and the point for the tertiary reference) are exactly equal. The Rotate to Origin Line is in a sense a Rotate to Equal Relationships.
Example
The following example illustrates the Rotate to Origin Line function: The zero point of the part alignment is in the bore on the left. The center of the bore on the right delivers the third reference for both the X and Y-axis. With (20,30), a line is defined in the X-Y plane, which passes through the origin and the point at X = 20 mm, Y = 30 mm. After the Rotate to Origin Line function has been performed, the line should also pass through the center of the bore on the right. Calypso rotates the part alignment around the origin in the left bore until the line touches the center of the bore on the right.
Rotate to equal deviation

The function Rotate to Equal Deviation can only be performed when certain conditions are met (see Rotate Reference Axis by Secondary Reference on page 4-47). This allows rotating the coordinate system such that a specified line with the slope 1 (equals 45) will go through the point that was used as the third reference when the base alignment was defined. When using the Rotate to Equal Deviation function, Calypso rotates the part alignment until the specified line touches the defined point. In the new coordinate system, the difference between the X-values (between the just defined point and the point of the tertiary reference) equals the difference between the Y-values which is why it is called Rotate to Equal Deviation.
Example
The following example illustrates the Rotate to Equal Deviation function: The zero point of the part alignment is in the bore on the left. The center of the bore on the right delivers the third reference for both the X and Y-axis.
4-50
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
A line is defined with (20,30) in the X-Y plane of the coordinate system; it will pass with the slope 1 through the point at X = 20 mm, Y = 30 mm. After the Rotate to Equal Deviation function has been performed, the line should also pass through the center of the bore on the right. Calypso rotates the part alignment around the origin in the left bore until the line touches the center of the bore on the right.
How to rotate the reference axis

To rotate the reference axis: 1 Make certain that the necessary Prerequisites for rotating the reference axis have been met. 2 In the list of prerequisites, click on the Base / Start Alignment button. The Load Create Or Change Base Alignment dialog box appears on the screen. The Base Alignment property card is in front. 3 To rotate the reference axis in a start alignment: click on the Start Alignment property card. 4 Select Change Active Base Alignment or Change Current Start Alignment and click on OK. 5 Click on the Special button. The Special Functions dialog box appears on the screen. Once the prerequisites are met, additional options and input fields will appear in the upper part for Setting Reference Axis with a Secondary Reference.
Enter distance
6 Select the desired option:
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-51
Rotate to distance Rotate to Origin Line Rotate to Equal Deviation 7 Rotate to Distance: In the Rotate Distance input field, enter the distance to be achieved by rotating (Caution: Pay attention to sign). 8 In Rotate to Origin Line or Equal Deviation: In the input fields, enter the coordinates of the point through which the line should pass. 9 Click on OK to save the setting and close the dialog box. 10 Click on OK to close the Alignment Base / Start Alignment window. You can observe the rotation of the base alignment directly in the CAD window.
How to Delete a Base Alignment

In Calypso, you can delete a part alignment when you no longer need it.
!
hss
Caution If you delete a base alignment, you must define new part alignments. (See How to Update a Base / Start Alignment on page 4-37.) To delete a part alignment: 1 Choose Delete base alignment from the File menu. The Delete Base Alignment dialog box appears on the screen, with a list of all the base alignments defined in Calypso. 2 Mark the name of the base alignment that you want to delete. 3 Click on OK. The base alignment is deleted from Calypso. Only the base alignment as such is deleted, not the constraints and features on which it is based.
4-52
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
How to set a base alignment to zero

If you want to undo the settings made in defining a base alignment to set it up again, you can set it to zero. To reset a base alignment to zero: 1 Select Prerequisites Utilities Set Base Alignment to Zero. The base alignment will be reset and can be set up again.
Alternative Alignment Methods

Apart from the standard method (see How to Create a New Base / Start Alignment on page 4-34), you have a choice of three other alignment methods:
3D Best Fit.
The 3D Best Fit can be used to calculate the alignment for workpieces for which no clear reference features have been defined. This is a situation frequently encountered in freeform measurements. The 3D Best Fit is a method that delivers the best possible fit between any number of points or geometrical features and their specified geometry. Number of points at least 1, no upper limit
Description The errors between specified and actual points are squared and added up. The base alignment is changed until this value is minimized.
RPS Method
The RPS Method is primarily used for measuring body panels for motor vehicles. Number of points minimum 3, maximum 6
Description A coordinate (for example Z) is fixed 3 times. A coordinate (for example Y) is fixed 2 times. A coordinate (for example X) is fixed 1 time. RPS alignment is usually an iterative process performed with the aid of a loop.
RPS is short for Reference Point System. RPS alignment is based on the 3-2-1 rule. Unlike other methods, RPS alignment is based on the points that are specified in the drawing of the workpiece.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-53
Alignment is therefore subject to rules and is not wholly userdefinable. One of the advantages is therefore that different results obtained with a given workpiece are comparable because they are all based on the same system of coordinates.
P6 Method
The P6 Method is particularly suitable for the alignment of pipes. Number of points exactly 3
Description The first point defines the origin in X, Y, and Z. The first and second points together define the primary axis. The third point defines rotation about this primary axis.
4-54
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
How to Use an Alternative Alignment Method

To make an alignment in accord with the RPS, P6 or 3D Best Fit method: 1 Open Prerequisites Utilities and select the method of your choice. If you want to generate a new part alignment, click on Base / Start Alignment in the list of the prerequisites and then select the desired procedure. The definition templates for all these methods are very similar in appearance. The illustration below shows the template for RPS alignment by way of example.
The dialog box for RPS alignment has X, Y and Z check boxes that you must use to define which feature constrains which degrees of freedom.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-55
2 Click on Select Features to define the features you want to use for alignment. This opens the Selection (Features) dialog box.
Here all of the features that have been defined will be displayed. 3 Press and hold down the Ctrl key and click on the features you need for alignment. The features you select in this way are listed in the definition template for alignment. 4 If you have to define constraint features in addition to those already listed: Click in the first column to the left of the name of the feature for which you want to define a constraint. An arrow appears, indicating the active line. Click on the Select References button. The Selection dialog box opens. Here all of the features that have been defined will be displayed. Click on the feature you want to define as a constraint. Click on OK to transfer the constraint to the definition template. Repeat this step as often as necessary until all the constraints you need have been defined. 5 If you want to fit actual values to nominal positions as part of alignment: Click in the field you want to change.
4-56
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Define the position in the columns headed Nominal X, Nominal Y and Nominal Z. Repeat this step as often as necessary to define specified positions for other features. 6 The next step in RPS alignment is to define the fixation direction for each feature you selected: Click on the X, Y or Z check box, as appropriate, to select the fixation direction. Repeat this step for each feature in the list until all fixation directions have been defined. 7 Select the alignment method to be used in the CNC run (for more information see Alignment in the Calypso Online Help). 8 If you are ready to execute the alignment you just defined, click on the Execute Manual Run Now button. Calypso will step you through the alignment procedure and prompt you to take probings (see Basics about Manual Control on page 8-10). 9 Click on OK. The dialog box is closed and the coordinate system is saved. See also Use of Loops in Alignment according to RPS on page 14-26.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-57
Prerequisites for the Rotary Table

With Calypso, you can also measure workpieces on a rotary table. The rotary table can be used only referred to the overall measurement plan, i.e. all features in the measurement plan are measured with the aid of the rotary table. For this purpose, the rotary table is fastened on the operating plate of the CMM and connected to the control if it is not already integrated in the CMM.
System setting
In the system configuration, you must have activated the rotary table on the Rotary Table tab of the CMM Configuration notebook under Extras Workroom CMM.
An additional element will then appear in the prerequisites: the rotary table icon. The rotary table must be activated and its axis (the RT axis) must be defined in the prerequisites for the measurement plan in which you wish to use the rotary table.
Icon color
The Rotary Table button remains red if the RT axis is not defined or is invalid. If the icon has a yellow background, the rotary table is irrelevant for the measurement plan. The button background changes to green as soon as the rotary table is activated for the measurement plan and the RT axis is valid.
4-58
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Preconditions
The following preconditions must be satisfied before you can define the rotary table: The presence of a rotary table must be entered in the system configuration under Extras Workroom CMM (on the Rotary Table tab).
General procedure
Proceed as follows if you wish to use the rotary table in a measurement plan: Activate the rotary table in the prerequisites. Load the rotary-table axis (RT axis), if the RT axis was performed with a different measurement plan, or define the tasks for determining the rotary-table axis. If necessary, pre-align the rotary table at the start of the run. Define the necessary features and check the associated clearance planes and clearance moves. For rotational parts, use RT clearance planes. In the features, bear in mind the particularities involved in measurement with the rotary table. Additional options are available to you when using the rotary table: You can control the rotary table directly. Particularities must be kept in mind in dividing a feature with rotary table coupling.
Determining the RT Axis and RT Prealignment

Even with the most precise positioning, the rotary-table axis deviates slightly from the ideal axis. These deviations falsify the measurement results, however, and thus have to be compensated. For this reason, the exact rotary-table axis must be determined for each measurement plan in which the rotary table is to be used.
Deviations of the RT axis
Deviations of the rotary-table axis can refer to the position and to the orientation. These deviations can be used to calculate the angle with respect to the main axis, the eccentricity and the wobble angle and thus the corresponding compensation values. The deviations will be saved together with the associated measurement plan. These values can be used for further measurements with the rotary table once they have been determined, provided that nothing is changed on the rotary table. Depending on the number of measurements, the rotary-table precision and the ambient conditions, it may be advisable to repeat the determination of the rotary-table axis.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-59
For this purpose, call the Rotary Table dialog box from the Prerequisites. You have several options here for defining the compensation values for the RT axis used in the measurement plan: The existing values for the RT axis are reused. The RT axis is requalified at the start of the CNC run. The RT axis is manually defined immediately, and the values determined are saved in the measurement plan (for later use).
RT pre-alignment
The rotary table must be in an exactly defined position for certain measurements. You also have several options to perform this RT prealignment: Pre-alignment is defined in the Prerequisites and is thus performed at the start of the measurement plan (see How to Activate the Rotary Table and Define the RT Axis on page 4-61). Pre-alignment is performed manually (see How to Perform RT Prealignment Manually on page 4-64).
4-60
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
How to Activate the Rotary Table and Define the RT Axis

To activate the rotary table for the current measurement plan: 1 Select Prepare Prepare rotary table or click on the Rotary Table button in the list of Prerequisites. The Rotary Table dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Select the check box RT activated for this Measurement Plan. 3 Select Load existing RT axis if the RT axis has already been defined for this measurement plan and does not have to be redefined. 4 Select Measure RT Axis if you wish to define the RT axis with the measurement plan. In the last case, you must inform Calypso which feature to use when defining RT axis. New buttons appear under the Options. The square button Switch to Feature Menu is used to specify the feature from the current measurement plan to be used when defining the RT axis. 5 Click on the Import Measurement Plan button and select a suitable measurement plan if you wish to use one of its features for defining the RT axis.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-61
!
hss
Caution This measurement plan must have the same position as the base alignment. The features of the imported measurement plan are added to the end of the list of features in the background. 6 Click on the Switch to Feature Menu button. The Selection dialog box will open. 7 Choose the feature with which the RT axis is to be defined. The 3-D line, cylinder and cone are suitable. 8 Under RT prealignment at start of run, specify whether the rotary table is to move to home position at the start of the CNC run and whether the workpiece is to be mechanically aligned at the beginning. This is advisable for narrow bores, for example, if the risk of a collision during a CNC adjustment would be too great. 9 If the workpiece possesses special characteristics, specify whether the workpiece is rotationally symmetrical (shorter clearance paths possible) and which retraction direction is to be preferred under RT clearance paths. 10 Click on OK to confirm. The Rotary Table button is now green.
4-62
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
How to Define the RT Axis Manually

To define the rotary table axis manually: 1 Select Prerequisites Prepare rotary table or click on the Rotary Table button in the list of Prerequisites. The Rotary Table dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Select the check box RT activated for the Measurement Plan. 3 Select Measure RT axis. New buttons appear under the Options. The square button Switch to Feature Menu is used to specify the feature from the current measurement plan to be used when defining the RT axis. 4 Click on the Import Measurement Plan button and select a suitable measurement plan if you wish to use one of its features for defining the RT axis.
!
hss
Caution This measurement plan must have the same position as the base alignment. The features of the imported measurement plan are added to the end of the list of features in the background.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-63
5 Click on the Switch to Feature Menu button. The Selection dialog box will open. 6 Specify which feature to use when defining the RT axis and confirm with OK. The 3-D line, cylinder and cone are suitable. 7 Click on the Measure now button and follow the instructions. Calypso will guide you through the manual definition of the RT axis. The determined RT axis is saved for the current measurement plan and can be reactivated for the next use with the option Load existing RT axis. The Rotary Table button is now green.
How to Perform RT Prealignment Manually

If there are tight bores and the risk of collision would be too high during CNC adjustment, the RT prealignment should be performed manually. To perform RT prealignment of the rotary table manually: 1 Select Prerequisites Prepare rotary table or click on the Rotary Table button in the list of Prerequisites. The Rotary Table dialog box appears on the screen.
4-64
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
2 Select the check box RT activated for this Measurement Plan. 3 Specify whether the rotary table is to move to home position under RT prealignment at start of run. 4 Select the check box Align workpiece mechanically and set RT position to and enter the required rotary-table position. A new button will appear under the input field. 5 Click on Execute now and follow the further instructions. Calypso will guide you through manual prealignment of the rotary table. 6 Click on OK to confirm. The Rotary Table button is now green.
RT Clearance Planes
A few particularities are involved for the clearance paths and clearance planes when a rotary table is used in a measurement plan.
Clearance paths
If the rotary-table position changes during the CNC run from one feature to the next, the probe must be moved clear according to a defined strategy before the table turns. Calypso uses information about the workpiece from the nominal data for this purpose. If the workpiece in question is rotationally symmetrical, Calypso can shorten the retract paths because there can be no bulges formed by the diagonals. In this case, you should activate the option Rotationally symmetrical part with RT axis center in the Rotary Table dialog box. Depending on the shape of the workpiece, you can also activate only one or both of the retraction options here.
Clearance planes
As soon as the rotary table is active, additional new clearance planes and groups are available for the features. The designations of these clearance planes are composed of RTSE or RTG and an axial direction. If you use the rotary table with rotationally symmetrical objects such that the workpiece is always measured from the same direction (direction of the CMM) as the rotary table is turned, it is recommended to use these RT clearance planes (RTSE...) or RT clearance groups (RTG...). If you use the usual clearance plane (SE), bear in mind that this clearance plane is linked to the base alignment. In other words, it rotates about the rotary table axis together with the workpiece (see illustration).
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-65
The RT clearance planes or groups do not rotate with the base alignment (and thus the workpiece) but are instead fixed. The position of the RT clearance planes is referred to the unrotated base alignment at a RT position of 0 degrees (see illustration).
RT position 45 degree
RT position 0 degree
Y
Probing direction 0 Probing direction SE +X
SE +X RTSE +X
RTSE +X
How to Control the Rotary Table Directly

If a rotary table is active, you can control it directly with Calypso. To control the rotary table directly: 1 Click on the RT travel commands icon in the menu bar. The RT travel commands dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Click on Read to read in the current rotary-table position, if necessary. This can be advisable after a manual movement, for example. The recognized position is indicated below the icon. It is indicated in relation to the rotary table (absolute position) and in relation to the machine coordinate system.
4-66
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
3 If you wish to use the multiple of a certain incremental angle as the position: Under the line 360 /, enter the divisor or the incremental angle suitable for the current configuration (e.g. of the workpiece). The other field is filled automatically in each case. After specifying the incremental angle, you can conveniently adopt a multiple of the incremental angle in the input field Degree by entering the divisor. 4 Then, enter the number of steps or click on the + and buttons to set the number of steps. The calculated angle is shown in the input field Degree. - or Enter the required angular position directly. 5 Click on Rotate to in order to move the rotary table to the desired position. The rotary table moves to the specified position. 6 Click on Close. The dialog box closes.
Measuring Features with Rotary Table

Two additional parameters are important for measurement with the rotary table: the rotary table position (RT position) and the rotation or non-rotation of the base alignment. RT position When features are measured with the rotary table, exactly one rotary table position is assigned to each feature. This position is saved together with the feature. The rotary table can thus move to the required position for each measurement, irrespective of the sequence of features in the measurement plan. Base alignment rotating / not rotating The values received in the machine coordinate system are converted to the base alignment of the workpiece after correction. When measurements are made on the workpiece, the base alignment must be virtually rotated as well, of course. If the measurements are to be used to determine the deviations of the RT axis, however, there would be no difference if the base alignment were to rotate. In this case the base alignment must remain fixed. This is the only way to determine deviations of the reference feature from the expected state of an ideal axis. You can change these RT parameters for a feature at the individual feature and in the Measurement Plan editor Features.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-67
Changing RT parameters in the feature

RT position
In order to enter, check or change the RT position for the measurement of a feature, open the definition template of the feature, click on the Strategy button and double-click to open the Clearance Data.
The input field RT position is contained in the Clearance Data dialog box.
Base alignment rotating / not rotating
Open the definition template of the feature to set Base alignment rotating / not rotating. To switch off rotation of the base alignment, select the entry BA not rotating with RT under Nominal Definition. This setting is suitable for defining the RT axis. To switch on rotation of the base alignment, select the entry Nominal Input under Nominal Definition. This setting is suitable for measuring the workpiece.
Changing RT parameters in the Measurement Plan editor Features

You can enter, check and, if necessary, change both additional parameters In the Measurement Plan editor Features.
4-68
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
For this purpose, choose the entry RT position or Base Alignment rotating with RT in the menu.
After you have marked the desired feature, enter any angle in the set to box or select one of the default incremental angles. Select On or Off for Base alignment rotating.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-69
Rotational pattern of a feature with rotary table coupling

With the rotational pattern, you measure similar features or workpieces that are arranged in a rotationally symmetrical configuration. All features must possess the same orientation with respect to the center of rotation (see illustration).
Center of symmetry
If you wish to measure one or several workpieces with rotational pattern, you can use the rotary table for this purpose. If this procedure is used, the rotary table always moves in several phases to a position in which the respective feature (or workpiece) is probed from the same direction.
Rotate rotary table as well
In order to use the rotary table for the rotational pattern, select the option Rotate rotary table as well in the Rotary Pattern dialog box. An RT clearance plane must be used, because only one clearance plane can be allocated to the feature to be measured.
Clearance planes
4-70
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Angle on workpiece and RT position
A particularity arises from the different reference systems for angles on the workpiece and the angle specification for the RT position (see illustration).
270
90
Probing direction 180 180 0

270
Rotary table 90
Workpiece
270
90 180
180
270
Probing direction 0
Workpiece 90
Rotary table
If the rotary table (e.g. with a quadrant pattern) is to measure a part feature that is at an angle of 90 on the workpiece, the rotary table must rotate in the opposite direction, i.e. to the RT position 270.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-71
Defining the Clearance Planes

Clearance planes enable CMMs with CNC capability to move probes around the workpiece without risk of collision. These clearance planes form a sort of imaginary box around the workpiece and clamping device, protecting the probe against collision.
Names of the clearance planes
The names of the clearance planes consist of the abbreviation SE, followed by the direction to be protected. For example, SE +X. The names of clearance planes that are additionally defined when a rotary table is used consist of the abbreviation RTSE and the direction to be protected. For example, RTSE +X. Do not make the clearance planes unnecessarily large, because in some cases this could lead to unfavorable routing or even collisions.
!
hss
Caution Any time the part alignment is changed such that a new origin or axis alignment is defined, you must redefine the clearance planes. Failure to do so may result in collisions with the part. The preconditions that have to be satisfied before you can define the clearance planes are as follows: All styli of the current probe must be qualified. See How to Qualify a Stylus on page 4-22. The size of the probe head must be defined in the system setup under Extras Workroom CMM (on the Probe Head tab).
Preconditions
Strategies
There are various strategies for defining the clearance planes: You can use the CMM to define the corners of the clearance plane at positions just beyond the outside corners of the part. You can type in the X, Y and Z locations of the corners of the clearance plane. If you do not have a CMM Position (or I-POS) button on your CMMs control panel (which allows you to record the current position of the probe), then you can use the CMM to probe the outside edges of the part itself as its clearance planes. If you use a CAD model, you can generate the clearance planes automatically. All you have to do is tell Calypso how far you want the clearance planes to be from the workpiece.
Closing edges
Closing edges is a way of further restricting probe travel without the need to change the size of the clearance planes. This can be useful, for example if you have two or more workpieces positioned on the table or the design of the clamping device is such that it could cause a collision at an edge. The new route is calculated automatically. See How to Close Edges on page 4-77
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-72
How to Define the Clearance Planes with the CMM

If you want to use the CMM to define the corners of the clearance planes, your CMM joystick must have a button that can be used to confirm the current position of the probe head. To define the corners of the clearance planes: 1 In the list of Prerequisites, click on the Clearance Planes button. The Clearance Planes dialog box appears on the screen. 2 Move the CMM to a position approximately 10 millimeters outside the top, rear right corner of the workpiece (position 1):
(1)
(2)
3 Press the position button on the right-hand joystick three times to save the current position. 4 Move the CMM to a position approximately 10 millimeters outside the opposing diagonal (bottom front left corner) of the workpiece (position 2): 5 Press the position button on the right-hand joystick three times to save the current position. 6 Click on OK to accept these values. The Update Clearance Plane Settings for Defined Features? message is displayed.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-73
7 Click on YES if you want to update the clearance planes for all defined features, or on NO if you want to retain the original clearance planes. You will find more information on updating clearance planes in Clearance Planes in the Calypso Online Help. The Clearance Planes button is now green.
How to Define the Clearance Planes Manually

If you want to define the corners of the clearance planes manually, you must enter the x, y and z coordinates for two corners. To define the corners of the clearance planes: 1 In the list of Prerequisites, click on the Clearance Planes button. The Clearance Planes dialog box appears on the screen. 2 Type the coordinate values into the X, Y and Z boxes. 3 Click on OK to accept these values. The Update Clearance Plane Settings for Defined Features? message is displayed. 4 Click on YES if you want to update the clearance planes for all defined features, or on NO if you want to retain the original clearance planes. You will find more information on updating clearance planes in Clearance Planesin the Calypso Online Help. The Clearance Planes button is now green.
How to Define the Clearance Planes by Probing

If you want to define the two corners of the clearance planes by probing, you have to define the X, Y and Z coordinates by probing.
(1)
z y x
(2)
4-74
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
!
hss
Caution The clearance planes generated by this strategy are very close to the workpiece. In order to avoid the risk of damaging a probe, you should set a clearance distance of at least 10 mm (see How to Move the Approach Position Closer to the Feature on page 7-31). To define the corners of the clearance planes: 1 In the list of Prerequisites, click on the Clearance Planes button. The Clearance Planes dialog box is opened. 2 Define the first corner (1). You do this by probing the workpiece in Z, X and Y, consecutively. Calypso automatically enters the values in each field in turn and highlights the next field so that you can determine the value by probing.
NOTE
hss
If a corner is inaccessible, you can move to the corresponding position on the clearance plane, select the stylus, highlight the appropriate input field and use the interim position. 3 Define the second corner (2). The procedure is the same as in step 2, but you probe in the opposite direction. 4 Click on OK to accept these values. The Update Clearance Plane Settings for Defined Features? message is displayed. 5 Click on YES if you want to update the clearance planes for all defined features, or on NO if you want to retain the original clearance planes. You will find more information on updating clearance planes in Clearance Planesin the Calypso Online Help. The Clearance Planes button is now green.
How to Generate the Clearance Planes Automatically

If you want to have the clearance planes generated automatically, you must have the workpiece's CAD file open in the CAD window. All you have to do is specify the clearance distance (offset) in millimeters. To define the corners of the clearance planes: 1 In the list of Prerequisites, click on the Clearance Planes button. The Clearance Planes dialog box appears on the screen.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-75
2 Click on the Clearance Planes from CAD Model button. The dialog box in which you can enter the offset appears on the screen. 3 Type in the offset in millimeters (e. g. 10) and click on OK. The computed values appear in the input fields. The clearance planes appear around the CAD model. 4 Click on OK to accept these values. The Update Clearance Plane Settings for Defined Features? message is displayed. 5 Click on YES if you want to update the clearance planes for all defined features, or on NO if you want to retain the original clearance planes. You will find more information on updating clearance planes in Clearance Planesin the Calypso Online Help. The Clearance Planes button is now green.
How to Test the Clearance Planes

Calypso has a function called Test Drive To The Selected Clearance Plane that you can use to validate the clearance planes.
!
hss
Caution Check that you have defined all the clearance planes (depending on the geometry of the workpiece, the CMM might not be able to reach each plane directly). When you are ready to test drive to a clearance plane: 1 In the list of Prerequisites, click on the Clearance Planes button. The Clearance Planes dialog box appears on the screen. 2 Highlight the clearance plane of your choice (e. g. +Z) by clicking in the appropriate input field. 3 Click on Test Drive To The Selected Clearance Plane. The CMM moves to the clearance plane.
!
hss
Caution The probe will always first travel out in the direction of the +Z-axis, before the CMM drives it in the selected direction (e.g. +X). 4 If necessary redefine the value. 5 Click on OK to accept these values. The Update Clearance Plane Settings for Defined Features? message is displayed.
4-76
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
6 Click on YES if you want to update the clearance planes for all defined features, or on NO if you want to retain the original clearance planes. You will find more information on updating clearance planes in Clearance Planesin the Calypso Online Help.
How to Close Edges

When you close an edge of the clearance planes in this way you prohibit the CMM from moving along the edge. It is advisable to close edges if You have positioned more than one workpiece on the table, or the clamping device could cause a collision at an edge. Under these circumstances closing edges can prevent collisions without the need to change the size of the clearance planes. To close edges: 1 Select CNC Navigation Block edges. The Block Edges dialog box appears on the screen.
check box for blocking an edge
NOTE
hss
The bottom edges (the edges of the face on the table) are always closed. The -Y or +Y edge is also closed if the measuring machine is of the gantry type. You cannot revoke these settings. 2 Select the check boxes for the edges you want to close. 3 Click on OK. The edges you selected are closed with immediate effect.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-77
Edit Measurement Plan Settings

The measurement plan settings define how actual values, target values and results are presented. The settings are based on the scales and units of measure of various geometrical features and are always saved together with the current measurement plan. These settings are edited in the Measurement Plan Settings dialog box:
You can view and edit settings for the entire measurement plan or for individual features. You will find more information on the Measurement Plan Settings dialog box in in the Calypso Online Help.
How to Edit Measurement Plan Settings

To check and/or change the settings: 1 To open the settings for the entire measurement plan: In the list of prerequisites, click on the Measurement Plan Settings button, or In the list of features, mark No feature and select Prerequisites Measurement Plan Settings.
4-78
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Edit Measurement Plan Settings
2 To open the settings for a single feature: Mark the entry in the list of features and select Prerequisites Measurement Plan Settings. The Measurement Plan Settings dialog box appears on the screen. It shows the default output settings for the available features (or for the feature you marked in the list, as applicable). Be sure to check all settings at the global radio buttons Position, Angle and Size. 3 If you want to change the setting for a feature, open the picklist of the feature in question in the Mode column and select Change. This activates the radio buttons on the right-hand side of the window. 4 Make all the necessary changes. 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you have made all your changes. 6 Click on OK. The settings are saved and the window is closed. This dialog box is fully described in Measurement Plan Settings in the Calypso Online Help.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-79

The Settings Editor provides you with a quick and easy way of checking and, if necessary, changing important measurement plan settings. You can choose whether to apply your changes to the entire measurement plan (global) or to selected features only. There are two separate editors, one for features and one for characteristics:
Settings Editor for Features
Use this editor to check and, if necessary, change settings for features. The settings in question are primarily those relating to clearances in a CNC run. For more information see Measurement Plan Editor Features in the Calypso Online Help.
Settings Editor for Characteristics
Use this editor to regulate how characteristics are output in the custom printout and define whether characteristics are to be executed in the CNC run. For more information see Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics in the Calypso Online Help.
4-80
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Temperature Compensation
You can configure Calypso to consider the temperature-related expansion/contraction of the workpiece and the X, Y and Z scales of the CMM when taking the measurements. Temperature compensation is of great significance for precision of the measurements, since the nominal values are generally based on a workpiece and ambient temperature of 20 C, and the different materials expand/contract to different degrees as the temperature varies. Therefore, the expansion/contraction must be compensated in accordance with the respective material, if the workpiece cannot be brought to the reference temperature. Calypso receives the information about the temperature, depending on your CMM's equipment, from sensors on the scales or temperature sensors on the workpiece, through probing with a temperature probe or simply manually entering the temperature value. In any case, you must enter the coefficients of expansion for the workpiece materials directly. Most manuals on materials science give the coefficients of expansion. The table below shows the coefficients of expansion for some common materials: Material Aluminum (2024-T3) Aluminum (6061-T6) Aluminum (7079-T6) Cast Iron Copper Magnesium (HK31A-H24) Nickel Steel (AISI C1020) Steel (AISI 304) Steel, Carbon Titanium (B 120VCA)
NOTE
hss
Coefficient (micrometers/C) 22.7 24.3 24.7 11.7 16.6 25.2 13.0 15.1 17.8 11.3 9.4
Since the coefficient of expansion depends on the alloy, the values may vary slightly from one table to another.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-81
Thermal plate bending
Differences in temperature above and below the granite plate of a CMM can cause a slight curvature of the plate. In high-precision CMMs, the thermal plate bending effect is also compensated. The compensation for thermal plate bending of the measuring table is automatically activated as soon as Calypso calculates the temperature compensation for the CMM scales. In this case, the plate will be simulated by a beam model.
How does Calypso learn the coefficients of expansion?

The coefficients of expansion must always be entered manually if the workpiece material doesn't change, just once per measurement plan (How to Enter Temperatures Manually on page 4-88).
Same workpiece from different materials
If you use multiple materials to manufacture the same part, for example a cast-iron version and an aluminum version, you have two options: Create two measurement plans that are identical except for the coefficients of expansion for temperature compensation. Use the same measurement plan for both versions, but always remember to enter the coefficient of expansion for the respective material before starting a new series.
How does Calypso learn the temperatures?

There are three ways for Calypso learn the actual temperatures: The CMM has temperature sensors on the scales in the X, Y and Z directions or on the workpiece. In this case, you need only start the temperature compensation (How to Activate Temperature Compensation on page 4-82). Have the CMM do a temperature probing of the workpiece (only on CMMs with a VAST probe). To do so, you must configure the temperature probing (How to Automatically Configure the Temperature Probing (CNC) on page 4-85). The CMM has neither a temperature sensor nor temperature probe. In this case, enter the temperature(s) of the workpiece or scales that you measured or determined yourself (How to Enter Temperatures Manually on page 4-88).
How to Activate Temperature Compensation

If the temperature of the workpiece to be measured or the room temperature is not 20 C (68 F), you can only measure accurately with temperature compensation activated.
4-82
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
To activate temperature compensation: 1 Click on the Temperature Compensation button. The Temperature Compensation dialog box appears on the screen.
2 To activate temperature compensation, select the Temperature Compensation check box. The check box Temperature Probing ON/OFF will now appear in the dialog box. 3 Under Workpiece click in the entry field Coefficient and enter the applicable coefficient of expansion for the workpiece. 4 Click on OK to confirm. Once you have activated temperature compensation, the following are true: If your CMM has automatic temperature sensors, the measured temperatures will be used automatically to correct the measurements. If your CMM does not have automatic temperature sensors, then, before you run a measurement plan, Calypso will automatically display the Temperature Compensation window. You can then perform or configure a temperature probing or enter the measured temperatures yourself.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-83
How to Determine the Temperatures by Manual Probing

If your CMM is equipped with the VAST probe head and a probe with temperature sensor (temperature probe), you can use Calypso to determine the precise workpiece temperature by probing. To do so, proceed as follows: 1 Click on the Temperature Compensation button. The Temperature Compensation dialog box appears on the screen. 2 Select Temperature Compensation on/off, followed by the Temperature Probing on/off check box as well (if the temperature probe has already been selected, both check boxes are selected automatically). The prompt Probe with temperature sensor at one or several workpiece points! will appear. 3 If the temperature probe has not yet been selected: select it now. 4 If the temperature probe has not yet been qualified: qualify it now by probing the reference sphere once in line with the shaft. For the temperature probing, you only need a coarse, not a highly precise qualification of the probe (Qualifying Styli on page 4-21). To do this, select the Manual mode and, under Geometry, the option Temperature Probe. 5 Probe the workpiece with the temperature probe. In a temperature measurement, the probe travels until it detects contact with the workpiece and then another 3 mm against the measuring force. After the first probing, an entry called Temperature Probing will appear in the list of features. 6 Probe other points on the workpiece. After each probing, the temperature and the location of the point will be determined and displayed. The data regarding the location of the points will be stored in the technology list for the Temperature Probing feature. This can be edited (How to Automatically Configure the Temperature Probing (CNC) on page 4-85). The measured temperatures will be determined and displayed in the Temperature Compensation window.
4-84
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
7 Click on OK to confirm. Calypso calculates the average of all of the measured temperatures and enters this value in the Temperature Compensation window. This value will be used (instead of the temperature from any possibly present temperature sensor) for the temperature compensation for the workpiece. All of the measured temperatures and the calculated average will be included in the printed work report.
How to Automatically Configure the Temperature Probing (CNC)

If your CMM does not have temperature sensors, but is equipped with the VAST probe head and a probe with a temperature sensor (temperature probe), you can let the system perform a Temperature Probing automatically in the CNC run.
Temperature probing at the beginning of a run
If automatic temperature probing is enabled (How to Activate Temperature Compensation on page 4-82), Calypso will begin probing the appropriate points on the workpiece with the temperature probe at the start of the CNC run (in other words before the CNC alignment) and will thus determine the temperature of the workpiece to a high degree of precision. The simplest way to add a Temperature Probing feature to the measurement plan is to perform a manual temperature probing (How to Determine the Temperatures by Manual Probing on page 4-84). A Temperature Probing entry with the probed points will be automatically added to the list of features. The Temperature Probing feature added to the measurement plan can be edited like any other feature, for example, if necessary, you can change the point probed. You can also copy or delete it. In this manner, you can add several temperature probed points to a measurement plan.
Add Temperature Probing feature
NOTE
hss
At the beginning of a CNC run, the system will only perform the Temperature Probing feature that is entered in the Temperature Compensation window under Feature. How to configure the temperature probing in a measurement plan: 1 Click on the Temperature Compensation button. The Temperature Compensation dialog box appears on the screen.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-85
2 Select Temperature Compensation on/off, followed by the Temperature Probing on /off check box as well (if the temperature probe has already been selected, both check boxes are selected automatically). The prompt Probe with temperature sensor at one or several workpiece points! will appear. 3 Cancel and click on the Switch to Feature Menu button next to Feature. The Selection window will open. In contrast to the usual window for selecting features, this one only lists the Temperature Probing features. (If the measurement plan does not yet contain any Temperature Probing features, the option New will be preset and the Edit check box will be selected.)
4 To activate the desired Temperature Probing feature, mark it and confirm with OK. The selected feature will now be shown in the Temperature Compensation window under Feature.
4-86
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5 To edit a specific Temperature Probing feature, mark it, select the Edit check box and confirm with OK. The definition template for the Temperature Probing feature will open and you can begin editing.
To define the probing strategy, click on the Strategy button and specify the probing method in Strategy window. Here you can define a list of points, preset probing and intermediate points, define CMM steps with and without probing and insert programmed halts. Furthermore, you can edit the Clearance Data. With OK, you will be returned to the definition template 6 Click OK to confirm your changes. The selected and edited Temperature Probing feature appears under Feature in the Temperature Compensation window.
Temperature probing in a CNC run
In a CNC run, the temperature probing will start automatically at the beginning in accordance with the selected feature. After the measurement, Calypso calculates the average of all of the measured temperatures and enters this value in the Temperature Compensation window. This value will then be used (instead of the temperature from any possibly present temperature sensor) for the temperature compensation for the workpiece.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-87
All of the measured temperatures and the calculated average will be included in the printed work report.
How to Enter Temperatures Manually

If the temperatures displayed in the Temperature Compensation dialog box are correct, simply click on OK. If not, before starting the measurement plan, enter the correct temperatures.
NOTE
hss
While the measurement plan is running, you cannot change the temperature values. To enter the temperatures manually: 1 Click on the Temperature Compensation button. The Temperature Compensation dialog box appears on the screen.
2 If the temperature of the part is not 20 C (68 F), click in the Temperature input field under Workpiece and change it to reflect the parts actual temperature. 3 If the workpiece is now made of a different material, click under Workpiece in the Coefficient input field and enter the correct coefficient of expansion for the workpiece.
4-88
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4 If the temperature in the room which contains the CMM is not exactly 20 C (68 F), click on the Scales fields and enter the temperatures from the X, Y and Z scales. (The coefficients of expansion for the scales are already known to Calypso.) The compensation values are calculated automatically and displayed. 5 Click OK to confirm your changes.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4-89
4-90
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5
5
61212-2010102
Chapter
.................................................................................................................................
Defining Features
When it is time to define features, you begin by probing points manually. Calypso's automatic feature recognition function determines the geometry that mathematically best fits the measured probing points. Calypso also rounds off the actual measured values in an attempt to suggest nominal values. These nominal values can easily be altered if required. You can thus adopt the exact values from the engineering drawing, or you can enter values yourself in order to define the nominal dimensions of an existing pattern (reverse engineering).

Defining Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Details on Specific Part Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Linking Features in Constructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 Defining a Measurement Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62 Path Generation Automatically Measuring Features . . . . . . . . . 5-68
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5- 1
Defining Features
Defining Features
Features are set by a certain pattern. Details on every feature (e.g. how many probing points does a cone need?) can be found in Details on Specific Part Features on page 5-15
What is a feature?
A feature is a regular geometric element or an element that is defined in a different manner, that is to be measured by the CMM. Features contain the nominal geometry, which is used for the purpose of evaluating the size, shape and position. The features are assigned to the associated characteristics. The features are defined in definition templates which contain the nominal and actual values as well as various measuring possibilities. Basically, you have several ways to define a feature. The alternative that is selected will depend on the measuring task you wish to execute with Calypso. How to Define Features Using Automatic Feature Recognition on page 5-5. Use Calypso's automatic feature recognition and probe the feature with the CMM directly on the workpiece. Calypso will recognize the geometry of the probed feature and will fill the appropriate definition template. This procedure is recommended in most cases. How to Define a Feature Using Definition Templates on page 5-4. Insert a feature into the measurement plan first and then continue work with the definition template. This enables you to use the possibilities for measuring in the definition template (e.g. scanning procedure). This possibility is also quite useful if you have already devised a measurement plan or if programming is to be effected away from the machine. Importing Features from CAD Files on page 5-6. Import an existing CAD file and extract its features into your measurement plan. This possibility is also useful if you want to program away from the machine. In addition to the above-mentioned possibilities for defining the feature, you also have the option of defining constructions constructed theoretical features that cannot be probed by the CMM. A feature such as this consists of features which have already been defined, e.g. an intersection of two features (see Linking Features in Constructions on page 5-39).
Defining features
5-2
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Defining Features
Another way to define features is by DMIS import. If you have purchased this option, you can import runs programmed in DMIS to Calypso and thereby create a regular Calypso measurement plan with features (see Chapter 13 DMIS Import (Option) on page 13-1). During your work, if you forget which features you assigned to which characteristic, you can check the usage of each feature with Calypso. Use the Check use of selected Features command which you can find in the pop-up menu in the list of features. This opens a list of all characteristics associated with the feature in question.
The Definition Template for Features

A definition template offers you the following editing possibilities: Enter comments. Develop a measurement strategy. Restrict the degree of freedom for coordinates. Change clearance groups. Change the mode for nominal value definition. Assign a different part alignment. Define characteristics for tolerance. For more information see Definition Template (Features) in the Calypso Online Help.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-3
Defining Features
The appearance of the definition template in the Features window will depend on the features that have been selected. This illustration shows the definition template for the Plane feature.
How to Define a Feature Using Definition Templates

When you define a feature, a definition template will be displayed in the measurement plan area. This template is always displayed: When Calypso recognizes a feature automatically When you choose an element from a menu or a toolbox and double-click it When you edit a feature When you define a feature for your part alignment. To copy the feature into the measurement plan and then probe it: 1 Click on the Features button to view features in the measurement plan area.
5-4
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Defining Features
2 Select the required feature in the submenu Features or under Features Additional Features. The feature appears in the measurement plan. 3 Double click on the feature to open its definition template. Calypso is ready to recorrd measured values. 4 Probe the feature. The values that are determined by Calypso are automatically entered in the corresponding fields of the definition template. If you do not wish to probe a feature manually, Calypso can take care of this for you. (See Path Generation Automatically Measuring Features on page 5-68.)
How to Define Features Using Automatic Feature Recognition

In the case of automatic feature recognition, the geometric element is simply probed on your workpiece. Calypso enters the recognized feature in the list of features and opens the definition template. The definition template offers you several options for working with the feature (see The Definition Template for Features on page 5-3). 1 Click on the Features button to view features in the measurement plan area. (The features used for the definition of the base alignment should already be displayed.) 2 Select the stylus you want to use for probing, if the correct stylus is not already illuminated on the control panel of the CMM. 3 Using the joysticks, move the stylus to the feature and probe the first point. Example: If the feature is a sloping plane on the side of a workpiece, move with the X/Y joystick over one corner of this plane and then probe in the Z direction. Once you have probed the point, Calypso will show the feature Point 1 in the template for the feature definition. (For detailed information on the features template see How to Define a Feature Using Definition Templates on page 5-4.) 4 Probe the next point. Example: On a sloping plane, move over another corner of the plane and probe again in the Z direction. In the template, Calypso will update the feature to a 2-D line.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-5
Defining Features
5 Probe the number of additional points required to define the feature in question (at least 3 points for a plane, for example; 5 points for a cylinder, and so on). Example: On a sloping plane, move to the remaining two corner points and probe each in the Z direction. Make sure that the points are not on the same line. (Because of this you should move the probe a little in the X and Y directions.) Calypso recognizes the plane this way and displays it in the evaluation field. 6 If Calypso does not recognize the right feature, you can choose it manually from the features in the CAD Entities picklist.
!
hss
Caution You cannot change the type of geometry feature subsequently. 7 Click on OK to confirm your choice. You now have defined a feature to be measured on the workpiece (in addition to those already defined for the part alignment). To define additional features for this workpiece, repeat the same steps. When adopting this normal procedure, Calypso will automatically recognize which feature you wish to measure.
Importing Features from CAD Files

The data for a workpiece is frequently available in the form of a CAD file. As well as loading and displaying the CAD model, Calypso also enables you to extract all recognizable features from the file. A large part of a measurement plan can therefore be created directly from a CAD file (see also How to Define a Measurement Plan from a CAD file in the Online Help).
Precondition
Calypso can convert CAD files with the following filename extensions: Extension .sat .exp .prt .igs .vda .dxf .stp Creating Program ACIS (standard) CATIA (optional) Pro-E (optional) / Unigraphics (optional) IGES (optional) VDAFS (optional) CAD systems such as AutoCAD and Caddy, etc. STEP (optional)
5-6
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Defining Features
Procedure
Perform the following steps: load a CAD file, define the parameters of the global measurement strategy (optional), and extract the features.
NOTE
hss
If you have loaded 2D data (e.g. from IGES, VDA or DXF format), you will have to define the third coordinate manually either by entering an offset in the Modify CAD Model dialog box or subsequently by changing the nominal geometry.
How to Load a CAD File

Before you can load a CAD file, a measurement plan must be open. Note that elements are added to the measurement plan when the CAD file is loaded and the features are extracted - in other words, the measurement plan is expanded.
!
hss
Caution The model originally shown in the CAD window is deleted when you load a CAD file. To load a CAD file: 1 Open a new measurement plan. (See How to Create a New Measurement Plan on page 4-3 or How to Open an Existing Measurement Plan on page 4-4.) 2 Select CAD CAD File Load. The Open CAD File dialog box appears on the screen.
3 Select the CAD file of your choice and click on Open. The file will be loaded. If you are loading an IGES file, the progress of the data conversion will be shown in a window. The model will then be shown in the CAD window.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-7
Defining Features
NOTE
hss
When converting an IGES file, a logfile with information on the converted features that are contained in the file will be created. Select CAD Logfile IGES to display this file. Once the model has appeared in the CAD window, you will be able to include the features in the measurement plan. You might want to edit the CAD file beforehand: see Working with the CAD Window on page 3-1 You will find more information under Working with CAD Data in the online Help. You can now proceed to specify metrology parameters.
How to Specify Metrology Parameters for the CAD Features to be Loaded

Before extracting features from an open CAD file, you can specify the strategy Calypso will subsequently employ to measure the features in question. The procedure for specifying the parameters is as follows: 1 Select CAD Filter Set Default Measurement Strategy. The Technology Defaults dialog box appears on the screen.
5-8
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Defining Features
2 Activate the check box of the feature for which you want to specify the parameters and then click on the Settings button. The appropriate strategy dialog box opens: 3 One after the other, double-click on each list entry for which you wish to make strategy settings. Alternatively, you can select the entry and click on the magnifier. The appropriate definition dialog box opens. 4 Close each definition dialog box again by clicking on OK. 5 When you have finished defining the strategy, click OK. 6 Repeat steps 2 to 5 for all other types of feature that you want to assign. Once you start a run using the imported features, Calypso will generate the features in accordance with the settings that have just been defined.
How to Extract Features from the CAD Model

Extraction is the process by which Calypso detects the regular geometric features in the CAD model, as well as the features defined in a different manner, and adds them to the list of features. To do this, it will be necessary to load a CAD file and, if necessary, define the measurement strategy (see General Settings for the Path Generation Method on page 5-70). The procedure for defining features with the CAD model is as follows:
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-9
Defining Features
1 Select CAD Filter All Features (or alternatively, planes, circles, cylinders, cones or points only, as applicable). The features are displayed in the measurement plan area in a separate window (example: test cube):
2 Select Edit Select All or highlight the individual features you want to insert into your measurement plan.
!
hss
Caution Calypso assigns the stylus currently activated on the control panel or via the CAD window to all features. 3 Click on Apply. The features are extracted and transferred to the measurement plan. This can take a few seconds to complete. 4 When transfer is completed, confirm by clicking on OK. You have now transferred the features defined in the CAD file to your measurement plan. You can edit the individual features in the usual way.
5-10
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Defining Features
Bear the following in mind: You must define the probing points if there are none defined in the strategy list of the feature. You can do this with the CMM or using only the CAD window (you will find more information in the Online Help under How to Define a Probing Point in the CAD Window). Calypso assigns all features the same stylus. You will have to assign a more suitable stylus for some features, in other words, one with which the CMM can probe the features in question (see). Editing a Measurement Plan on page 7-19
How to Import Features from the CAD Model to the Measurement Plan
You can import complete features from the CAD model displayed on the screen into the measurement plan. To do so, use the menu options from the Selection list on the CAD toolbar. 1 To import a plane, cylinder or cone into the measurement plan: Select Extract Features from the menu. Click on the required feature in the CAD view The element is highlighted and immediately added to the list of features. 2 To define a single point: Select Define a Space Point from the menu and click on the point of your choice on the surface of the CAD model. The point is now defined. 3 To define a line on a plane: Select Define Line on a Plane. Click on a point on the line you want to define. Use the mouse to drag the line. The line is shown on the screen. 4 To define two mutually opposite space points: Select Distance check. Click on a point on the model. The two space points and the connection between them are shown at the selected position on the screen. With the aid of these two points, you can check the wall thickness or the material deviation at the place in question, for example. 5 To define a circle on a cylinder: Select Define Circle on a Cylinder.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-11
Defining Features
Click on a point on the cylinder in question. The circle is shown at the corresponding level on the screen. 6 To define a probing point: Open the feature in question. Click on Strategy and select the appropriate stylus. Select Define Points. Click on the probing point of your choice on the surface of the CAD model. The probing point is now defined.
Copying Properties of Features

You can copy certain properties of a feature and assign them to one or more other features. This means that the information in question has to be defined only once, while at the same time you can be sure that the common properties are exactly the same for all the features concerned. The following are the properties you can copy to all features: Coordinate system Clearance plane Probe Stylus (only if different styli were not used for the points of the feature) Retract distance Clearance distance The following are the properties you can copy only to like features: Projection plane (if defined) Evaluation settings Measurement strategy (measured features only) Like features are features of the same kind (e. g. circle, cylinder) having nominals defined in the same way (e. g. by recall).
How to Copy Properties of a Feature to Other Features

The procedure for copying properties of a feature to other features is as follows: 1 Click on the feature from which you want to copy properties.
5-12
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Defining Features
2 Click on the Transfer Format button in the upper menu bar. The Copy Properties from <Feature_name> dialog box appears on the screen. All the check boxes are activated by default.
3 Deactivate the check boxes of the properties that you do not want to copy to other features. 4 Highlight the feature or features to which you want to copy the properties. Press and hold down the Shift or Ctrl key if you want to highlight more than one feature. 5 Click on OK. Copying is started.
Color-Coding of Features Buttons

When a feature is listed in the measurement plan area, the background color of its button tells you its status: Light gray (same as measurement plan area): The feature has not been fully defined. Dark gray: The feature has been fully defined. Green / red: The feature has been defined and measured results have been gathered.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-13
Defining Features
Tips and Tricks for Defining Features

You can cancel the definition of a feature at any time, even while probing is in progress: Click on Reset and then click on OK. You can restart the definition of a feature at any time, even while probing is in progress: Click on Reset and then repeat probing. If the CAD image of the parts features is not fully on the screen or is not displayed at all, the image may have been zoomed or shifted in the CAD window. Click on the Fit button to resize the model to fit into the CAD window. If the feature does not seem to be properly defined but you have clicked OK to save it, you can delete it from the measurement plan and then define it again. See How to Delete Features or Characteristics on page 7-11. If you want to change the order in which features are displayed, you can easily move a feature to new location. Click on the feature (either its button or its name) and hold the left mouse button down, then drag the feature to a new location. If the probing point you used is unsuitable, you can delete it by clicking on the Undo last probing button (or pressing F3 on the standard control panel). If you want to delete a probing point defined some time in the past, proceed as described in the section entitled How to Use the Shortcut Menu of the Strategy List on page 5-63. Probing or position points can be added to a feature at any time. First, open the definition template of the feature. To add a probing point, probe the point with the CMM. The point is added automatically. If you want to add an intermediate position, you must check that the original stylus is activated. Move the probe to the appropriate position, then press the button on the right-hand joystick to accept the position or click on the Position CMM without probing symbol in the strategy window.
5-14
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Details on Specific Part Features

Basics of probing
When you define features, two basic rules apply to probing: Produce as large a measurement basis as possible. If, for example, you define the face of a cube as a plane, probe close to the corners of the workpiece. Probe as many points as possible (taking into account the time within which you want the CNC run to complete). This is particularly important when you record and evaluate shapes on a workpiece.
Inside or outside feature?
In most instances, Calypso can identify the feature as an inside or outside feature from the probing direction. You also have the option of defining a feature as an inside or outside feature. However, always bear in mind that this affects the combination of the travel paths and the calculation of the tangential features. You define a feature as an inside or outside feature in its definition template. The left button shown here is for an inside feature, while the right button is for an outside feature.
Correcting the probe tip radius
The measured value of a measurement sent to the CMM is always the center coordinates of the probe tip. The coordinates of a measured value, therefore, always differ from those of the contact point the measured value you want at the time of measurement by the radius of the probe tip.
probing direction
probing radius desired measured value
measured value
Calypso automatically corrects the measured value, so you always receive the coordinates of the actual contact point. There may be a residual error despite this correction, but you can usually prevent this.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-15
Defining Features
The Point
Menu: Features Point Use the Point feature to determine the coordinates of individual points on the workpiece, in order to size the workpiece, for example.
Probing strategy
You can measure a point anywhere on a surface.
probing direction
measured value correction
To obtain the right correction for the stylus radius for normal vector directions which are non-parallel to the coordinate system, it is possible to switch to the space point procedure by clicking on Evaluation in the definition template. In case of an unknown normal vector direction, the correction will be automatically defined.
Output
Click on the Output button to open the Evaluation dialog box in which you can enter details relating to the conversion and correction of the measured values. Under Space Point Mode you can now select the manner in which the point is to be calculated:
Mode Touch Point
Type of correction/conversion Radius correction in the direction of a coordinate system axis corresponding to the probing direction. Here, probing is effected in a coordinate axis direction; otherwise the radius correction will be effected in the direction of the coordinate axis which is closest to the probing direction. (default setting) Radius correction in normal vector direction.
Plane Point
5-16
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Mode Space Point
Type of correction/conversion Radius correction in normal vector direction, followed by projection on the normal of the nominal point. The radius (length of the tripod) used to measure the normal can be set using the menu point Radius for space point normal measurement in the Measurement Plan Editor - Features. Radius correction in normal vector direction, followed by projection on the coordinate system axis which corresponds to the reference axis of the nominal plane. The corrections which are made for the respective point type are shown in the diagram.
Net Point
Probing direction
z
Nominal outline
Nominal normal Vector Actual normal Vector 4 3 1
Actual outline
Nominal point 1 2 3 4
x
Touch Point Plane Point Space Point Net Point
The Circle
Menu: Features Circle Using the Circle feature, you can probe bores, plugs and shafts with a circular cross section or workpiece parts with arcs. You can project the circle or arc on any measured plane. Calypso uses the probed points to compute the circle or arc which best fits the probing points. The start angle W and the partial angle TW (for an arc) are specifed in the definition template.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-17
Defining Features
Probing strategy
The minimum number of points is 3. The probing points should be on a section perpendicular to the axis of the circle you want to measure. It is advisable to probe at least 4 points. Make sure that all the points you probe are at approximately the same height. If the height differences between the individual points are excessive, Calypso will compute a cylinder instead of a circle. If this happens, you can reconstruct a circle manually in the Geometry menu. The origin of the features local coordinate system is in the center of the measured circle (not in a projection plane of the coordinate system).
Feature's local coordinate system
origin of LA
Greater Accuracy in Circle Measurement (Basics of Gage Correction Qualification)

Gage correction qualification is a method by which Calypso can measure circles to a very high degree of precision and at very high scanning speed. Calypso must first record the bending parameters of the probe. When a circle or arc is subsequently measured, you can instruct Calypso to correct the result by applying the bending parameters.
Preconditions
The preconditions for recording and correcting bending parameters are as follows: A new measurement plan for the reference workpiece is open and you have defined the clearance planes. How to Create a New Measurement Plan on page 4-3 Defining the Clearance Planes on page 4-72 You know how to start a CNC run. Defining the Scope of Measurement on page 8-2 The circle is measured on the same primary plane of the workpiece coordinate system as was used in recording the bending parameters.
5-18
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
How to Record the Bending Parameters

In order to record the bending parameters, you need a workpiece with a reference bore or a reference plug. The bore or plug must be of known diameter.
NOTE
hss
The bending parameters have no effect unless you have installed a measuring probe head. The plug or bore is measured as a full circle in a separate measurement plan. To record the bending parameters: 1 Position the base alignment in the center of the reference bore or plug. 2 Select the Gage Correction Qualification utility by selecting Prerequisites Utilities Gage Correction Qualification. Calypso adds the icon for gage correection qualification to the list of features. 3 Double-click to open the definition template. 4 Enter the calibrated diameter of the bore or the plug in field D. 5 Select the scanning method for the circle: Click on Strategy. Click on the Full Circle button. In the list, double-click on Circle Auto Path. This opens the dialog box where you define the scanning speed. 6 Enter the scanning speed in the Speed field. 7 Click on OK to close all dialog boxes Click Yes at the prompt shown below.
8 Perform a CNC run of the measurement plan so that Calypso can measure the bending parameters. Once Calypso knows the bending parameters of the probe, it will be possible to correct future measurement results of full circles and arcs in a corresponding manner (see How to Apply the Bending Parameters)
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-19
Defining Features
How to Apply the Bending Parameters

You can use the definition template of the circle to have all future full circles and arcs corrected with the bending parameters. To activate correction by application of the bending parameters: 1 Open the definition template of the circle to which you want to apply the bending parameters. 2 Click on the Output button. The Evaluation (Feature) dialog box appears on the screen.
3 Activate the Gage Correction check box. 4 Click on OK to close the Evaluation dialog box. 5 Click on OK to save the settings and close the definition template. The next time you measure a circle, the measuring results are corrected by the bending parameters. Optimal accuracy values are achieved when the diameter, measuring location and scanning speed are as close as possible to the values of the bending parameter definition.
The Plane
Menu: Features Plane Use the Plane feature to probe plane surfaces of the workpiece the position or inclination of which you want to determine. Calypso computes the plane from the points which you probe. In the definition template the computed length and width of the plane are displayed along with the coordinates of the probing points.
5-20
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Probing strategy Automatic feature recognition
Probe at least 3 points. Take care to spread the points as evenly as possible over the plane. If the points are all in a line (an arc of minimal curvature), Calypso will compute a line instead of a plane. If this happens you can reconstruct a plane manually in the Geometry menu. This illustration shows the positions of the projected angles W1 and W2.
projection into the Z/X plane normal
spatial view Z
Result output
A1=0
plane
surface normal
projection into the Z/Y plane
example plane
A2
normal
plane Y
The origin of the features local coordinate system depends on the position of the plane relative to the axes of the coordinate system: Bottom left for a viewing position in +X, -Y and +Z. Bottom right for a viewing position in -X, +Y and -Z.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-21
Defining Features
The illustration below is an example showing how this applies to 5 planes of a cube.
Z Y X
origin of the respective LA
The 2-D Line

Menu: Features 2-D Line The 2-D Line feature is primarily for probing lines and straights on any plane on the surface of the workpiece. Calypso computes a meanvalue line through the points you probe.
Types of representation
The 2-D Line can be defined and represented in two different ways: with X, Y and Z values for the start and end points of the line, with one point (X, Y, Z) of the line, the specified length and the projected angles W1 and W2. You can toggle between the two types of representation in the Feature representation dialog box, which you can open from the Prerequisites or via Prerequisites Feature representation.
Probing strategy Automatic feature recognition
Probe at least two points (three are recommended, however). Make sure that all the probing points are roughly in line. Otherwise, Calypso will compute a plane instead of a line. If this happens, you can open the CAD Entities menu and regenerate the feature as a line.
5-22
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
The origin of the local coordinate system for the feature is at the first point on the line which defines the line fully when first registered in these examples points 1, 4 and point 3.
3
or
1
or
Result output
After measurement, the following results are output in the definition template and in the printout. Result X, Y, Z W1 (Z/X) Meaning Coordinates of the origin of the coordinate system Projected angle 1. Projection in this case is in the X/Z plane; the reference axis is X. In the printout the projected angles are referenced to the position of the feature In the definition template the projected angles are referenced to the position of the features plane normal (the 2D-line corresponds to a reduced plane). W2 (Y/X) Projected angle 2. Projection in this case is in the X/Y plane, the reference axis is X. In the printout the projected angles are referenced to the position of the feature In the definition template the projected angles are referenced to the position of the features plane normal Sigma Min/Max Form Scatter referenced to the best-fit computed feature Minimum and maximum deviation, referenced to the best-fit computed feature Difference between minimum and maximum deviation, referenced to the best-fit feature.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-23
Defining Features
The illustration below shows the positions of projected angles W1 and W2 for a straight line on a cube. The reference axis is always the coordinate axis with which the projected angles are both less than 45 in this case the X-axis.
projection into the X/Y plane
spatial view Z
A1 X
example line
projection into the X/Z plane
A2
The 3-D Line

Menu: Features 3-D Line A 3-D line cannot be measured: it is computed from a recall of at least two features. You can, for example, employ a 3-D line to represent the axis of a shaft by using several circles for the purpose of definition. Open the Nominal Definition picklist and select Recall. This opens the Selection dialog box and you can select the features of your choice. The resulting 3-D line is placed through the center point of the selected features.
5-24
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
The Cylinder
Menu: Features Cylinder You can use the Cylinder feature to probe bores, plugs and shafts. As opposed to the circle, a cylinder yields information about height and depth as well.
Probing strategy
You must probe at least five points in order to identify a form as a cylinder: 1 Probe a circle first, i.e. at least the first three points on a section perpendicular to the cylinder axis. The axis of this section will be the provisional cylinder axis. 2 Probe at least two more points on another section perpendicular to the axis of the first section. Calypso computes the data of the cylinder from the circular sections at the different levels. The axis of the cylinder is computed perpendicularly through the centers of the two circular sections. If you probe nine or more points, there is no need for a probing strategy.
If geometrical error is excessive for a cylinder, Calypso computes a cone instead of a cylinder. This also happens if the two circular sections are too close together. If this happens, you can reconstruct a cylinder manually in the Geometry menu.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-25
Defining Features
Result output
The illustration shows the positions of the projected angles W1 and W2.
Z projection into the Z/X plane
spatial view Z
X A1
example cylinder
Z projection into the Z/Y plane
Y A2
The origin of the features local coordinate system is on the plane with the lowest probing point (not on a projection plane of the coordinate system).
5-26
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
The Cone
Menu: Features Cone Use the Cone feature to probe the location and position of inside and outside cones, the direction of the cone axis and the cones taper angle.
Probing strategy
You must probe at least 6 points in order to identify a form as a cone. 1 Measure three points on a circular section parallel to the axis of the cone. 2 Move the CMM to another height. 3 Measure three points at this height. 4 Measure other sections, as in steps 2 and 3. Calypso computes the data of the cone from the circular sections on the different planes. The axis of the cylinder is computed perpendicularly through the centers of the circular sections. If you probe nine or more points, there is no need for a probing strategy.
If cone angle Wk is very small, Calypso might compute a cylinder instead of a cone. The measurement uncertainty for the cone axis will be too high if the height difference between the circular sections is very small, and Calypso might compute a circle instead of a cone. If this happens you can reconstruct a cone manually in the Geometry menu.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-27
Defining Features
Result output
The illustration shows the positions of the projected angles W1 and W2. In this example, the reference axis is -Z.
Z projection into the Z/X plane
spatial view Z
X
Y
A1
example cone
Z projection into the Z/Y plane
Y A2
The origin of the features local coordinate system is in the center of the circle of smaller diameter. The direction of the axis is from the smaller toward the larger circle.
The Sphere
Menu: Features Sphere Calypso uses the Sphere feature to compute the diameter and the center coordinates of a sphere, spherical cap or spherical zone.
5-28
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Probing strategy
Probe at least 4 points distributed as uniformly as possible over the surface of the sphere. If the probe configuration and sphere position allow this, it is best to probe from different directions. The first two points should be probed near the sphere's pole and the remaining points along the equator of the sphere. If you fail to probe the points in the recommended manner, Calypso will not automatically recognize a sphere. If this happens you can reconstruct a sphere manually in the Geometry menu. There are no projected angles for a sphere. D represents the diameter of the sphere.
Result output
The Curve
Menu: Features Curve You can use the Curve feature to measure planar sections of bodies and lift curves (planar curves on the face of a cylinder). This feature is extremely versatile and consequently, it is described in a separate section (see Curve Measurement (Option) on page 15-1). Bear in mind that this feature is not included in the normal Calypso scope of supply and must be obtained as an option.
The 3D Curve
Menu: Features 3d Curve You can use the 3d Curve feature to measure freeform surfaces. This feature is extremely versatile and consequently, it is described in a separate section (see Curve Measurement (Option) on page 15-1). Bear in mind that this feature is not included in the normal Calypso scope of supply and must be obtained as an option.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-29
Defining Features
The Ellipse
Menu: Features Additional Features Ellipse You can use the Ellipse feature to probe bores, plugs and shafts having axes not parallel with an axis of the base alignment, as well as true ellipses. Bear in mind that automatic feature recognition is not available for ellipses. The ellipse can be defined in two different ways: by specifying the center (with X, Y and Z) and the two diameters D (major diameter) and D2 (minor diameter), by specifying the two focal points (with X1, Y1, Z1 and X2, Y2, Z2) and one of the two diameters (diameter D and note indicating whether this is the larger diameter). You can toggle between the two types of representation in the Feature representation dialog box, which you can open from the Prerequisites or via Prerequisites Feature representation. In the definition template, the angles W1 and W2 indicate the position of the ellipse in relation to the respective plane (X in XY plane, Y in YZ plane and Z in ZX plane). If the defining specifications (second type of representation) do not produce an actual ellipse, the second diameter is set to 0 and the ellipse is no longer shown.
Probing strategy
Probe at least 5 points in a planar section. Distribute the points as uniformly as possible around the circumference of the section.
5-30
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Result output
The following illustrations show the definition of the minor diameter D2 and the major diameter D, as well as the location of the focal points.
D2
M (X, Y, Z)
Dgro
Dklein
(X1, Y1, Z1)
(X2, Y2, Z2)
Automatic feature recognition Feature's local coordinate system
An ellipse is not recognized automatically by Calypso. Begin by adding the feature to the measurement plan and then take probings. The origin of the features local coordinate system is in the center of the ellipse. It is not projected on a plane of the coordinate system.
The Slot
Menu: Features Additional Features Slot You can use the Slot feature to probe the length, width, depth and position of slots. Bear in mind that automatic feature recognition is not available for slots.
Probing strategy
Probe at least 5 points. Make sure that all points are spaced as uniformly as possible over the sides of the slot. 1 Begin by probing 2 points on one side of the slot. 2 Probe a point at the apex of a curve.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-31
Defining Features
3 Probe a point on the other side of the slot. 4 Probe a point at the apex of the second curve.
2 3 4
1 5
You can distribute other probing points as you wish.

Automatic feature recognition Feature's local coordinate system
A slot is not recognized automatically by Calypso. Begin by adding the feature to the measurement plan and then take probings. The origin of the features local coordinate system is in the slots center of gravity.
The Rectangle
Menu: Features Additional Features Rectangle You can use the Rectangle feature to probe the length, width, depth and position of all elements of hollow rectangular geometry.
Probing strategy
Probe at least 6 points. Make sure that all points are spaced as uniformly as possible over the sides of the rectangle. Probe at least two points for each side of the rectangle. You must enter the value for the depth of the rectangular hollow manually in the Length field. A rectangle is not recognized automatically by Calypso. Begin by adding the feature to the measurement plan and then take probings.
The Offset Plane

Menu: Features Additional Features Offset Plane You can use the Offset Plane feature to define from three datum points a plane which does not actually exist on your workpiece. You can offset the reference points at will along the probing direction. Bear in mind that automatic feature recognition is not available for offset planes.
5-32
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Probing strategy
You must probe no more and no less than three points and then enter the offsets: 1 Probe the 3 points. 2 Click on the Output button. 3 In the Point Modification group, click on the Edit button. The Point Offset dialog box appears on the screen.
4 Enter an offset for each point you want to modify. The points are offset along the probing direction. 5 Close the dialog box to accept the modified settings.
An offset plane is not recognized automatically by Calypso. Begin by adding the feature to the measurement plan and then take probings.
The Symmetry Point

Menu: Features Additional Features Symmetry Point You can use the Symmetry Point feature to have Calypso compute a point which is symmetrical with two probing points. Calypso computes the coordinates of the symmetry point and displays the distance between the two points.
Probing strategy
You must probe no more and no less than two points in order to compute a symmetry point. 1 Open the definition template. 2 Probe the first point. 3 Probe the second point from the opposite direction. 4 Close the definition template.
Automatic feature recognition Result output
Calypso automatically recognizes a symmetry point. Calypso computes the coordinates and the normal vector of the symmetry point and the distance between the original two probing points.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-33
Defining Features
The Radius Point

Menu: Features Additional Features Radius Point Using the features Radius, Sphere and Angle Points, you can select the applicable radius correction in different situations with singlepoint measurements in order to define the point of contact correctly. The Radius Point feature is intended for probing cylindrical elements. The measured value is corrected in the measuring plane towards the connecting line between the center of the probe tip and the specified center point.
Measuring plane R
Cylinder axis
Perform the following steps to measure a radius point: 1 Open the definition template. 2 Specify a point on the cylinder axis and the vector of the cylinder axis. 3 Probe a point. The actual radius and the coordinates of the probing point are read out in the definition template.
A radius point is not detected automatically by Calypso. First, insert the feature in the measurement plan, define a center point and then perform probing.
The Sphere Point

Menu: Features Additional Features Sphere Point Using the features Radius, Sphere and Angle Points, you can select the applicable radius correction in different situations with singlepoint measurements in order to define the point of contact correctly.
5-34
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
With the Sphere Point, the measured value is corrected towards the connecting line between the center of the probe tip and the specified center. The sphere point is intended for probing sphere surfaces. Use the radius point for cylindrical features. Perform the following steps to measure a sphere point: 1 Open the definition template. 2 Enter the coordinates for the sphere center point and the desired radius in the Center Point column. 3 Probe a point. The actual radius of the sphere, the vector from the sphere center point to the probing point and the coordinates of the probing point are read out in the definition template.
Example of application
Using the Sphere Point feature, you can define the radius of a sphere with a single probing and specification of the sphere center point.
pre-defined center of circle
Calypso cannot automatically detect a sphere point. First, insert the feature in the measurement plan, define the sphere center point and then perform probing.
The Angle Point

Menu: Features Additional Features Angle Point Using the features Radius, Sphere and Angle Points, you can select the appropriate radius correction in different situations with singlepoint measurements in order to define the point of contact correctly. With the angle point, the measured value is corrected towards the normal for the probed plane.
Probing strategy
To measure an angle point, you must specify a reference plane through the plane origin, a space axis and an angle and then probe exactly one point. The actual angle of the probed plane and the coordinates of the probing point are read out in the definition template.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-35
Defining Features
Perform the following steps to measure an angle point: 1 Open the definition template. 2 Enter the values for the for the location of the plane origin in the left column. 3 Select how you want the reference plane to lie by specifying a space axis and an angle. 4 Probe a point on the plane that has to be measured.
Using the Angle Point feature, you can compute the angle between two planes, for example, by a probing. Specify one plane first. Calypso computes the second plane from a probing and the origin of the specified plane. Remember that automatic feature recognition is not available for the angle point.
A origin of planes
Calypso cannot automatically recognize an angle point. First, insert the feature in the measurement plan, define the plane origin and then perform the probing.
The General Surface

Menu: Features Additional Features General Surface The General Surface feature was integrated in Calypso to allow runs programmed in DMIS to be imported to Calypso. The General Surface corresponds to the DMIS feature FEAT/GSURF. For the evaluation of a General Surface, a mathematically defined freeform surface is not computed in order to obtain the result of a nominal-actual comparison between two surfaces. The General Surface feature is merely a container for a set of points belonging to a surface.
Particularities
Each point of a General Surface is therefore probed, measured and processed individually. Each point possesses its own strategy and resources.
5-36
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
The entries in the strategy list are thus structured as trees in the Strategy dialog box. The associated clearance data and technology information can be found under each entry of a point. If no feature or technology is selected, clicking on the probing point icon will produce a new point here.
NOTE
hss
The actual values of individual points are shown neither in the definition template nor in the point list; they appear only in the printouts and protocols (default printout, compact protocol and custom printout). Nominal input and the definition as a theoretical feature are options for the nominal definition. A change in the nominal definition refers to all associated points of the General Surface. You can add a nominal point to the General Surface by clicking on the desired position of the CAD model in the CAD window (the definition template must be open when you do this). You can add a point to the General Surface by probing with the CMM. Calypso cannot automatically recognize a General Surface. Enter the feature in the measurement plan before probing.
Nominal definition
Point from CAD model
Point by probing Automatic feature recognition
The General Curve

Menu: Features Additional Features General Curve The General Curve feature was integrated in Calypso to allow runs programmed in DMIS to be imported to Calypso.
Particularities
The General Curve feature corresponds to the DMIS feature FEAT/GCURVE. No mathematically defined curve shape is computed from splines in the evaluation of a General Curve to obtain the result of the nominal-actual comparison of two curved lines. The General Curve feature is merely a container for a set of points belonging to a curve. Each point of a General Curve is therefore probed, measured and processed individually. Each point possesses its own strategy and resources. The entries in the strategy list are thus structured as trees in the Strategy dialog box. The associated clearance data and technology information can be found under each entry of a point. If no feature or technology is selected, clicking on the probing point icon will produce a new point here.
Strategy
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-37
Defining Features
The points may be in any spatial location. The actual values result after projection of the data onto a plane specified in the definition template of the General Curve (with X, Y, Z, NX, NY, NZ).
NOTE
hss
The actual values of individual points are shown neither in the definition template nor in the point list; they appear only in the printouts and protocols (default printout, compact protocol and custom printout). Nominal input and the definition as a theoretical feature are options for the nominal definition. A change in the nominal definition refers to all associated points of the General Curve. You can add a nominal point to the General Curve by clicking on the desired position of the CAD model in the CAD window (the definition template must be open when you do this). You can add a point to the General Curve by probing . Calypso cannot automatically recognize a General Curve. Enter the feature in the measurement plan before probing.
Nominal definition
Point from CAD model
Point by probing Automatic feature recognition
5-38
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Linking Features in Constructions

Constructions are constructed features which cannot be probed directly on a workpiece, e.g. the center of a bore or the intersection of two features. Calypso can, however, mathematically construct regular geometric features and, in this way, define the feature you require. As constructions cannot be probed, automatic feature recognition is not available here. In the measurement plan, a construction is indicated by the blue border around the icon. Calypso supports a total of 12 different constructions: The Intersection on page 5-42 The Perpendicular on page 5-53 The Symmetry on page 5-54 The Projection on page 5-55 Average-Feature Construction on page 5-56 The Edge Point on page 5-56 Cone Addition Construction on page 5-57 The Maximum Coordinate on page 5-59 The Minimum Coordinate on page 5-59 The Maximum Result on page 5-59 The Minimum Result on page 5-60 The Plane with Offset on page 5-60
How to Define Constructions

The procedure for defining a construction is very similar to that for defining a feature: 1 Add the construction of your choice to the measurement plan by selecting it in the Construct menu. 2 Double-click on the icon of the construction or select it and click on the Magnifier icon. This opens the definition template of the construction. 3 Use the Feature buttons to select the features for which the construction is required. 4 Click on OK to confirm your choice. The features you selected are now interlinked in a construction.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-39
Defining Features
Defining Features by Recalling

The recall is a special type of construction. You can use a recall to derive a new feature from one or more features in a common coordinate system.
Let us suppose you have measured four circles. You would now like to learn the circle in which the center points of the measured circles are located. To this end, define a new circle from the recalled center points of the four measured circles.
circle 2
resulting pitch circle r
circle1
circle3
circle4
How to Define a Point or a Feature by Recall

You can recall the reference point (the origin of the features local coordinate system) of an element or the element as a whole. Perform the following steps to define a point or a complete element by a recall: 1 Open the definition template of the geometric element that you require to be created by a recall. 2 Select one of the recall types from the Nominal Definition list: Recall with this type you define a new feature from previously defined features, with each recalled feature providing its reference point (the origin of its features local coordinate system). Thus two circles define a straight line that goes through both their center points. Recall One Feature in this way you recall the whole selected element (possibly transformed into a different coordinate system) and derive from it a new feature of identical geometry. You then see the select window with the features.
5-40
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
3 Select the feature or features you require press the Ctrl or shift key if necessary and click on OK. The reference point or points and the feature are accepted.
How to Recall Points with Area Specification

Points recall supports the recall of any previously defined points of other features to evaluate them in a different manner. You can recall individual points, single paths, specific areas (specified in coordinates or angles) or the complete feature. Perform the following steps to define a point or a complete element by a point recall: 1 Open the definition template of the geometric element that you require to be created by a recall. 2 From the Nominal Definition list, select the Recall Points recall type. The features available to you are displayed in the Recall Points window:
The list contains all the potential features for the points recall. When the Recall Points dialog box opens, two more buttons appear at the upper right of the toolbar.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-41
Defining Features
There are now two options: 3 To recall all points from one or several features into the new feature: Select the feature or features you require press the Ctrl or shift key if necessary and confirm with OK. 4 To recall certain points from a single feature into the new feature: In the list, select the feature with the points from which (or with some of the points from which) the new feature is to be produced. Click on this icon to display the measured points of the feature in the CAD window with crosses. Click on this icon and, using the mouse, drag a rectangle around the points of your choice. Click on OK. The points are included in the new feature.
The Intersection
Menu: Construction Intersection With the Intersection construction, you can intersect straight lines, planes, circles, cylinders, spheres and cones with each other and have tangents computed. To do this, you enter the two characteristics and obtain one or more results. Depending on which characteristic you entered first, not all options are available to you for the second one.
Intersection with wall or axis?
If you select an axial element, such as a cylinder or cone, for the intersection, Calypso assumes that you want to intersect the axis of the element with a different element. If, however, you want to intersect the section surface of the element instead of the axis of the axial element, you must select the Wall check box in the definition template of the intersection. Depending on the intersection, one to four results are showed in the Result Selection group of the definition template, and you select the intersection result you want to proceed with.
Automatic correction
With this construction, Calypso supplies results even when the objects do not intersect geometrically but a meaningful, different interpretation (for example, tangent) is possible. When a cylinder or cone intersects a plane, Calypso performs automatic corrections under certain circumstances the plane is interpreted as vertical or parallel (refer to Intersection of a plane with a cylinder on page 5-49 and Intersection of a plane with a cone on page 5-50).
5-42
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
When rotationally symmetrical three dimensional surfaces intersect, Calypso performs automatic corrections under certain circumstances the surfaces are interpreted as concentric or coaxial.
Interpretation of results
The following sections describe the different intersections and their results.
Intersection of a straight line with a straight line

The straight lines can be located in any part plane. However, they must not be parallel or antiparallel.
Line 1
Inters ection
Line 2
Calypso delivers four points as results. If you select the Spatial option in the definition template, you obtain as the intersection the center of the perpendicular between the two straight lines - the point closest to the two straight lines. If both straight lines are in one plane, this point coincides with the actual intersection of the two straight lines. If you select one of the other results in the definition template, you obtain in each case the intersection of the projections of the two straight lines to one of the three part coordinate system planes.
Intersection of a plane with a plane

The normals of the two planes must not be parallel or antiparallel.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-43
Defining Features
The result computed by Calypso is the spatially defined intersection line. The point of the computed intersection lines that is closest to the origin is used as the origin of the features local coordinate system (reference point) of the intersection lines.
Intersection of a circle with a circle

Both circles must lie in one plane. A distinction must be made here between two possibilities: Two intersections are present.
intersection 1
intersection 2
In the Result Selection group of the definition template, specify the intersection you require as the result: Result 1 for intersection 1 and Result 2 for intersection 2. If just one intersection is present because the circles are touching, two identical points are read out. There is no intersection between the circles.
center
Calypso cannot compute a result in this case.
5-44
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Intersection of a straight line with a circle

The straight line and the normal of the circle must not be parallel or antiparallel. This means that the projection of the straight line into the plane of the circle is again a straight line.
L ine
Circle P1 P rojection line
P2
Calypso calculates as a result the intersections of the projected straight lines with the circle. If the straight line only touches the circle and does not intersect it, two identical points are determined. Differentiation has to be made between the following two possibilities: Two intersections are present.
intersection 1
intersection 2
In the Result Selection group of the definition template, specify the intersection you require as the result: Result 1 for intersection 1 and Result 2 for intersection 2.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-45
Defining Features
There is no intersection between the (projected) straight line and the circle.
Perpendicular Lotfupunkt
Calypso cannot compute a result in this case.
Intersection of a straight line with a sphere

Calypso computes as a result the intersections of the straight line with the sphere. If the projected straight line only touches the sphere and does not intersect it, two identical points are determined.
If computation is not possible, an error message is issued.
Intersection of a straight line with a plane

The straight line and the normal of the plane must not be perpendicular to each other.
penetration point
5-46
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Calypso computes as a result the piercing point of the straight line through the plane.
Intersection of a straight line with cylinder

The straight line and the cylinder axis must not be parallel or antiparallel.
If the check box Wall has been activated, Calypso will calculate: the piercing points of the line through the cylinder wall otherwise: the intersection point of the line with the axis of the cylinder.
Intersection of a straight line with a cone

If the check box Wall has been activated, Calypso will calculate: the piercing points of the line through the wall of the cone
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-47
Defining Features
otherwise: the intersection point of the line with the axis of the cone.
Intersection of a plane with a circle

The normals of the plane and of the circle must not be parallel or antiparallel.
Calypso computes as a result the intersections of the circular line with the plane. If computation is not possible, an error message is issued.
5-48
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Intersection of a plane with a sphere

Calypso computes as a result the intersecton circle of the sphere with the plane.
Intersection of a plane with a cylinder

If the check box Wall has been activated, Calypso will calculate: a circle otherwise: an intersection point.
z, k
K E
In the case of a wall intersection, Calypso will not create the exact mathematical ellipse as the intersected entity but will automatically adjust this to form a circle if the plane does not deviate too greatly from the perpendicular position, i.e. if the angle between the normals of the plane and the axis of the cylinder is less than 45. In this case, the circle - the center point of which represents the intersection point of the cylinder axis with the section plane - which intersects the cylinder vertically will be calculated. No intersection is measured in all other cases.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-49
Defining Features
Intersection of a plane with a cone

If the check box Wall has been activated, Calypso will calculate: a circle otherwise: an intersection point.
E E
Here, Calypso will not create the exact mathematical ellipse as the intersected entity but will automatically adjust this to form a circle if the plane does not deviate too greatly from the regular position, i.e. if the angle between the normals of the plane and the axis of the cone is less than 45. In this case, the circle - the center point of which represents the intersection point of the cone axis with the section plane - which intersects the cone vertically will be calculated. No intersection is measured in all other cases.
Intersection of a sphere with a cylinder

The intersection of the sphere and the cylinder is the intersection of a sphere of identical size whose center point is the projection of the sphere center point to the cylinder axis.
5-50
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
The distance between the center point of the sphere and the cylinder axis must be less than half the cylinder radius.
Intersection of a sphere with a cone

The intersection of the sphere and the cone is the intersection of a sphere of identical size whose center point is the projection of the sphere center point to the cone axis.
The distance between the sphere center point and the cone axis must be less than half the radius of the theoretical resulting circle. No intersection is determined in all other cases.
Intersection of a sphere with a sphere
Calypso computes the exact intersection circle of the two spheres.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-51
Defining Features
Intersection of a cone with a cylinder

If the check box Wall has been activated, Calypso will calculate: the intersection of the cylinder with the projected cone this is a cone of the same tapen angle, the point of which is the projection of the cone point on the cylinder axis and the axis of which runs parallel to the cylinder axis. The angle between the (actual) cone axis and the cylinder axis must not be greater than 45. The distance between the intersection of the cone axis and the theoretical resulting circle must be less than half the radius of the theoretical resulting circle. No intersection is determined in all other cases. otherwise: the intersection point of the two axes. The same conditions apply here as for the intersection of two lines.
Intersection of a cone with a cone

The intersection of a cone with another cone is generated in the following manner: The cone with the blunter opening angle is set coaxially to the other cone, the tip of the new cone results as the projection of the old tip to the cone axis of the cone having the more pointed opening angle. The circle resulting from this is generated as the intersection of the two cones. A condition for this is that the angle between the two cone axes is smaller than 45. The distance between the axis of the blunter cone and the plane of the theoretical resultant circle and the center point of the circle must be less than half the radius of the circle.
S spitz
S stumpf
h R K
5-52
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
The two cones can lie parallel or antiparallel to each other. Calypso computes the intersection circle in both cases.
The Perpendicular
Menu: Construction Perpendicular Using the Perpendicular construction, you can have Calypso compute the shortest distance between two features.
Feature 1
With Feature 1 in the definition template, define the point from which the perpendicular will be struck. You can select any feature to be feature 1. The following table shows which coordinates are used by potential characteristics: Feature 1 Point (probing) Circle Straight line Plane Using Coordinates Coordinates of probing point Coordinates of center point Coordinates of the origin of the local coordinate system Coordinates of the origin of the local coordinate system
Feature 2
With Feature 2 in the definition template, set the direction of the template. The perpendicular is vertical on Feature 2. Therefore, Feature 2 must be a spatially defined element. The following is read out as the result of the computation:
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-53
Defining Features
The straight line on which the perpendicular is located by the specification of two projection angles. You can modify the reference to the projection angles at Spatial axis. The length (distance) of the perpendicular. The calculated distance of the perpendicular is the distance of the point in Feature 1 to Feature 2.
The Symmetry
Menu: Construction Symmetry You can use the Symmetry construction to determine a symmetry feature between your selected Feature 1 and Feature 2. You can then use the symmetry feature obtained in this way freely in other constructions.
Feature 1 Feature 2 Interpretation of results
You can select any feature as Feature 1. You can select any feature as Feature 2. The computed symmetry feature is output in the form of coordinates common to the two features. The examples below will facilitate interpretation of the results: Symmetry point of two circles
symmetry point
Calypso computes the coordinates of the symmetry point.
5-54
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Symmetry plane of two planes
As the result, Calypso computes the position, length and width of the symmetry plane on which the symmetry point from the two start points of the two planes is located. Symmetry axis of two lines
line1
line2
symmetry axis
As the result, Calypso computes the coordinates of the symmetry axis on which the symmetry point from the two start points of the two lines is located.
The Projection
Menu: Construction Projection You can use the Projection construction to determine the position of a feature projected onto another feature (e.g. the position of a point projected onto a plane).
Feature 1 Feature 2
Define the feature you want to project as Feature 1. Specify as Feature 2 the feature onto which you want Feature 1 projected.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-55
Defining Features
Result output depends on the feature which results from the projection. The examples below will facilitate interpretation of the results: Projection of a circle onto a plane The projection of a circle onto a plane transposes the circle perpendicularly to the plane until it is on the plane. Calypso computes the coordinates of the center of the circle on the plane. Projection of a cylinder onto a plane Projection of a cylinder onto a plane produces a straight line formed by the two end points of the cylinders axis on the plane. Calypso computes the two projected angles and the coordinates of the origin of the local coordinate system. A special case is a cylinder normal to the projection plane: in this case projection produces a point on the plane. Calypso computes the coordinates of the point on the plane.
Average-Feature Construction
Menu: Construction Average-Feature Using the Average-Feature construction, you can have Calypso calculate the average value of several measurement results. The features from which the results originate must all be of the same kind (e.g. only cylinders).
Feature selection Picklist
Click on the Feature Selection button to select the features for whose measured values you want to compute the average. In the picklist, define the characteristic (radius, angle, ...) for which you want the average computed. The list contains all the main characteristics.
The Edge Point

Menu: Construction Edge Point Use the Edge Point construction to have Calypso compute a corner between two features. This corner is the intersection of two imaginary extensions of the two features.
Feature 1
Point (generally a space point) is the only feature you can use as the first feature. The spatial axis of this first point defines the first plane on which the edge point will be situated. This plane must intersect with the plane of feature 2.
5-56
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Feature 2
Point (generally a space point) is the only feature you can select as the second feature. The spatial axis of this second point defines the second plane on which the edge point will be situated. This plane must intersect with the plane of feature 1. You can specify a plane or a point as feature 3. If you specify a point, this point also defines a plane via the normal. The edge point is computed as the intersection of this plane with the intersection of plane 1 and plane 2. Calypso computes the coordinates of the edge point. The example below illustrates how an edge point is computed for two planes in order to yield the coordinates of the imaginary corner. The third plane here is the drawing plane.
element 1 contour point
Feature 3
element 2
If the third plane is not defined, the edge point is defined centered between element 1 and element 2 (element 1 and element 2 usually differ at least slightly in height).
Cone Addition Construction

Menu: Construction Cone Addition Calypso uses the Cone Addition construction to compute the following data for the Cone feature: Diameter Definition: The diameter of the cone at the defined height. Position Definition: The cone height at a defined diameter.
Feature Diameter definition
The only feature you can select is a cone, because cone additions are computed exclusively for cones. If you have selected the option Diameter Definition, you can either enter the height directly or determine this indirectly using another feature. Calypso will require that you make the following entries: At L: Enter height L, the height at which the diameter should be calculated, and enter the reference point of the height entered under Referenced To:
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-57
Defining Features
Height L can be referenced to the Cone Origin.
cone axis cone origin reference plane
Height L will be measured from the cone origin (the intersection point of the cone axis with the surface area closest to the cone center). Height L can be referenced to the Part alignment.
cone axis L workpiece system cone origin
Here, the coordinate axis which lies closest to the cone axis will be computed first. The diameter will be output on the point of the cone axis for which the coordinates on this axis are equal to L. Or At: If you do not wish to enter the height directly, you can use this button to determine a feature that (if necessary, using the intersection point with the cone axis) defines the height of the required diameter. Only the Point, 2-D Line and Plane features are suitable here.
Position definition
If you have selected the option Position Definition, you can either enter the appropriate diameter or determine the required height indirectly using another feature. Calypso will require that you make the following entries: At D: Directly enter the diameter for which the appropriate height should be calculated. Or At: If you do not enter a diameter, you can use this button to determine a feature to indirectly determine the height at which the position will be defined. Only the Circle, Circle on Cone, Cylinder, Cone and Ellipse features are suitable here.
5-58
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Calypso will either calculate a specific diameter or a specific height on the cone depending on what you have selected.
The Maximum Coordinate

Menu: Construction Maximum Coordinate You can use the Maximum Coordinates construction to have Calypso compute the coordinates of the point at which positive deviation in feature geometry is at its maximum. You can reference the deviation to the features actual geometry or its nominal geometry.
Feature 1 Interpretation of results
Click on the Feature 1 button to open the Selection dialog box, where you can select a regular geometrical feature of your choice. Calypso computes the coordinates of the point where positive deviation is at maximum.
The Minimum Coordinate

Menu: Construction Minimum Coordinate You can use the Minimum Coordinates construction to have Calypso compute the coordinates of the point at which negative deviation in feature geometry is at its maximum. You can reference the deviation to the features actual geometry or its nominal geometry.
Feature 1 Interpretation of results
Click on the Feature 1 button to open the Selection dialog box, where you can select a regular geometrical feature of your choice. As a result, Calypso calculates the coordinates of the point having the largest negative deviation.
The Maximum Result

Menu: Construction Maximum Result You can use the Maximum Result construction to have Calypso determine which is the largest in a group of similar features.
Click on the Feature Selection button to open the Selection dialog box, where you can select the features you want to have compared. From the picklist, select the characteristic (radius, angle...) of the selected features for which you want the maximum computed. The list contains all the main characteristics. Calypso computes the maximum for the characteristic you selected and displays the feature in question in the CAD window.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-59
Defining Features
For example, you can ascertain which cylinder in a group of three has the largest diameter.
The Minimum Result

Menu: Construction Minimum Result You can use the Minimum Result construction to have Calypso determine which is the smallest in a group of similar features.
Click on the Feature Selection button to open the Selection dialog box, where you can select the features you want to have compared. From the picklist, select the characteristic (radius, angle...) of the selected features for which you want the minimum computed. The list contains all the main characteristics. Calypso computes the minimum for the characteristic you selected and displays the feature in question in the CAD window. For example, you can ascertain which cylinder in a group of three has the smallest diameter.
The Plane with Offset

Menu: Construction Plane with Offset You can use the Plane with Offset construction to define a plane offset a certain amount above a reference plane.
Feature 1 Offset Interpretation of results
Planes are the only feature you can select. The plane you select here is the origin or reference plane for computing the plane with offset. In the input field Offset enter the value by which the offset plane should be offset compared to the plane selected in Feature 1. Calypso computes the coordinates of the plane with offset. Please note that the offset plane is usually a plane which does not really exist and, consequently, no probing points can be taken.
Additional Features Holos and Gear

You can add the Holos or Gear feature to the measurement plan with Features Additional Features Holos or Features Additional Features Gear or via the Toolbox of the Utilities page. In this manner, you can integrate any HOLOS or GEAR macro into a measurement plan and have it executed during the CNC run. The programmed macro is started by the CMM-OS during the CNC run.
5-60
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
You can add the Holos or GEAR utility to both the list of characteristics and the list of features. In this manner, the selected macros can be executed after either a characteristic or feature is run.
!
hss
Caution Before starting a measurement, either HOLOS or GEAR must have been started, otherwise the CNC run will be canceled.
Entries for HOLOS or GEAR
Enter the following in the definition template: the macro to be executed You can either enter the macro directly or by selecting it from a catalog. the coordinate system for the macro You can select a coordinate system in Calypso, which will be passed to HOLOS or GEAR. The manner in which the coordinate system will be used must be specified in HOLOS. a coordinate system from the macro You can receive a coordinate system from the macro and use it further in Calypso. To do so, enter the name under which the coordinate system should be used in Calypso.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-61
Defining Features
Defining a Measurement Strategy

The nature of the feature and the location of the measurement must be known before Calypso can perform a measurement with the CMM. In most instances that is enough, because when the measurement plan starts Calypso automatically performs the measurements required for the characteristics.
The term measurement strategy
Not infrequently, however, other decisions have to be made because of special considerations relating to measurement or the material, for example, or on account of other, specific requirements. The term measurement strategy describes all the additional definitions you make so that Calypso and the CMM can return an optimum measuring result. The measurement strategy derives from the measuring task as such: A measurement strategy refers only to the corresponding feature, not to an entire measurement plan.
Tasks
The tasks that defining a measurement strategy can involve are as follows: Select Utilities and insert in the strategy list (Stop, Position CMM without Probing, Change Prober, Clearance Data, etc.) Using Technology macros (single point mode) Selecting a Path generation method (See Path Generation Automatically Measuring Features on page 5-68.) Editing the Point list (See The Points List on page 5-64.) Editing the Probe routes (See Editing the Probe Routes on page 7-22.) Checking and editing Clearance data (See Checking the Routes on page 7-25.) You can take care of all these tasks in the Strategy dialog box that you open from within the definition template of the feature in question.
5-62
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
The diagram shows an example of the Strategy window with a Circle feature.
Generate Path Point list Single points/ scanning (paths) Technology macro Resources Edit technology
Strategy list
This dialog box is fully described in Strategy in the Calypso Online Help.
How to Use the Shortcut Menu of the Strategy List

The strategy list contains certain entries (e.g. probing points, used tools and scanning methods) for all the points and tasks that the Calypso should execute when measuring a feature (in the sense of the probe routes). To edit a list entry through the shortcut menu: 1 With the mouse, mark the list entry that you want to work on. 2 With the right mouse button, click on the list entry. The shortcut menu opens with the following options: Execute Now!: The CMM runs the list entry immediately. Make sure that the CMM can move freely. Copy: Copies the marked list entry. Cut: Removes the marked list entry from the list. Paste: Inserts a previously copied or cut element. Edit: Opens the window with the parameters for the list entry. This can also be done with a double click on the list entry.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-63
Defining Features
3 Click on the command of your choice. The command is executed.
The Points List

The points list contains the coordinates for all the points together with the normal vectors that have been collected for the feature. You can edit these coordinates and for example define optimal probe points. The illustration below shows an example of the Point List window with a plane measured at 4 points.
How to Change the Point List

In the point list you can change the stylus used for measuring and change the coordinates or the normal vectors of the probing points.
!
hss
Caution Be careful when changing the list, because the CMM goes to each point in the list as soon as you run the measurement plan. To display or change a point list of a feature: 1 Double-click on the feature to open its definition template, and click on the Strategy button. The window will open. 2 Click on the button with the icon for the point list.
5-64
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
3 To change a coordinate, click in the entry field shown and overwrite the old value. 4 Click on OK. The settings are accepted.
Alternative Probing Methods (Self-Centering Probing)

The probe head is usually unlocked only in the probing direction. This means that the probe head can move in one direction only, namely the direction corresponding to the movement of the joystick on the control panel.
probing direction
Z Y locking mechanism X
In this example, self-centering probing of the Vee-way necessitates cancellation of the lock in the X direction in order to avoid faulty probing.
probing direction
Z Y locking mechanism X
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-65
Defining Features
How to Activate Self-Centering Probing

NOTE
hss
Self-centering probing is an option only for measuring probe heads. To activate probe self centering: 1 If you want to activate this function for a particular feature: Highlight the feature in the measurement plan. Select Prerequisites Probe Self Centering. The Self-Centering Probing dialog box is opened. Skip to step 4. 2 If you want to activate only this function for individual probing points of the feature: Open the definition template of the feature. Click on the Strategy button. Highlight the probing point in the strategy list. Open the probing point by clicking on the magnifier or by double-clicking. Click on the Probe Self Centering button. The Self-Centering Probing dialog box is opened. Skip to step 4. 3 If you want to activate for all features of a measurement plan: Check that no features are highlighted in the measuring plan. Select Prerequisites Probe Self Centering. The Self-Centering Probing dialog box is opened.
5-66
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4 To activate probe self centering: Deactivate the left of the two check boxes Self-centering probing. Activate the right of the two check boxes Self-centering probing. 5 Set the parameters for self-centering probing. 6 Click OK to save the settings. The next time it probes, Calypso will use the settings you just activated.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-67
Defining Features
Path Generation Automatically Measuring Features

Unlike the probing of individual points, path generation procedures feature rapid multi-point measurement in a single operation. Path generation will help you arrive at optimum and highly accurate measuring results.
NOTE
hss
You must have qualified your probe with the Tensor setting in order to use path generation for scanning (see Installing and Qualifying Probes on page 4-10). The measurement strategy depends on a number of parameters, on the group of the characteristic (shape, position, size) through tolerance up to the stylus used. Calypso calculates from these parameters the starting parameters of the CMM, which lead to best possible compliance with the tolerance you demand. You only have to enter the minimum data. With path generation you can continuously record measuring points and generate paths from single points, if you have a CMM with measuring probe head. Or you can just generate a path from single points, if you have a CMM with switching probe head (pseudo scanning). Path generation is a macro which automatically measures a feature with set parameters, for example a certain number of surface lines or screws on a cylinder or cone. With this you can reach a high point density and thus adequate information about the workpiece surface. High point densities are the standard proof required and very accurate calculation of your features. To use a path generation method, follow these steps: Set the global settings for the evaluation of the characteristics groups in the System Set Up (you will find more information in the Online Help under How to Change the Measurement Parameters of the CMM). Enter the feature in the measurement plan and probe its geometry. Alternatively, you can load a feature from a CAD file. See Defining Features on page 5-2. Assign a path generation method. Check and/or change the settings of a path generation method. Assigning the path generation method is split into three steps: Adding the path generation method to the strategy list.
5-68
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Check/Change general settings. These settings are common to all path generation methods. Check/Set values for the path generation method. These settings are described separately because they depend on the chosen path generation method.
How to Add a Path Generation Method to the Strategy List

First, the path generation method has to be added to the strategy list of the feature, so it can be used when generating travel paths. To adopt a path generation method for a feature: 1 Make sure that the feature is part of the measurement plan and that the definition template is open. In the definition template you see the Strategy button. 2 Click on the Strategy button. The Strategy dialog box is opened.
Path Generation Methods
Strategy list
3 Choose the path mode. To change the setting click on the displayed button. (You have chosen path generation if the points are displayed connected.) 4 Click on the button for the path generation method you want.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-69
Defining Features
The path generation method is entered in the strategy list. At the same time, Calypso immediately generates the path from the single points if you choose it in Step 3.
General Settings for the Path Generation Method

You can now change general settings for the method separately from which path generation method is set for a feature. Calypso supplies default values for the fields in the dialog box for the chosen path generation method. The data comes from: the geometry data of the feature, the default values and the tolerances from the characteristics and the feature. If you have not defined any tolerances yet, you can do it in this section. Calypso calculates the parameters by the closest tolerance which you entered for testing the feature and the point density for the characteristics group (see Basics about Characteristics on page 6-2). A description for these parameters for each path generation method can be found in: Path Generation Methods for Circle, Cylinder and Cone on page 5-71 Path Generation Methods for Planes: the Polyline on page 5-73 Path Generation Methods for Planes: the Grid on page 5-75 Path Generation of Lines on page 5-76
5-70
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Path Generation Methods for Circle, Cylinder and Cone

The offered pages for entering the parameters for the path generation methods (for the features circle, cylinder, cone) do not differ from each other. In the following picture you see the input window for a circle segment.
Generating the path from the CAD model
You can extract the data for path generation straight from the CAD model. When you use this method the system returns a series of either start and end angles or start and end points. Open cylinders and cones are taken into account. Each new path is checked directly against the CAD model in order to identify material flaws, if any, and eliminate them from the path. The path can thus be generated with restrictions, or you may be able to generated different paths. (At this time the function is implemented only for the circle and arc.) If you make subsequent, manual changes to the data, Calypso does not recheck the information. This means that you have a great deal of latitude in defining paths.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-71
Defining Features
Entering formulas for path parameters
The entries for path generation can be parameterized. Click on the corresponding fields with the right mouse button and then select Formula in the popup menu. In the Formula dialog box, you can use the variables that are defined in the measurement plan to make formulas and enter PCM commands. The following entries can be parameterized. Scanning Speed Step Distance Start Angle (Input in decimal degrees) Angle Range (Input in decimal degrees!) Probe Stylus
Parameterizing single points and intermediate positions
Single probing points and intermediate positions can also be parameterized. Here, it will be necessary to define the basis system for the purpose of clarity. To do so, click on the PCM-Reference button in the List Of Points dialog box.
In the dialog box Reference system for PCM variable you can define which of the three relevant coordinate systems should be used a basis for the conversion of parameters to numerical values. This coordinate system will apply to all parameters of the feature that is currently open. All technological parameters of this feature will always be calculated on the basis of this coordinate system irrespective of the view that has been selected.
5-72
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Measuring range
The meanings of the terms measuring height and the resulting measurement range are explained by the illustration below:
Origin of local Element Coordinate System X
min. measuring height
Measuring range
max. measuring height
Path Generation Methods for Planes: the Polyline

The automatic measurement of a polyline is a valuable tool which helps you measure a track of lines, circle segments and full circles on planes. This helps you measure planes very easily that are strongly segmented or ruptured.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-73
Defining Features
You see the input window for the generation of polylines in the following picture.
Coordinates list
Mark frame
Make sure that you have entered a value for edge deviation in the system set up. Check this value by pressing on the Basic Settings button and then on the SCAN Limits tab.
How to Create a Polyline

To create a polyline: 1 Probe the points on the plane that you want to create the polyline from. You can do this with the CAD window (you will find more information in the Online Help under How to Define a Probing Point in the CAD Window) or the CMM. Each measuring point which you entered is displayed in the coordinate list (from bottom to top) in its X, Y and Z coordinates. Calypso connects these points with lines by default.
5-74
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
2 You always need three points if you want to create a circle segment or full circle from the collected points (start point, direction point and end point). The corresponding three points have to be displayed in the coordinates list. Use the Arrow buttons next to the Number field to do so. 3 Click on the circle segment icon or full circle icon, depending how you want to connect the points. The green border consists now encloses the three points from which the circle segment or full circle is calculated. You see the new connection in the CAD window. 4 Continue in this way with all following points. The order does not matter for this: You can probe new points at any time and/or choose/edit connection types between any points.
Path Generation Methods for Planes: the Grid

With the grid measurement, you can create a plane right down to very small sections. The input window for the path generation of planes with a grid can be seen in the figure below.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-75
Defining Features
Path Generation of Lines

With the path generation method for straight lines, a straight line is started whose points are already defined in the feature. Calypso does not need any more details for this, and you can merely see the parameters of the CMM and the tolerance in the input window of the path generation method. The input window for the generation of straight lines can be seen in the figure below.
How to Set Parameters for a Path Generation Method

To enter tolerances now and set general settings: 1 Double click on the corresponding entry in the strategy list to open the window for the path generation method. 2 Click on the Basic Settings button if you want to enter required point densities. You switch to the corresponding page in the system set up (you will find more information in the Online Help under How to Change the Measurement Parameters of the CMM).
5-76
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
3 If you have not defined any tolerances yet, enter them in the Expected Tolerance field for the feature. 4 Click on the Calculate button. Calypso runs the calculation with the parameters from the Settings group. The default scanning speed proposed by the system depends on the required accuracy. 5 Enter the number of the stylus in the Stylus field, which you want to use for the CMM path generation method. 6 Enter the values for the path generation method. See Path Generation Automatically Measuring Features on page 5-68. 7 Click on OK to save the settings and close the dialog box. You are returned to the Strategy window. 8 If you do not want to set any more path generation methods for this feature, click OK. Otherwise repeat the steps from Features you can Measure with Path Generation on page 5-77. The path generation method has now been fully defined and will be executed once a CNC run is initiated.
Features you can Measure with Path Generation

The available path generation methods are automatically offered with every relevant feature. The choice of a path generation method emerges from the required measuring tasks. The following path generation methods are available: Feature Line Icon Path Generation Method Line measurement
Plane
Polyline measurement
Grid measurement. The plane is acquired in a grid of user-definable pitch. Circle, Cylinder, Cone Four-Point Circle Macro. This measurement is semiautomatic. To execute this measurement, move the probe to the center of the circle (cylinder, cone) that is to be measured. Calypso takes 4 probings and calculates from these the values for the circle. Circle Auto Path Definition (Circle Auto Path Measurement). The start angle and angle range can be adjusted.
Circle
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5-77
Defining Features
Feature
Icon
Path Generation Method Helical Path (Helix Measurement). Suitable for special applications (threads). Gradient, number of turns, start angle and rotation direction can be adjusted.
Cylinder
2 Circle Auto Paths. Two circles are measured the first at the top of the cylinder and the second at the bottom of the cylinder. The measuring heights can be set individually. 1 Circle Auto Path. This intersection is measured at the center of the cylinder. The measuring height can be adjusted. Form lines. The number of surface lines is editable. Helical Path (Helix Measurement). Gradient, number of turns, start angle and rotation direction can be adjusted.
Sphere
Define Sphere Position. Calypso probes the sphere and in so doing defines the position of the sphere. The probing locations can not be influenced. In CNC runs, you will be requested to take manual probings. Sphere Macro. You can enter the sphere coverage for the area in which these probings are to be taken.
Cone
Circle part measuring: Two circles will be measured the first at the top of the cone and the second at the bottom of the cone. The measuring heights can be set individually. Layer measuring: One or more intersections will be measured between the surface area and coverage area of the cone. The number of intersections and their measuring heights can be adjusted.
Curve
Curve segment measuring: Only for the Curve option (see Curve Measurement (Option) on page 15-1). The segment to be measured is defined by three or more points: If you define three points, they represent start point, end point and direction of curvature (direction around circumference) of the curve segment, in that order. If you define more than three points, they represent a full circle; the first point defines the start point and the direction around of curvature is clockwise (from the top or outside).
5-78
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
6
6
61212-2010102
Chapter
.................................................................................................................................
The characteristics enable you to check the tolerance limits that your workpiece and its features should meet. You integrate the required characteristics in the measurement plan and link them with to the measured features. If those features are already defined, will be defined or maybe are to be imported from a CAD file later on, it makes no difference. Calypso supports any given order in which you define the features or characteristics of your measurement plan. You should be familiar with the basic concepts of Calypso before you proceed with this chapter. If you are not, you should read The Calypso User Desk on page 1-5 and Measurement plan-oriented Measuring with Calypso on page 1-9.

Basics about Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Calculation of Geometric Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Defining Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Details on Specific Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
6- 1
Basics about Characteristics

Once you have defined the features, you can set the characteristics for measuring the size (dimensions), form, position, and so on, of these features. In this way you can ascertain whether the features are within the limits you specified. You can also add a characteristic to the list of characteristics without immediately defining the associated feature. You can select the associated feature later when entering the settings for the characteristic. The characteristics are split into three groups (see table below). To evaluate these features, different point densities are required for each group, depending on which best fit method is used (see The Fit Methods on page 6-3 and in Online Help to check the settings under How to Change the Measurement Parameters of the CMM). Group Size elements Point Density Small Comment Normally these characteristics are rated by a small number of measuring points. It is recommended to use more points than required to also get a statement about the standard deviation (Sigma). For a function-oriented evaluation (peer measure evaluation) a higher number of points is required. These characteristics require a higher point density, because the position deviation overlaps the shape deviation of the measuring features. The evaluation of the characteristics needs a high point density on their measurement plane. Low-pass filtering of the measurement points is also recommended to minimize the influence of the surface roughness. You can add other special features to the list of characteristics. In this case, they are not actually characteristics, but they will be processed during the CNC run. For more information, please see The Utilities on page 6-9.
Location elements Form elements
Medium
High
6-2
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Calculation of Geometric Features

To understand and correctly interpret measuring results, you need to know how Calypso calculates the corresponding standard geometric feature from CMM's measured points. Using the entered measuring points Calypso calculates a computed feature. Mathematically, the computed feature is the feature which best fits the resulting measured values in terms of the standard geometery. The computed feature is the basis for the evaluation of the measuring results. Depending on the fit method used, the features determined in this manner can differ slightly from each other. Thus, there are also different deviations of the measured feature from the specified nominal feature. Therefore, the computed feature and the associated best fit method are fundamental for the accuracy of the Nom-Act Comparison, which is performed over the characteristics.
NOTE
hss
The optimal best fit methods are the default settings for the respective characteristic groups. This section shows and explains the advantages and disadvantages of the mathematical best fit methods. This means that for each measuring requirement that arises within the framework of a measuring strategy you can now select the Best Fit Method which is best suited to your individual requirements.
The Fit Methods

Calypso uses the following best fit methods: Gauss Tschebyscheff (minimum criterion) Calculation as circumscribed or inscribed feature Calculation as tangential element (outside/inside).
Specifying the fit method
In Calypso, you can specify which best fit method to use for which feature at two places: in the Evaluation dialog box, which you can access from the definition template for the respective feature using the Settings button.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
6-3
in the Evaluation dialog box, which you can access from the feature selection for the characteristic using the Settings button. The selected method will be used to calculate the characteristic when the data are evaluated. If you select Default, the fit method defined in the feature will be used. Not all fit methods are available, only those suitable for the selected feature (see Using the Fit Methods on page 6-6). You can view and change the parameters for the best-fit method in the system setup by selecting Extras Workroom Measurement. The current settings are on the Point Density tab.
Example
The following diagram shows the actual-shape of a scanned circle with the ideal geometric shapes. Those shapes result from the different best fit methods.
outlier
Gauss fitting-in Minimum fitting-in (Tschebyscheff) Hull Element Fitting-in element X Actual outline
As you can see in the diagram, depending on the used rectification method, there are different results for measuring sizes (e.g. example diameter), form deviation and position (e.g. center).
6-4
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Best fit According to Gauss

The Gauss best fit method calculates the average best fit element. From the calculated ideal outline and the actual probed outline, a sum of square distances is calculated. The minimum this sum results in the best fit element. That means a best fit according to Gauss is insensitive against outliers and forms a clear result by using limited calculating. If there is just a small amount of points, the Gauss method is always the standard evaluation method for measure, form and location testing.
Best Fit According to Tschebyscheff

The best fit according to Tschebyscheff calculates the geometric feature in a way that there is the smallest maximum deviation between calculated ideal outline and actual probed outline results. Therefore, the extreme values of the probing have an impact on the result of calculation. This makes this best fit method very susceptible for outliers. A high number of measured values can improve matters. It may, however, be advisable to eliminate outliers, depending on the measuring requirements (see How to Eliminate Outliers on page 6-31). Used for ISO 1101 shape testing.
Calculation as Circumscribed/Inscribed Feature

When calculating as circumscribed feature, the feature is as small as possible and positioned in such a way that no probing point is outside the feature. When calculating as inscribed feature, the feature is as large as possible and positioned in such a way that no probing point is inside the feature. This method is useful for pairing dimension evaluation and for evaluating the relating element on position tolerances. Requirement: Large number of points. Recommendation: Outlier elimination, because the circumscribed or inscribed feature can only be mapped on the basis of the extreme points.
Calculation as Tangential Feature

The tangential feature is the largest possible feature outside which no probing points of the feature are situated, or the smallest possible element inside which no probing points of the feature are situated. Requirement: Large number of points. Recommendation: Outlier elimination, because the tangential feature can only be mapped on the basis of the extreme points.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
6-5
Using the Fit Methods

For each feature, the table below shows the fit methods you can select for the feature. Element Gauss Minimum Circumscribed/ inscribed Tangential element
2-D line 3-D line Plane Circle Sphere Cylinder Cone Ellipse Rectangle Slot Point
6-6
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
To go from merely obtaining measurements to their evaluation, it is necessary to define the characteristics. This is performed as following: You integrate the characteristics into the measurement plan, a procedure for which you have three options: You can choose characteristics from the menu list of the User desk. You can choose characteristics from a toolbox of Calypso. You can define characteristics implicitly in the definition template of a feature. See the section entitled The Definition Template for Features on page 5-3 for a description of the check boxes of the Tolerance for: group. You assign the features to the characteristics, please see Connecting a Characteristic to a Feature on page 6-14. You can find more detailed information regarding the different characteristics in Details on Specific Characteristics on page 6-35.
How to Insert Characteristics into the Measurement Plan

To insert characteristics into a measurement plan: 1 Click on the Characteristics button to view the list of characteristics in the measurement plan area. 2 Choose the characteristic you want: To select the characteristic from the menu bar of the User Desk, click either on Size or Form and location and select the characteristic from the submenus. You can add other special features to the measurement plan using Prerequisites Utilities. To select the characteristic from a toolbox, open the toolbox. (How to Work with a Custom Toolbox on page 7-17.) Click on the characteristic and drag it into the measurement plan area. The selected characteristic is added to the list of characteristics. You can repeat these steps to add more characteristics or immediately link a feature to the inserted characteristic.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
6-7
The Characteristic Definition Templates

When you select a characteristic from the Size or Form and Location menu or from the toolbox, it will be listed in the measurement plan area. If you wish to assign features and select their tolerances, the corresponding definition template must be open.
NOTE
hss
The content of the characteristic definition template varies with the selected characteristic. There are three ways of opening a definition template: Mark the characteristic and click on the Open selected object button. Right-click on the characteristic to open the popup menu and then select Open. Double click on the icon of the characteristic. The template of this characteristic will open. Here, the fields for tolerance and actual value are shown. The buttons for the required links of this characteristic will still be shown as empty. Example:After you select and double click on the True Position characteristic, the following dialog box will appear on the screen:
6-8
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
The Utilities
In the Utilities group in the toolbox and in the menu under Prepare Utilities, you can find some special elements that, strictly speaking, are not characteristics but are required for the measurement plan run in certain circumstances: Alignment 3D Best Fit RPS Method P6 Method Stylus Qualification Gauge Correction Qualification (see Greater Accuracy in Circle Measurement (Basics of Gage Correction Qualification) on page 5-18) Erosion module (option) Textelement Save Alignment Load Alignment Delete Alignment Zero Base Alignment (see How to set a base alignment to zero on page 4-53) The utilities are described with the runs, characteristics and features for which they are needed. Only the following utilities are described here. Stylus Qualification Erosion Module Textelement Save Alignment Load Alignment Delete Alignment
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
6-9
The Stylus Qualification Utility

Use Prerequisites Utilities Stylus Qualification to add the Stylus Qualification utility to the measurement plan. The definition template for this utility corresponds to that of the Probe Qualification dialog box (this dialog box is fully described in Probe Qualification Window in the Calypso Online Help):
You can use this utility to qualify any defined stylus or probe configuration defined beforehand. Calypso automatically performs qualification during the CNC run of the measurement plan. If you use a probe changer, Calypso automatically uses the correct probe. Otherwise, you will be prompted to insert the probe.
6-10
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
The Erosion Module Utility

NOTE
hss
The Erosion Module is an option you can purchase and have enabled. You can add the Erosion Module utility to the measurement plan by selecting Prerequisites Utilities Erosion Module or via the Tool Box on the Utilities page.
The Erosion Module provides a file with translation and rotation modules for two related coordinate systems which is suitable for erosion machines. These coordinate systems refer on the one hand to the clamping device and to the erosion electrode on the other. Here, the coordinate system of the workpiece or tool (erosion electrode) (Xe, Ye, Ze) will be determined on the basis of the coordinate system of the clamping device (X, Y, Z). It will be necessary to enter the type of erosion machine that is being used along with the name of the file that will be created. During the CNC run, i.e. when measuring the feature, the coordinate systems will be formed - if this has not already been executed - and the parameter file of the Erosion Module will be saved on the hard disk or an a diskette.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
6-11
Once the Erosion Module has been executed, an ASCII file will be available in a format that can be used with the eroding machine. You can now determine the name and path of the file.
NOTE
hss
The directory path must be available. It is not created automatically.
The Textelement Utility

With Prerequisites Utilities Textelement or by using the Tool Box on the Utilities page you can enter the utility Textelement on the current page in the measurement plan. The Textelement utility appears with its symbol in the list of Characteristics. Double click to open a window which will allow you to enter a text.
In the case of a CNC run of the measurement plan, the text will be output in the printouts and protocols (the default printout, the compact protocol, and the custom printout). Here, only the text itself will be output. The name of the characteristic will not appear as a header (as is usual the case of characteristics. The text will only be written in the printouts and during CNC run and not when opening or closing the definition template (as is usual in the case of characteristics).
6-12
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Save Alignment
Calypso can save, load and delete alignments again during a CNC run. In the definition template for the Save Alignment utility, enter the file name and select the alignment to be saved. When the utility is executed in the CNC run, the actual alignment (calculated from the actual values) is saved on the hard disk in the directory ...\Calypso\home\om\workaera\basesystems. A subdirectory is created with the name that was entered in the definition template. If you entered backslashes (\) here, further subdirectories will be created under this directory. If there is no actual alignment of the set alignment, this will be calculated during the CNC run and, if necessary, measured. If the alignment cannot be measured and calculated, the symbol for the utility will turn red in the measurement plan.
Load Alignment
Calypso can save, load and delete alignments again during a CNC run. In the definition template for the Load Alignment utility, enter the file name for the alignment to be loaded. When the Load Alignment utility is executed in the CNC run (because a feature refers to this alignment, for example), the alignment is loaded from the hard disk. The directory for alignments is ...\Calypso\home\om\workarea\basesystems. If the file name contains backslashes (\), the program will branch to the appropriate subdirectories. If a Load Alignment utility is contained in the measurement plan, it is treated as a normal alignment. Its name (not identical to the file name) appears in the geometry reference system lists and the lists for linked alignments, for example. No distinction is made between nominal values and actual values when loading. Nominal values and actual values are equal in this case. In the case of a DMIS run, the loaded alignment is used as the current alignment.
Particularities
The name of the alignment to be loaded need not necessarily be the file name.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
6-13
An error message will be issued if an alignment cannot be loaded (because the file is not present). In addition, a message stating this will appear in the status window, and the CNC run will be interrupted if necessary. The base alignment is returned for critical calls, such as the nominal alignment for the nominal geometry.
Delete Alignment
Calypso can save, load and delete alignments again during a CNC run. In the definition template for the Delete Alignment utility, enter the file name for the alignment to be deleted. All alignments are listed in directory
...\Calypso\home\om\workarea\basesystems.
If the file name contains backslashes (\), the program will branch to the appropriate subdirectories. The file you specified in the definition template is deleted during the CNC run. If the file is not present, the run will continue without a message. The symbol for the utility in the measurement plan will turn red. If the file is write-protected, an error message will appear stating that the file cannot be deleted. The CNC run is resumed.
Connecting a Characteristic to a Feature

A characteristic must receive information relating to the feature in the measurement plan which will be used as a basis for the check. You have several different ways of connecting the characteristic to the feature of your choice: Use the CAD window if the feature is already defined. Click on the feature of your choice in the CAD window. Don't forget to make sure, however, that Select Already Extracted Features is set in the CAD window (you will find more information in the Online Help under How to Select Features on the CAD Model). The first feature you click on will be adopted as the Feature, the second as Primary Datum, the third as Secondary Datum etc. corresponding to the sequence of the buttons.
6-14
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Use the displayed button in the template window. In this way you can connect new features or features that have already been defined to the characteristic. You establish the connection to the characteristic in the Selection dialog box.
Input field
List of existing features
Overview
If the measurement plan is large, you might find it useful to have an overview of how a feature is used in the various characteristics. You can obtain an overview of this nature by opening the list of features, highlighting a feature and selecting the Check use of selected features command in the shortcut menu. This opens a list of all characteristics in which the feature you selected is used.
How to Assign an Existing Feature

To assign a feature to a characteristic using the definition template, follow these steps: 1 Open the definition template by double-clicking the characteristic of your choice. The definition template is opened. 2 Click on the Feature (or Feature element1) button. The Selection (Features) dialog box is opened. All Features is generally activated by default. 3 In the list, click on the feature that you want to assign.
NOTE
hss
You can view a filtered, short-form list by clicking on the corresponding icon, for example.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
6-15
4 If you want to filter the measured values: activate the Filter check box and if necessary, click on the Settings button to define the filter. You will find more information on filters and filtering in the section entitled How to Set and Activate a Filter on page 6-29. 5 If you want to eliminate outliers: activate the No Outliers check box and if necessary, click on the Settings button to define parameters for eliminating outliers. You will find more information on outliers in the section entitled How to Eliminate Outliers on page 6-31. 6 If you want to use a method other than the default, click on the Parameters button and select the method you want in the dialog box. Note that all methods are not necessarily available for all features. 7 Click OK to assign the values in accordance with your settings. This takes you back to the definition template. If the characteristic requires more than one feature, you can define the remainder by repeating the steps described above. You will find more information on the Selection dialog box under Selection (Features) in the Calypso Online Help.
How to Assign a Feature Not Yet Defined

As you entered the characteristic in the measurement plan, maybe you did not define the feature. Or maybe you noticed that you need more features. It does not take much effort to create a new feature within the definition template of the characteristic and directly assign it. 1 Open the definition template by double-clicking the characteristic of your choice. The definition template is opened. 2 Click on the Feature (or Feature1) button. The Selection (Features) dialog box is opened. 3 Select the New option. A list of all the types of feature possible for the characteristic in question is displayed. 4 Select the feature type and click OK to confirm your choice. This opens the definition template of the feature. 5 Define the feature. The procedure is exactly as described in How to Define a Feature Using Definition Templates on page 5-4. 6 When you have probed all the points, click OK.
6-16
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
This closes both the definition template and the Selection window, so you return to the definition template of the characteristic. If the characteristic requires more than one feature, you can define the remainder by repeating the steps described above. You will find more information on the Selection dialog box under Selection (Features) in the Calypso Online Help.
How to Assign and Edit a Defined Feature

If you are about to assign a feature to a characteristic and notice that something in the definition of the feature has to be changed (measuring strategy, additional probings, etc.), you can do so in the course of defining the characteristic. To assign and edit a defined feature: 1 Open the definition template by double-clicking the characteristic of your choice. The definition template is opened. 2 Click on the Feature (or Feature1) button. The Selection (Features) dialog box is opened. 3 Activate the Select existing Features radio button, if it is not already activated. 4 Click on the feature you want in the list.
NOTE
hss
You can view a filtered, short-form list by clicking on the corresponding icon, for example. 5 Activate the Edit check box. 6 Click on OK. This opens the definition template of the assigned feature. 7 Make the necessary alterations to the feature (see The Definition Template for Features on page 5-3). 8 Click on OK. The changes you made to the feature are saved and the definition template for the characteristic reappears on the screen. If the characteristic requires more than one feature, you can define the remainder by repeating the steps described above. You will find more information on the Selection dialog box under Selection (Features) in the Calypso Online Help.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
6-17
How to Assign Characteristics to Certain Features

You can assign one or more characteristics to certain features in a single step. This means that the information in question has to be defined only once, while at the same time you can be sure that the common properties are exactly the same for all the features concerned. To assign characteristics to certain features: 1 Open the list of characteristics. 2 Click on the characteristics you want to assign. Press and hold down the Shift or Ctrl key if you want to highlight more than one characteristic. 3 Click on the Transfer format icon in the upper menu bar. The Characteristics assign to Features dialog box appears on the screen.
At the same time, the list of features is opened in the background.

NOTE
hss
The dialog box contains a second page on which you can copy the properties of characteristics. To open the second page, click on the symbol for the characteristics at the bottom left of the dialog box or on the user desk. 4 Set a radio button in the Naming block to specify whether the characteristics will be entered with standard names or whether you will define the names in a dialog. If you do not want to be prompted to enter names, Calypso will assign each new characteristic a standard name. 5 Set a radio button in the Existing characteristics block to specify whether or not existing characteristics will be overwritten.
6-18
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
6 In the list of features, highlight the feature or features to which you want the characteristics assigned. Press and hold down the Shift or Ctrl key if you want to highlight more than one feature. 7 Click on OK to start the assignment. If you activated the Request all names radio button, the number of boxes suggesting names will be equal to the number of characteristics you selected times the number of features. If a characteristic already exists the default is the current name, whereas for new characteristics a standard name (see above) is suggested. 8 Overwrite the names suggested by the system, if applicable. The new characteristics are added to the list of characteristics. If this list already contains the same characteristic for a feature the original characteristic will be overwritten or not, depending on which radio button you activated in the Existing characteristics block.
How to Define Nominals and Tolerances

You can now match each nominal and tolerance that the characteristic has to check to the specifications.
NOTE
hss
The tolerances define calculation of the scanning speed for the measuring strategy. (See Path Generation Automatically Measuring Features on page 5-68).
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
6-19
To enter tolerances and nominal values: 1 Open the definition template by double-clicking the characteristic. The Definition Template (characteristic) 2 will open (taper angle of a cone is shown here by way of example).
2 Enter the required nominal values (or more than one for locations) in the field Nominal (or Setting Position). 3 Now enter the tolerance values: You can choose the tolerance group from the picklist (below the name of the characteristic). Once you have made your selection the corresponding values appear in the Upper Tolerance and Lower Tolerance boxes. Or you can type the tolerance values directly into the Upper Tolerance and Lower Tolerance if you need your own tolerance values. 4 Activate the None check box if you do not want tolerances taken into account in measurement evaluation. 5 Select Last input form the menu if you again need the most recently selected tolerance. 6 Click on OK to close the definition template of the characteristic. You have now defined all the characteristic parameters Calypso needs for the evaluation of measurement results. The elements in this dialog box are fully described in Definition Template (characteristic) 1 in the Calypso Online Help.
6-20
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Keep in mind that the icon of the characteristic is now displayed with either a green or red background, depending on if it is inside or outside of the tolerance. If the feature is not measured yet, the icon has a dark gray background (indicating that it is completely defined).
Tolerance Specifications for Characteristics

Calypso has a multi-level menu that enables you to select the correct tolerance specification in the definition template for the characteristic. Tolerance Type General tolerances DIN 1680 Rough castings Tolerance fine, medium, coarse, very coarse General tolerances GTA 12 to GTA 21 group GTA General tolerances GTB 12 to GTB 21 group GTB DIN 1683 Rough steel castings DIN 1684 Rough castings of malleable iron Linear measures DIN 1683 linear measures GHTB 20 to GTB 16.5
Thickness measures DIN 1683 thickness measures GHTB 20 to GTB 16.5 GTB 17/5 moulding / not moulding GTB 17 moulding / not moulding GTB 16/5 moulding / not moulding GTB 16 moulding / not moulding DIN 1685 Rough castings of cast iron with sphero DIN 1686 Rough castings of cast iron with foliated graphite DIN 1687 Rough castings of heavy metal alloys DIN 1684 GTB 17/5 m. linear measures / not m. linear measures DIN 1684 GTB 17/5 m. thickness measures / not m. thickness measures DIN 1684 GTB 17 m. linear measures / not m. linear measures DIN 1684 GTB 17 m. thickness measures / not m. thickness measures DIN 1684 GTB 16/5 m. linear measures / not m. linear measures DIN 1684 GTB 16/5 m. thickness measures / not m. thickness measures DIN 1684 GTB 16m. linear measures / not m. linear measures DIN 1684 GTB 16m. thickness measures / not m. thickness measures
Linear measures / DIN 1685 linear measures GTB 20 to GTB 15 thickness measures DIN 1685 thickness measures GTB 20 to GTB 15 Linear measures / DIN 1686 linear measures GTB 20 to GTB 15 thickness measures DIN 1686 Thickness measures GTB 20 to GTB 15 Sand rough DIN 1687 GS GTB 20 to GTB 16 m. / not m.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
6-21
Tolerance Type Gravity die casting
Tolerance DIN 1687 GK GTB 15 to GTB 14 m: / not m.
Pressure die DIN 1687 GD L GTB 14 m. / not m. Linear measures / Thickness measures for high melting and low melting alloys DIN 1688 Rough castings of light metal alloys Sand rough DIN 1688 GS GTB 20 to GTB 16 m. / not m.
Gravity die casting
DIN 1688 GK GTB 20 to GTB 16 m. / not m.
Pressure die DIN 16901 Plastic tolerances General tolerances DIN 16901 Gen. 160 A / 160 B DIN16901 Gen. 160 B / 160 B Tolerances for DIN 16901 with direct entered A. 160 A / 160 B values with directly entered deviations DIN 169091 with directly entered A. Precision Techn. A/B Select General tolerances (fine, medium, coarse, very coarse) or special, material-specific tolerances (cast blanks, plastic parts) with the appropriate DIN standard (for information on how to add tolerance tables of your own to this menu, see Defining Custom Tolerance Tables on page 6-24).
Specifying Tolerances with MMC/LMC

You can apply the maximum material principle or the minimum material principle as necessary when you specify tolerances of form and position. The most-material principle is laid down in DIN ISO 2692. It applies to axes and mid-planes and allows for the interrelationships between dimensional tolerance and tolerance of form and position. When the most-material condition (MMC) or the least-material condition (LMC) is applied, tolerance extensions are permissible for tolerances of position for which diameter tolerances are not fully exploited. The procedure for applying MMC or LMC to tolerances of position is as follows:
6-22
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
1 Open the definition template for the characteristic. 2 If you have not assigned features, click on the Feature button and select the feature whose position you want to check. This illustration shows the template for the DIN Position characteristic for checking a cylinder.
Picklist
3 From the RFS (= Regardless Feature Size) selection list, select the entry: MMC to apply the most-material condition, or LMC to apply the least-material condition. The Nominals button now appears beside the picklist. 4 If Diameter has not been defined as a characteristic for the feature, click on the Nominals button. Calypso adds Diameter as a characteristic for the feature to the measurement plan and opens the definition template: Enter the nominal value for the diameter. Click on OK to close the definition template for the diameter. 5 Define reference features, if necessary. You can apply MMC or LMC to the constraining features as well. To do this click on the button of the constraint and proceed as described above, starting at step 3. 6 Click on OK. The settings are saved and the definition template is closed.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
6-23
Defining Custom Tolerance Tables

When you have to define tolerances for a characteristic, you have a choice of entering the tolerance directly or selecting the Tolerance group from a selection list (with the name of the characteristic) (see How to Define Nominals and Tolerances on page 6-19). Calypso supports you with a multi-level menu in which you will find General Tolerances and a number of material-specific tolerances (Cast blanks of various makes, Plastic parts). You can expand this table as the need arises, in order to avoid the necessity of having to enter custom tolerances in the Upper Tolerance and Lower Tolerance . The tolerances offered in the menu are saved in XML files called dinxxxx.xml in the calypso\opt\om\data\toldat directory. If you want to add a tolerance table to the menu, you must create an XML file called userXXXX.xml (e. g. userworkroom1.xml) of your own and copy it into this directory. The manner in which the file should be structured can be seen in the following example .
6-24
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
XML File with Custom Tolerances (Example)
<?xml version="1.0" ?> <!DOCTYPE tolerancesDefinitionFile SYSTEM "tolerancesDefinitionFile.dtd"> <tolerancesDefinitionFile> <userNorm name = "Feinmessraum" group = "3" description = "Feinmessraum1"> <range stop= "18"> <value name = "UT" value = "+4.5"/> <value name = "LT" value = "-4.5"/> </range> <range start = "18" stop="30"> <value name = "UT" value = "+7.5"/> <value name = "LT" value = "-7.5"/> </range> <range start = "30" stop="50"> <value name = "UT" value = "+8"/> <value name = "LT" value = "-8"/> </range> <range start = "50" stop="80"> <value name = "UT" value = "+8.5"/> <value name = "LT" value = "-8.5"/> </range> <range start = "80" stop="120"> <value name = "UT" value = "+9.01"/> <value name = "LT" value = "-9.01"/> </range> <range start = "120" stop="180"> <value name = "UT" value = "+10"/> <value name = "LT" value = "-10"/> </range> <range start = "180" stop="250"> <value name = "UT" value = "+11"/> <value name = "LT" value = "-11"/> </range> <range start = "250" stop="315"> <value name = "UT" value = "+11"/> <value name = "LT" value = "-11"/> </range> <range start = "315" stop="400"> <value name = "UT" value = "+12"/> <value name = "LT" value = "-12"/> </range> <range start = "400" stop="10000"> <value name = "UT" value = "+13"/> <value name = "LT" value = "-13"/> </range> </userNorm> </tolerancesDefinitionFile>
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
6-25
When you copy this file into the calypso\opt\om\data\toldat directory, the tolerances menu will have another item called Feinmessraum1, and this item, in turn, will offer you a total of 10 tolerances.
Meanings of the entries
The following entries in the file are customizable: group=3 The standard entry is group=1. If there are two or more userdefined tolerance tables, this number defines the position at which the submenu will appear when the User-def. Tolerance pulldown menu is opened. description=Feinmessraum1 The text displayed in the pulldown menu. range stop=18 Nominal range from 0 mm to 18 mm, inclusive. value name=UT value =+4.5 Upper tolerance of nominal range 0 to 18 (+4.5mm). value name=LT value =-4.5 Lower tolerance of nominal range 0 to 18 (-4.5mm). range start=18 stop=30 Nominal range from 18 mm to 30 mm, inclusive.
Filtration and Outliers

Calypso enables you to edit measured values and exclude certain values from further analysis. A variety of filters are available for this purpose, along with the functionality for eliminating outliers. Filters can segregate the waviness profile of a geometric feature from the effects of surface roughness. Filters, therefore, are of assistance in maximizing measuring accuracy. The following filter types are available: Gauss (ISO 11562), Spline and 2 RC (ISO 4291). The filter methods are low-pass, band-pass and high-pass. The new statistical data of the geometric feature are obtained from the filtered measuring data after compensation. Individual measuring points of the geometric features 2d straight, plane, circle, cone, cylinder and sphere can be purged from the measured values as Outliers. The number of outliers eliminated is documented in the printout.
6-26
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Filtering Scanned Features

The use of filters is recommended only for a large number of points, i.e. only for scanned features.
Low-pass
Filtering a profile with lowpass (low frequencies pass the filter, high frequencies do not) yields an average line in which waviness and other long-wave profile components are present, while the effects of surface roughness are largely eliminated. The average line is produced by analyzing measuring points within equal sections (double the wave length): The measuring points are analyzed with weighting within each section. The profile obtained in this way is compensated and serves as the basis for calculating parameters of waviness.
High-pass
Filtering with high-pass (high frequencies pass the filter, low frequencies do not) yields an average line in which waviness is suppressed, while the effects of the surface roughness are still present. A band-pass results from the combined use of a low-pass and a highpass. This suppresses both the long-wave (waviness) and short-wave (surface roughness) profile components that exceed the respectively specified limit.
Band-pass
Eliminating Outliers
A measured point is tagged as an outlier if it is further than a defined threshold (threshold = factor * standard delta) from the computed Gaussian element. Outliers are geometric points that differ significantly from the geometric form yielded by the other measured points and as such, they can produce a large error when the computed feature is calculated. An error of this nature easily propagates through the actual-value determination of the corresponding characteristic.
Defining Filters and Outlier Elimination

There are several different points in Calypso at which you can parameterize and activate filtration and outlier elimination: For an individual characteristic For an individual feature As defaults for the characteristic groups and the references and alignment elements of the coordinate systems.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
6-27
Which setting is valid?
The setting for the characteristic always takes priority. If filtration/outlier elimination is not activated for the characteristic, the setting for the feature applies. If filtration/outlier elimination is not activated for the feature, Calypso refers to the default settings for the characteristic groups. Bear in mind that filtration requires a minimum number of points to be probed. If the number of probings is less than this minimum number the filter is not activated and a message to this effect is issued. A feature obtained by recall from a feature filtered beforehand is automatically not filtered subsequently, even if filtration is activated.
How to Select General Settings for Filter and Outliers

You can define general settings for filtration and outlier elimination per characteristic group. Unless another setting is defined elsewhere for individual features, Calypso uses these general settings. The procedure for defining filtration and outlier elimination for characteristic groups is as follows: 1 Select Prerequisites Filter/Outlier Elimination. The Filter/Outlier Elimination Default Settings dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Click on the appropriate Settings button. 3 Set the parameters as necessary in the Filter or Outlier Mode dialog box and activate your settings, if applicable. The current setting is displayed beneath the corresponding check box. 4 Click on OK.
6-28
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
The dialog box is closed and the settings are accepted. The filter or outlier elimination activated in this way applies with its parameters to all the features required for the characteristic, unless a setting to the contrary is made in a given features definition template.
How to Set and Activate a Filter

To activate a filter: 1 Open a corresponding characteristic in the measurement plan and click on the Switch to Feature Menu button. The Selection dialog box appears on the screen. At the bottom left you can see whether or not a filter is activated. If a filter is active its parameters are shown.
2 Activate the Filter check box to activate the filter.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
6-29
3 Click Settings to define the settings for the filter. The Filter dialog box appears on the screen.
4 Select Filter Method and Filter Type, then enter the limit values for the selected filter. You can specify the filter parameters via Undulations Per Revolution or via Wavelength Lc. You must enter a value range if you have entered the filter type Band-pass everything exceeding this range will be filtered out. 5 Click on OK to save the settings and close the dialog box. This returns you to the Characteristics window, which is still open. If you activated a filter, the filter method and the filtration parameters now appear below the Filter check box (e.g. Gaussian 150).
6-30
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
How to Eliminate Outliers

To activate outlier elimination: 1 Open a corresponding characteristic in the measurement plan and click on the Switch to Feature Menu button. The Selection dialog box appears on the screen.
At the bottom right you can see whether or not outlier elimination is activated. If it is active its parameters are shown. 2 Activate the Outlier Elimination check box to activate elimination, or deactivate the check box to deactivate elimination.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
6-31
3 Click Settings to define the parameters for outlier elimination. The Outlier Mode dialog box appears on the screen.
4 Make your settings by activating or deactivating the check boxes or changing the parameter settings in the input boxes. 5 Click on OK to save the settings and close the dialog box. This returns you to the Characteristics window, which is still open. If you activated outlier elimination, the works Outlier Elimination now appear below the Outlier Elimination check box.
Copying Properties of Features

You can copy certain properties of a characteristic and assign them to or more other characteristics. This means that the information in question has to be defined only once, while at the same time you can be sure that the common properties are exactly the same for all the characteristics concerned. The following are the properties you can copy to all features: Nominal Tolerance class ISO286 Upper tolerance Lower tolerance
6-32
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
How to Copy Properties of Characteristics into other Characteristics

The procedure for copying properties of a characteristic to other characteristics is as follows: 1 Click on the characteristic from which you wish to copy the properties and click on the Transfer format icon in the upper menu bar. The Characteristics assign to Features dialog box appears on the screen. 2 Click on the characteristics icon at the bottom of the dialog box. The Copy Properties from <prfmerkmalname> dialog box appears on the screen.
3 Activate the check boxes of the properties that you want to copy to other characteristics. 4 Highlight the characteristic or characteristics to which you want to copy the properties. Press and hold down the Shift or Ctrl key if you want to highlight more than one characteristic. 5 Click on OK. Copying is started.
About the Color-Coding of Characteristics Buttons

When a characteristic is listed in the measurement plan area, the background color of its button tells you its status: Light gray (same as measurement plan area): The characteristic has not been defined yet and no nominal data has been recorded. Dark gray: The characteristic has been defined and nominal data has been recorded. The characteristic is ready to run.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
6-33
Green: The characteristic has been defined, nominal data has been recorded, measured results have been gathered, and the results are within the tolerances. Red: The characteristic has been defined, nominal data has been recorded, measured results have been gathered, and the results are outside of tolerances.
6-34
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Details on Specific Characteristics

Whenever you define a characteristic, you must always assign it one or two features in its definition template. Frequently, you will also have to define primary references, and less frequently secondary or even tertiary restraints as well. The most common approach to constraint definitions is as follows. A primary constraint generally constrains two of the rotational degrees of freedom and one or two translational degrees of freedom for the evaluation of a characteristic. In order to satisfy these requirements, the primary constraint must be set by a three-dimensional feature: a plane, and 3 D line, a cylinder or a cone. If required, a secondary constraint usually further constrains the remaining rotational degree of freedom. A secondary constraint can be a plane, 2 D line, 3 D line, cylinder or cone. All other features are insufficient to establish rotation frames of reference. Lastly, a single additional feature provides the remaining one or two degrees of translational constraint. The table below lists the items of information you need to define the characteristics for size, form and location: MenuLocation in command toolbox Description Size Standards Size elements Determines the position of a given feature in X. The location of each feature is stated in coordinates for X, Y and Z. The position of a circle, for example, is defined by its center. The values are referenced to the part alignment. Size elements Determines the position of a given feature in Y. The location of each feature is stated in coordinates for X, Y and Z. The position of a circle, for example, is defined by its center. The values are referenced to the part alignment. Size elements Determines the position of a given feature in Z. The location of each feature is stated in coordinates for X, Y and Z. The position of a circle, for example, is defined by its center. The values are referenced to the part alignment. Size elements Determines the diameter of a round feature such as a circle, cylinder, cone, or sphere.
Characteristic X value
Y value
Size Standards
Z value
Size Standards
Diameter
Size Standards
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
6-35
Characteristic Radius
MenuLocation in command toolbox Description Size Standards Size Standards Size elements Determines the radius of a round feature such as a circle, cylinder, cone, or sphere. Size elements Determines the radius of a feature. This value is determined separately for each probing; in this way the results for a small arc segment can be enhanced. Size elements Determines the length of the axis of a rotationally symmetrical body. Size elements Determines the position of a given feature with the polar coordinate Radius. The location of each feature can be defined in terms of the polar coordinates (Radius, Angle, Height). The position of a circle, for example, is defined by its center. The values are referenced to the part alignment. Size elements Determines the position of a given feature with the polar coordinate Angle. The location of each feature can be defined in terms of the polar coordinates (Radius, Angle, Height). The position of a circle, for example, is defined by its center. The values are referenced to the part alignment. Size elements Determines the position of a given feature with the polar coordinate Height. The location of each feature can be defined in terms of the polar coordinates (Radius, Angle, Height). The position of a circle, for example, is defined by its center. The values are referenced to the part alignment. Size elements Determines the first projected angle of a certain feature based on the part alignment. In a spatial system of coordinates the axial direction can be defined by two projected angles. A projected angle is an angle on a workpiece plane viewed from the third axis. Projected angle No. 1 is based on the reference axis (the axis common to the two planes of projection) of the feature. Feature axis X Y Z Angle 1 Y/X Z/Y X/Z
Radius measurement
Length of Axis
Size Standards Size Standards
Polarposition Radius
Polarposition Angle
Size Standards
Polarposition Height
Size Standards
Projection Angle One
Size Angle
6-36
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Characteristic Projection Angle Two
MenuLocation in command toolbox Description Size Angle Size elements Determines the second projected angle of a second projected angle of a certain feature based on the part alignment. In a spatial system of coordinates the axial direction can be defined by two projected angles. A projected angle is an angle on a workpiece plane viewed from the third axis. Projected angle No. 2 is based on the reference axis (the axis common to the two planes of projection) of the feature. Feature axis X Y Z Angle 2 Z/X X/Y Y/Z
Cone Angle
Size Angle Size Angle Size Angle Size Angle Size Angle Size Distance Size Distance Size Distance
Size elements Determines the angle of aperture of a cone.
Half Cone Angle Angle of Tilt
Size elements Determines the half angle of aperture of a cone (the angle between the axis of the cone and the cones lateral area). Size elements Determines a features angle of tilt from the Z axis of the part alignment. Size elements Determines a features angle of rotation about the Z axis, referenced to the W axis of the part alignment. Size elements Calculates the angle that the axis of rotation of a feature assumes with the part alignment. Size elements Determines the distance between the two reference features of a symmetry point. Size elements Determines the distance of a space point or net point referenced to its nominal. Size elements Determines the distance of a point feature from the origin of a coordinate system or the distances of two point features from each other. The distances output are those along the Cartesian axes, along with the point-to-point distance (radius) and the vector angle. The reference point for a circle, ellipse, sphere, rectangle or slot is always the midpoint.
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Rotation Angle Feature Angle
Distance Symmetry point Space Point Distance Distance
61212-2010102
6-37
Characteristic Diameter 2
MenuLocation in command toolbox Description Size More Size More Size elements Determines the second diameter of an ellipse. The first diameter of the ellipse is measured with the Diameter command. Size elements Determines the second radius of an ellipse feature. The first radius of the ellipse is measured by the Radius characteristic.
Radius 2
Length
Size Size elements Determines the length of a slot or a rectangle. More Slot Length Size More Slot Width Size More Average Form and Location Size elements Determines the width of a slot or rectangle.
Width
Average
Size elements Determines the average of multiple length measurements. Form elements Determines the roundness or circularity of a given circular feature. The circle can be on a cylinder, a sphere, or a cone. The definition template includes a button labeled Graphic for form plots (see How to Display Variations Graphically on page 9-23). Determines the flatness of a flat feature. The definition template includes a button labeled Graphic for form plots (see How to Display Variations Graphically on page 9-23). Determines the straightness of a line. The normal tolerance direction reflects straightness in the probing direction; the parallel tolerance direction reflects straightness parallel to the surface of the workpiece. The definition template includes a button labeled Graphic for form plots (see How to Display Variations Graphically on page 9-23). Determines the cylinder form of a cylindrical feature. The definition template includes a button labeled Graphic for form plots (see How to Display Variations Graphically on page 9-23).
DIN ISO 1101 Roundness
DIN ISO 1101 Flatness
Form and Location
Form elements
DIN ISO 1101 Straightness
Form and Location
Form elements
DIN ISO 1101 Cylinder form
Form and Location
Form elements
6-38
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Characteristic Form
MenuLocation in command toolbox Description Form and Location Form elements From the extreme values of features, determines form deviation as the difference between the maximum and minimum measured values normal to the feature (e.g. cone form or sphere form). This characteristic is optional. It defines the deviation of a defined curve (see Curve Measurement (Option) on page 15-1). Defines the deviation of a plane from its nominal geometry. Its value depends on the selected shape of zone (see Basics About GDT Profile on page 6-40). Determines the position of a given feature in relation to a datum reference frame. You have the choice of defining the reference features, the base alignment, or one of the systems of coordinates. Each defined part alignment can be used as the datum reference frame. When you define position tolerance you can click on the Special button to apply the Offset and Rotate functions with reference to the base alignment (see Moving or Rotating the Base / Start Alignment on page 4-42). Alternatively, you can use the Best Fit of Bore Pattern function (see How to Use Best Fit of Bore Pattern on page 6-43). Determines the concentricity of a given feature (e.g. a circle) relative to one or two reference features. Determines the coaxiality of a given features axis (e.g. the axis of a cylinder) relative to another feature. Determines the squareness of a planar, cylindrical, conical or a straight-line feature relative to one or two reference features. Determines the parallelism of a planar, cylindrical, conical or a straight-line feature relative to one or two reference features. Determines the symmetry of a feature relative to two reference features.
Curve form
Form and Location Form and Location
Form elements Form elements
DIN Profile
DIN ISO 1101 Position
Form and Location
Location elements
DIN ISO 1101 Concentricity DIN ISO 1101 Coaxiality DIN ISO 1101 Squareness DIN ISO 1101 Parallelism DIN ISO 1101 Symmetry
Form and Location Form and Location Form and Location Form and Location Form and Location
Location elements Location elements Location elements Location elements Location elements
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
6-39
Characteristic DIN Angularity
MenuLocation in command toolbox Description Form and Location Location elements Determines the deviation of a feature from a reference feature and a defined angle. Determines the deviation of a feature normal to the datum axis in the radial direction. Determines the deviation of a feature in the direction of the datum axis. Determines the two-dimensional distance between the midpoints of two features. This characteristic is used to determine the distance between the projections of two twodimensional features on a datum plane. Determines the direct three-dimensional distance between the midpoints of two features. This characteristic is generally used for two points defined in all three dimensions (e.g. the centers of spheres). Determines the distance between two features in Cartesian coordinates (along the X, Y and Z axes). Determines the angle between two features. You have a choice of results: acute angle, this angles explement to 180 and the explementary angles of both to 360.
DIN ISO 1101 Radial Runout DIN ISO 1101 Axial Runout Polar 2d (Distance)
Form and Location Location elements Runout Form and Location Location elements Runout Form and Location Location elements Distance
Polar 3d (Distance)
Form and Location Location elements Distance
Cartesian (Distance) Angle Between Features
Form and Location Location elements Distance Form and Location Location elements
Basics About GDT Profile

Characteristics
The GDT profile can be determined for the following characteristics: Plane Cylinder Cone Sphere Point General surface
NOTE
hss
The GDT profile corresponds to the TOL/PROFS defined in DMIS.
6-40
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
When defining the GDT profile, you can choose from four shapes of zone: Shape of Zone Bilateral One-sided (inside) One-sided (outside) Bilateral (unequal distribution) The following are observed: The deviation from the nominal surface to the inside and outside (with the same values) The deviation from the nominal surface to the inside The deviation from the nominal surface to the outside The deviation from the nominal surface to the inside and outside (with unequal values) For the bilateral tolerance with unequal distribution, a further input field is activated for the Tolerance (one side), in which you additionally specify the side to which the tolerance applies with the Inside / Outside Switch button.
Result of profile
The result of the profile depends on the shape of zone. The following are output: The largest deviation (inside and outside) times 2. The largest deviation inside the workpiece. The largest deviation outside the workpiece. The largest deviation (inside and outside) from a calculated center line times 2.
Shape Of Zone Bilateral One-sided (inside) One-sided (outside) Bilateral (unequal distribution)
Theoretical center Nominal contour
Calculation of deviations for the General Surface
The General Surface feature contains only a set of points and not a mathematical description of the surface. Therefore, the points can be evaluated only individually: Each actual point is compared with its associated nominal point. The probe touch point is calculated based on the probe center, probe radius and the normal vector of the nominal point. The deviation D of the point is formed from the nominal point and actual point along the normal vector of the nominal point. The deviation perpendicular to the normal vector of the nominal point is ignored. This corresponds to the procedure for the space point. The greatest absolute deviation of all point comparisons is then used as a measure for the profile.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
6-41
Restrictions
The following restrictions apply to the GDT profile: No restrictions may be set for the best fit. Negative tolerances are not permitted.
Particularities for the General Surface
The following particularities apply to the GDT profile of a General Surface: No filters or outlier elimination. Only the Gauss evaluation method is possible.
Profile with references
As in general, the following applies to profile with references: Either no reference or all three references are defined. Otherwise, no result will be output.
How to Check Wall Thickness and Wall Deviation

With the aid of the selection menu points in the CAD model, you can define two space points with a click of the mouse and use these points to check the wall thickness or the material deviation at this point.
How to define two space points for the distance check

1 Turn the CAD model, so that the position with the wall thickness to be checked can be seen in the foreground. 2 Click on the Selection selection list in the CAD menu bar. 3 Select menu point Distance Check. 4 Click on the position on the model at which you wish to check the wall thickness. The two opposite space points and the connection between them are shown at the selected position on the screen. Two new features of the type space point appear in the list of features. With the aid of these two points, you can check the wall thickness or the material deviation at the place in question.
How to check the wall thickness

You have created two opposite space points using the menu point Distance Check. 1 Add a symmetry point to the list of features with Measure Special Features Symmetry Point. 2 Select the Recall entry in the selection list Nominal Definition in the definition template of the symmetry point.
6-42
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
3 Select the available space points for the definition of the symmetry point. 4 Add the Distance_Symmetry point characteristic to the list of characteristics and assign it to the symmetry point that was just created. The wall thickness will be checked at the desired position during the measurement plan run.
How to check the wall deviation

You have created two opposite space points using the menu point Distance Check. 1 Add two Space Point Distance characteristics to the list of characteristics and assign them the space points just created. During the measurement plan run, it will be checked whether there is too much or too little material at the desired position.
Basics about Best Fit of Bore Pattern

The following best fit methods are available for the best fit of bore pattern: Gauss Best Fit. For this method, outliers have only a minimal influence. Limitations due to references are not taken into consideration. Optimal setting parameters can be derived from this for the machine tools. Minimum Best Fit (Tschebyscheff). Outliers have a significant effect on the result when this method is used. Limitations due to references are not taken into consideration. Optimal setting parameters can be derived from this for the machine tools. Tolerance Best Fit. Iterative attempts are made to bring all values into tolerance. Possible movement and rotation areas are limited due to the reference features. This corresponds to a Good/Bad evaluation of a mechanical gauge with an additional evaluation of the single deviations. L1 Best Fit. Outliers have less effect with this method than is the case with the Gauss method. Limitations due to references are not taken into consideration. Optimal setting parameters can be derived from this for the machine tools.
How to Use Best Fit of Bore Pattern

The True Position characteristic offers options for bore-pattern best fit. As the result of this operation, Calypso computes the rotation and offset of the bore pattern.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
6-43
To proceed with best-fit of bore-pattern: 1 Add the True Position characteristic to your measurement plan. 2 Double-click on the button for the characteristic to open the definition template. The definition template is opened. 3 Activate the Best Fit of Bore Pattern radio button. 4 Enter the tolerance. Use the buttons labeled Primary Datum, Secondary Datum and Tertiary Datum to specify the datums so that the bore pattern can be computed later. If you do not enter a datum, the base alignment is used by default. 5 Click on the Bore Pattern button to define the settings for evaluating the bore pattern. This is the dialog box in which you define the settings.
6-44
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
6 Click on the Select Features button to select the features you need for best-fitting the bore pattern. You can use the Select Bolt Hole Pattern picklist to incorporate bore patterns defined beforehand. All the features you select are listed in the Features List. The coordinates as shown here are referenced to the datum selected beforehand. The values are editable and can be shown in Cartesian or polar form. 7 Select a best-fit method from the Best-Fit Methods group: Select the best-fit method of your choice from the picklist. Select Translation and/or Rotation for the means of fitting. 8 Start computation by clicking on the Execute button. When computation is completed, the result is displayed in the Result of Fit group. To see a graphic representation of the best fit bore pattern, mark the check box Graphic (see How to Display Variations Graphically on page 9-23). 9 Click on OK. The settings are saved and the window is closed.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
6-45
6-46
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
7
7
61212-2010102
Chapter
.................................................................................................................................
You must define characteristics and features, but there are also a number of things you can do which, although not absolutely essential, will streamline the work of measurement and make your job easier. You must already have created a measurement plan and defined features and/or characteristics in order to understand this chapter.

Managing Measurement Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 The Toolboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Editing a Measurement Plan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 Editing the Probe Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22 Using the Probe Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33 Multimedia User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
7- 1
Managing Measurement Plans

The Following topics cover how to work with measurement plan files (copying, saving etc.) and how to improve your efficiency by using common Windows functions:
How to Save a Measurement Plan

Do not forget to save your measurement plan after you have edited it. You can either overwrite the original measurement plan or save the edited plan in another file. To save a measurement plan: 1 If you want to overwrite the original measurement plan, click on the Save Current Measurement Plan button. The measurement plan is saved. 2 If you want to retain the original measurement plan, Select File Save As.
Enter a new name and press Enter to confirm. The original measurement plan is retained, and the new measurement plan is also saved to hard disk.
How to Rename a Measurement Plan

Calypso does not have a direct command for renaming a measurement plan. You can, however, assign the measurement plan a new name in the Save As dialog box. Calypso saves each measurement plan as a file called inspection in a directory that bears the name of the measurement plan.
7-2
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Follow these steps to rename a measurement plan: 1 Select File Save As. 2 Overwrite the name in the File name field with the desired new measurement plan name. 3 Click on OK to confirm. You have now created a new measurement plan under another name; the original (old) measurement plan still exists. If you want you can delete the old plan.
How to Copy a Measurement Plan to a Floppy Disk

You may want to copy a measurement plan to a floppy disk to back it up or to work with it on another computer. To copy the measurement plan, you need to use Windows Explorer. Follow these steps to copy a measurement plan to a disk: 1 Minimize Calypso by clicking on the Minimize button in the upper right corner. 2 Insert a diskette into the drive. 3 In the Windows Taskbar, click on Start Programs Windows Explorer. 4 View the contents of the folder called C:\calypso:\home\om\workarea\inspections. This is the default path for Calypso. A subfolder is created in this folder for each Calypso measurement plan. To copy a measurement plan, you must copy its entire folder because it contains a number of files. 5 Click on the folder that is the name of the measurement plan that you want to copy. 6 Select Edit Copy. 7 View the contents of the diskette in the floppy disk drive with Explorer. 8 Select Edit Paste. The measurement plan folder and its contents are copied to the floppy disk. 9 Close Windows Explorer and return to Calypso.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
7-3
How to Delete a Measurement Plan

You can delete measurement plans that are no longer needed. To delete a measurement plan: 1 Select File Open. The administration dialog for the measurement plan will open. A subfolder is created in this folder for each Calypso measurement plan. 2 Mark the measurement plan that should be deleted, right-click and, in the popup menu that appears, select Delete. The selected measurement plan will be deleted. You can also use the Windows Explorer to delete measurement plans.
Combining Several Measurement Plans

You can combine measurement plans and create combined evaluations. The measurement plans you combine in this way need not necessarily be on the CMM - they can be created and run on CMMs at different points in the network. The primary use of this function, however, is to generate common logs for measurements on horizontal-arm systems with two measuring columns.
NOTE
hss
If you want to combine the measurement plans of a horizontal arm CMM with two measuring arms, you should, if possible, use the same features for alignment (definition of the base alignment). In order to combine measurement plans you must create a master measurement plan on a CMM designated for the purpose, and import the measurement plans from other CMMs into this master.
How to Create a Master Measurement Plan

To create a master measurement plan: 1 Create a new measurement plan and assign it a name beginning with the character $. This $ tells Calypso that this is a master measurement plan.
7-4
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
2 Select Prerequisites Import Measurement Plan. A dialog box appears in which you can import the measurement plans run to date on networked CMMs onto your computer. All nominals, actual values and tolerances are imported into the master measurement plan. The names of the individual features and characteristics have to be unique only within each single measurement plan incorporated into the master. In the master measurement plan itself, each name of a feature or characteristic is prefixed with the name of the original measurement plan, with a period as separator. 3 Edit the measurement plan: Delete superfluous characteristics and add constructions of features across individual measurement plans. 4 Save the master measurement plan.
NOTE
hss
When saved, the $ will be removed from the name. To make it easier to distinguish the master measurement plans from regular ones, you should save them separately in a special directory.
How to Obtain the Combined Evaluation

The master measurement plan is not used to measure features: its purpose is to calculate combinations from multiple measurement plans.
NOTE
hss
The master plan is used for computation, not for measurement. To perform a computation run: 1 Open the master measurement plan. 2 Select CNC Run to start the CNC run. The Start Measurement window is displayed. 3 Under CMM, go to the Navigate-Feature To Feature field and select Use Position Points Only. 4 If individual measurement plans have been run in the interim and you want to update the results: Tick the Clear Existing Results check box. In this case the current values (actuals, nominals and tolerances) of the individual measurement plans that make up the master measurement plan are reimported and the results are updated. 5 Click on OK to start the CNC run. No further measurements take place in this CNC run. Instead, the process is used for calculations only, and the results are printed out or generated as result files. If the Clear Existing Results check box was marked, the latest results of the individual measurement plans will be imported.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
7-5
If this option was not selected, the results are recalculated from the individual measurement plans' results already available on the computer.

Once you have set up a measurement plan, you can edit it later. You can add, move or delete features or characteristics, group features or characteristics and rename features, characteristics or groups. You can also mirror the entire measurement plan across an axis of your choice. Remember to save the measurement plan after you make changes to it (select File Save).
NOTE
hss
All of the following sections assume that you have a measurement plan open on the Calypso User Desk.
How to Undo an Action in the Measurement Plan

There is currently no way of undoing an action in Calypso. The Undo command on the Edit menu is just for deleting the last probing point. However, you can revert to the last saved version of your measurement plan: 1 Save the measurement plan without saving it beforehand.
!
hss
Caution All changes made since the last time the measurement plan was saved are lost. 2 Reopen the measurement plan. The contents of the measurement plan are now as they were when last saved.
How to Use Additional Options in Shortcut Menus

Calypso, like many Windows software packages, has popup menus that change depending on where you are in the software. To open a shortcut menu: 1 Click on the right mouse button. The shortcut menu appears on the screen. 2 Click on the command of your choice.
7-6
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Usually, the shortcut menus offer commands that are available at the main User Desk menu. Sometimes, however, the shortcut menus offer commands that are available nowhere else. If you are trying to perform a task and cannot figure out how to do it, try clicking the right mouse button to view the options in the shortcut menu, and you may find the function you need.
How to Edit Features or Characteristics

To work with a feature or characteristic, you first have to highlight it: 1 Click with the left mouse button on the icon in the measurement plan area. 2 To highlight two or more features or characteristics that are not listed one after the other, press and hold down the Ctrl key and click on each feature or characteristic in turn. You deselect by clicking on a highlighted feature or characteristic. To undo the entire selection, release the Ctrl key and click on any point outside the highlight. 3 To highlight a block of two or more features or characteristics listed one after the other: Click on the first feature or characteristic you want to highlight. Press and hold down the Ctrl key and click on the last feature or characteristic you want to highlight. When you highlight a feature or characteristic, the button and text are highlighted by a dark gray background. When you select a characteristic, its features in the CAD window turn a different color. 4 Double click with the left mouse button on the icon in the measurement plan area. The feature or characteristic definition template, as appropriate, appears on the screen.
Adding Features or Characteristics to a Measurement Plan

You can add a feature to your measurement plan at any time. You have several options. For more information, see Defining Features on page 5-2 You can add a characteristic to your measurement plan at any time. You have two options. For more information, see Defining Characteristics on page 6-7.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
7-7
Positioning Features in the List of Characteristics

The screen will display either the list of features or the list of characteristics, but not both together. Bear in mind, however, that you can define features even when the list of characteristics is displayed. Calypso automatically places new features in the list of characteristics if it is open. Result: A feature added to the list of characteristics in this way is measured even if it is not assigned to a characteristic this could not happen if the feature was included only in the list of features. New characteristics, in contrast, are automatically positioned in the list of characteristics even if the list is not currently displayed. The button above the list is a toggle for switching from one list to the other.
How to Move Features or Characteristics

You can change the order of the features and characteristics in the list in the measurement plan area. The order is more important for the features, because the list order determines the order in which the characteristics are checked by the CMM when the measurement plan is executed. To move a feature or characteristic Use the Cut and Paste buttons.
How to Copy Features or Characteristics

You can make copies of a feature or characteristic and then paste it into the corresponding list. This is a quick way to add another feature or characteristic of the same type. Copying characteristics works well if you have multiple items that have similar tolerances with only minor changes to the characteristic definition. The features copied, however, do not contain the measured data in the original feature only the nominal data. To copy a feature or characteristic 1 Click on the item to highlight it and then click on the Copy button. 2 Click on the new position in the list and then click on the Paste button. The feature or characteristic is pasted into the list at the position you selected. 3 To make additional copies of the same item, click on the Paste button again.
7-8
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4 You can also copy features or characteristics from one measurement plan to another: Open the appropriate measurement plan. Paste the feature or characteristic into the measurement plan at the appropriate position.
Mirroring a Measurement Plan

You can mirror an entire measurement plan across a coordinate axis of the base alignment. This means that all features with their strategies (e. g. probing points) are mirrored on the plane formed by the other two coordinate axes.
About mirroring
Bear the following in mind: No actual values are mirrored. The actual values are deleted prior to mirroring. After mirroring, the nominals of the characteristics that mirroring can change (these include distances and X values, for example) are updated. You have to assign probes to the mirrored measurement plan manually.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
7-9
The coordinate systems are not mirrored, because the mirrored direction of rotation would be counterclockwise. The coordinate systems are transformed: only the coordinate origin (zero point) is mirrored, the directions of the axes remain unchanged, relative to the base alignment.
NOTE
hss
The base alignment is unaffected by the transformation. Caution Parameters and patterns are not mirrored. If your measurement plan contains parameters or patterns, they have to be reentered after the measurement plan has been mirrored.
!
hss
How to Mirror a Measurement Plan

To mirror a measurement plan: 1 Open the measurement plan you want to mirror. 2 Select CNC Measurement Plan Functions Mirror Measurement Plan. The Mirror Measurement Plan dialog box appears on the screen.
3 Click on Mirror to Plane and select the mirror axis. 4 Go to Change Probe Data and select a different probe, if applicable. The data applicable to your selection is listed in the display area.
7-10
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5 Click OK to confirm your selection. The measurement plan is mirrored. The image in the CAD window is refreshed; the new view shows you the workpiece after mirroring. 6 Save the mirrored measurement plan by selecting File Save or by selecting File Save As if you want to keep the old, unmirrored measurement plan as well.
How to Delete Features or Characteristics

You can remove measured features and characteristics from the measurement plan in a variety of ways: Cut an element The element that was last cut can be pasted into the same or another location using Paste. Move an element to the Waste Basket All of the elements which were dragged with the mouse to the Waste Basket icon will be gathered in the Waste Basket (spanning all measurement plans). They can be moved to any location in any measurement plan. Delete an element for good To cut a feature or characteristic: 1 Click on the feature or characteristic you want to delete. 2 Click on the Cut button. The feature or characteristic is removed from the measurement plan and is placed on the clipboard. To place a feature in the Waste Basket: 1 Use the mouse to drag the feature onto the Waste Basket icon. Items in the Waste Basket can be reinserted with the mouse. To delete a feature or characteristic for good: 1 Click on the feature or characteristic you want to delete forever. 2 In the popup menu, select Delete. The feature or characteristic will be deleted.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
7-11
How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters with the Mouse

If you prefer using the mouse to enter text and digit strings, Calypso can display an input box with a keyboard. You generate entries in the input boxes by pointing to the individual keys with the mouse pointer and clicking. To activate this functionality: 1 Select View Configuration. The Datum Features dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Tick the Typewriter check box. 3 Click on Close. The dialog box closes. From now on, the Typewriter dialog box will appear on the screen whenever a change is made to an input field.
How to Work with the Waste Basket

All of the elements which were dragged with the mouse to the Waste Basket icon will be gathered in the Waste Basket (spanning all measurement plans). To view the contents of the Waste Basket: 1 Click on the Waste Basket button To recover an item from the Waste Basket: 1 Click on the Waste Basket button. The contents are displayed. 2 Mark the corresponding item and drag it into the measurement plan area. A copy of the feature will be added in the measurement plan area while the original copy will remain in the Waste Basket.
7-12
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
To delete an item from the Waste Basket: 1 Click on the Waste Basket button 2 Mark the desired item and select Delete in the popup menu. The item is deleted from the Waste Basket.
Grouping and Ungrouping Characteristics

Sometimes a measurement plan has so many characteristics that it gets cumbersome to view and edit. In that case, you can group certain characteristics, which combines all the individual characteristics that you select into one single group characteristic. If you want to evaluate only certain features, you define a feature group, known as a mini-plan, within the measurement plan. This allows you to check the mini-plan and run it, but leaves the characteristics unchanged in the measurement plan area. You can read about how to create these groups and ungroup them in Defining the Scope of Measurement on page 8-2.
How to Rename Features, Characteristics and Groups

You can name each symbol in the measurement plan area.
NOTE
hss
You should name features before you define them (probe them, in other words). When you subsequently rename a feature, you have to redefine a characteristic associated with it. To rename a feature, characteristic or feature group listed in the measurement plan area: 1 Click on the feature or characteristic button that you want to rename. 2 Double click on the icon. This opens the definition template of the feature. - or Right-click and select Rename from the popup menu. The Name/Comment window is displayed. 3 Overwrite the name of the feature in the Name field. You can also use the Comment field to enter a comment, which will appear on any measurement plan report that contains this characteristic. 4 Click on OK to confirm. The button now has the name you just entered.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
7-13
How to Search for a Measurement Plan Feature

You can look for a specific feature or characteristic in a measurement plan. Please be aware that the search function always checks in the currently displayed list, either in the list of features or list of characteristics. To look for an item in a measurement plan: 1 Click on the Search button. The Search dialog box will appear.
2 Enter the name of the desired item in the Find What field. If you want to differentiate between cases, click on the Match Case check box. If you want to look for complete words only, click on the Match whole word only check box. 3 Click on the Find Next button. Calypso looks through the list from top to bottom. When a matching item is found, it is marked in the list. 4 If the correct item has not been found, click on Find Next until you find the item. Calypso always starts the search from the last highlight in the list going downwards. 5 If you want to start from the beginning, click on the Start at top button. The items found in the search are displayed in a picklist.
7-14
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
The Toolboxes
The Toolboxes
With toolboxes, you can easily insert features and characteristics into your measurement plan. Using a toolbox gives you a quick way to access features, characteristics and utilities. You can also use the drag&drop functionality to create custom toolboxes that contain only the items that you most frequently use. This toolbox contains most of Calypsos features, characteristics and utilities and is part of a window called Tool Box Builder. The Toolbox Builder also allows you to create custom toolboxes.
Here are the details on working with tool boxes: The element groups are listed in the column on the left. When you select an element group, its contents are listed in the middle column. To move an item from the toolbox to your measurement plan, you simply click and hold the left mouse button on the item, drag it over to the measurement plan area on the left of the screen, and release the mouse button. The right column of the Toolbox Builder is where you set up custom toolboxes. Just like any other dialog box in Windows, you can close a toolbox by clicking on the Close button in the title bar.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
7-15
Creating and Using Custom Toolboxes

To create a custom toolbox, you first need to open the Toolbox Builder and the Master Toolbox.
NOTE
hss
Once you have saved a custom toolbox and then exited the Toolbox Builder, there is no way to edit or change the custom toolbox (other than deleting it and starting again from scratch). To create a custom toolbox, follow these steps: 1 Click on the Open Selected Tool Box(es) button. The Toolbox Selector dialog box appears on the screen.
If you have not defined any custom toolboxes, only the Master Toolbox is listed. 2 Highlight Master Tool Box and click on Open. 3 Name your new toolbox: Delete the unnamed label and type a name for the toolbox. 4 This name can be any combination of letters, numbers and spaces. Click and hold the left mouse button on the desired toolbox button and drag it over to the right column. Keep in mind: Custom toolboxes do not have separate groups for buttons. All buttons are placed in the same list. You cannot change the order of items in the custom toolbox (except to delete an item and add it to the bottom of the list). To delete an item, click on the item to highlight it and select File Delete from the menu bar of the dialog box. 5 Select Tool Box Builder File Save. The toolbox configuration you put together is saved.
7-16
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
The Toolboxes
How to Work with a Custom Toolbox

A custom toolbox contains the items you need most frequently in your day-to-day work. 1 Click on the Open Selected Tool Box(es) button. The Toolbox Selector dialog box appears on the screen. 2 Highlight your toolbox and click on Open. The Toolbox Builder dialog box appears on the screen. 3 To move the items you need from the toolbox to your measurement plan, click an item, hold down the left mouse button and drag the item into the measurement plan area. Release the mouse button. 4 As soon as you click anywhere else on the User Desk, the toolboxes are hidden. To display them again, click on the Select Toolboxes button.
Deleting a Custom Toolbox

To delete a custom toolbox, follow these steps: 1 Click on the Open Selected Tool Box(es) button. The Toolbox Selector dialog box appears on the screen. 2 Highlight Master Tool Box and click on Open. 3 Select File Delete from the menu bar of the dialog box. 4 At the list of custom toolboxes, click on the appropriate toolbox to highlight it, then click OK. The toolbox has now been deleted.
Sizing and Moving Toolboxes

Just as with any window in Windows NT, you can enlarge custom toolboxes or the Toolbox Builder window, and you can also make them smaller or move them: To resize a toolbox, follow these steps: 1 Move the mouse pointer to the corner of the window in question until it changes to an arrow with two points. 2 Then click on the left mouse button and drag the window in or out to make it smaller or larger.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
7-17
To move a toolbox, follow these steps: 1 Click on the left mouse button on the title bar, and hold down the mouse button. Move the mouse to drag the box to another position. 2 Release the mouse button when the box is where you want it.
7-18
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Editing a Measurement Plan

The measurement plan editors (for features and characteristics) provide you with a quick and easy way of checking and, if necessary, changing important settings. You can choose whether to apply your changes to: selected features or characteristics, or the higher-order measurement plan setting. Calypso has an editor for features (Prerequisites Measurement Plan Editor - Features) and an editor for characteristics (Prerequisites Measurement Plan Editor - Characteristics). For more information about the individual dialog elements in both dialog boxes, please see in Measurement Plan Editor Features and Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics in the Calypso Online Help, and also Editing the Probe Routes on page 7-22
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
7-19
Example: Checking and Changing the Operating Mode in the Settings Editor
This example demonstrates how to check and change the operating mode: 1 Select Prerequisites Measurement Plan Editor - Features to open the features editor.
List of settings
List of defaults
Feature name Feature type Column of currently valid settings
2 Go to the list of settings at the top left and select the section for which you want to view or change the settings. The currently valid settings appear in the column on the right. 3 To change the current settings, select the feature to which you want the change to apply: For the higher-order measurement plan setting: Activate the Apply to all defaults of this plan check box. For selected features: Click on the feature of your choice in the column on the left.
7-20
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
You can mark a block of features (e.g. features 1 to 5) by holding down Shift and highlighting them with the mouse, or you can mark individual features (e.g. features 1, 3 and 5) by holding down Ctrl and highlighting them with the mouse. 4 Select the value for the new setting from the Set To list. The highlighted features are immediately updated in the list of currently valid settings. 5 Restart the procedure at step 2 if you want to view or change settings for other sections as well. 6 Click on OK. The changed settings are accepted and the Measurement Plan Editor - Features dialog box is closed.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
7-21
Editing the Probe Routes

Calypso needs probe routes in order to move the probe around the workpiece without colliding during automatic runs (CNC). Calypso generates the routes automatically, if clearance planes were defined around the workpiece (see Defining the Clearance Planes on page 4-72. You may be able to optimize the routes, depending on the geometry of the workpiece and the resulting positions of the features. You also have the option of changing the coordinates for the route to a feature. This is useful, for example, if you want to ensure that the probing points for a cylinder are uniformly spaced. The tasks involved in checking and optimizing the routes are as follows: Checking the Routes on page 7-25 Editing Routes between Features on page 7-26 Editing Routes within a Feature on page 7-31.
About Probe Routes

Probe routes in Calypso can be divided into two groups: the routes between features and the routes within features. Terms closely related with this concept include clearance plane, clearance group, retract plane, clearance distance and retract distance these terms are explained briefly below. Broadly speaking, routes contain all the relevant data for the CMM to reach and probe the feature without collision. Along with the coordinates for the probing points, this data set can also include data for intermediate positions, for table control, for stylus changes, and so on. The result is a route comparable with a detailed description of how to find a particular building on a particular street in a large city.
Routes between Features

The routes between features define how the probe head moves from one feature to the next. These routes are computed on the fly during a CNC run and depend on the following parameters: Current status (current position referenced to the probe, associated clearance group, current probe, ...) Settings for the clearance group (retract plane defined or not, ...)
7-22
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Clearance planes (sizes, edge blocking) Other (probe-specific data, position of a probe-changer magazine, ...).
Routes within a Feature

The routes within a feature influence the path traced by the probe head in carrying out the measurement strategy defined for a feature. These routes comprise: Defined probing points, intermediate positions, scanning paths Approach and departure positions of the probe head relative to a feature and possible intermediate positions between the probing points. These components of the route are computed on the fly during the CNC run and depend on the following parameters: the clearance distance, i.e. the height of the first intermediate position in axial direction or normal vector direction, the retract distance, i.e. the distance of the generated intermediate position from the probing point in the probing direction.
Clearance Planes/Clearance Groups

When it is defined, each feature is automatically assigned a particular clearance plane. This assignment defines the approach position, i.e. the side of the clearance planes on which the probe head is located when approaching the feature. Feature orientation (e.g. direction of cylinder axis or normal of a plane) is of no consequence in this respect, and the same applies to the probing direction at the feature.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
7-23
Calypso distinguishes between clearance planes (SE) and clearance groups (SG). The clearance planes are assigned when the clearance planes are defined (see Defining the Clearance Planes on page 4-72). The normals of the clearance planes bear designations corresponding to the directions of the coordinate axes (positive or negative), referenced to the base alignment of the workpiece.
Clearance group SG+Z1 Clearance plane SE+Z
Clearance group SG+Z2
A clearance group is akin to a local clearance space in which two or more features can be combined. This is a way of avoiding unnecessary retractions of the probe head to the clearance plane. A clearance group, hierarchically speaking, is below a clearance plane (parent group) from which the features of the clearance group in question are reached.
7-24
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Retract Planes
The illustration below shows what a retract plane signifies:
SE+Z
Retract plane
SG+Z2
It is not necessary to define a retract plane if the approach and departure positions of all features in a clearance group are such that they can be reached without collision when the head moves from one to the other. This means that features on different sides of a common interior space can be assigned to the same clearance plane.
Checking the Routes

When a measurement plan is created, some settings of crucial importance in terms of navigation are automatically entered in the feature. These settings (e.g. clearance group, clearance distance, ...), however, are merely defaults: prior to the first CNC run you must check and, if necessary, change these settings.
!
hss
Caution There is no guarantee that the run will be collision-free if you fail to check the defaults. The most practical procedure for checking the defaults is described below: When you program the feature, check the clearance plane, the clearance distance and the retract distance. Change the default settings if necessary. (for more information see Clearance Data in the Calypso Online Help) The criterion for the correct clearance plane is the position of the probe head relative to the clearance planes (on the approach to the first intermediate position of the feature in question).
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
7-25
When you finish programming the measurement plan, select Prerequisites Clearance Planes and click on the Test Drive To The Selected Clearance Plane button to perform a test move to (see How to Test the Clearance Planes on page 4-76). This is your opportunity to recheck the assignment of features to clearance planes in the CAD model.
!
hss
Caution Other routes might be generated, depending on the characteristics selected or if the run takes place without a result reset. Perform the first CNC run at reduced speed. If routing turns out to be poor, click on the Help button in the Start Measurement dialog box and proceed in accordance with the instructions.
Editing Routes between Features

On routes between features, the intermediate position for the probe head is computed from the current position and the approach position for the next feature.
NOTE
hss
Consider edge blocking: It could be either a hindrance or a help, depending on the circumstances (see How to Close Edges on page 4-77). The activities which influence the routes between features are as follows: How to Define Clearance Groups on page 7-26 Assigning Clearance Planes and Clearance Groups on page 7-28 How to Define the Retract Plane in a Clearance Group on page 7-30
How to Define Clearance Groups

When you define clearance groups, remember that all the features in a group must be reachable from each other and from a higher-order clearance plane.
7-26
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
To define a clearance group: 1 Select CNC Navigation Define Clearance Group. The Define Sub Clearance dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Click on the New button. Type a name for the new clearance group into the input field. If the name includes a coordinate (e.g. HoleB -X), the name of the parent group is entered by default. 3 To assign the clearance group a different clearance plane, click on the arrow beside the picklist headed Parent Group. Press and hold down the mouse button and select the clearance plane (SE) you need by highlighting it and then releasing the mouse button. 4 Click on OK. The dialog box closes.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
7-27
How to Delete a Clearance Group

You can delete a clearance group when you no longer need it. 1 Select CNC Navigation Define Clearance Group. The Define Sub Clearance dialog box appears on the screen.
2 In the Clearance Group list, select the group you want to delete. 3 Click on Delete. 4 Click on OK. The clearance group is deleted.
Assigning Clearance Planes and Clearance Groups

A feature can often have different clearance planes. Automatic assignment does not always result in optimized routes, so you have the option of changing the assignment or defining new clearance groups. To assign clearance planes or clearance groups: 1 Double-click on the icon of the feature to which the assignment will apply. The definition template is opened. 2 Click on Strategy. The Strategy dialog box is opened.
7-28
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
3 In the strategy list, double-click on Clearance Data. The Clearance Data dialog box appears on the screen.
The elements that make up this dialog box are described in Clearance Data in the Calypso Online Help. 4 To reassign the clearance plane or clearance group, click on the arrow beside the Clearance Group picklist. 5 Hold down the mouse button and select the clearance plane (CP) or clearance group (SCP) of your choice by highlighting it and then releasing the mouse button. The new clearance plane or clearance group is now assigned to the feature and is used in the next automatic CNC run.
Editing two or more features
Use the Features Settings Editor if you want to assign clearance planes or clearance groups to more than one feature at a time (see How to Edit Measurement Plan Settings on page 4-78).
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
7-29
How to Define the Retract Plane in a Clearance Group

All features in a clearance group must be reachable from each other and from the higher-order clearance plane. To ensure this collisionfree accessibility, you can define a retract plane within a clearance group. To define a retract plane within a clearance group: 1 Select CNC Navigation Define Clearance Group. The Define Sub Clearance dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Activate the Retract To Inner Plane check box. The field labeled Clearance Distance Probe Part Or Enter Data is now active. 3 Type in the height of the retract plane relative to the datum of the base alignment (perpendicular to the higher-order clearance plane). 4 Click on OK. The retract plane is defined and the dialog box closes.
7-30
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Editing Routes within a Feature

The routes within a feature define the path followed by the probe head from one probing point to the next. Your options for editing the routes within a feature are described in the following sections: How to Move the Approach Position Closer to the Feature on page 7-31. How to Change the Point List on page 5-64, in order to define optimum probing points, for example.
How to Move the Approach Position Closer to the Feature

The distance separating the approach position from the feature is defined by the Clearance Distance parameter. If the clearance distance for a feature is excessive, the result can be collisions in narrow grooves or gaps, because when it attempts to move to the clearance distance the probe comes into contact with the material opposite. To move the approach position closer to the workpiece: 1 Open the definition template of the feature in question by doubleclicking on the features icon. 2 Click on Strategy. The Strategy dialog box appears on the screen.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
7-31
3 In the strategy list, click on Clearance Data. The Clearance Data dialog box appears on the screen.
The elements that make up this dialog box are described in Clearance Data in the Calypso Online Help. 4 Check that the correct clearance group is selected. 5 Click on the Clearance Distance check box to deactivate the default. 6 Type the new clearance distance into the input field. 7 Click OK to close the dialog box. The approach position should now be close enough to the feature to improve the route.
7-32
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Using the Probe Changer

The CMMs automatic probe changer allows you to change probes without any manual intervention. Before you execute the automatic changing of probes, you need to define for Calypso the exact configuration and location of the probe changer rack. Calypso saves the probe used to measure a feature along with the feature. If it is necessary to change probes between features, Calypso can do this automatically. The following preconditions, however, must be satisfied:
Preconditions
Calypso must know that there is a probe changer. Additionally, the appropriate probe must be in the probe changer.
Procedure
To configure the probe changer: Specify the probe changer in the system settings (once-only operation) Determine the length of the reference stylus (once-only operation), (not applicable to RDS, MCR20 and SCR200) RDS only: determine the RDS geometry In the Change Probe dialog box, insert an icon for each holder (MCR20 and SCR200: for one holder only, all others are automatically created when the magazine is calibrated) Set the approach parameters Determine the position of each holder (MCR20 and SCR200: calibrate the magazine) Assign probes to holders The following sections will walk you through these steps. Once these steps have been performed, they do not have to be repeated as long as the probe changer is not changed in any way, for example by being moved. When the automatic probe changer is properly configured, you can easily execute an automatic change of probes, as described in the section.
Renishaw MCR20 Probe Changer

The MCR20 probe-changer magazine consists of a stand and a horizontal beam with six holders. It can be approached from the four approach directions (+X, -X, +Y, -Y).
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
7-33
!
hss
Caution Always comply with the instructions in the user guide supplied with the MCR20. The Renishaw User Manual states that the MCR20 has to be aligned with a machine coordinate axis. Deviation of up to 0.25 mm from the machine axis over the width of the magazine (200 mm) is tolerated. On account of the special design of the MCR20, you must bear the following in mind: After the Store Probe operation, the probe head moves only to the transfer point, because without a measuring module movement is restricted to the zone of magnetic force movement without a measuring module outside the MCR20s zone of magnetic force causes the controller to issue collision messages. No machine operations are triggered by a manual probe change with the MCR20. If the RDS is used with TP20, you cannot change the RDS plate manually. In the pickup process the probe-change solenoids of an index head, if fitted, are not driven.
NOTE
hss
!
hss
Caution Never change the probe without calling the manual or automatic probe-change function (e.g. by selecting another probe in the qualification dialog and changing the probe by hand). Strong magnets affect the TP20 probe head. If probing fails switch off the solenoids if necessary or consult the user guide supplied with the TP20/Renishaw. Whenever possible, always use the manual or automatic probechange function to change probes with the TP20 and MCR20, because this is the only way that Calypso can monitor the status of the probe head (probe in probe head or probe not in probe head).
SCR200 Probe Changer

The SCR200 probe-changer magazine consists of a stand and a horizontal beam with six holders. It can be approached from the four approach directions (+X, -X, +Y, -Y).
!
hss
Caution Always comply with the instructions in the user guide supplied with the SCR200. On account of the special design of the SCR200, you must bear the following in mind:
7-34
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
The SCR200 has a photoelectric barrier that is interrupted when a probe change takes place. Movements between the individual holders take place inside the space delimited by the photoelectric barrier. The probe does not move out of this space until the change has been completed.
!
hss
Caution If the photoelectric barrier is interrupted during a CNC run, the controller switches permanently to closed contact with probe head. If this happens the probe head no longer recognizes probings and collision is inevitable. Movement without a measuring module outside the zone delimited by the photoelectric barrier is possible, but there is no protection against collision. Consequently, it is best not to perform movements with the machine if you change probes manually. If the machine is equipped with an articulated probe head from Renishaw (PH10), you must also bear the following in mind: If you have qualified probe positions that could cause a collision with the probe-changer magazine when probes are subsequently changed, you must use Approach Parameters to change the parameters for the holders in question. The route above or in front of the holder must be parameterized in such a way that the head can rotate before and after the probe change without any risk of collision.
!
hss
Caution Never change the probe without calling the manual or automatic probe-change function (e.g. by selecting another probe in the qualification dialog and changing the probe by hand). Whenever possible, always use the manual or automatic probechange function to change probes with the TP200 and SCR200, because this is the only way that Calypso can monitor the status of the probe head (probe in probe head or probe not in probe head).
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
7-35
Probe Changer for RDS

The illustration shows you what distances you need between the holders as well as the probe movement when removing a stylus.
Probe movement when removing a stylus
The movement strategy to a holder is set up so that the probe changer is outside of the measurement area. Please be aware that a minimum distance of 150 mm (6 in.) between the holders is necessary. An empty area of 120 mm (4 in.) below the holder is necessary. Without the empty area, it is not possible to mount a lateral stylus in the RST probe.
Defining the RDS Geometry

Before you can measure the probe changer magazine for the RDS, you first have to define the geometry of the RDS.
Procedure
To define the geometry: Compute the slot distance from the virtual axis intersection of the RDS axes. Calibrate the four preset angle settings for the RDS. Calypso uses this information to compute the intersection of the axes.
7-36
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
How to Define the RDS Slot Distance

The slot distance is necessary only for the startup of the RDS probe changer and need only be defined once. The illustration shows an overview of the definition of the slot distance X. The stylus is shown from above, e.g. from +Z.
2
X
RDS probe at top in position 2
Reference edge
Probe head at top in Position 1
RDS probe at top in position 1
Calypso helps you when defining the slot distance with a dialog. If you know the value of the slot distance (offset), you can enter this directly in the field Slot Distance. To define the RDS slot distance: 1 Find an appropriate vertical reference edge. An appropriate reference edge must be parallel to the machine coordinates. 2 Position the RDS probe so that the outer slot wall is in a plane with the reference plane. In the above illustration, this is position 1. 3 Click on Read Position. Calypso saves the current probe position. 4 Turn the RDS 180 around its A axis. In the illustration this is position 2. 5 Reposition the RDS probe so that the outer slot wall is in a plane with the reference plane.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
7-37
6 Click on Read Position. Calypso saves the current probe position. 7 Check the results in the field Slot Distance. Typical values are around 38 mm (1 in.).
How to Define the Axis Intersection
The position of a holder is always based on the axis intersection of the two rotational axes of the RDS. Calypso must therefore firs calculate the intersection of these axes. Before Calypso can do this, you must calibrate the four additional probe positions of the master probe (refPos1 to refPos4) (styli 2 to 5): A/B = 0/90 A/B = 0/-90 A/B = 90/0 A/B = -90/0
Setting up the Initial Probe Changer Configuration

You must inform Calypso that an automatic probe changer is installed, and define the type. All other settings (e.g. defining holders) and functions of the probe changer are defined with Prerequisites Automatic Probe Changer. To configure the automatic probe changer: 1 Select Extras Workroom CMM. The System Set Up dialog will be opened with the CMM Configuration notebook. 2 Click on Probe Change. 3 Activate the Probe Changer Exists check box if it is not already activated. 4 Click on the arrow for the Construction list, hold down the mouse button and select the correct entry for your holder: Scanning Head, Old Scanning Head or ProMax (Scanning Head) for a scanning probe head Trigger Head for a trigger probe head (ST / ST3 from Zeiss) RDS for an RDS MCR20 for an MCR20 SCR200 for an SCR200 5 Click OK if you are ready to save the settings and close the window.
7-38
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
6 If you want to make more changes to the CMM configuration, click Apply. 7 Select the Controller bookmark and click on the Connect button to initialize the CMM. The CMM now also has the information it needs about probe changes.
Defining the Master Probe Length

If you are using a magazine for measuring or trigger probes, you have to define the length of the master probe. This is important, because the position of every single holder in the probe changer is defined relatively to the machine coordinate system and the adapter plate on the probe head. To locate a holder, use the master stylus. Calypso knows the length of the master probe from this procedure.
NOTE
hss
Magazines for RDS probes can be measured with any calibrated stylus. You cannot use the automatic probe change functionality for RDS with an MCR20, only the TP20 probe modules can be changed. Follow these steps to define the length of the reference probe: 1 Insert the reference probe (see How to Install a Probe on page 4-11) 2 Select Prerequisites Automatic Probe Changer. The Automatic Probe Change dialog box appears on the screen.
NOTE
hss
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
7-39
3 Click on Length of Master Probe.. 4 A prompt appears, asking you whether the reference probe has been inserted. Check the control panel to make sure that stylus 1 is selected and click on OK. 5 At the prompt to probe on the adapter plate, use the joysticks to touch the adapter plate to the top surface of any holder. The area on the plate to touch the top surface of the holder is the outer perimeter of the plate where it would naturally contact the holder when placed in it. 6 At the prompt to probe with the stylus, use the joysticks to probe the same place on the holder, using the stylus tip this time. The length of the reference stylus is shown in a separate box. 7 Click OK to close the dialog box. Calypso now knows the length of the master probe. The locations of the holders can now be defined.
Adding Holders to the Probe Changer Configuration

The holders in the probe changer that you want to use have to be added to the configuration of the probe changer on your system. When you add a holder it appears as an icon in the Automatic Probe Changer window.
NOTE
hss
You can use only one MCR20 or SCR200 with 6 holders in conjunction with the CMM. You do not need to add holders in the case of the MCR20 or SCR200 Calypso automatically adds six new holders in the Automatic Probe Changer dialog box. To add a holder: 1 Select Prerequisites Automatic Probe Changer. The Automatic Probe Changer window opens. 2 Click on the arrow for the Edit list and select Add Holder. You are prompted to enter a name for the holder.
7-40
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
3 Click in the input box, enter a new name and click OK to confirm your entry and proceed. An icon for this holder, accompanied by the name you assigned, appears in the Automatic Probe Changer window.
4 Add more holders as necessary, until the configuration of your probe changer in the system matches that at the CMM. When you create a new holder, a default is defined for the intermediate position before and after probe changes: this is a safety precaution. You can change the default if a lower value is preferable (see How to Check or Change Approach Parameters on page 7-42). Before you can set the positions of the new holders in the machine coordinate system, you first have to determine the approach parameters.
The Approach Parameters for the Probe Changer

Configuring the automatic probe changer also involves setting the approach parameters that are used to define the clearance distances from the probe holder rack. These distances are defined from each given position (e. g. before entry into the rack) to the midpoint of the probe head. The Position Over Holder distance is from the probe adapter plate (on the bottom of the probe head) to the top of the rack. The default value is 0 mm.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
7-41
You can change the settings for each holder. If you need to change these distances because of part or probe clearance problems, please be aware of how close the movements are around the probe holders and the rack.
Datum for approach parameters

The approach parameters for all probe changers are referenced to the transfer point to the macro in front of the holder, and not the toholder point itself. If you enter Position Before Holder = 0, the probe head moves directly to the transfer position. The Approach In direction is the direction the CMM must travel in to access the probe holder. If your probe rack is at the back of the CMM, the approach direction will be in the positive Y-axis. If it is on the left side of the CMM, the approach will be in the negative X-axis.
!
hss
Caution An articulating probe head moves the probe to the intermediate position. The values for Position Before Holder, Position After Holder and Position Over Holder must be set such as to ensure collision-free rotation for every probe used.
The Approach for RDS

The illustration shows a probe changer magazine for RDS probes. The arrow shows how the approach has to be defined.
How to Check or Change Approach Parameters

Follow these steps to view or change the approach parameters: 1 Select Prerequisites Automatic Probe Changer. The Automatic Probe Change dialog box appears on the screen. 2 Click on the holder you want to change.
7-42
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
3 (MCR20 only): In the Edit list, select Edit Orientation of Changer and enter the approach direction. This setting applies to all the changers probe holders. 4 In the Changer list, select Approach Parameters. The window with the approach parameters is opened.
If you have an MCR20 or an SCR200, the Approach Direction is set to a default that you cannot change here. You can enter the other values. 5 To change a value: Click in the input box and highlight the current value. Type in the new value. 6 Click on OK. The settings are saved and the window is closed.
How to Define the Position of a Holder

Every time a holder is created in a probe changer, the position has to be defined in the machines system of coordinates. In the case of the MCR20 and the SCR200, all holders are calibrated jointly in a single operation (see How to Define the Holder Positions of an MCR20 on page 7-44).
!
hss
Caution The approach direction has to be set before you define the position of a holder (see The Approach Parameters for the Probe Changer on page 7-41). Risk of collision if this procedure is not adopted. To define the position of a holder: 1 Select Prerequisites Automatic Probe Changer. The Automatic Probe Change dialog box appears on the screen.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
7-43
2 Click on the icon of the holder whose position you want to define. The icon turns green. 3 In the Changer list, select Define Holder Location. 4 When you see the prompt asking whether you want to overwrite the existing position, click on OK. You are prompted to select the name of the probe for this holder. 5 If no probe has been qualified yet and you merely want to define the position of the holder, click on Cancel. If you already know which probe you want to assign to the holder, select the probes name and click on OK to confirm.
NOTE
hss
Do not click on OK as long as you have not completed the following step. In addition, ensure that the dust cover is open. 6 Calypso reacts differently, depending on which type of probe head is installed: With a trigger probe head you are asked to bring the stylus into the center of the circle. Ensure that you measure the holder location in the area between the hexagon screw head and the surface. With a measuring probe head, a cone on the side of the holder is located by self-center probing. With Renishaw probe heads (TP20 and TP200), you are prompted to probe points on the MCR20 or SCR200. With a RDS probe head, the back and side reference areas are automatically probed after probing the upper reference area. When the measurement is finished, you will see a symbol for the probe head. The name is below the symbol. 7 Repeat these steps for every holder which has not yet been defined.
How to Define the Holder Positions of an MCR20

All the holders of an MCR20 are calibrated at once.
!
hss
Caution Before you define the holder positions of the MCR20, the covers must be opened and the approach direction set (see The Approach Parameters for the Probe Changer on page 7-41). Risk of collision if this procedure is not adopted.
7-44
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
To define the holder positions of the MCR20: 1 Open the covers of the MCR20. 2 Select Prerequisites Automatic Probe Changer. The Automatic Probe Change dialog box appears on the screen. 3 Click on a holder icon in the Automatic Probe Changer window. 4 In the Changer list, select Define Holder Location.
!
hss
Caution Always use the PSR2 probe without extension /2 mm head, 20 mm shank) for the qualification procedure. The deviation between P1 and P2 in the Y coordinate (for approach direction in Y) must not be more than 0.2 mm (see the user guide for the MCR20). You are prompted to enter the name of the probe for this holder. 5 If no probe has been qualified yet and you merely want to define the position of the holder, click on Cancel. If you already know which probe you want to assign to the holder, select the probes name and click on OK to confirm. The information about the probe refer only to the holder active at the start of the qualification procedure. 6 Click OK when you see the prompt asking you whether you want to overwrite the existing holders and add undefined holders. If the MCR20 probe changer is selected, only the MCR20 holders are displayed. Holders of other types for this machine configuration are deleted.
!
hss
Caution Always use Reduced Speed (potentiometer) for movement, as otherwise there is a risk of collision.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
7-45
7 Probe point 1 on the left end face of the MCR20 as prompted.

P5 P4 P3
1
2
3
4
5
6
P6 P7 P1 Z+ Y+ P2
X+
Calypso takes care of everything else automatically. When the qualification is completed, all six holder positions of the MCR20 are labeled from 1 to 6. 8 Close the covers when prompted. The covers have to be closed so that the magnets mounted in them can function correctly and keep the switching contact closed during probe changes. 9 Click on OK. The dialog box closes.
How to Define the Holder Positions of an SCR200

All the holders of an SCR200 are calibrated at once.
!
hss
Caution Before you define the holder positions of the SCR200, the covers must be opened and the approach direction set. The cable between SCR200 and SI200 (controller for TP200) must be disconnected for the calibration process, in order to interrupt the signal from the photoelectric barrier (see The Approach Parameters for the Probe Changer on page 7-41). Risk of collision if this procedure is not adopted.
7-46
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
To define the holder positions of the SCR200: 1 Open the covers of the SCR200. 2 Select Prerequisites Automatic Probe Changer. The Automatic Probe Change dialog box appears on the screen. 3 Click on a holder icon in the Automatic Probe Changer window. 4 In the Changer list, select Define Holder Location.
!
hss
Caution Always use the PSR2 probe without extension /2 mm head, 20 mm shank) for the qualification procedure. The deviation between P1 and P2 in the Y coordinate (for approach direction in Y) must not be more than 0.25 mm (see the user guide for the SCR200). You are prompted to enter the name of the probe for this holder. 5 If no probe has been qualified yet and you merely want to define the position of the holder, click on Cancel. If you already know which probe you want to assign to the holder, select the probes name and click on OK to confirm. The information about the probe refer only to the holder active at the start of the qualification procedure. 6 Click OK when you see the prompt asking you whether you want to overwrite the existing holders and add undefined holders. If the SCR200 probe changer is selected, only the SCR200 holders are displayed. Holders of other types for this machine configuration are deleted.
!
hss
Caution Always use Reduced Speed (potentiometer) for movement, as otherwise there is a risk of collision.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
7-47
7 Probe point 1 on the left end face of the SCR200 as prompted.

P5 P4 P3
1
2
3
4
5
6
P6 P7 P1 Z+ Y+ P2
X+
Calypso takes care of everything else automatically. When the qualification is completed, all six holder positions of the SCR200 are labeled from 1 to 6. 8 Close the covers when prompted and reconnect the cable between the SCR200 and the SI200 to reactivate the photoelectric barrier. 9 Click on OK. The dialog box closes.
How to Assign a Probe to a Holder

In this step, you define which probe will belong to which holder.
NOTE
hss
A probe has to be qualified before you can assign it to a holder. Qualify the probes in accordance with the instructions in How to Qualify a Stylus on page 4-22. To assign a qualified probe to a holder: 1 Select Prerequisites Automatic Probe Changer. The Automatic Probe Change dialog box appears on the screen. 2 Select the holder to which you want to assign the probe by clicking its icon. The icon turns green.
7-48
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
3 In the Changer list, select Assign Probe to Selected Holder. A list of all qualified probes is displayed. 4 Select the name of the probe you want to assign to the holder, and click on OK to confirm your choice. The probe is assigned, and by way of confirmation the probe name appears below the icon for the holder. 5 Repeat the above steps for the holders to which no probe has been assigned as yet.
How to Perform an Automatic Probe Change
!
hss
Caution When storing or getting a probe for the first time, you should be prepared to cancel the procedure. If the approach parameters are incorrect, you can avoid a possible collision by canceling. To automatically change between probes that are both stored in the probe changer rack, follow these steps: 1 Select Prerequisites Automatic Probe Changer. The Automatic Probe Change dialog box appears on the screen. 2 Click on the holder icon that contains the probe you would like to install. 3 Click on the Changer drop-down list and select Load Probe. The CMM first stores the probe that is currently installed, then picks up the probe you selected and backs out the approach distance.
How to Perform a Semiautomatic Probe Change
!
hss
Caution When storing or getting a probe for the first time, you should be prepared to cancel the procedure. If the approach parameters are incorrect, you can avoid a possible collision by canceling. To automatically store an installed probe and then manually install a different probe, follow these steps: 1 Select Prerequisites Automatic Probe Changer. The Automatic Probe Change dialog box appears on the screen. 2 Click on the probe holder icon where the currently installed probe should be stored (the icon for the empty holder on the rack).
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
7-49
3 Click on the Changer drop-down list and select Store Probe. The CMM places the probe in the selected holder. There is then no longer a probe installed in the probe head. 4 Click OK to exit the Automatic Probe Changer window. 5 Proceed with the steps for manually changing a probe, as described in How to Install a Probe on page 4-11.
How to Change the Probe Assigned to a Holder

To change the probe that is assigned to a particular holder, follow these steps: 1 Make sure the probe is qualified and is currently installed on the CMM (see Installing and Qualifying Probes on page 4-10).. 2 Select Prerequisites Automatic Probe Changer. The Automatic Probe Change dialog box appears on the screen. 3 Click on the icon for the new holder to which you want to assign the probe. The icon turns green. 4 In the Changer list, select Assign Probe to Selected Holder. A list of all qualified probes is displayed. 5 Click on the name of the probe you now want to assign to this holder. The probe is assigned, and by way of confirmation the probe name appears below the icon for the holder.
7-50
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Multimedia User Information

In Calypso, you can include audiovisual information that users can view before running the measurement plan. For example, you could include a video showing instructions on how to fixture or orient a part. Each measurement plan can have its own unique user information file, or you can use the same information file for several different measurement plans.
NOTE
hss
If you have the appropriate utilities installed on your computer, you can view files of the following formats: *.txt, *.doc, *.bmp, *.avi, *.flc, *.pdf and *.gra. You can create video files on any personal computer with a video capture board and an attached camera. Refer to the documentation included with these devices and associated software. You can create video files on any PC with a video grabber board and a video camera. You can view this information in the Start Measurement dialog box by clicking on User Information.
How to Add User Information to a Measurement Plan

Follow these steps to select a user information file for a measurement plan: 1 Make sure you have created an audio-video file of the proper format and have stored it in the folder c:\opt\om\pictures\userinfo. 2 Open the measurement plan with which you want to include the user information file (for example, by selecting File Open). 3 Select CNC Select User Information For Program Start Select. The File Selection dialog box is displayed, listing all files currently in the c:\opt\om\pictures\userinfo folder. 4 Click on the file that you want to include with this measurement plan. 5 Click Open. The file is now available to everyone who uses the measurement plan. Only one user information file can be selected for each measurement plan. You can change which file is selected simply by following the same directions for selecting a file the first time.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
7-51
How to View User Information for a Measurement Plan

After you have selected a user information video file to use with a particular measurement plan, you or other users can view it when running the measurement plan. Follow these steps: 1 Make sure the measurement plan you want to run is open. 2 Click on the Start Measurement button. The Start Measurement / Measurement Plan Definition dialog box is opened.
An icon is displayed at the top left corner for each measurement plan, if the folder of the current measurement plan (.../workarea, inspections) includes a file called icon.bmp which contains the icon.
7-52
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
3 Click on User Information. A window pops up that shows the selected user information. If the file contains a drawing, a picture or a photograph, you can return to the Start Measurement dialog box by clicking on Apply. If it is a video, the Windows Media Player appears. You can change how the video plays, go forward and back, and perform other functions. Refer to Windows documentation for instructions on using Media Player.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
7-53
7-54
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
8
8
61212-2010102
Chapter
.................................................................................................................................
The preconditions listed below must be satisfied before you can run a measurement plan: The CMM must be initialized (You will find more information in the Online Help under How to Initialize the CMM). The scope of measurement must be defined. A measurement plan defines what is to be measured, whether or not a custom printout will be generated, and how the CMM will perform the measurement. Calypso automatically measures all the features you defined and evaluates the characteristics in the order you specified. Before you run a measurement plan, you should always make sure that the CMM is clear for automatic movement around the part and fixture. Use the joysticks to move the probe above the part and fixture. If you want to combine two or more measurement plans (and evaluate them together) you do so by starting a master measurement plan.

Defining the Scope of Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Entering Printout Header Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Starting a Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Monitoring Measurement Plan Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
8- 1
Defining the Scope of Measurement

If you do not want to measure all the characteristics in the measurement plan, you have the option of running only selected parts of the plan. You can do this by combining characteristics in groups or selecting individual characteristics.
Actual selection
If you want to test characteristics only once or twice, you can mark the characteristics in question and start the measurement plan. Calypso runs only your selection. If you want to measure a large number of characteristics repeatedly, you can highlight the characteristics in question and combine them in a measurement plan group. The group behaves like a single characteristic. It is represented by a button of its own in the measurement plan and can be assigned a name.
Measurement plan group
Feature group
If you test certain characteristics frequently, independently of the overall measurement plan, but you prefer not to combine the characteristics in a measurement plan group, you can highlight the characteristics in question, combine them in a feature group, save this group and run this mini measurement plan. If you want certain characteristics repeatedly omitted from measurement, you can mask the characteristics in question. Masked features are highlighted light gray in the measurement plan list. You will find more information in Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics in the Calypso Online Help.
Masked
Features
If you do not want to run the entire measurement plan, you can measure without characteristics in order to obtain initial information on the features.
How to Define a Current Selection of Characteristics

It is advisable to group characteristics whenever you want to test a small combination of characteristics or a measurement plan group on a single occasion. To define a current selection: Press and hold down Ctrl key and click on the characteristics you want to select. In the Start Measurement dialog box you can activate this selection by clicking on Current Selection under List Of Characteristics (see Starting a Measurement on page 8-7).
8-2
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Defining the Scope of Measurement
How to Create a Measurement Plan Group

You can combine characteristics to form groups. You can run a group of this nature separately, without the other characteristics in the measurement plan.
NOTE
hss
The grouped characteristics no longer appear individually in the measurement plan. You have to open the grouping if you want to see the individual characteristics. To create a measurement plan group: 1 Press and hold down the Ctrl key and click on each characteristic you want to have in the group. 2 Open the Edit menu and select Group. The characteristics you selected are grouped and the group is represented by a button in the measurement plan. 3 Click on the group in the measurement plan and then click on the right mouse button to open the shortcut menu. 4 In the shortcut menu, click on Rename and type in the new name. It is always a good idea to assign mnemonic names to the groups. 5 Press OK to confirm the new name and proceed. In the Start Measurement dialog box you can activate this selection by clicking on Current Selection under List Of Characteristics (see Starting a Measurement on page 8-7).
How to Ungroup a Measurement Plan Group

You have to ungroup the characteristics in the measurement plan group in order to view them singly in the measurement plan. To ungroup a measurement plan group: 1 Highlight the group in the measurement plan. The line is grayed. 2 Open the Edit menu and select Ungroup. The characteristics are again listed individually in the measurement plan.
How to View the Contents of a Measurement Plan Group

You can view the contents of a group in order to check, for example, that you have not omitted any characteristics. To view the contents of a measurement plan group: 1 Click on the left mouse button on the group in the list of characteristics.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
8-3
2 Click on the Magnifier button. The members of the group are listed after a few moments. The members of the group are slightly indented in the list to indicate that they belong to the group.
How to Create a Feature Group

If you prefer not to create a measurement plan group (for example because you do not want a group named in the work printout), but you want to iterate certain characteristics, you can create a feature group.
NOTE
hss
A feature group has a name, but this name does not appear in the measurement plan. To create a feature group: 1 Press and hold down the Ctrl key and click on each characteristic you want to have in the group. 2 Select CNC Feature Group Define. Calypso prompts you to assign a name to the group. 3 Assign the group a name and click on OK. The feature group is now defined. In the Start Measurement dialog box you can activate this selection by clicking on the feature group under List Of Characteristics (see Starting a Measurement on page 8-7).
How to Select Individual Features

Instead of running an entire measurement plan or individual characteristics, you can also test individual features. Measuring without characteristics is a useful way of collecting advance information about the features. To measure selected features: 1 Click on the Features button to open the list of features 2 Press and hold down Ctrl key and click on the features you want to select. You can then open the Start Measurement dialog box, select the entry Current Selection under List Of Characteristics and start the measurement plan (see Starting a Measurement on page 8-7).
8-4
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Entering Printout Header Data
Entering Printout Header Data

If you want to document the measurement in a custom printout, you must enter the printout header data before you run the measurement plan. As regards entering printout header data, a distinction has to be drawn between: Global printout header data Global printout header data refer to the entire measurement plan and have to be entered only once for each measurement plan. The global printout header data include, for example, the name of the operator and the name of the measurement plan. Local printout header data Local printout header data refer to the current measurement and have to be entered before measurement starts each time a measurement plan is run. The local printout header data includes entries such as lot ID and order. When you enter printout header data, the system prompts only for the items that are contained in the currently selected format file (see Preparing Header Data on page 9-16).
How to Enter Global Printout Header Data

Global header comments belong to the measurement plan and need only be entered once for each measurement plan. To enter global printout header data: 1 Select Prerequisites Printout Header Parameters. The Input Parameter dialog box will appear.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
8-5
2 Click on the field you want to complete and enter the appropriate values or plain text. 3 If you want the system to prompt for the local printout header data at the start of every CNC run, activate the Force Input at Start check box. 4 Click on OK. The entries are saved and the window is closed. The data you entered is included in the custom printout when the measurement is completed.
How to Enter Local Printout Header Data

Local header comments belong to a measurement and therefore must be entered before the measurement plan is run. To enter local printout header data: 1 Click on the Start Measurement button. The Start Measurement / Measurement Plan Definition dialog box is opened. 2 Make sure that the Include Header check box is activated. 3 Click on the Data Input button. The Input Parameter dialog box will appear.
4 Click with the mouse on the field you want to complete and enter the appropriate values or plain text. 5 Click on OK. The entries are saved and the window is closed. The data you entered is included in the custom printout when the measurement is completed.
8-6
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Starting a Measurement
As regards measurement, a distinction is drawn between two process modes: CNC run The CMM is under the fully automatic control of Calypso. The prerequisite is that the CMM must have CNC capability. Manual run In a manual run Calypso administrates only the measurement plan and tells you which feature you must probe next, and how many probings to take. As well as probing the features, you also control the CMM. Both modes of measurement are started from the Start Measurement dialog box. This where you set the options for the measurement plan run, and where you start measurement. It contains the parameters you use to define the scope of measurement, set the parameters for the printout, and define the settings for the CMM.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
8-7
How to Start a CNC Run

Before you can start a CNC run, you have to define the details of the run in the Start Measurement dialog box. To start a CNC run: 1 Click on the Start Measurement button. The Start Measurement dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Set the parameters as necessary for measurement. You will find more information on setting these parameters in Start Measurement / Measurement Plan Definition in the Calypso Online Help. 3 Click on OK to start the measurement plan. Calypso commences probing. 4 When the measurement is completed, you can click on the Show Default Printout button. The results of measurement are displayed. 5 Once you have checked the results, click anywhere in the open part of the User Desk to hide the listing.
8-8
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
How to Start a Manual Run

In a manual run Calypso steps you through the measurement process, but you have to make all the probings manually. This section explains how to run a measurement plan manually with Calypso. You have to do this if, for example, you work with a manual CMM. In a manual run Calypso is in control, and you probe the workpiece. The procedure for starting a manual run is as follows: 1 Click on the Start Measurement button. The Start Measurement / Measurement Plan Definition dialog box is opened. 2 Set the parameters as necessary for measurement. You will find more information on setting these parameters in Start Measurement / Measurement Plan Definition in the Calypso Online Help. 3 Tick the Custom Printout check box, if you want the system to generate a custom printout. 4 In the Run Mode list, select Manual. 5 If you want to measure the coordinate system manually as well, go to the Selection group and select Manual run for the coordinate system. 6 Click on OK to start the measurement plan. Calypso steps you through the process: The Manual CNC dialog box is the direct man-machine interface.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
8-9
7 When measurement is completed, you can click on the Default Printout button. The results of measurement are displayed. 8 Once you have checked the results, click anywhere in the open part of the User Desk to hide the listing.
Basics about Manual Control

You can influence a manual run in a number of ways while it is in progress. You can declare the manual run as an automatic run at any time. You can delete the last probing point if it was unsatisfactory. You can change the number of nominal probing points if, for example, some points are not accessible, or more points should be probed. You can cancel the manual run. You will find more information on these actions in Manual CNC in the Calypso Online Help.
8-10
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Monitoring Measurement Plan Runs

Irrespective of whether the run you start is automatic (CNC) or manual, Calypso always does some of the work for you, which means that it is active the entire time that a measurement plan is running. You can intervene in the process while the measurement plan is running. For example, you can interrupt the run or cancel it if this is necessary for some urgent reason. Calypso's Stoplight dialog box is the communication interface between you and the system. Just as a stoplight regulates the flow of traffic on a busy street, this stylized stoplight helps control process flows and display important status information. The Stoplight window is always on view after you start measurement. It controls communication between the CMM and Calypso. It is also the interface that enables you to intervene in a measurement plan run.
NOTE
hss
Never close the Stoplight window, because if you do Calypso will lose contact with the CMM. You can always minimize the window or put it behind another window. In addition to controlling the process, the Stoplight window also enables you to activate various views that show additional information while the measurement run is in progress. They are: Stoplight, Base Alignment, Move in Part Alignment, Probe Information, Alignment and Data Transfer On/Off.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
8-11
The illustration below shows the Stoplight window:
How to Switch Views On and Off in the Stoplight Window

The Stoplight window enables you to activate various views that show information about the measurement plan run. These views can be activated at the same time. To switch a view on or off: 1 In the menu list of the Stoplight window, click on View. A tick preceding the name indicates which views are active. 2 Click on the view of your choice to toggle its on/off status. 3 If you want to move the views or arrange them neatly, click on the Arrange button and move the views as you wish. When you are finished, exit the arrange mode by clicking on an unoccupied part of the window. 4 To save the arrangement of views, click on the Save button. The size and position of the Stoplight window are also saved.
8-12
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
How to Cancel a Run

There are many reasons why a run might have to be canceled. Bear in mind, however, that certain preconditions have to be satisfied before you can restart a canceled run. To cancel a run: Click on red in the Stoplight window or press the Esc key on the control console (not in case of Dynalog P!). The CMM immediately cancels measurement. You have to click on green before you can start another measurement plan.
How to Interrupt a Run

Interrupting means that the CMM comes to an immediate standstill, but can continue at some subsequent point in time. To interrupt a run: 1 In the Stoplight window, click on the amber light. The CMM comes to an immediate stop, the green light flashes. 2 Click on green. The run is resumed.
Reaction Following a Collision

In the case of a collision between the probe and the workpiece, the CMM control switches all drives off. This is designed to prevent damage to the workpiece and the probe. In the Stoplight window, the stoplight goes red. Measurement can only be resumed if not all the buttons in the list of features are red or green.
Special Aspects of Collision with RDS

If your CMM is equipped with an RDS (indexing articulating probe head, or stepping articulating probe holder), bear the following aspect in mind if a collision occurs. If the RDS collides while the CMM is not in motion and if the disk contacts open, the collision will not be detected when the machine subsequently moves (because the contacts are open). A collision can be detected only when the disk contacts are opened by movement of the CMM.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
8-13
How to Clear the CMM after a Collision

You have to clear the CMM if the probe collides with the workpiece or the fixture. To clear the CMM: 1 In the Stoplight window, click on the green light. This reestablishes the connection between controller and CMM. 2 Using the joysticks, carefully move the probe away from the workpiece until it reaches a safe position. You can now resume your work. To ensure accurate results, check the probe and make sure that the stylus is not deformed.
How to Restart a Run after Cancellation

You can restart an interrupted measurement run if not all the buttons in the list of features are red or green. To restart an interrupted run: 1 Set the stoplight to green. 2 Click on the Start Measurement button. The Start Measurement / Measurement Plan Definition dialog box is opened. 3 Deactivate the Clear Existing Results option. 4 Click on OK to restart the run. Calypso reruns the measurement plan. This time round, however, it measures only the features for which no measured values were recorded. This is the reason why compliance with the precondition described above is mandatory, as otherwise you would not obtain new results.
8-14
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
9
9
61212-2010102
Chapter
Viewing, Presenting and Editing Measurement Results .................................................................................................................................

Every time you perform a measurement, the results you obtain are presented in the default printout and the compact protocol. Calypso also offers a custom printout that you can use specifically for presenting the results of measurement. If you want to save results in files as backups or for processing in subsequent evaluation runs, you can use Calypso's export functionality that supports a number of mainstream formats.

Result Printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Set up Custom Printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 How to Display Variations Graphically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Saving Measurement Results to Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Converting Measurement results for qs-STAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
9-1
Result Printouts
The printouts are logs that are generated while the measurement plan is running. Calypso offers logs of three different kinds, known as the default printout, the compact protocol, and the custom printout. Additionally, the measurement results can also be output to Excel. The Default Printout is a detailed log of all results obtained in measurement. You cannot change the way in which this information is presented.
9-2
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Result Printouts
The Compact Protocol is shorter than the Default Printout. It lists the characteristics together with the measured features for speedy assessment.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
9-3
The Custom printout allows you to decide which elements you want to include and to arrange the sequence in which they are presented, along with the mode of presentation.
The default printout is always used by Calypso. After every evaluation it is generated and continued.
Combined evaluations
You can also combine two or more measurement plans and so create combined assessments (see Combining Several Measurement Plans on page 7-4). The measurement plans you combine in this way need not necessarily be on the CMM - they can be created and run on CMMs at different points in the network. If you have installed Excel, you will also be able to output the measurement results in the form of an Excel report which will first have to be defined in Excel. The type of report required can be selected in the Format Custom Printout window (see How to Define the Output of the Printout on page 9-9); the output to Excel is set in the Start Measurement window.
Output in the form of an Excel report
How to View the Default Printout

If you have not selected the custom printout option, the default printout window is automatically displayed on your screen after the measurement plan has been carried out.
9-4
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Result Printouts
If you hide the window behind the User Desk, it stays hidden while the measurement plan is running. To display the measurement results: Click on the Show Default Printout button. The default printout is displayed. You can also click on this button to display the results even if you have closed the Default Printout window.
How to View the Compact Protocol

To have the compact protocol displayed by default, you must activate the Compact Protocol check box in the Start Measurement dialog box (select CNC Run Run). To view the compact protocol: Select View Compact Protocol. The compact protocol is displayed.
Layout of the compact protocol
The compact protocol contains all the features of the measurement plan, with lines separating the individual features. The results of the characteristics are logged for each feature and color-coded: green means within tolerance, red means out of tolerance, brown means warning limits violated. If a characteristic belongs to the feature line, the log shows the characteristic line instead of the feature line. References and comments are also included.
Other options
You can search the compact protocol for character strings. You have a choice of two font sizes for on-screen display. The compact protocol is saved in the measurement plan directory as an ASCII file (without color-coding information) called cprotocol.txt.
How to View the Custom Printout

As soon as results have been calculated after a measurement, you can view and print the custom printout. Select View Custom Printout. Calypso opens the custom printout in a separate window. You can customize the way in which the custom printout is laid out to suit your needs and preferences (see Set up Custom Printouts on page 9-7).
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
9-5
How to Print the Measurement Results

To send the measurement results to a printer, check the Send to Printer radio button in the Start Measurement window. You can select the number of copies in the Copies field beside this radio button. 1 Click on Print Results to print the default printout. 2 To print the custom printout, select View Custom Printout and in the dialog box of the printout, select File Print. The printout is output on the printer, that has been defined as the standard printer in the Windows settings.
9-6
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Set up Custom Printouts

The custom printout is your way of presenting measurement results, for example, to a customer or client. You can generate your own custom printouts tailored to your needs and preferences or to those of your client, and presenting the results of measurement in detail. Custom printouts are ideal for attractive graphical presentations. Consequently, it consists of various graphics files. You can edit these graphics files as necessary. For using and modifying custom printouts, the following steps are necessary: How to Define the Output of the Printout on page 9-9 Designing Custom Printouts with the Header Editor on page 9-12.
The Structure of a Custom Printout

The custom printout consists of various sections that you can include in or exclude from the printout, and arrange to suit your preferences. The data for each section are saved in separate files in the directory called calypso\opt\om\protform\default\.... These sections are listed in the table below, alongside brief descriptions of their contents. Section Printout header Content Automatic fields with information on: workpiece measurement data etc. Header Line Specifications for presentation of the results. Prerequisites Result Presentation Header Line Editor File name: header.gra Edit Under Prerequisites Result Presentation Printout Header File name: vphead.gra
Printout area
The printout area contains the characteristics and the measurement results as well as coordinate systems etc. Contains the icons, the Prerequisites Result Presentation names and the results of the Characteristic Editor characteristics. File name: cffra.gra
Characteristics
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
9-7
Section Features
Content
Edit Under
Contains the icons, the Prerequisites Result Presentation names and the results of the Feature Editor features. File name: me.gra Contains the icons, the Prerequisites Result Presentation names and the references of Coordinate System the coordinate system. File name: cfpcs.gra any Prerequisites Result Presentation User Defined Header
Coordinate systems
User-definable pages
Automatic Fields in the Custom Printout

The printout header contains automatic fields or dummies, as they are also known. Dummies are inserted once only. Subsequently, they are replaced by Calypso or by you when you run a measurement plan. This arrangement saves time and trouble, and the data on the measurement and the workpiece are always current. There are two kinds of dummy: global dummies. You must enter global dummies once for each measurement plan (such as the part number, for instance), while others (e.g. time, measurement plan name) are filled in automatically by Calypso. local dummies. These dummies are filled by you or by Calypso before each measurement plan start; they include the order number and remarks, for example. For more information, see under Preparing Header Data on page 9-16
Results Presentation in the Custom Printout

The custom printout presents the measurement results as follows (shown here without the printout header):
Icon of characteristic
Name of char.
Deviation from tolerance
Histogram
9-8
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Along with the actual value and nominal value and upper and lower tolerances, the printout contains further information, indicated by the arrows in this illustration. This information includes: Icon of the characteristic: The icon of the characteristic can assume one of several colors: Red: Characteristic is out of tolerance Yellow: Characteristic is in the defined warning range (if defined) Green: Characteristic is within tolerance. Histogram: The vertical line in the histogram represents the middle of the tolerance range. The dashes represent the tolerance limits. Each dash represents 25% of the tolerance limit. The illustration below, for example, represents 50% of the upper tolerance limit.
If the value is out of tolerance, the numerical value of the deviation is displayed instead of the histogram.
How to Define the Output of the Printout

The Format Custom Printout dialog box allows you to define WHAT (e.g. characteristics) is contained in the printout and HOW (e.g. the sequence) it is presented. Additionally, you can also set the required report type for output to Excel. To specify printout: 1 Select Prerequisites Define Printout. The Format Custom Printout dialog box appears on the screen. 2 Set the parameters defining the scope and sequence of the features in the custom printout.
NOTE
hss
If you want to output measurement plan groups, go to the Range column, select the Other Objects line and set the option to All. Make sure that Separate is not activated in the Output Order column. 3 To allow the measurement results to be output to an Excel file: click on the Select EXCEL Report button and select the required report type.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
9-9
NOTE
hss
You can only use this function if you have installed Excel 2000 on your system. Requirement: You must have previously defined at least one output format as Report in Excel 2000. INI files with the name ReportINI.xls must be available in the same directory as the reports. 4 Click on OK. The settings are accepted and the dialog box is closed. You can determine which report is to be output in the Start Measurement window before you start your measurement plan. For more information, see Format Custom Printout in the Calypso Online Help.
Examples of Printouts
Example of a custom printout. Color highlighting is used for emphasis in the custom printout.
9-10
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Example of a VDA printout (without values). The test report is output in a VDA printout. This printout does not contain any features.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
9-11
Example of a condensed custom printout. The condensed form of the custom printout does not feature color highlighting.
Designing Custom Printouts with the Header Editor

While creating an individual custom printout, you can freely choose the representation for the measurement results. Here, you can create various custom printout templates which can be called up in accordance with the measurement task which is to be executed for the Result Presentation. The Header Editor is a tool that you can use to create and edit graphic elements and insert measurement plan variables into the printout.
9-12
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
This illustration shows the Header Editor for features.

Menu bar Task bar Info bar
Graphic
Drawing area Special toolbox
You can change the following structural aspects: Printout header, Header line, Characteristics, Features, Coordinate systems and Additional, user-defined pages.
NOTE
hss
You need some experience of drawing programs in order to use the editor.
The Header Editor

The functions of the Header Editor are not described in detail in the following as they do not differ greatly from those of conventional drawing programs. The drawing area is where you lay out the custom printout. The special toolbox provides a number of variables or fields that you can insert into the custom printout; the choice varies, depending on the editor. These fields are filled either automatically by Calypso while measurement is in progress, or my the operator.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
9-13
The graphic toolbox contains the icons representing the usual tools of a graphics program for drawing simple graphical elements, and for inserting entire graphical elements (such as a company logo, for example) into the custom printout. The info bar contains information on size of image, working directory and current scaling. The tool bar contains a selection of commands for controlling the Header Editor: The commands available in the menus accessible through the tool bar are as follows: Menu File Menu item New Save Save As Open Format Function Creates a new custom printout Saves the current custom printout. Saves the current printout under a new name. Opens an existing printout. Opens the Page Layout dialog box. This dialog box is fully described in Page Layout in the Calypso Online Help. Prints the current printout. Closes the dialog box Copies the selected element to the Clipboard. Copies the selected element to the Clipboard and removes it from the drawing area Pastes the contents of the Clipboard back into the printout. Selects all elements in the drawing area. Duplicates the selected element. Not yet available
Print Close Edit Copy Cut Paste Select All Duplicate Make Polygon
9-14
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Menu Draw
Menu item New Number Field Text Field Output Field Data Output Field Table Output Field Graphic Fill Color Border Color Line Width Properties
Function
Inserts a number field for numerical inputs. Inserts a text field for alphanumerical inputs. Inserts an output field. Inserts a data output field. Inserts a table output field. Inserts a graphic (file, OMView or Formplot). Defines the fill color for an object. Defines the color for an object's border. Defines the line width for an object's frame Opens the Properties (Header Editor) dialog box. This dialog box is fully described in Properties (Header Editor) in the Calypso Online Help. Defines the width of an object. Defines the height of an object. Defines the name for the object. Prompts whether you want to create a new view of the object. Brings an object into the foreground. Brings an object one layer forward Sends an object to the background. Sends an object one layer back. Creates a group for symbols. Creates a group for statistics. Creates a group for comments. Creates a group for references. Groups the selected objects. Ungroups a group. Aligns selected objects vertically and/or horizontally.
Width... Height... Object Name... Object Visibility... Bring To Front Forward Send To Back Backward Group For Symbols For Statistics For Comments For References Group Ungroup Align...
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
9-15
Menu View
Menu item Refresh Zoom In Zoom Out Grid Off Define Grid Scale feature Reset Page Select Objects
Function Not yet available Zooms in the view. Zooms out the view. Switches the grid on and off. Defines the size of the grid. Scales an object by the defined scaling factor Not yet available Lists all objects that occur in the printout template.
Preparing Header Data

The printout header part of the custom printout can accept data relating to the measurement environment, the operator, or the workpiece. You decide which data to include in the printout header when you structure your custom printout. There are two types of printout header data: Local data: You have to enter these data each time you start a measurement plan Global data: You enter these data once only for each measurement plan. Calypso also provides other information for the printout header data (such as tester, date, etc.), which cannot be modified. In addition to the fields provided by Calypso, you can also define your own printout header fields (Define your own Printout Header Fields on page 9-17). To define which data is incorporated into the printout header, select Prerequisites Result Presentation Printout Header.
9-16
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
The available printout header data is listed in a column reserved for this purpose.
Printout header
Within the column, the printout header data is arranged in groups, as follows: Data Group SYS EDIT Type local/global global Subsequently Entered automatically by Calypso once only per measurement plan under Prerequisites Printout Header Parameters. for each measurement plan start in the Start Measurement dialog box, see How to Enter Local Printout Header Data on page 8-6. automatically by Calypso
START
local
OTHER
local/global
Define your own Printout Header Fields

Input fields can be freely defined for the printout header. These fields will then be available for selection for the printout header.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
9-17
The additional input fields will have to be defined in the ASCII file userfields.txt which can be found in the directory /opt/om/protform/. Here, it will be necessary to add one further line with the following features, separated by a comma, for each required input field: Setting (field or button) Meaning ID Label Display control will be used in the result file, must begin with u_ will be displayed in dialogs E = appears in the dialog when editing, R = appears in the dialog at CNC start, RE = appears in both dialogs
You can, for example, append the following three lines in the file userfields.txt:
u_field1,FELD 1,RE u_field2,FELD 2,R u_field3,FELD 3,E
Once you have called the Report Header File Editor using Prerequisites Result Presentation Printout Header you will notice that the newly defined fields have been added to the left selection column of the printout header fields. These fields can now be added to the printout header in the same manner as standard fields in Calypso. The values for the added fields are entered in two dialogs: for the fields in the Input Parameter dialog that are highlighted with R (during CNC run, after clicking on the Printout Header Data button, or mandatory at the start), for the fields in the dialog under Prerequisites Printout Header Parameter that are highlighted with E, for the fields in both dialogs highlighted with RE. The entered values will appear in the printout header of the Custom Printout. The identifications (e.g. u_field1) and the appropriate values will be output in the result header file (*_hdr.txt).
How to Work with the Custom Printout Template

The template for the printout header is used here by way of example to illustrate how to create a custom printout template and what to bear in mind when you save your work.
9-18
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
To work with a custom printout template: 1 Open the editor for the section you want to edit by selecting Prerequisites Result Presentation. 2 Open the template sketch by selecting File Open and then clicking on OK. The template is displayed as a sketch. 3 You can edit the sketch in accordance with your needs and preferences to create the template for your own custom printout: Highlight the object you want to use in the graphic toolbox or the special toolbox. In the drawing area, click on the position where you want to insert the object. 4 Save the template: Select File Format, to define the format. Select File Save As. Calypso displays the following message:
!
hss
Caution Do not, under any circumstances, change the name of the file, because Calypso always uses the same name. Change the name of the directory called default, if you want to create two or more versions of the printout. Overwrite the default name with the name of a directory you have created for this purpose with Windows NT Explorer. Click on OK. Your template is now saved.
Example: Programming a Custom Printout with Input Prompt

You can program a custom printout in such a way that before the printout is printed, the user is prompted to enter certain items of information destined for inclusion in the printout. You do this with the aid of the variables in the printout header (see The Printout Header Data (Reference) on page 9-21) and the Inquire query function in the PCM language.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
9-19
In this example we want to have Calypso prompt for the pallet number when the measurement plan is started, and include the number entered by the user in the custom printout. 1 Select Prerequisites Result Presentation Printout Header. The file now shown under Sketch should now be vphead.gra. 2 Select File Open. The printout header is now displayed on the User Desk.
3 In the list of fields on the left, go to the START section, mark the Tool field and click in the printout header at the point where you want to position the field. Delete the word Tool from the label and type Pallet number instead. 4 Close and save the printout header you edited. 5 Open the list of characteristics. 6 Make sure that no characteristic is highlighted, right-click to open the shortcut menu, and select Parameter. The Settings dialog box appears on the screen. 7 Under Presettings, enter the following: PALETTE=inquire(Enter the pallet number:) setRecordHead(tooldf,PALLET) The effect of the first line is that a prompt box opens and the user is prompted to enter the pallet number. The effect of the second line is that the number entered in this way is assigned to the tooldf variable and is thus subsequently printed in the printout under pallet number. Commands entered in PCM apply to the entire measurement plan, which means they are executed when the measurement plan starts.
9-20
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
The Printout Header Data (Reference)

All the printout header data are listed in the table below: Data Group SYS Name of field CMM No. Time of Datum Software Revision Department: Software Telephone/fax: No. Control type Sheet Machine type Operator Run EDIT Clamp No. Comment: Clamp Name of probe changer Previous operation Ser. No. workpiece Measurement plan commentary Subject number: Device no. Name: Version: Device Rev. workpiece Audit no. Drawing number START Comment at start ID dmesn time nrpgs date dmeswv vda_departm dmeswi vda_phone vda_number Controller actpgnr dmeid operid measRun clmpsn vda_remark clmpid partid prevop partsn partcomment vda_subjno fixtsn vda_name vda_version fixtid partrv vda_auditno drawingno startcomment
Measurement plan name planid
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
9-21
Data Group
Name of field Comment: Name of probe changer Test ID Lot ID Subject number Name: Process plan Order Version: Audit no.: Tool Signature:
ID vda_remark procid lotid partnbLong vda_subjno vda_name mfgdev order vda_version vda_auditno tooldf vda_signature changeoper changedate produceoper creationdate creationdme
Part number incremental partnbinc
OTHER
Change operator Date of change Created by Date of creation CMM type creation
Creation of software rev. creationswi
The IDs are used to identify the header data in the table result file (...hdr.txt).
9-22
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
How to Display Variations Graphically

Calypso can graphically display the deviations which are determined by form elements on the measured geometric features as Form Plots and can output these to your printer. This form plot is available for the following characteristics: Straightness Flatness Roundness Cylindricity Best Fit of bore pattern Curve form (optional feature). You can either select an existing format file or a format file which you have created yourself (*.gra) to display the deviations in graphical form.
How to Activate a Form Plot

Before you can activate a form plot, you must check that the characteristic for the form plot you want to define has been measured. To activate the form plot: 1 To open the definition template, double click on the characteristics icon in the measurement plan. The definition template will appear. 2 Complete the Tolerance and Feature fields, if they do not already contain the applicable data.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
9-23
3 Click on the Graphic button. The selection window for the form plot is opened. The appearance differs, depending on the characteristic from which the form plot is called. The diagram shows an example of a window with the feature Roundness for a circle:
Option for the type of plot Format File Selection List
Picklist for characteristics
4 Select the type of plot you require for the feature from the upper selection list. 5 From the selection list below that, select the format file which should be used to display the form plot. Default refers to the standard Zeiss format file. All characteristics for which the type of form plot can be used are listed in the Characteristics selection list. You can select two or more in the case of some characteristics. 6 Select the characteristic. The Form Plot window opens with the type of plot you selected. The editing options in the Form Plot window are described in detail in About the Form Plot Window on page 9-26). 7 Click again on the selection window for form plots if you want to view other form plots. This moves the Form Plot window to the background. You can now display the form plots of other characteristics together with the current form plot. Repeat step 6 for this. 8 Click on OK when you are ready.
9-24
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
You can always bring the form plot window back to the foreground again if you need it.
Format Files for Form Plots

Calypso provides several standard format files for displaying the form plots. Additionally, you can also create your own format files. The file that is required for the form plot can be selected in the selection window for the form plot. The format files which are offered here can be found under ..\Calypso\opt\om\pictures\formplott\calypso\ in the subdirectory for the respective plot type. Plot type Straightness Multiroundness Multiroundness with diameter Multiple roundness transposed Cylinder form from Circle segments in 3D Cylinder form from Line segments Cylinder form using many circle segments Cylinder form using a single circle segment Flatness from Circle Segments Flatness from Line Segments Multi-flatness from circle segments Multi-flatness from line segments 3D Flatness View Curve form linear Curve form 2D Multi-curve form 2D Multiple curve form linear Subdirectory Straightness Multiroundness Multiroundnessdia Multiroundnesstranspose Cylinderformcircular3d Cylinderformline Cumradialrunoutmulticircle Cumradialrunoutsinglecircle Circlemulti Linemulti Multiflatnesscircular Multiflatnesscircular flatness3d curveformline curveform2d multicurveform2d multicurveformline File Name cz_sn.gra cz_mr.gra cz_mr_dia.gra cz_mr_t.gra cz_cf_3dc.gra cz_cf_l.gra cz_crro_mc.gra cz_crro_sc.gra cz_fn_mc.gra cz_fn_ml.gra cz_mfn_c.gra cz_mfn_c.gra cz_fn3d.gra cz_cu_li.gra cz_cu_2d.gra cz_mcu_2d.gra cz_mcu_li.gra
Only the format files that have been provided in the respective subdirectory and are appropriate for the plot type can be selected in the selection window for the form plot. Format files which you have created yourself should also be saved to the appropriate directory.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
9-25
Individually Structured Format Files for Form Plots

In addition to the format files provided by Calypso for displaying form plots, you also have the option of creating your own format files. To do so, use the Header Editor which can be called using Prerequisites Result Presentation Characteristics. Details on how to work with the Header Editor can be found under The Header Editor on page 9-13.
About the Form Plot Window

The illustration below shows the Form Plot window for a roundness plot for a circle. The window consists of three areas: The form plot header, containing the data from the printout header. The form plot area. It shows the validated specified form along with the actual contour as derived from the measured points. The two red lines represent the upper tolerance limit and the lower tolerance limit. You can see at a glance where a measured point deviates from specification, and in which direction. A data table with the name of the characteristic, the actual value, the tolerance, the number of points, and the data for the filter, if used.
9-26
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
In this window you can edit, save and print the form plot.
How to Print a Form Plot

To print the form plot: In the Form Plot window, select the appropriate command from the File menu. A dialog box appears on the screen.
How to Change the Form Plot Settings

The parameters in the form plot settings define the scope of the form plot, among other things. To change the form plot settings for the next output: 1 In the Form Plot window, select Edit Modify Chart Settings. This opens a notebook laid out like the notebooks containing the system settings.
2 Set the parameters as necessary. 3 If you have changed the settings and want to use these for the current plot, click on OK. 4 If you want to save your settings for other form plots, click on Save. The Form Plot window reappears on the screen.
NOTE
hss
This dialog box is fully described in Formplot Attributes in the Calypso Online Help.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
9-27
How to Change Form Plot Settings Permanently

The parameters in the form plot settings define the scope of the form plot, among other things. To incorporate the form plot settings permanently into the measurement plan: 1 Open the definition template for the characteristic. 2 Click on the Graphic button. 3 In the Form Plot window, select Edit Modify Chart Settings. This opens a notebook laid out like the notebooks containing the system settings.
4 Set the parameters as necessary. 5 If you have changed the settings and want to use these for the current plot, click on OK. 6 If you want to save your settings for other form plots, click on Save. The Form Plot window reappears on the screen. 7 Click on OK to close all sub-windows along with the definition template for the characteristic.
NOTE
hss
This dialog box is fully described in Formplot Attributes in the Calypso Online Help.
9-28
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Saving Measurement Results to Files

In addition to saving measurement results in the file protocol in the standard manner, Calypso also supports additional files types in which the measurement results can be saved as required. You can determine the mode in which Calypso saves the data in these additional files. The table below describes the file types supported at this time: File type Table Description The measurement results are saved in a text file in table format. The results are therefore available for use in other programs, especially spreadsheet programs. Files of this type are saved under C:\calypso\home\om\workarea\results under the name of the measurement plan which corresponds to the measurement results, including part number indices. When you save the measured values in a merge file, the measured values of different CNC runs are saved sequentially in a common file. Before you can save the measured values in a merge file you have to initialize them. Merge files always have table format. They are saved in C:\calypso\home\om\workarea\results under the name merge. The measurement results are saved in a file in DMIS format and are suitable for the PROVACS statistics program. Files of this type are saved in C:\calypso\home\om\workarea\dmisout under the name of the measurement plan that belongs to the measurement results. The measurement results are saved in a file in QDAS format and are suitable for QDAS statistics programs (e.g. qs-STAT, procella). The system only saves the results of those characteristics which correspond to the characteristic set in the measurement plan editor (Characteristic to Statistic on). Files of this type are saved in C:\calypso\home\om\workarea\qdas under the name of the measurement plan that belongs to the measurement results. The measurement results for curves are output as an ASCII file under C:\calypso\home\ASCII\prfplanname\elementname.txt. You can select which data should be written to the ASCII file: Nominal values or actual values with or without normals and deviation. You can also select an export in VDA format: The stylus-corrected curve points are written in a file as MDI (point-vector sequence).
Merge file
DMIS / PROVACS I
QDAS Available as option only!
ASCII File Curve
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
9-29
How to Save the Measurement Results as Files

To define which file type the results will be saved under: 1 Select Prerequisites Results to File. The Results to File dialog box appears on the screen:
2 Use the radio buttons to set saving on or off for each file type. Activate the appropriate radio buttons or initialize the merge file.
!
hss
Caution Initialization deletes existing entries in the merge file. Activate the Select at CNC Start radio button if you want Calypso to prompt for confirmation before saving to this type of file. 3 Click on OK to accept the settings and close the dialog box. The measurement results will be saved after the CNC run in accordance with the settings that have been made.
NOTE
hss
In a QDAS file, only the results are stored for which the selection point of the characteristic Characteristic to Statistic is set to On or Default in the Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics. This dialog box is fully described in Results to File in the Calypso Online Help.
9-30
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Copying the Measurement Results File

The results in the default printout and the compact protocol are automatically saved in files on your computer's hard disk. Each time you run a measurement plan, these files are overwritten with the new results. The names of the files are protocol.txt and cprotocol.txt, respectively. They are saved in the subfolder created for the measurement plan in the main folder C:\calypso\home\om\workarea\inspections\ (the path on your computer might be slightly different). You can use the Windows NT Explorer to copy these files to a floppy disk or to another folder on the hard drive. Custom printouts are not saved on hard disk. Consequently, they cannot be copied to floppy disk or to other folders on your hard disk.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
9-31
Converting Measurement results for qs-STAT

You can evaluate measurement results, which have been saved by Calypso in the QDAS format, in the statistics program qs-STAT.
How to Convert into QDAS

Calypso automatically produces a results file after a CNC run.
CNC run of CAL YP S O measurement plan with activated QDAS output QDASCONV.CON Configuration file
CALYPSO Results file
CNC-E nd
QDASCONV.EXE Conversion file for file exchange format
QDAS Description file (*.DFD)
QDAS Value file (*.DFX)
Statistics software qs-STAT
If conversion to QDAS has been activated, the conversion program QDASCONV.EXE converts this results file into a QDAS description file and a QDAS values file. The conversion program uses the file structures defined in the configuration file QDASCONV.CON.
NOTE
hss
In the QDAS file, only the results are stored for which the selection point of the characteristic Characteristic to Statistic is set to On or Default in the Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics.
QDAS Description File

The name of the description file consists of the first 8 characters of the measurement plan and the extension *.DFD.
9-32
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
The description file contains data particular to the part and characteristics that describe the workpiece and the separate features. The contents of these data can be taken from the printout header, the printout or the configuration file. Every time QDASCONV.EXE is called, a check is run to ascertain whether or not the description file already exists. If it does not exist, it is created and thereafter, it remains valid for all subsequent measurements. In the data acquisition module of the qs-STAT statistics program, you can perform changes, such as adding features or entering information that was not known at the time of the measurement. If you give the Calypso computer a modified description file, the QDASCONV.EXE conversion program recognizes the changes and takes them into account for the next conversion.
Key structure
The description data in the DFD file start with a 4-character key that indicates the data type in the file. 0 ... 999 1000 ... 1999 2000 ... 2999 3000 ... 3999 Description of the value formats Part data Characteristic data Measurement plan data
Example: K1001 Engine block Where: K = Key 1001 = Part number Engine block = Information content
QDAS Values File

The name of the values file consists of the first 8 characters of the measurement plan and the extension *.dfx. The actual measurements, the identification for the validity of the dimensions and the date saved are saved in the value file. During the first run, all characteristics should be sent to qs-STAT, so that a complete data model can be created in qs-STAT. If only certain selected elements are sent to qs-STAT later, the data model is updated; all elements which are not measured stay at counter status 1.
NOTE
hss
If only part of the measurement plan is sent to qs-STAT during the first run, but all characteristics are then sent as a later run, the data model created earlier is not updated.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
9-33
Additional data, such as charge number, operator, and machine number can be added as necessary. The sequence of the characteristics in a file is determined by the measurement sequence. If characteristics are missing due to focusing of the CNC run, the measurement value is set to zero and the dimension is labeled as invalid.
Configuration File QDASCONV.CON

The conversion file QDASCONV.CON controls the conversion of the Calypso measurement results into the QDAS format. QDASCONV.EXE needs the data from this file for the conversion. QDASCONV.CON must be located in the directory c:\opt\home\om. You can modify QDASCONV.CON to influence the conversion (see Controlling the Conversion with QDASCONV.CON on page 9-34).
How to save Calypso Measurement Results in QDAS Format

To save the Calypso measurement results in QDAS format: 1 Make sure that QDASCONV is installed. The program QDASCONV.EXE is located in the directory c:\opt\om\bin\winnt. 2 Save the results as described in Saving Measurement Results to Files on page 9-29. Set the option QDAS to On (Save without query) or Select at CNC Start (Save with query).
NOTE
hss
In the QDAS file, only the results are stored for which the selection point of the characteristic Characteristic to Statistic is set to On or Default in the Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics. After execution of a CNC run, the measurement results will be saved as the description file (*.dfd) and the value file (*.dfx) in the directory C:\home\om\workarea\qdas, and under the name of the corresponding measurement plan.
Controlling the Conversion with QDASCONV.CON

To control the conversion of the Calypso measurement results into the QDAS format, you just need to adapt the configuration file QDASCONV.CON.
9-34
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Line Format of the Configuration File QDASCONV.CON
Every relevant line of the configuration file has the following line format:
KXXXX LLL T H:<Name>
The wildcards have the following meanings:

K LLL T
Key Length of field Type of data
XXXX: 4-character key for indication of type of contents 1 ... 255 A = Alphanumeric I = Number F = Floating point number D = Date P = Key word from the header file, example: P:planid W = directly from this file; example: W:Prismo7
H:<Name>
Origin and field name
Spaces and tabs are used as separators. Spaces at the beginning are not allowed. Comments begin with #.
Sections of the Configuration File QDASCONV.CON

The file is divided into four sections, which are labeled with the letters B, C, D and E. Each section is opened with a separator, for example:
$C------------------------------------
Sections B, C and D contain the keys (including definition) to be requested from the customer which are necessary for the description file and the value file, as well as a description of how the data fields are to be filled. The values defined here are valid for all workpieces. You can, however, individually adapt the QDAS information part in the custom printout for every workpiece. Section E defines the extra data fields to be created in the values file.
Section B: Parts data to be created
In this section of the configuration file, all part information which is to be requested from the customer is specified here with key, length and type and, in some cases, contents. Frequently used keys and their labels for part data:
K1001 K1002
Part number Part label
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
9-35
K1003 K1004 K1005 K1007 K1040 K1041 K1042 K1043 K1900
Part short label Part modification status Product Part number short label Drawing catalog Drawing number text Drawing change Drawing index Remarks
You do not necessarily need to use the keys listed here. You can add new keys at any time.
Section C: Constant characteristic data to be created
Some of the specifications needed to describe features are not known by the user or machine, and are not contained in the measurement protocol. Some of these data have the same values for all features. These data are therefore defined as constant feature data in this section of the configuration file. Frequently used keys and their labels for constant feature data:
K2004 K2005 K2007 K2211 K2212 K2213 K2214 K2215 K2220 K2221 K2303 K2305 K2306 K2307 K2342 K2343 K2344
Type of feature Feature class Type of control Type of distribution Normal number text: Comparison normal Normal label Normal temperature Normal number Number of tester Number of measurements Section/Bookkeeping Machine number Area in works PTM - number Measurement plan name Measurement plan creation date Measurement plan creator
9-36
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
K2401 K2402 K2404 K2405 K2406 K2407 K2408 K2409 K2410
Test equipment number text Test equipment label Test equipment resolution Text equipment number Text equipment manufacturer SPC device number SPC device label SPC device type Test location
You do not necessarily have to insert values for these keys in the configuration file, because you can enter them in the data module of the statistic program qs-STAT.
Section D: Variable feature data to be created NOTE
hss
Some of the feature data can be taken directly from the measurement protocol. Values for these data do not have to be entered in this section of the configuration file. Do not change data in section D Frequently used keys and their labels for variable feature data:
K2001 K2002 K2003 K2100 K2101 K2110 K2111 K2112 K2113 K2120 K2121 K2142 K2151
Feature number Feature label (Additional text from configuration file) Label short text (Calypso feature type) Nominal value/Target value Nominal dimension Lower limit Upper limit Lower deviation Upper deviation Type of lower limit Type of upper limit Unit label Tolerance as text (tolerance width)
Section E: Additional data fields to be produced
For every measurement, additional data can be saved in the value file. These data are valid only for the corresponding measurement run.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
9-37
Keys and their labels for additional data fields

K0005 K0006 K0007 K0008 K0009 K0010
Events Charge number/Identification number Nest number/Spindle number Tester (number from catalog) Text Machine number (number from catalog)
These values can change with each measurement run. It is therefore useful to use the columns from the printout. The keys in this section affect only the first measurement run. They should be evaluated only if they are valid for all measurements, for example if all workpieces come from the same machine. To save all corresponding data with the measurement run, these keys can also be listed in the QDAS information section of the measurement protocol.
9-38
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Example of a QDAS Configuration File
############################################################################## # File: QDASCONV.CON # Configuration file for QDASCONV.EXE ############################################################################## $B---------------------------------------------------------------------------############################################################################## # Section B: Parts data to be created (K1000 - K1099) # (see also QDAS data formats) # All customer-required data must be specified here # CALYPSO: The data is taken from the header file #----------------------------------------------------------------------------K1001 30 A P:planid K1002 80 A P:partcomment K1004 20 A P:partrv K1007 20 A P:partsn K1041 30 A P:drawingno K1053 20 A P:order K1081 20 A P:mfgdev K1086 20 A P:tooldf K1101 40 A P:vda_departm K1201 20 A P:dmesn K1202 40 A P:dmeid K1900 255 A P:startcomment $C---------------------------------------------------------------------------############################################################################## # Section C: Feature data to be created that is the same for all features # (see also QDAS data formats) # All customer-required data must be specified here, the format is # the same as in section $B # ATTENTION: Values from the characteristic file are not allowed here. #----------------------------------------------------------------------------K2004 1 I W:0 K2005 1 I W:3 K2007 1 I K2011 4 I K2013 22 F W:0.0001 K2022 1 I W:4 K2142 40 A W:mm K2301 20 A P:mfgdev K2302 40 A P:mfgdev K2303 40 A P:vda_departm K2306 40 A P:vda_departm K2342 40 A P:planid K2343 20 D P:creationdate K2344 20 A P:produceoper K2401 40 A P:dmesn K2402 80 A P:dmeid K2406 40 A W:Carl Zeiss Oberkochen K8500 5 I W:3
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
9-39
$D---------------------------------------------------------------------------############################################################################## # Section D: Feature data to be created that is specific for all features # (see also QDAS data formats) # All customer-required data must be specified here, the format is # the same as in section $B # No value identifications are defined, the values are taken from the # characteristic file. # If no source is given, the values will be calculated. ############################################################################## K2001 20 A C: K2002 80 A C:id K2003 20 A C:type K2100 22 F K2101 22 F C:nominal K2110 22 F C:lowertol K2111 22 F C:uppertol K2112 22 F C:lowertol K2113 22 F C:uppertol K2120 1 I K2121 1 I K2130 22 F K2131 22 F K2141 5 I K2151 20 A K2213 22 F C:actual $E---------------------------------------------------------------------------############################################################################## # Section E: Additional data fields to be created in the values file # All customer-required data must be specified here, the format is # the same as in section $B ############################################################################## #K0001 22 F C:actual #K0006 14 A P:lotid #K0007 5 I P:tooldf #K0008 5 I P:operid #K0009 40 A P:startcomment
9-40
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
10
10
.................................................................................................................................
Chapter
The Duplex Mode
Very large workpieces can be measured using CMMs with two measuring columns (dual-column CMMs) to obtain almost twice the usable measuring volume offered by a CMM with only one column. Each of the two columns measures, but computations and evaluations take place on only one of the computers. Calypso enables you to prepare, perform and evaluate duplex measurements of this nature. Note that to do so, you must have Calypso running on both computers. The sections included in this chapter explain the basics of working with dual-arm CMMs, and step you through the procedures involved.

Duplex Operation with Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Preparing the Duplex Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Using Duplex Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
10- 1
The Duplex Mode
Duplex Operation with Calypso

Very large workpieces can be measured using CMMs with two measuring columns to obtain almost twice the usable measuring volume offered by a CMM with only one column. Each of the measuring columns is connected to a computer for correction and evaluation of the measurements; one of these computers is the master, the other is the client.
Calypso enables you to prepare, perform and evaluate duplex measurements of this nature. Note that to do so, you must have Calypso running on both computers.
Run Mode
There are two different modes in the duplex mode run control: Synchronous mode The measurement plan runs on the master. The master controls both measuring columns, with only one moving at any time. The client is only a conveyor of commands and results. Asynchronous mode The measurement plan runs on both computers. The measuring columns move relatively independently of each other, controlled by the relevant computer. However, if data from the other measuring column are required for calculating a specific feature, the measuring column will wait until these data have been provided by the other measuring column.
10-2
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Duplex Operation with Calypso
The sections included in this chapter explain the basics of working in duplex mode, and step you through the procedures involved. You have to prepare duplex mode in order to take measurements with two measuring columns. In particular, Calypso must know how the two measuring ranges, originally independent, relate to each other (see Preparing the Duplex Mode on page 10-4). Important when measuring in any given run: log on, measure, log off (see Measuring with a Dual Arm CMM on page 10-15).
NOTE
hss
Analog to duplex mode, you can also control more than two measuring columns in multiplex mode. In this way, you can increase the measuring range again and you can save additional measuring time in asynchronous mode. The procedure is principally the same as in duplex mode; you have a master and several clients.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
10-3
The Duplex Mode
Preparing the Duplex Mode

The preconditions for duplex mode are as follows: The files for duplex operation are available and correct Both computers are connected via the network Both measuring ranges are coupled
Files for Duplex Operation

Some Windows NT system files have to be configured for duplex operation. These files are preconfigured on both computers of a system designed for duplex operation. The files are in the directory ..\winnt\system32\drivers\etc and are called services and hosts. The lines required for duplex mode are listed here just in case the system files are modified in some way.
The services file
Examples of entries in the services file: qmaster czcol1 czoemint acis counter holos ZVICONTROL col0 col1 col2 col3 oscssd 10012/udp 9996/tcp 9999/tcp 9998/tcp 9888/tcp 4959/tcp 8888/tcp 9800/tcp 9801/tcp 9802/tcp 9803/tcp 5019/tcp
# Double Column CNC
# CADLINK-UX # CALYPSO # Double Column MAN # Column1 # Column2 # Column3 # VERSANT connect service
It is important to make sure that the czcol1 line is in the file.
10-4
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
The hosts file
Entries in the hosts file (example): #################################################### # # SubNet 192.4.1 Testroom # # 192.4.1.65 cnc1 CNC1 # Master 192.4.1.66 cnc2 CNC2 # Client # 192.4.1.55 dynalog1 # computer1 -> Master 192.4.1.56 dynalog2 # computer2 -> Client # 192.4.1.200 cmm_1 CMM_1 # controller1 -> Master 192.4.1.201 cmm_2 CMM_2 # controller2 -> Client 192.4.1.202 cmm_3 CMM_3 # controller3 192.4.1.203 cmm_4 CMM_4 # controller4 # #################################################### In this example cnc1 CNC1 is the name of the master PC. dynalog1 is the name of the control panel connected to the master CMM. cmm_1 CMM_1 is the name of the master CMM's controller.
Establishing the Connection and Coupling the Measuring Ranges

The two measuring ranges have to be coupled so that Calypso can combine the results from both. Reference probings have to be taken at one or three reference spheres in the zone that is common to both measuring ranges, so that the two can be coupled. The results are combined in calculation and yield the basis for common measurements and evaluations for the two measuring columns. The coupling matrix is computed on the master and sent to the client, and the client uses the matrix to convert its measured coordinates into the coordinate system of the master CMM.
Selecting the Method of Coupling for Duplex Operation

The sphere normals (references) must be installed in such a way that they can be reached and probed by both measuring columns.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
10-5
The Duplex Mode
Coupling methods
There are two possible methods: Translational coupling A reference sphere is positioned in the center of the common zone. Translational coupling involves computing the offset of the two device zero points. Translational and rotational coupling Three reference spheres are arranged to form a triangle in space. They should delimit the common zone of the measuring space vertically and horizontally. Translational and rotational coupling involves computing the residual angle of the two device coordinate systems relative to each other remaining despite alignment. Calypso has a measurement plan for each method, so that you can proceed with coupling.
Probes
Install the appropriate reference probe in each column for coupling. This ensures maximum precision. You have the option of using some other, qualified probe if slightly less precision is sufficient. Once the two measuring ranges have been coupled for the first time, the relevant data is stored in Calypso and is evaluated for measurements in duplex mode. The coupling has to be readjusted under the following circumstances: Method Translational + rotational Translational + rotational Translational Translational
Subsequent coupling
Reason for Coupling Always after a mechanical alteration From time to time in operation (e. g. weekly if use is frequent) Every time the system is restarted Every time a measuring column homes
How to Prepare Coupling for Duplex Operation

A number of preconditions have to be satisfied before you can proceed with coupling the measuring ranges. The preparations are as follows: 1 On each computer, select Extras Workroom CMM and open the notebook to the Dual Arm page. This page is available only if the machine is defined as a horizontalarm CMM.
10-6
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
2 On the designated master computer, select the option Master.
3 Enter the requisite information for coupling the systems: Under Columns: enter the number of columns (in duplex mode usually 2). The Port Number is taken from the services file in the ..\winnt\system32\drivers\etc directory. The measuring columns are correlated to the computers on the basis of the computer names in the hosts file, in this case, for example, cnc1. You can overwrite the defaults, listed here by way of illustration: Master Arm 1 = Column1 Controller 1 = CMM_1 Client Arm 2 = Column2 Controller 2 = CMM_2
Computer 1 = CMMWS_1 = local Computer 2 = CMMWS_2 PC
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
10-7
The Duplex Mode
4 Select Client as the option for the other computer.
5 Enter the requisite information for coupling the systems on this computer: The Port Number is taken from the services file in the ..\winnt\system32\drivers\etc directory. Correlation is on the basis of the computer names in the hosts file, in this case, for example, cnc2. It is advisable to check the connection before coupling the measuring ranges.
10-8
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
6 On the client, click on the Interface button. The Interface page appears on screen. The page shown here is the Interface page on the master:
7 Check the settings for the connection: Address for controller on client: cmm_2,4712 Address for control panel on client: cmm_2,4712 Note the comma after the digits. IP address of controller on client: IP address found: 192.4.1.201
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
10-9
The Duplex Mode
8 If you wish to control the columns in asynchronous operation: On the client computer, select Extras Workroom Environment and open the notebook to the Dual Arm page.
9 In the first line, enter the path for the measurement plans on the master PC and in the second line the path for the basic alignments on the master PC. Under Directory path, enter the locally valid designation of the path and under Mounted as..., enter the designation valid in the network under which the client system can access the path. 10 Click on OK. The notebook is closed and the settings are accepted.
How to Set Up the Connection between the Computers

Once you have completed the preparations, you can set up the connection between the two computers.
Connection setup
1 Close Calypso, but do not close the Taskbar and the Stoplight window. The connection is set up in the Stoplight window only.
10-10
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
NOTE
hss
Always proceed exactly as described below, otherwise the connection will not be successful. 2 In the stop light window on the client computer, select View Multi-Arm and click on the Initialize... button.
The Wait for Master... message is displayed on the client.
3 In the Stoplight window on the master computer, select View Multi-Arm. 4 Tick the Connected with Clients check box to establish the connection to the client computer. The prompt shown here is displayed:
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
10-11
The Duplex Mode
5 Do not click OK to confirm until the client reports that its status is Wait for Master...:
When the connection is successfully established, the following dialog box appears on the screen:
Important: Make sure that the Column1 entry is labeled in black (not gray).
You can now proceed to Redefine the connection or, if this has already been done, you can start measuring.
How to Check the Measurement Plans before Coupling the Measuring Ranges
Once you have set up the connection, the next step is to couple the two measuring ranges. Calypso provides two measurement plans for the purpose: The col2_trans plan for exclusively translational coupling, The col2_rotate plan for rotational and translational coupling. It is best to check the measurement plan before using it, if you are unsure whether all the settings are correct. The procedure is as follows: 1 Select File Open and select the measurement plan for the coupling you are going to use.
10-12
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
2 Select Prerequisites Measurement Plan Editor - Features. 3 Make sure that the setting for Probe is MasterProbe across all features (or the qualified probe you are going to use). 4 Make sure that the setting for Man CNC Mode is MAN across all features. 5 Make sure that the entry under Columns that will be measured with column 2 is column 2 for all features. 6 In the list of characteristics, open the 3-D Best Fit1 characteristic. The Definition Template (Alternative Alignment Methods) dialog box appears on the screen.
7 Make certain that the entry Column2 (arm ID slave) is set under Receiver. 8 Select File Save to save the measurement plan.
How to Define the Coupling

When you are satisfied that all settings in the measurement plan (probe, base alignment, MAN or CNC, name of the second measuring column, etc.) are correct, you can run the measurement plan for the coupling. 1 Open Calypso on the master computer.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
10-13
The Duplex Mode
2 In the Stoplight window, click on the Define Coupling button and select Translate or Translate and Rotate. 3 In response to the prompt, manually probe six points in succession on a sphere, using measuring column 1 (the master). The number of the point to be probed appears in the dialog box under Next Probing Point. 4 In response to the prompt, manually probe six points in succession on the same sphere, this time using measuring column 2 (the client). If you selected translational and rotational coupling, you must repeat this procedure at two more positions on the measuring plate. 5 In response to the prompts, probe sphere 2 and sphere 3 in succession, first with measuring column 1 (master) and then with measuring column 2 (client). When measurement is completed, the master sends its computed coupling matrix to the client. The client uses the coupling matrix to convert its measured points into the coordinate system of the master, before sending this information back to the master. As soon as this process is completed, you can start measuring in duplex mode. Alternatively, you can clear down the connection between the two computers and set it up again later when measurements are to be made.
How to Reset the Coupling

A coupling corrects the coupling matrix on the client, but the matrix is not entirely rebuilt. If you want to delete the coupling matrix on the client in order to rebuild it from scratch, proceed as follows: 1 In the stop light window, go to Multi-Arm and click on the Special button. 2 Click on the Reset connection data button that now appears. The matrix is deleted. You have to redefine the coupling before you can use duplex mode again.
10-14
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Using Duplex Mode
Using Duplex Mode

It is very important to bear the following points in mind when you measure in duplex mode: Each feature can be measured with only one measuring column. This means that large holes, for example, have to be interlinked by means of individual points. (Each feature is assigned to one and only one measuring column). Unless otherwise defined in the Strategy dialog box, the master (measuring column 1) is generally used for measuring features. Note the geometry of the features. When you assign features, remember to make sure that measurement must be collision-free, and that this applies to both measuring columns. Measurements in the common measuring range of the two arms merits special care and attention. Make sure that there is no risk of an arm colliding with the other arm as it performs a retract or moves to an intermediate position without probing.
Asynchronous operation
We recommend the following general procedure for measuring in asynchronous operation: Set up the measurement plan for asynchronous operation. First test the measurement plan in synchronous mode (measurement plan editor - features: duplex run mode set to synchronous). Only then test the measurement plan in asynchronous mode (measurement plan editor - features: duplex run mode set to asynchronous).
Measuring with a Dual Arm CMM

The procedure for measuring in duplex mode consists of the log-on, measure, and log-off phases. You do not have to log on if you have just finished coupling the measuring ranges; the two measuring columns are already coupled. You can skip to Measuring in Duplex Mode on page 10-16. In all other circumstances, you have to start by setting up the connection. The log-on phase is described in detail in How to Set Up the Connection between the Computers on page 10-10.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
10-15
The Duplex Mode
Measuring in Duplex Mode

The recommended procedure for measuring in duplex mode consists in successively constructing the measurement plan by manual probings and generating features, before starting the measurement plan in CNC mode. The measurement can also be constructed offline using empirical values, but this requires specialist knowledge and experience. It is, therefore, best to proceed as usual, working on the master computer as if you were measuring with a single-arm CMM, while bearing the following additional points in mind: Each feature can be measured with only one of the two measuring columns. The point and the position know where they come from; probing the first point or the first position defines the measuring column to which the feature belongs. You can view this information in the Measurement Plan Editor Features under Columns (default or column1 means master; column2 means client). Clearance Planes: The measuring column flagged as active by the stoplight is the arm that executes the go to clearance plane movement.
!
hss
Risk of collision Do not forget to clear the intermediate positions, as otherwise there would be a risk of collision. Caution If you are preparing a measurement plan for asynchronous operation, you must make absolutely sure that the measuring columns can not collide under any circumstances. That is to say, the areas in which the measuring columns move must never overlap. Insofar as the areas of movement overlap, the possibility of a collision can not be excluded, because in asynchronous mode the measuring columns move independently of each other. Please check the following functions and settings in particular using the Measurement Plan Editor - Features: COLUMNS Probe Stylus Clearance group RDS angle
!
hss
10-16
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Using Duplex Mode
If you are measuring in asynchronous mode, you have to save the measurement plan after every alteration. Otherwise the client will not be able to read the current alterations.
How to Start the Duplex Mode

After you have completed all the preparations and you have connected the two computers together, you can start the duplex mode. To start the duplex mode: 1 Select CNC Measurement Start Measurement Start. The Start Measurement window is displayed. 2 If you want to work in asynchronous mode: Under Order of Run, select the mode From Feature List. If you select From Characteristic List, the CMM will proceed as in synchronous mode. 3 Click on OK to confirm. A warning message will appear, which you must confirm. The run begins.
How to Clear Down the Coupling for Duplex Operation

Clear down the connection between master and client when you have finished measuring. The procedure for logging off and terminating the duplex mode is as follows: 1 On the master computer, deactivate the Connected with Clients check box. 2 On the client computer, deactivate the Connected to the Master check box. This clears down the connection.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
10-17
The Duplex Mode
10-18
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
11
11
.................................................................................................................................
Chapter
Managing Calypso
This chapter is intended primarily for system administrators (e.g. the Master user) or experienced users, who are authorized to change the Calypso system settings. This chapter explains how to check and, if necessary, change system settings. This includes, for example, defining users or initializing the CMM.

Installing Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Installing a Service Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 If a Software Error Occurs the Error Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
11- 1
Managing Calypso
Installing Calypso
Calypso is automatically installed on your computer when you receive the system. However, the installation instructions are included here in case you need to reinstall the software for any reason. The installation requires: the Calypso software CD the CMM Disk
System Requirements
To guarantee that Calypso runs error-free, your system must at least fulfill the following requirements:
Hardware requirements
Windows-compatible Siemens, Compaq, Hewlett Packard or DELL PC with 2.5 GB hard drive CD-ROM drive 17 SVGA monitor 3.5 floppy drive LAN card Mouse Keyboard
Performance parameters
Minimum Requirements: Pentium II processor with 200 MHz clock frequency 128 MB RAM 8 MB OPEN-GL-compatible graphics card Recommended configuration (especially for CAD options): Processor with 2 GHz clock frequency 1 GB RAM 32 MB OPEN-GL-capable graphics card
Software requirements
The PC must run one of the following Operating Systems: Windows NT 4.0 Windows 2000
System settings
If your system was configured by Zeiss service personnel, you do not have to modify the settings. If this was not the case, click on Start Settings Control Panel and select Display and set True Color under Colors on the Settings card.
11-2
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Installing Calypso
Installing Calypso
NOTE
hss
In order to install / uninstall Calypso, you must be logged on with Administrator privileges. If you already have an older version of Calypso installed on your computer, run the uninstall program before you install a new version. Existing data such as measurement plans, probe data, base alignments or other CMM-specific data will not be deleted during the uninstallation process. It is, however, recommended, that a backup copy of the existing Calypso directory be made using Windows Explorer. Follow these steps to uninstall Calypso: 1 Turn on your computer. Windows starts automatically. 2 Select Start Settings Control Panel in the Windows start menu and click on Add / Remove Programs. 3 Select the program Calypso on the Install/Uninstall card, click on Add/Remove and follow the instructions on the screen. 4 Select Remove from the Program Maintenance window and click on Next. 5 In the next window, click on Remove. The Calypso files on zhe PC will be removed automatically. The current status will be displayed. 6 Confirm completion of uninstall with Finish. 7 Confirm the restart message with Yes. Your computer will be restarted. Calypso has now been uninstalled.
Uninstall existing version NOTE

hss
Install current version or new release
Once you have removed an existing version of Calypso you will be able to install the current version. Follow these steps to install the software: 1 If you have not already done so, switch on your computer. Windows will start automatically. 2 Insert the CMM Disk into the floppy disk drive.
NOTE
hss
The write protect on the CMM Disk must be off. You can also copy the CMM Disk onto the hard drive for later selection. 3 Place the Calypso software CD in the CD-ROM drive. If the CD starts automatically, the Calypso installation window will appear immediately. Proceed to step 7.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
11-3
Managing Calypso
4 If this is not the case, select the Windows command Start Run. A prompt for a filename to run appears. 5 Click on Browse, select the CD-ROM drive and select the Calypso.exe file on the CD. 6 Click on Open, and then on OK. After a few moments, the Calypso installation window will appear. 7 Select English as the language of the installation. 8 Click on the Install button and then on Calypso. The installation program checks if there is enough space on the hard drive and asks you if the CMM Disk is inserted. 9 If the CMM Disk is in the floppy drive, then click on Yes. Otherwise, click on No, enter the path with the CMM Disk in the following prompt, and click on OK. A Welcome screen appears. 10 Click on Next to accept the copyright agreement and continue. The User Information window will open. 11 Enter the user information and click on Next. The Setup Type window will appear on the screen. 12 Select Standard if you do not wish to alter any of the presettings and click on Next. - or Select Custom and click on Next if you wish to change the following settings in the windows that follow: drives and target directories for installation program features to be installed
NOTE
hss
The settings as you define them in this step are subsequently proposed as the defaults for the next Standard installation. After a short time, the system indicates that it is Ready to install the program. 13 Click on Install. Calypso will now be installed automatically. The current status will be displayed. Afterwards, the message InstallShield Wizard completed appears. 14 Click on Finish. 15 Confirm the restart message with Yes and remove the CMM Disk from the drive. Your computer will now be restarted. Calypso has now been correctly installed.
11-4
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Installing a Service Pack

From time to time, you may receive program modifications and additions as Service Packs. Service Packs can arrive by e-mail, on floppy disk or on CD-ROM. The instructions below are based on the assumption that you have received the Service Pack on disk. Broadly speaking, though, the procedure is the same for all distribution mediums. The name of the service pack file contains information relating to the corresponding program version. zeiss_sp3412.exe, for example, is Service Pack 12 for Version 3.4 of the program. Installation consists of two steps: Decompressing the Service Pack files Installing the Service Pack files
How to Decompress the Service Pack Files

The program files on the shipping medium are compressed to take up as little storage capacity as possible. You have to decompress the files before you can install them. 1 Boot your computer if you have not already done so. 2 Insert the Service Pack disk into the floppy disk drive. 3 Open Windows Explorer: Point to Start and click on Programs. Click on Windows Explorer. Delete the contents of C:\TEMP. 4 Click on the 3 1/2 Floppy (A:).
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
11-5
Managing Calypso
5 Double-click on the file calypso_spxxxx.exe.
1. Select drive A:
2. Double-click on the file name
This opens the WinZip Self-Extractor window.
The default folder is C:\TEMP. 6 Click on Unzip. The files are decompressed. A message appears on the screen when the files have been decompressed. 7 Click on OK and click on the Close button in the WinZip SelfExtractor dialog box. The program files are now in the directory C:\TEMP on your hard drive. They can now be installed (see How to Install the Program Files Contained in the Service Pack on page 11-7).
11-6
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
How to Install the Program Files Contained in the Service Pack

Once they have been decompressed, the files of the current Service Pack will be on your hard drive (see How to Decompress the Service Pack Files on page 11-5). To install the program files: 1 Select Start Programs Zeiss Calypso Service Pack from the Windows start menu. You will be prompted to select a language for the installation routine. 2 Select the installation language and then click on OK. The installation program now asks you to confirm the path for the decompressed files. The default folder is C:\TEMP. 3 Click on OK if the decompressed files are located in C:\TEMP. Should this not be the case, enter the correct path and then click on OK. When installation completes, the following message will appear.
4 Click on OK to close the message. Calypso's system files will be updated the first time the program is called after installation of the Service Pack. This may take some time. You will then be asked to close and restart Calypso.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
11-7
Managing Calypso
If a Software Error Occurs the Error Report

Calypso is a program which undergoes continuous development. The target of the development is to make Calypso better with every revision. You can support this process by using the error report. An error report can be generated automatically by Calypso, or you can trigger the process manually (see How to Use the Error Report on page 11-9). The error report contains at least the following data: the type of device the current Service Pack version the system's error messages a description of a situation (what was the lead-up to this error?), which you will be required to enter The error report can be saved as a file and sent to Zeiss. If you wish, you can also add the current measurement plan to this file.
11-8
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
If a Software Error Occurs the Error Report
How to Use the Error Report

The automatic error report appears anytime Calypso runs into an internal program error. To manually call up the error report: 1 Select Extras Error Report.
2 In Comment please enter as precisely as possible the circumstances which led to the error.
NOTE
hss
You must type in a comment before you can print or save the error report. 3 In the Address area, select the appropriate address from the Selection list. 4 Enter your name, address, phone and fax numbers, and your email address. 5 If you wish to forward the error report to Carl Zeiss by fax: Select File Print and fax the error report to the number stated under Address. 6 If you wish to forward your error report to Carl Zeiss by e-mail and also wish to forward the measurement plan: Select File Save. You will be asked if you also wish to save the measurement plan as some errors can only be analyzed with the help of the measurement plan.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
11-9
Managing Calypso
7 Confirm with Yes if Customer Support at Zeiss has requested that you forward the measurement plan. The error report will be compressed and saved (if necessary, with all the data from the current measurement plan directory and from the actual values directory) on your hard disk as hotl in the directory ..\calypso\var\opt\om\hotline. 8 Send this file by e-mail to the address stipulated under Address.
NOTE
hss
The other menu items under File are used for special service purposes Open can be used by Zeiss employees to unpack the forwarded measurement plan; the menu item Record geometric calculation should only be used when instructed to do so as this triggers resource-intensive processes.
11-10
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Modifying System Settings

Click on Extras Workroom to open the menu for the system set up. Each menu item in this menu (with the exception of Status Monitor) opens a notebook together with a matching group of settings: User Here, you can define new users and manage the existing users. This notebook can only be processed by the Master user. CMM Here you can set up the configuration of the CMM (control type, probe head, control console, etc.) and the software drivers. You also initialize the CMM here. Status Monitor You can view all important events which occurred during the current measurement. Environment You can modify the user specific settings (User Desk and measure units, start conditions, colors of the Calypso window). Measurement Here you can set the measuring parameters of the CMM (working speed, clearance distance, retract distance, scanning parameters, etc.). Miscellaneous You can view the Calypso copyright and version information. When you open one of these menu items, you can check or modify Calypsos system settings. Most settings are valid globally, i.e. for all users equally. Exceptions here are the settings for language, measure units and color. Each user that has logged in can select these specifically. The same, of course, applies to the user settings (privileges). You will find an overview of the settings in Settings You Can View or Modify on page 11-11.
Settings You Can View or Modify

The following table lists all of the system settings you can modify in Calypso: All the menu items listed in this table can be found under Extras Workroom.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
11-11
Managing Calypso
The instructions (column headed For More Information) are in the corresponding sections in the Online Help system. Setting Retract Distance Menu item Measurement Tab Methods For More Information How to Change the Measurement Parameters of the CMM How to Change the CMM Configuration
Beeping upon probing Users logged in Decimal Precision Expansion coefficients of the scales Automatic login at start
CMM User Environment CMM User
Head
Administration How to View or Enter a User Description Language Temperature How to Change your Environment How to Change the CMM Configuration
Administration How to Activate Automatic Log In Elements How to Change the Measurement Parameters of the CMM How to Change the Measurement Parameters of the CMM How to Change your Environment How to Change the Measurement Parameters of the CMM How to Change the CMM Configuration
Automatic feature predefinition Measurement
Automatic feature end (and number of points needed) Automatic opening of a measurement plan at program start Automatic path measurement
Measurement
Elements
Environment
Start
Measurement
Methods
Control panel type Add User Deleting users Renaming users User Copyright of Calypso
CMM User User User User Miscellaneous
Panel
Administration How to Add New Users Administration How to Delete a User Administration Renaming a User Administration Basics about Users Copyright How to View General Information about the Program Version How to Change the CMM Configuration How to Change the CMM Configuration
Articulating probe head Rotary table
CMM CMM
Head Rotary table
11-12
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Setting Dynalog keys Single point measurement
Menu item Environment Measurement
Tab Dynalog Methods
For More Information How to Change your Environment How to Change the Measurement Parameters of the CMM
Window color Device administration Speed of CMM for positioning and scanning Hardware and drivers
Environment CMM Measurement
Window Color How to Change your Environment Administration How to Change the CMM Configuration Speed How to Change the Measurement Parameters of the CMM How to Change the CMM Configuration How to Check the Home Directory How to Initialize the CMM How to View General Information about the Program Version How to Change the CMM Configuration How to Change the CMM Configuration How to Change the CMM Configuration How to Change your Environment How to Change your Environment How to Change the CMM Configuration How to Change the Measurement Parameters of the CMM How to Change the CMM Configuration How to Change the Measurement Parameters of the CMM
CMM
Control Name Control Internals
Home directory (for storing user- User specific settings) Initialization of the CMM Internal parameters of the software installation Coefficients (expansion) for scales Machine Type (CMM Type) Master in duplex operation Measure unit of length (mm or Inch) (User Interface) Measure unit of length (mm or Inch) (Printouts) Maximum diameter of probe head Measured points (for automatic feature recognition) Measuring range of CMM Nominal Mode CMM Miscellaneous
CMM CMM CMM Environment Environment CMM Measurement
Temperature Machine Duplex Language Language Head Elements
CMM Measurement
Machine Nominal
Reread (Internal)
Miscellaneous
Internals
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
11-13
Managing Calypso
Setting Home position of the CMM
Menu item CMM
Tab Machine Paths Paths Paths Duplex Privileges Reference probe Nominal
For More Information How to Change the CMM Configuration How to Change your Environment How to Change your Environment How to Change your Environment How to Change the CMM Configuration How to Assign General User Privileges How to Change the CMM Configuration How to Change the Measurement Parameters of the CMM How to Change the Measurement Parameters of the CMM How to Change the CMM Configuration How to Change the CMM Configuration How to Change the Measurement Parameters of the CMM How to Change the CMM Configuration How to Change the Measurement Parameters of the CMM How to Change your Environment How to Change your Environment How to Change your Environment
Path (directory) for actual values Environment Path (directory) for measurement plans Path (directory) for Table files Computer allocation in duplex operation Assign privileges Reference probe in sensor system Rounding measure for preset nominal value Scanning speed Environment Environment CMM User CMM Measurement
Measurement
Speed
Interface type and address CMM serial number Clearance distance
CMM CMM Measurement
Interface Machine Methods
Slave in duplex operation Rounding to nominal value (Rounding measure) Language (User Interface) Language (Printouts) Start conditions Start procedure (automatic login)
CMM Measurement
Duplex Rounding to nominal Language Language Start
Environment Environment Environment User
Administration How to Activate Automatic Log In
11-14
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Setting Status log for system Control type (hardware and drivers) Probe holders Probe changer Probe head configuration Diameter of probe head Temperature unit (Celsius or Fahrenheit) (User Interface) Temperature unit (Celsius or Fahrenheit) (Printouts) Positioning speed
Menu item Status Monitor CMM CMM CMM CMM CMM Environment Environment Measurement
Tab Control Changer Changer Head Head Language Language Speed
For More Information How to View the System Status Monitor How to Change the CMM Configuration How to Change the CMM Configuration How to Change the CMM Configuration How to Change the CMM Configuration How to Change the CMM Configuration How to Change your Environment How to Change your Environment How to Change the Measurement Parameters of the CMM How to Change your Environment How to Change your Environment
Angle Unit (Measure Unit) (User Environment Interface) Angle Unit (Measure Unit) (Printout) Environment
Language Language
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
11-15
Managing Calypso
11-16
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
12
12
.................................................................................................................................
Chapter
The Auto-Run interface segregates the performance of the measurement plans from the other tasks and functions in Calypso. This means that users who do not have specialist knowledge of how to work with Calypso can run measurement plans. In an Auto-Run interface, moreover, you can map typical measurement configurations as encountered in your CMM measuring range. The workpieces in the CMM measuring range correspond in size and position to the icons in the measurement plans on the AutoRun interface. The size and position of the measuring-plan icons on the interface correspond approximately to the size and position of the workpieces in the measuring range. You can use Auto-Run interfaces, therefore, to perform multiple measurement plans one after the other in a defined sequence.

Basics About Auto-Run Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Auto-Run for System Administrators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 Auto-Run for Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
12- 1
Basics About Auto-Run Interfaces

The Correspondence between CMM Measuring Range and Auto-Run Interface
An Auto-Run interface represents the measuring table or base plate of your CMM. This means that the position of each measuring-plan icon on the Auto-Run interface approximates to the position of the corresponding workpiece on the table. In the Auto-Run interface, the icons of the measurement plans are represented as if you were looking down on them from above, with a birds-eye view of the table or base plate of the CMM.
Important Auto-Run Terms

A certain number of new terms are encountered in the context of Auto-Run interfaces. These terms do not occur in Calypso, but they are very important as regards your grasp of the Auto-Run concept. Measurement Plan Icons A measurement plan icon is a symbol that represents a measurement plan (see Basics about Measurement Plan Icon on page 12-3). Desk A desk is that part of the Auto-Run interface which corresponds to the table or base plate of the CMM (see Basics about Desks on page 12-4). Branches A branch defines two or more connections between specific desks (see Basics about Branches on page 12-5). Pallet You can space workpieces over a defined grid on a pallet and then measure them all at once (see Basics about Pallets on page 12-5).
12-2
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
The Layout of the Interface

An Auto-Run interface is superimposed on the Calypso user interface. The illustration below shows the major features of the Auto-Run interface, and these features are described in more detail below.
Task bar
This area corresponds to the table or the base plate of the CMM
Buttons for controlling measurement
Measurement Plan icon here
Basics about Measurement Plan Icon

Each workpiece to be measured is assigned a measurement plan. When you want to map a workpiece on the measuring range onto an Auto-Run interface, you do so by means of the workpieces measurement plan. On the Auto-Run interface, however, you see only an icon labeled with the name of the measurement plan, instead of the entire measurement plan as such. The size of the icons is a special aspect: the larger the workpiece, the larger the icon. Calypso derives the size of the workpiece from the size of its clearance planes.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
12-3
Basics about Desks

A desk is that part of the Auto-Run interface which corresponds to the table or base plate of the CMM. A desk is characteristic of one and only one measuring configuration, as reflected by the fact that it bears the name of this configuration.
An Auto-Run interface can comprise more than one desk and you can switch from desk to desk. In this way, you can map a variety of measuring configurations in a single Auto-Run interface instead of having to define a new interface for each configuration. This is useful if the workpieces you have to measure recur, but are arranged in a variety of configurations on the table.
12-4
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Basics about Branches

Along with measurement plan icons, you can also place branches on the desk. If you have defined multiple desks, a branch is a way of going from one desk to an other, specific desk. This can be useful, for example, if you want to finish measuring with one desk and then immediately continue with a certain other desk. Clicking on the branch takes you directly to this particular desk, without having to look for it in the list of desks.
Basics about Pallets

You can map a pallet on your Auto-Run interface. You can arrange similar workpieces at regular intervals on a pallet and then measure them all at once. The pallet is loaded into the measuring range of the CMM as a complete unit for this purpose. Two preconditions have to be met so that Calypso can determine the positions of the workpieces on the pallet: Calypso requires the position of the pallet itself. This means you have to define a base coordinate system for the pallet and this, in turn, means that each pallet requires its own measurement plan. Calypso must be able to locate the individual workpieces on the pallet. This involves dividing the pallet into rows and columns, forming a grid in other words. The intersections are the reference points at which the workpieces are situated. The illustration below shows the pallet from above (Z direction) to clarify the relationships.
columns (X-division)
lines (Y-division) Y
X palette alignment
reference points on which the parts are situated
You can define how the pallet is divided so you can map each pallet in full.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
12-5
Auto-Run for System Administrators

One of your functions as system administrator is to set up an AutoRun interface, so that inexperienced users have a convenient way of running measurement plans. You will be familiar with some of the tasks involved from Calypso, others will be new to you. You must: configure Auto-Run, i.e. assign privileges to the future users and check the settings of the CMM in the system configuration. (See Configuring Auto-Run on page 12-6) map the possible measuring configurations of the CMM, each in an interface (known as a desk) of its own. See Mapping the Measuring Configuration on page 12-8.
Configuring Auto-Run
The purpose of Auto-Run interfaces is to automate Calypso processes so that inexperienced users will encounter no difficulty running them. Before you start mapping desks, the first thing to do is assign privileges for the future users. You also have to check the parameters set in the system settings for measuring and for the CMM and make any changes that might prove necessary.
How to Load the Auto-Run Interface

In order to open the Auto-Run Interface dialog box: 1 Close all measurement plans. 2 Select CNC Auto-Run. The Auto-Run Interface dialog box is opened.
How to Assign User Privileges for Auto-Run

As system administrator, you determine which tasks individual users can perform on the basis of their experience, by assigning certain privileges. Only the Master user has the right to edit Auto-Run.
12-6
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
To assign privileges: 1 Select Configuration Users Privileges. The User Privileges dialog box appears on the screen.
The names of all defined Calypso users are listed on the left. 2 Highlight the name of the user to whom you want to assign privileges. All privileges available for the Auto-Run interface are now listed on the right.
3 To assign a privilege, activate its check box in the Status column. A tick means that the user in question can execute the action specified under Privileges. 4 Once you have defined the privileges for this user, click on OK.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
12-7
The settings are saved and are active for this user with immediate effect.
How to Specify the CMM

The parameters for the CMM, measurement and the work environment are usually defined already in the system settings. For safetys sake, however, you should at least check the settings and adjust them as necessary. Check the parameters for the following areas: The CMM configuration (under Configuration CMM). There is an Explanation in Online Help under How to Change the CMM Configuration.
NOTE
hss
On the Machine page of the CMM configuration, make sure that the Measuring Range is defined completely and correctly. The measuring parameters for speed and probe routes (under Configuration Measurement). There is an Explanation in Online Help under How to Change the CMM Configuration. The users work environment (under Configuration Environment). There is an Explanation in Online Help underHow to Change the CMM Configuration.
Mapping the Measuring Configuration

You can streamline the process of measuring different workpieces by grouping them on the table or on the base plate of the CMM. You can map the arrangement of these workpieces accurately in the AutoRun interface you do this by defining what are known as desks. The tasks involved in mapping the measuring configuration are as follows: Define desks Add measurement plan Position measurement plan icon Place graphic on measurement plan icon Set size of an icon
12-8
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
How to Define Desks

A desk is an accurate map of the workpieces as arranged in the CMMs measuring range. You define a separate desk for each arrangement of workpieces. To define a desk: 1 If no desks have been defined as yet in this Auto-Run interface: Go to the menu bar and select Desk Link Rename. (When a new Auto-Run interface is defined, Calypso always creates a desk named No Name and you should first rename before using it).
Enter the new name for the desk. Click on OK. The default desk now has a new name. 2 If you have already created a desk: Go to the menu bar and select Desk Link New.
Enter a name for the desk. Click on OK. The name of the new desk appears in a picklist in the task bar. You have now defined a desk, in other words a two-dimensional map of the empty CMM measuring range.
How to Add a Measurement Plan to a Desk

To map a workpiece in the measuring range, add the measurement plan that was defined for the workpiece to the desk.
NOTE
hss
Make sure that no measurement plan is open in Calypso, because it would be overwritten in an Auto-Run process.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
12-9
To add a measurement plan to the desk: 1 Click on the Measurement Plan button. The Select Measurement Plan dialog box is opened.
This dialog box contains a list of all measurement plans in the selected measurement plan folder. 2 Highlight the measurement plan of your choice or look for it, if it is some other folder. 3 Click on OK to load the measurement plan and close the dialog box. Calypso creates an icon for the measurement plan and places it in the top left corner of the desk. All you have to do is position the icons in accordance with the positions of the workpieces in the measuring range.
How to Position Measurement Plan Icons on the Desk

The position of each measuring plan icon on the Auto-Run interface must correspond to the position of the corresponding workpiece on the table or base plate. To position a measurement plan icon: 1 Click the left mouse button on the icon and hold down the button. You can now drag the icon with the mouse. 2 Drag the icon to the approximate position on the desk.
12-10
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
How to Place a Bitmap Image on a Measurement Plan Icon

For the sake of clarity, you can superimpose images (e.g. of the relevant workpieces) on the icons on the desk. You need a bitmap of the workpiece, imaged with a digital camera, for example. You can load various images for each individual run of a measurement plan, so that you can easily distinguish between the individual runs. To place a bitmap on a measurement plan or run icon: 1 Highlight the icon. 2 Open the shortcut menu by clicking the right mouse button (twobutton mouse, or the middle button of a three-button mouse) on the icon. The shortcut menu opens. 3 Select the Load Bitmap... command. 4 Select the desired image file in the file selection dialog. The image is then placed on the measurement plan icon or on the run icon. With the menu item Remove picture in the shortcut menu, you can display the icon again without the bitmap.
How to Define the Size of an Icon

You can define the size of an icon in the popup menu: 1 Highlight the icon. 2 Open the shortcut menu by clicking the right mouse button (twobutton mouse, or the middle button of a three-button mouse) on the icon. The shortcut menu opens. 3 Select the Define Icon Size... command. The Defining Icon Size dialog box appears on the screen.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
12-11
4 Enter the height and width you want the icon to have on the desk. 5 Click OK to confirm and save your entries. The dialog box closes and the icon is resized to your specifications.
How to Create Branches between Desks

You can use the picklist in the task bar to move from one desk to another. A branch, however, is a quick way of changing directly to a specific desk. To create a branch: 1 Make sure that the desk displayed on the screen is the one from which you want to link to another desk by means of a branch. 2 Click on the Branch button or in the menu bar on the arrow beside the picklist for desks. The selection box illustrated below opens and you are prompted to define the destination for the branch.
3 Select the destination desk: If you want to go to an existing desk, highlight the desks name. If you want to go to a desk that has not been defined at this time, highlight <new>. 4 Click on OK. Calypso creates the icon for the branch (together with the name of the destination desk) and adds it to the source desk.
Mapping a Pallet
Multiple workpieces of similar type are mounted on a pallet. Calypso determines the position of the pallet on the table by computing the pallets base alignment. Calypso can deduce the positions of the workpieces from the grid of rows and columns which it superimposes on the pallet.
12-12
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
How to Prepare a Pallet

Preparing a pallet entails creating a new measurement plan. This step does not involve dividing the pallet into rows and columns. To prepare a pallet: In Calypso, create a measurement plan specially for the pallet. It is important that the pallet should have a unique base alignment so that the program can unequivocally determine the location of the pallet.
How to Add a Pallet to a Desk

You can add a pallet to a desk. Workpieces of similar type mounted on a pallet, arranged in a uniform grid of rows and columns. To add a pallet: 1 Click on the Pallet button. The Pallet Parameters dialog box appears on the screen:
Picklist for pallet base alignment Input field for pallet name
Input fields for pitch and number of grid lines in X and Y directions
2 Select the base alignment for the pallet from the Pallet System picklist. 3 In the Pallet Name input field, enter a name for the pallet. 4 Define the grid for the pallet: In the Group Columns column, enter the Distance and the Number of columns. In the Group Rows column, enter the Distance and the Number of rows. 5 Click on OK.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
12-13
The icon is created and appears in the top left corner of the desk. You still have the option of defining the size of the icon (How to Define the Size of an Icon on page 12-11).
How to Add a Measurement Plan to a Pallet|

The workpieces on a pallet are all similar. You must now select a measurement plan that suits this type of workpiece and add it to the pallet, so that Calypso can subsequently perform the CNC run. To add a measurement plan to the pallet: 1 Highlight the icon of the pallet. 2 Open the shortcut menu by clicking the right mouse button (twobutton mouse, or the middle button of a three-button mouse) on the icon. 3 Select the Add Measurement Plan... command. The Select Measurement Plan dialog box is opened.
This dialog box contains a list of all measurement plans in the selected measurement plan folder. 4 Highlight the measurement plan of your choice or look for it, if it is some other folder. 5 Click on OK to load the measurement plan and close the dialog box. The name of the measurement plan is displayed below the pallet.
12-14
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Defining Measuring Runs for a Pallet

There are two ways of defining the workpieces on the pallet to be measured in the CNC run: Define a loop. In this way, for example, you can measure every third workpiece on the pallet - take samples, in other words. Select individual positions on the pallet with the mouse. This is a straightforward means of selection and enables you to exclude specific positions on the pallet before measurement commences, for example there are positions on the pallet that do not contain workpieces.
How to Define Measurement Runs for a Pallet with a Loop

To define the measuring run as a loop: 1 Highlight the icon of the pallet. 2 Open the shortcut menu by clicking the right mouse button (twobutton mouse, or the middle button of a three-button mouse) on the icon. 3 Select the Define Loop... command. The dialog box for entering loop parameters is opened.
4 Enter the loop parameters: Select the Add command from the shortcut menu if there are no input lines in the dialog box. Click in the From: input field and enter the start value for the loop. Click in the To: input field and enter the end value for the loop.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
12-15
Click in the Step: input field and enter the step width of the loop. 5 If you want to define another section for the loop: Select the Add command from the shortcut menu. A new line is inserted. Repeat the definition of the loop in step 4 for the new line. 6 Click on OK to save the settings and close the dialog box. 7 Activate the Loops radio button to prepare the pallet for the CNC run.
At this point, you should define the CNC parameters (see Preparing for Measurement on page 12-17), so that the pallet can be measured.
How to Define Measurement Runs for a Pallet Individually

To select individual positions on the pallet: 1 On the pallet, click on each position you want to have measured in the run. The color of each position you click changes to green. 2 Activate the User defined radio button to prepare the pallet for the run.
At this point, you should define the CNC parameters (see Preparing for Measurement on page 12-17), so that the pallet can be measured.
12-16
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Preparing for Measurement

Once you have defined desks with measurement plans or pallets, you can prepare for measurement. You can perform all preparations for measurement or only some that depends on the privileges you have assigned to the user who is going to perform measurement as such.
How to View the Position of the Probe Head

In some situations it can be helpful to know the current position of the probe head. You can view the position expressed in machine coordinates. To view the position of the probe head: 1 Click on the Position button or go to the menu bar and select Tools Display Position. The current machine coordinates for the position of the probe head are displayed in the XXX Position dialog box.
2 Click on Close. The dialog box closes.
How to Define CNC Parameters

You must define the CNC start parameter before a measurement plan can be run. This is the job of the system administrator or of a user to whom the Define CNC start parameters privilege has been assigned. To define the CNC start parameter for a measurement plan (or pallet measurement): 1 Highlight the icon of the measurement plan or the pallet that you want to run. 2 Open the Measurement Plan Definition dialog box: If you want to set parameters for a measurement plan icon, click on the CNC button.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
12-17
If you want to set parameters for a pallet, open the relevant shortcut menu and select the Define CNC Start Parameters command. The Measurement Plan Definition dialog box appears on the screen.
You will find more information on CNC runs and on this dialog box in How to Start a CNC Run on page 8-8 and in Start Measurement / Measurement Plan Definition in the Calypso Online Help. 3 Open the Base alignment picklist and select the base alignment in which the measurement plan will run. 4 Define the scope (see Defining the Scope of Measurement on page 8-2). 5 Define the other parameters in the Result and CMM groups. 6 Click on OK when you have finished setting the parameters. The dialog box closes. The parameters are saved along with the measurement plan and the desk.
How to Define Probe Settings in the Auto-Run Interface

The dialog boxes for changing and qualifying probes are conveniently available under the Auto-Run interface. This is the job of the system administrator or of a user, depending on how the corresponding privileges have been assigned.
12-18
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
To start an automatic probe change: Select Probe Probe Change Automatic Probe Changer. The dialog box for automatic probe changes is opened. For more information, see How to Perform an Automatic Probe Change on page 7-49. To change a probe manually: Select Probe Probe Change Manual. The dialog box for manual probe changes is opened. For more information, see How to Install a Probe on page 4-11. To start stylus qualification: Select Probe Stylus Qualification Manual. For information on how to qualify a stylus, see How to Qualify a Stylus on page 4-22.
How to Change the Sequence of Measurement Plan Runs in Desks

The desks of an Auto-Run interface will generally contain several measurement plans, all of which have to be run. By default, the measurement plans of a desk are run in the order in which they were defined. You can, however, change this sequence in accordance with your needs and preferences. To define the sequence: 1 Highlight the measurement plans to be performed in a CNC run. If you want to highlight multiple measurement plans, press and hold down the Ctrl key and click on the appropriate icons. 2 Click on the Sequence button.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
12-19
3 The Define Sequence dialog box is opened. All the measurement plans you highlighted are listed in this box.
The measurement plans are listed in the sequence in which they are run. 4 To change the sequence: Highlight the name of a measurement plan in the list. Click on the ArrowUp/ArrowDown buttons to move the measurement plan to the correct position in the sequence. Repeat the process for the other measurement plans, until the sequence is correct. 5 Click on Reset if you decide you want to restore the original sequence. 6 Click on OK to accept the sequence as it is. The dialog box closes. As soon as you start measuring, the measurement plans are run in your custom sequence. Calypso retains this sequence until such time as you define another.
Administrating Auto-Run
One of your functions as system administrator is to set up the AutoRun interface and make sure it remains up-to-date. The tasks involved are summarized in this section.
12-20
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
How to Save Auto-Run Interfaces

Each Auto-Run interface is saved in a separate file. To save an Auto-Run interface: 1 Click on the Save button. The Select File dialog box is opened. 2 Select the path for saving the file. 3 Enter a file name, complete with an .arn extension. 4 Click on OK. The Auto-Run interface is saved, but remains open.
How to Rename a Desk

You can rename a desk if the name originally selected is no longer practical or if you misspelled the name: 1 Make sure that the desk you want to rename is displayed on the screen. 2 Go to the menu bar and select Desk Link Rename.
3 Enter the new name for the desk. 4 Click on OK. The desk is renamed.
How to Delete a Desk

You can delete a desk that you no longer need from the Auto-Run interface. To delete a desk: 1 Make sure that you are in the desk you want to delete. 2 Go to the menu bar and select Desk Link Delete.
3 Click on Yes to delete the desk.

61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
12-21
4 Click on OK. The desk is deleted from the Auto-Run interface.
How to Copy Icons

To copy an icon: 1 Highlight the icon you want to copy. 2 Go to the menu bar and select Edit Copy. The icon is copied to the Clipboard. 3 Select the desk into which you want to paste the icon. 4 Go to the menu bar and select Edit Paste. The icon is pasted into the desk.
How to Delete an Icon

You can remove icons you no longer need from a desk. To delete icons: 1 Highlight the icon you want to delete. 2 Go to the menu bar and select Plan Icon Edit Delete Icon.
3 Click on Yes to delete the icon. 4 Click on OK. The icon is removed from the current desk.
12-22
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Auto-Run for Users
Auto-Run for Users

Your system administrator has already configured the Auto-Run interface for you. This interface makes it easier for you to run measurement plans because a lot of the work has been done in advance generally, you can start performing measurements right away. You will find basic information about the Automatic Run interfaces under Basics About Auto-Run Interfaces on page 12-2.
Your User Privileges

The system administrator who configured the Auto-Run interface for you will be able to tell you what tasks you have to do before or during measurement. The scope of tasks you have to perform depends on the privileges (and obligations) your system administrator has assigned you. At some point in a session with the Auto-Run interface, you will probably encounter the message shown below:
It appears when you have attempted to execute a command for which you do not possess access privileges. Consult your system administrator if the command in question is one you urgently require.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
12-23
Preparing a Measurement Start for Auto-Run

The illustration below shows what could be a typical Auto-Run interface.
Prerequisites
The prerequisites that have to be satisfied before you can start a measurement are as follows: Your Auto-Run interface must be loaded (see How to Load an Auto-Run Interface on page 12-24). The correct desk must be selected (see How to Select a Measuring Configuration on page 12-25). The scope of measurement must be defined (see How to Define List of Characteristics in Auto-Run on page 12-26). These prerequisites must be satisfied before measurement can be started.
How to Load an Auto-Run Interface

Each Auto-Run interface is stored in a separate file. You have to load your Auto-Run interface before you can start measuring. Your system administrator will tell you which interface is yours.
12-24
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Auto-Run for Users
To load an interface: 1 Check the name of the current interface. The name is on the left, below the status bar. 2 Click on the Open button. Auto-Run always loads a default interface directly after starting, so Calypso issues the following prompt:
3 If the name of the currently open interface is noname.arn, click on Open. 4 If a name other than noname.arn appears in the status bar: Click on Save and Open. Save the original interface. Consult your system administrator if you encounter difficulties with saving. The original interface is saved and the Select File to Open dialog box appears on the screen. 5 Highlight the name of your interface and click on Open. Your Auto-Run interface is loaded.
How to Select a Measuring Configuration

Your Auto-Run interface might consist of more than one desk. Each desk displays a configuration of workpieces to be measured. The arrangement of the icons on the interface must correspond to the arrangement of the workpieces on the CMM, so you usually have to select the correct desk at this point. To select a desk: 1 Make sure that your interface is loaded. 2 Check whether the arrangement of the icons corresponds to that of the workpieces in the measuring range of the CMM. 3 If you want to select a different configuration, click on the arrow buttons in the task bar until the configuration you want is displayed. The name of the desk is displayed in the picklist box beside the arrow buttons. Once you have selected the appropriate desk, the next step is to select the workpieces to be measured.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
12-25
How to Define List of Characteristics in Auto-Run

One of the purposes of Auto-Run interfaces is to facilitate consecutive measurement of multiple workpieces, which are generally already in position on the CMM table. You have to define which workpieces of a desk will be measured in a CNC run. To select workpieces for measurement: 1 Make sure that you have selected the correct desk. 2 If you want to select measurement plans in a desk: Click on the icon of each measurement plan to be run on the workpiece. Press and hold down the Ctrl key to select more than one measurement plan. A thin black border appears around each icon you select. The Start button is activated.
NOTE
hss
A pallet can only be started on its own. Make sure that only one pallet is selected for measurement. 3 If you want to select a pallet for measurement, highlight the icon of the pallet in question. The measurement plans of all the icons you highlight are executed when you start the CNC run. See How to Start a Measurement in the Auto-Run Interface on page 12-26 for instructions on starting a CNC run.
How to Start a Measurement in the Auto-Run Interface

To start a measurement: 1 Click on the Start button. A green border appears round the selected icons of the measurement plans. Calypso begins by checking the CNC parameters. Calypso issues the following prompt:
2 Make sure that the CMM is ready and click on Yes. Calypso starts measuring. Two windows are opened: the stop light window and the default printout.
12-26
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Auto-Run for Users
If Measurement Fails to Start in the Auto-Run Interface

An error message is issued if a measurement does not start in the Auto-Run interface. If you have privileges to enter CNC parameters, correct the CNC parameter settings (see How to Define CNC Parameters on page 12-17). Then restart the measurement. If you do not have privileges to enter CNC parameters, notify your system administrator.
Monitoring Measuring Runs in Auto-Run

A measurement started by means of an Auto-Run interface can take some time to complete. While Calypso is measuring the selected workpieces, you can intervene at any time. Intervention on your part could be necessary if a collision threatens or if you have to interrupt measurement for some reason. You use the stop light window to control the measuring run. If, for example, this window is hidden behind the Auto-Run interface, you can use Tools Stop Light to bring it back to the foreground. If you wish to interrupt a measurement run,click on yellow. When you wish to resume an interrupted measurement,click on green. If you wish to cancel a measurement,click on red or on the Cancel button. You will find more information on the Stop light window in Monitoring Measurement Plan Runs on page 8-11.
When a Measurement in Auto-Run is Complete

When all the workpieces have been measured, the default printout appears on the screen. It lists all the measuring results in the sequence in which they were computed. Depending on how the CNC parameters were set, the measuring results are saved in a custom printout and/or in special files. The custom printout is displayed on screen the result files are for evaluation by other means and are not directly viewable.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
12-27
12-28
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
13
13
.................................................................................................................................
Chapter
Calypso can import DMIS files and convert them into measurement plans. To achieve this, a DMIS post processor runs and processes the DMIS commands. The DMIS import is an option on Calypso. You can license this functionality and have it enabled in your system if it would be of use to you. Contact your Carl Zeiss Service for more information. The sections included in this chapter explain the basics of importing DMIS measurement plans, and guide you through the procedures involved.

Basics about DMIS Measurement Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Configuring DMIS Import. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Importing Measurement Plan from DMIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
13- 1
Basics about DMIS Measurement Plans

Calypso is able to import a DMIS program and to have it run as a Calypso measurement plan.
What is DMIS?
DMIS stands for Dimensional Measuring Interface Standard. DMIS is a programming language used for programming mechanical, laser, optical and video measuring systems. DMIS is designed to be a programming language for all or at least most measuring machines. The vocabulary of DMIS is very large and resembles that of a genuine programming language: there are language elements for declarations and definitions of variables, loops, conditional jumps, mathematical functions, coordinate transformations and of course commands for the measuring machine control such as positional movements, probing, geometrical elements, measurements, probe changes, temperature compensation, etc. DMIS-compatible measuring machines read the DMIS commands from an ASCII file and then perform the measurement run.
DMIS and Calypso

DMIS files must be translated to ensure that they can also be used by measuring machines which are not DMIS-compatible. The translator tailored to the relevant measuring software is referred to as the post processor, because it becomes active after the production of the DMIS file. The option described here, Calypso DMIS is just such a DMIS post processor for Calypso.
Which DMIS Commands are Supported?

Not every DMIS command is understood by every measuring machine. DMIS itself was developed in stages and is available in various versions. Therefore a characterization file is included in every post processor, in which the commands supported by the post processor are listed, and there is optionally also a specification of the supported version of DMIS.
Requirements for the DMIS program
The DMIS post processor integrated into Calypso can translate DMIS commands of Version 3.0, with certain restrictions. If the DMIS measuring program has been created taking this requirement into account, there should not be any implementation problems.
13-2
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Characterization file
The characterization file for Calypso is located on your system at the path ..\Calypso\home\om and has the file name CHARACTERISATIONFILE.
Displaying the Characterization File

You can either display the characterization file directly with a text editor or by selecting File Import DMIS and clicking on the Info card.
In particular, all features are listed here which can be converted by the post processor into Calypso features.
Special Features of Measurement Plans Imported from DMIS

DMIS programs and Calypso measurement plans are actually quite similar. As a result, Calypso measurement plans generated from DMIS measurement runs have certain special features compared to conventional Calypso measurement plans.
Run control via input parameters

DMIS is designed sequentially and Calypso is more object-oriented. In order to allow the sequential structure of the DMIS measurement run to be represented in Calypso, some parts of the DMIS program are written into the input parameters of the new Calypso measurement plan.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
13-3
This mainly involves the commands needed for run control. The input parameters therefore control the sequence of the run as specified by the DMIS file. You can also find any variables, jumps or possible loops here. The run control which you know from Calypso is, therefore, only available to a certain extent. You can display the input parameters by opening the list of characteristics without highlighting any of the characteristics and then clicking on the list with the right mouse button. Then select Parameters in the shortcut menu.
No Clearance Planes
DMIS does not recognize any clearance planes used to define implicitly the clearance moves in Calypso. In DMIS, all movements are specified explicitly. Therefore, when carrying out a CNC start of a measurement plan generated from DMIS under Navigate-Feature To Feature, you must never run the start with the setting Automatic. In this case, select the setting Use Position Points Only.
13-4
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Saving, Loading and Deleting the Coordinate System

DMIS always defines only the current coordinate system. The other coordinate systems are based on the relevant current coordinate system. Therefore the iterative alignment in DMIS works in a different way from that in Calypso. To avoid placing the current coordinate system into a loop in an unexpected way, it is necessary to save the current coordinate system in the intermediate memory. There are DMIS commands to save, load and delete a coordinate system. These commands are converted into corresponding Calypso features, which you can find in Calypso in the Utilities section.
NOTE
hss
These measurement plan features are intended for the translation of DMIS programs. They can also be used in other Calypso measurement plans. Caution - Risk of collision Extreme care is also needed for the subsequent addition of these features into measurement plans imported from DMIS, because the coordinate systems are defined in the features at the time of import and should only be changed there.
!
hss
Other Special Features

These and other differences not listed here (for example in the definition of features) are implemented by the post processor so that a valid Calypso measurement plan is produced.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
13-5
Configuring DMIS Import

You have the option of making various presettings for the DMIS import. To do so, select File Import DMIS and click on the card Config.
NOTE
hss
This register card is only intended for special circumstances. For standard installations, you do not need to do anything here; the settings are correct.
On this register card, the paths for the language library and the Calypso messages are displayed on the left-hand side, while the settings for the import are displayed on the right-hand side. You can make the following settings: Language Library (DLL) After clicking on Search, you can assign a directory if necessary. Calypso Hostname or IP-Address This is the name or the Internet protocol address of the computer on which Calypso is running and for which the import function is waiting. Port Displays the port of the DMIS post processor. Directory of Calypso messages If necessary, you can overwrite the directory in this box directly.
13-6
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Configuring DMIS Import
Take GOTOs which are outside MEAS-ENDMES blocks. This check box is activated by default. If you deactivate it, no clearance commands will be accepted during the translation into the Calypso measurement plan (the movement commands within the features will be retained). The clearance paths must then be generated by Calypso during the CNC run itself. The advantage is: if a DMIS measurement run is designed from the outset to be used only for Calypso, you can omit the clearance paths when setting up the run. At the CNC start of a measurement plan generated from DMIS, you must select the setting Automatic under Navigate-Feature To Feature. Don't ask for error confirmation. Just go on. Activate this check box if you do not want the DMIS post processor to ask you whether to continue the process if it discovers errors or inaccuracies in the DMIS program during the translation process. You can also check up on the errors in the reports after the import process. Update Calypso grafics view with each feature. This check box is activated by default. Deactivate the check box if the CAD window of Calypso is not to be updated constantly during the translation process. This will save up to 20% of the reading time.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
13-7
Importing Measurement Plan from DMIS

In order to import a measurement plan from DMIS, you must simply choose the menu item DMIS Import and select the relevant file. The procedure for certain parameters depends on your settings for the DMIS import configuration.
Save measurement plan
After the import, you should save the measurement plan immediately, because at first it is only stored in the main memory of the computer. During the import, the post processor creates reports, which you can read and save, if required. You can start the measurement plan immediately after the import, or edit the measurement plan and run it later.
How to Import and Start a DMIS Program

With DMIS Import, you can import a DMIS program and convert it immediately into a measurement plan. If you want to run the measurement plan immediately after that, you should make certain preparations first: Click on Extras Workroom CMM and set up the connection to the CMM by clicking on Connect. If you import the DMIS program without connecting Calypso to the CMM, the probe data can not be taken over. Make sure that the probes defined in the DMIS program are located on the CMM. If no probe with the same name as the measurement plan exists, a probe is created during the import. All used styli with the names used in the DMIS file are allocated to this probe. You can define and use this probe later in Calypso.
13-8
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
In order to import a DMIS program: 1 Select File Import DMIS. The Import of DMIS Inspection Files to Calypso dialog box appears.
2 Click on the Select the DMIS File... button. The standard Windows dialog box for opening files appears on the screen. 3 Select the desired DMIS file (file name extension .dmi) and click on Open. The import starts running; you can follow its progress and the creation of the Calypso measurement plan. A message confirming the end of the import appears.
NOTE
hss
If Calypso is not connected to the CMM, you will be given a message and can decide whether you want to continue with the import or not. 4 If reports have been created during the import, you can view them and save them. 5 After a successful import, click on Close. Calypso is displayed on the screen; the measurement plan that has just been imported is opened. 6 Select File Save to save the measurement plan. 7 In the prerequisites phase, click on the symbol Switch to Probe Qualification Menu and calibrate the probes. 8 Select Prerequisites Select Probe for this Measurement Plan..., click in the Measurement Plan Editor Features on the option For Measurement Plan and choose from the list the probe that has just been imported.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
13-9
9 Start the CNC run by clicking CNC CNC Start CNC Start. The Start Measurement window is displayed.
10 Under Navigate-Feature To Feature, select the relevant entry: Use Position Points Only: in this way, the automatic consideration of the clearance planes by Calypso is switched off. The reason for this is that there are no clearance planes in a DMIS program: all clearance paths are programmed and entered directly. Automatic: the movement paths are generated by Calypso. Only select this entry if you have configured the DMIS import so that no GOTOs are adopted in the measurement plan by the post processor.
!
hss
Caution If you do not switch off the automatic movement path generation in spite of the translated movement commands, the movement commands will be incorrect and there will be a risk of collision. 11 Click on OK to confirm. The imported measurement plan is processed.
13-10
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Evaluating Reports about the DMIS Import

If a DMIS command can not be processed by the post processor or by Calypso during the translation, a message is displayed. You must then decide whether you can ignore the misunderstood instruction in the Calypso measurement plan or not. The translation is resumed by clicking OK. You can end the process with Cancel. A message is displayed as soon as the end of the DMIS file has been reached.
Displaying reports
All problems that occur during the translation are logged. Two different reports are generated: Syntax report The printout DMIS file syntax check report is produced before the actual translation. Any possible syntax errors in the DMIS file are logged here. If the syntax errors are too serious, the DMIS import will abort. This printout can be useful for the creator of the DMIS measurement program for evaluation purposes. Import report The Calypso Import report contains all messages about special features relating to the measurement plan which have been noted during the import by the post processor, for example the impossibility to assign a stylus because of no connection to the CMM. The printouts are displayed on the register card Report.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
13-11
Saving reports
If you would like to evaluate the printouts at a later stage, you can save them as a text file (.txt). To do so, click on the Save reports button and select a directory. The file name is preset, but can be overwritten.
13-12
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14
14 Parameter-coded Measurements (Option) .................................................................................................................................
In Calypso you can define parameter-coded measurement runs using PCM, the programming language developed expressly for this purpose. This chapter explains how to define variables, set parameters and use parameterized measurement runs. On account of the complexity involved, programming in PCM is suitable for experienced users with basic knowledge of programming structures (e. g. Pascal or C). PCM is one of Calypsos optional features. You can license this option and have it enabled in your system if the PCM functionality would be of use to you. Contact your Carl Zeiss sales partner for more information.
Chapter

Introduction to PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Variables, Parameters and Formulas in Calypso. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9 Entering Parameters and Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15 Examples for PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-33 PCM Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-47 Tips and Tricks for Working with PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-63
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-1
Introduction to PCM
Calypso uses the PCM programming language for variable control of measurement runs. Of course you can use Calypso without PCM, but PCM offers you a powerful toolset for simplification and automation, along with part-variant programming and parameter-supported and interactive control of measurement runs.
What is PCM?
PCM is a development system for parameterizing measurement runs. PCM is short for parameter-coded measurement. PCM enables you to simplify and rationalize measurement runs in Calypso: You can program measurement plans in such a way that you can measure various workpiece variants, and you can set parameters to influence the automatic run of a measurement plan. PCM has functions for calculating values, for controlling the CMM, and for interactive input/output dialogs. You can vary the way in which a measurement plan runs by programming loops and conditions. In certain situations you can have Calypso generate special messages.
NOTE
hss
A yellow input box in Calypso always contains a parameter or formula. In Calypso, you are using PCM when you enter a Formula in an input box for a feature. By so doing, you automatically define a variable and assign it parameters. The color of the input fields changes, in this case to yellow. By the same token, when you set a condition in Calypso or define a loop, you automatically create PCM code. Once you have familiarized yourself with the syntax, you can employ the PCM code to enter conditions and loops or other commands directly, or generate files for import into Calypso.
14-2
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Using PCM in Calypso First Steps

You will use PCM primarily to parameterize measurement plans in Calypso. You are, in fact, using PCM indirectly when you define a condition or a loop. You also have the option of defining variables of your own and assigning them parameters or formulas. The easiest and most reliable way of generating variable measurement plans is to begin by creating an ordinary measurement plan with fixed coordinates and values in Calypso in the usual way. You can then substitute variables for the specific coordinates that vary from workpiece to workpiece. The various measurement plans you need derive from the formulas and parameters you enter for the variables.
Programming with PCM

Over and above parameterization of measurement plans, PCM provides an extensive programming functionality: You can program dialogs that Calypso uses in the course of a CNC run to query the operator for quantities, so that the figures supplied in this way can subsequently be used in different ways as the run progresses. You can determine and reuse measured values and system parameters. In the case of conditions or loops, you are not bound to the forms specified in the dialogs you can enter them directly in PCM. You can issue direct control and motion commands to the CMM. You can use these functions in many different ways, individually and in combinations, so these instructions cannot cover all possible circumstances in detail remember that PCM is a programming language, designed for you to use to the best possible effect. This chapter, therefore, describes the basics of the run structures of Calypso and the syntax of PCM, tells you how to enter parameters and formulas in Calypso, and contains a reference library of functions and commands. The examples (see Examples for PCM on page 14-33) demonstrate the versatility of PCM and show you how to utilize the performance of this programming language.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-3
Variable Measurement Plans in PCM

Calypso employs the principle of parameterization so that you can use a single measurement plan to measure workpieces that are similar but not identical. This principle is based on the premise that the quantities that are the same for both workpieces are defined in the measurement plan in Calypso as fixed quantities; the quantities that vary from workpiece to workpiece, on the other hand, are defined as variables.
In this way one and the same measurement plan can be used to measure and test different workpieces: for example a plate with either one or two holes even if the radii or the holes are different. Different geometries, differences in the number of certain features, the presence or absence of features all these can be parameterized.
Parameters for Variables in PCM

Note, however, that a measurement plan with variables cannot be run unless the variables are assigned specific values. These specific values, the parameters in other words, have to be known to Calypso: you define them in the measurement plan before it is run. Instead of the variables, Calypso then uses the coordinates or values you entered.
14-4
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Example
The two workpieces in the illustration above are different, but similar: they have some identifying characteristics in common, while others are unique to each. The first workpiece in the illustration has a central hole with a radius of 20, while the hole in the second workpiece, while of the same depth, has a radius of 10 and is off-center. This workpiece, moreover, has a second hole. The variables that could be used here are as follows: positions of the holes (hole1_center, hole2_center), their radii (hole1_radius, hole2_radius) and the number of holes (number_holes). These variables have to be assigned values for each workpiece, so that a measurement plan can be run: Variables Number_holes hole1_center hole2_center hole1_radius hole2_radius Parameters for workpiece No. 1 1 any 20 any Parameters for workpiece No. 2 2 point(-60,30,40,0,0,1) 10 10
point(-40,30,40,0,0,1) point(-20,30,40,0,0,1)
Set up in this way with only five different parameters, the measurement plan is able to measure two different workpieces.
Parameters in Parameter Files

The process is even more straightforward when you provide Calypso with the parameters of the current workpiece or the measurement plan variant you intend using in the form of a prepared, reusable ASCII file. All you have to do when a new version of a workpiece is due for measurement is load a new ASCII file containing the requisite information. Another advantage is that ASCII files can be edited independently of Calypso.
Parameterizing Characteristics with PCM

Characteristics can sometimes be the same despite differences in features, as is the case, for example, with the diameter of a circle of given size that only has to be measured at different positions on a workpiece. Other characteristics can vary as a function of the parameterized measurement plan. This, in turn, means that if the value of the characteristic, and not just the measured values of a given feature, varies from workpiece to workpiece, you have to parameterize the characteristic as well.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-5
You do this by defining a variable for the characteristic in question and assigning it the corresponding value.
Parameter Files for Measurement Plans

The advanced way of setting up variable measurement plans is to use parameter files. A parameter file contains the set of value assignments for the variables in a measurement plan. When you parameterize fixed defining aspects of a workpiece you are in a position to measure different workpieces with a single measurement plan: all you have to do is enter different parameters, either directly in Calypso or by specifying and loading a parameter file. You can create different parameter files for a particular measurement plan and load whichever file you need for a given workpiece and the aspects you want to measure. You need a dedicated parameter file per workpiece.
*.para
Workpiece1.para
Measurement Plan
*.para
Workpiece2.para
*.para
Workpiece3.para
14-6
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
There are two ways of creating a parameter file you can save the parameters set in a measurement plan, or you can use an ASCII editor to enter the parameters directly. If you want to use this second method, you need experience with measurement plans and a thorough knowledge of the PCM syntax. Like the programming languages Basic, C, Fortran and so on, PCM uses a functional syntax (see PCM Syntax on page 14-47). When you create a parameter file it is important to remember that the filename extension has to be .para, so that Calypso can recognize it as a parameter file.
Conditions and Parameters for the Run Structure of Calypso

After the CNC start, Calypso runs the measurement plan. PCM commands and parameter assignments come into effect at a very wide variety of points. You can define input and output parameters for each feature and each characteristic, and for the measurement plan as a whole. This means that you can enter PCM commands when these elements are defined. The input parameters are processed before the element is run, the output parameters are processed after the run. You also have the opportunity of setting start parameters once or loading a file before the measurement plan is run. You can set a condition and a loop for each characteristic. You can enter input and output parameters for each condition and each loop. Utilizing these Calypso functions in this way, therefore, you can construct complex, nested structures. Wherever you set input parameters, output parameters or start parameters, moreover, you can program conditions and queries directly with PCM.
Sequence of measurement plan Processing in PCM

The sequence adopted by Calypso to process the data is as follows: 1 Calypso begins by processing the commands in the start parameters. 2 The input parameters are evaluated before the measurement plan is run; the output parameters are evaluated when the run completes.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-7
3 Calypso checks each characteristic in succession, in the order in which they appear in the list of characteristics. The condition and the loop are processed first (depending on the order in which they were entered) followed by the input parameters of the characteristic. Once the characteristic has been determined, its output parameters are evaluated. 4 Before a feature defined for a characteristic is measured, its input parameters are evaluated. The features output parameters are evaluated when measurement completes. 5 If input or output parameters are set for a condition or loop, the input parameters are evaluated before the condition is checked or the loop run. The output parameters are evaluated after the element referenced by the condition or loop. If the condition results in a stop, the output parameters are not evaluated. You might find it useful to visualize the input and output parameters as parentheses bracketing the objects in question.
14-8
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Variables, Parameters and Formulas in Calypso

When you want to run variable measurement plans for different workpieces in Calypso, you have to use variables instead of absolute values to describe the workpiece.
What are Variables?

Variables, by definition, are quantities that can vary. In Calypso and in PCM all defining aspects required in descriptions of workpieces or runs in measurement plans can be characterized as variables. The variables are stored locally together with the element (feature, characteristic, condition, loop) for which they were defined. The assigned values, the parameters in other words, are stored centrally for the entire measurement plan.
Types of variables
PCM recognizes four types of variable: number, point, vector and string. Each variable has a name consisting of alphanumeric characters (without blanks; first character is no number), and different variables have different names. Examples: radius_1, set-down point, message_354 You are not allowed to use reserved names, in other words strings that are required in the PCM syntax: X, Y, Z, the names of functions and commands, and so on.
Arrays
Groups of variables are called arrays. The only difference in the names of variables in an array is the array index. Example: hugo[1], hugo[2], hugo[3], hugo[4] In this case, hugo is an array with four variables.
What are Parameters?

Parameters are specific values for variables. When variables are used in a measurement plan instead of fixed numbers or texts, you can vary the measurement plan by assigning certain fixed values (parameters) to the individual variables. You assign values either by entering them directly or by means of statements in a file. Use the following syntax: Variable_name=value
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-9
You can enter the value using one of the following formats: Variable type number vector point string
NOTE
hss
Format for values (example) -3.141529 vector(10,12,0) point(-10,12.5,0,0,0,1) circle
The last three components of a variable of the point type represent the coordinates of a normalized vector. This means that the root of the sum of the three squares (= the length of the vector) must always be 1.
Value Assignments and Variable Definitions

It follows that the PCM commands listed below are value assignments: P1=10 hugo=vector(10,20,30) hugo_1=point(10.1,20.5,30.02,0,0,1) text_1=This is a text in the text_1 variable A value assignment also defines the variable and makes it known to Calypso. There are no explicit variable definitions (constructors) in PCM. Variables in the arrays can be defined either individually one by one or in a loop instruction. Example: hugo[1] = point(-10,12.5,0,0,0,1) hugo[2] = point(-12,12.5,0,0,0,1) hugo[3] = point(-14,12.5,0,0,0,1) hugo[4] = point(-16,12.5,0,0,0,1) Here, hugo has been defined as an array consisting of four variables of type point.
Formulas and Functions in PCM

As well as using individual variables in measurement plans, you also have the options of using functions of variables and formulas with variables.
14-10
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Return Values
The return value is an important function of a variable: the individual parts of a parameter have to be addressed so that you can work with them. The return values of variables of the point type are defined as follows: Function variable_name.x variable_name.y variable_name.z variable_name.nx variable_name.ny variable_name.nz Return value x value of the point variable y value of the point variable z value of the point variable x value of the normal vector of the point variable y value of the normal vector of the point variable z value of the normal vector of the point variable
You can access variables of the vector type as follows: Function variable_name.x variable_name.y variable_name.z Return value x value of the vector variable y value of the vector variable z value of the vector variable
Arithmetic Operators and Functions

The most important operators and functions with variables are: Arithmetic operators: +,,*,/ Comparative operators (used in conditions and loops): <,>,==, <>, <=, >= Mathematical and angle functions: sqrt, squared, abs, exp, int, ln, log, mod, round, sign, sin, cos, tan, arcsin, arccos, arctan, arctan2 Functions for determining values (query): getNominal, getActual Character string functions: asc, chr, format, inStr, len, mid, strElement, val
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-11
There are also a number of functions for input and output, for run control and for CMM movement commands (see PCM Quick Reference on page 14-47).
Programming with PCM

You can vary the way in which the measurement plan runs by setting conditions and loops. A characteristic or feature with a condition is not executed unless the condition is satisfied. The characteristic is either calculated or not calculated depending on the truth value returned for the condition, which means that the measurement plan run either proceeds or is interrupted. A loop around a characteristic or a feature results in the characteristic or feature being run repeatedly, possibly with changed variables for each run. You trigger these functions by selecting Condition or Loop in the shortcut menu and entering the settings for the condition or loop, as applicable (see Setting Conditions on page 14-19 and Inserting Loops in PCM on page 14-22).
Programming Conditions and Loops

Over and above the options at your disposal in Calypso, you can use PCM to insert conditions and loops explicitly in parameter files or in the input and output parameters of features or characteristics. In this way you can utilize conditions and loops much more comprehensively you are in control of the measurement run. During the CNC run, the truth values of the conditions are determined, the loop index is incremented automatically and the definitions, the value allocations and the commands are processed accordingly. The following control elements are available for both the input and output parameters: The Simple Operation (if - endif) The Condition with Alternative (if - else) The Defined Loop (for - next) The Conditional Loop (repeat - until)
The Simple Condition

The syntax of the simple condition is as follows:
if CONDITION then DEFINITION endif
14-12
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Meaning: If CONDITION is satisfied, DEFINITION is processed. If CONDITION is not satisfied, DEFINITION is not processed. The DEFINITION can be formulas, value assignments, functions or other conditions or loops of your choice, always with line breaks as separators.
The Condition with Alternative

The syntax of the condition with alternative is as follows:
if CONDITION then DEFINITION1 else DEFINITION2 endif
Meaning: If CONDITION is satisfied, DEFINITION1 is processed. If CONDITION is not satisfied, DEFINITION2 is processed. DEFINITION1 and DEFINITION2 can be formulas, value assignments, functions or other conditions or loops of your choice, always with line breaks as separators.
Example
In the example below the variable result is assigned the diameter of circle circle_1. A message corresponding to this quantity is then output on the screen:
Result=getActual(Circle_1).diameter if result>10 then message(Diameter circle_1 is greater than 10) else if result<10 then message(Diameter circle_1 is less than 10) endif endif
The Defined Loop

In the case of the defined loop, the number of loops is defined unequivocally. The syntax of the defined loop is as follows:
for index=start to end [step] DEFINITION next index
The following must be inserted: for index the name of the loop variables (random), for start, end and step full figures,
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-13
for DEFINITION random formulas, value assignments, functions or other conditions or loops of your choice, always with line breaks as separators. Meaning: the functions or commands under DEFINITION are processed (end - start + 1)/step times, whereby step is set to 1 if no other specification is made. At the same time, the specific value for index is always entered in DEFINITION: at first start, then start+step, start+2*step etc. up to end. With next i, the loop index is incremented by step each time.
Example for i=1 to 4 message(i,". step: ",step[i]) next i
The Conditional Loop

In the case of the conditional loop, the number of runs depends on the fulfillment of a condition, whereby the condition is only tested after the first run. Therefore a conditional loop must run at least once. The syntax of the conditional loop is as follows:
repeat DEFINITION until CONDITION
Meaning: DEFINITION IS PROCESSED. Then CONDITION is tested. If CONDITION is fulfilled, the loop is ended. If CONDITION is not satisfied, DEFINITION is processed again and CONDITION is tested again. The CONDITION can be set up as a logical combination of several subconditions. The DEFINITION can be formulas, value assignments, functions or other conditions or loops of your choice, always with line breaks as separators.
!
hss
Caution Please note that infinite repetitions are possible with the conditional loop, if the condition is never fulfilled.
14-14
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Entering Parameters and Formulas

In Calypso you can use parameter-coded measurement runs as follows: You can enter parameters for the variables of a measurement plan You can enter formulas directly You can test the value of a PCM expression You can set a condition for the entire measurement plan and for each individual characteristic You can place a loop around the entire measurement plan and around each individual characteristic to force repeated runs You can enter input and output functions for features, characteristics, conditions and loops You can use the Point Generator to read in the points of a curve or define them with a mathematical expression. You enter parameters for a measurement plan in the Settings window. In so doing you assign formulas or values to existing or newly defined variables. You can enter the parameters directly in the window or you can load them from a parameter file. You can create a parameter file by saving the parameters of a measurement plan or explicitly by generating the file with an ASCII editor of your choice.
NOTE
hss
In PCM and in the formula, the decimal separator is always a period (.; example: 3.5 + 4.8, and not: 3,5 + 4,8). The comma is used as the separator within value assignments (example: Location = point(3.5, 4.5, 1.5, 0, 0, 1)).
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-15
How to Enter Parameters for a Measurement Plan Directly

To enter parameters for a measurement plan directly: 1 Select CNC Measurement Plan Functions Parameter. The Parameter Input dialog box opens.
2 Click in the (white) input box and start defining the parameter: Start with the variable name, followed by =. Proceed with the definition. Please observe the syntax described in Arithmetic Operators and Functions on page 14-11 and the parameter syntax (see Example for PCM: ASCII Parameter File on page 14-46). 3 Click on OK. The dialog box closes. The parameter is now included in the list of all available parameters. (this dialog box is fully described in Formula in the Calypso Online Help).
How to Save the Measurement Plan Parameters in a File

Once parameters have been defined in a measurement plan, you can save them in a file. In this way they are readily available for subsequent use in other measurement plans. To save the measurement plan parameters in a file: 1 Select CNC Measurement Plan Functions Parameter. The Parameter Input dialog box opens. 2 Use Shift + click to select the parameters you want to save in the file.
14-16
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
3 Click on the diskette icon. The Save: Select Parameter File dialog box opens. 4 Enter the name of the file (do not omit the .para extension), select a directory and click Save. The variables and parameters you selected are saved in the file.
How to Load Measurement Plan Parameters Saved Beforehand

You can integrate parameters saved in a parameter file (file name *.para) into your current measurement plan. To open a *.para file: 1 Check that the Parameter Input dialog box is open (CNC Measurement Plan Functions Parameter). 2 Click on the icon for opening a file. The Open: Select Parameter File dialog box opens. 3 Select the appropriate file and click Open. The parameters in the file are listed in the input window and are available for your current measurement plan.
How to Enter Formulas

By entering formulas you can calculate function values of measurement results (sin, cos...) use operators to link measurement results with constants use operators to interlink multiple measurement results. The value returned by the formula is displayed in the input box from which you called formula input.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-17
To define a formula: 1 Open the definition template for the feature in which you want to assign the formula to an input box. 2 Right-click in the input box whose value you want to calculate with the formula, hold down the mouse button and select the Formula command from the shortcut menu. The dialog box shown below is opened:
3 In the box labeled Formula, enter the formula, making sure your entry complies with the PCM syntax rules (see Arithmetic Operators and Functions on page 14-11). 4 Click on the Function button to open a list of all operators, functions and commands. Select the element of your choice from this list and double-click it to copy it to the formula input box. 5 To insert a parameter into the formula: click on the Settings button. Double-click on the parameter of your choice in the Parameters List to insert it into the formula. 6 To insert a loop variable into the formula, click on the Loop button. LOOP1 appears in the input box. 7 Click on Compute if you want to test your settings by computing the formula's return value. 8 Click OK to confirm your settings and terminate formula input. The value returned by the formula is displayed in the input box from which you called formula input. Note that the color of this field has changed to yellow.
14-18
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Setting Conditions
You can link computation of characteristics to conditions that enable Calypso to execute jumps in the CNC run in accordance with the measurement results.
NOTE
hss
A basic knowledge of programming structures will help you understand the following. You can choose whether to have the condition queries before or after the characteristic is computed. Calypso ascertains whether the condition is true or false. You also have the option of linking the entire measurement plan to a condition.
NOTE
hss
In addition to the conditions for characteristics or the measurement plan, PCM also enables you to enter simple conditions or conditions with alternative directly in the input/output parameters (see Programming Conditions and Loops on page 14-12). If the condition is queried before calculation, Calypso either computes the characteristic and continues or executes the instruction linked to compliance with the condition. This instruction can be either of the two stated below: cancel the automatic measurement run do not compute the characteristic and continue. If the condition is queried after calculation, the only alternatives are: cancel the automatic measurement run continue. If a loop has been defined around the characteristic, processing depends on what was defined first.
How to Link a Condition to a Characteristic

To set a condition for a characteristic: 1 Open the list of characteristics in the measurement plan area. 2 Highlight the characteristic for which you want to set a condition.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-19
3 Right-click and select Condition from the shortcut menu. The Dialog Box for Conditions dialog box appears on the screen.
4 Set the condition first: Right-click in the yellow input box to open the shortcut menu. Select Formula. The Formula dialog box appears on the screen. Enter the condition in the Formula dialog box and click OK to confirm your entry (see How to Enter Formulas on page 14-17).
NOTE
hss
The only possible return values for the condition are true and false. Use the comparison operators (see Arithmetic and Comparative Operators in PCM on page 14-49) for this purpose. You can test the return values of comparison operators by clicking on Compute in the Formula dialog box. The condition is displayed in the input box. 5 If you wish to set the presettings or postsettings, click on the Settings button and enter the settings.
14-20
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
6 If you do not want the condition to be queried until after the characteristic has been computed, click on the box labeled Post condition. The characteristic box is now right at the top of the window.
7 If you want the automatic run canceled or measurement of the feature to be omitted if the condition is true (satisfied): make sure that the Yes button is beside the End program box. If it is not, you can move it there by clicking the Yes button. 8 If you want the automatic run canceled or measurement of the feature to be omitted if the condition is false (not satisfied): make sure that the No button is beside the End program box. If it is not, you can move it there by clicking the No button. 9 Click OK to confirm and terminate definition of the condition. The condition will be checked and evaluated in the next automatic measurement run.
How to Link the Entire Measurement Plan to a Condition

You can also link the entire measurement plan to a condition. In this case the measurement plan is executed or not, depending on the truth value of the condition. To set a condition for the measurement plan: 1 Open the list of characteristics and make sure that no characteristics are highlighted. 2 Right-click and select and select Condition in the popup menu. The Condition window will appear on the screen (this dialog box is fully described in Formula in the Calypso Online Help).
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-21
3 Set the condition first: use the yellow input box to open the Formula window (see How to Enter Formulas on page 14-17) and enter the condition. Click OK to confirm this entry and close the window.
NOTE
hss
The only possible return values for the condition are true and false. Use the comparison operators (see Arithmetic and Comparative Operators in PCM on page 14-49) for this purpose. The condition is displayed in the input box. 4 If you want to set input or output parameters, click on the Settings button and enter the parameters. 5 If you do not want the condition to be queried until after the characteristic has been computed, click on the box labeled Post condition. The characteristic box is now right at the top of the window. 6 If you want the measurement plan run canceled if the condition is true (satisfied): make sure that the Yes button is beside the End program box. If it is not, click on the Yes button. If you want the measurement plan run canceled if the condition is false (not satisfied): make sure that the No button is beside the End program box. If it is not, you can move it there by clicking the No button. 7 Click OK to confirm and terminate definition of the condition. The condition will be checked and evaluated in the next automatic measurement run.
Inserting Loops in PCM

If you place a loop around a characteristic or the entire measurement plan, the characteristic or measurement plan is processed several times in succession.
NOTE
hss
This section is intended for advanced users familiar with the basics of programming structures. Loops are used primarily in measurement plans in which identical or similar features are arranged in regular patterns (as is the case, for example, with a perforated plate). You can also use loops when you configure the base alignment. A loop is defined by a Start Index, an End Index, and an Increment. Each time the loop repeats the increment is increased by the defined value and compared with the end value. The loop is repeated until the end value is greater than or equal to the increment.
14-22
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
You can define multiple cycle levels in a loop (nested loop), so you can process two-dimensional or three-dimensional repetitions. In each of these levels a dedicated loop counter variable, the loop index, is incremented in steps. The loop variables have fixed names and in each loop they are called LOOP1 to LOOP4. In the characteristic and the associated features you can use these loop variables in formulas to vary the way in which the characteristic is processed.
NOTE
hss
Note that you cannot enter loops directly in the input/output parameters with PCM. If a condition is also linked to the characteristic, the sequence of processing depends on what was defined first.
How to Place Loops around Features

To place a loop around a characteristic or the measurement plan: 1 Open the list of characteristics in the measurement plan area. 2 Highlight the characteristic you want to loop. If you are going to place a loop around the entire measurement plan, make sure that none of its characteristics are highlighted. 3 Right-click and hold down the mouse button. Select Loop from the shortcut menu and release the mouse button. The Loop Interface dialog box appears on the screen. 4 Click Insert to insert a new loop level in the dialog box. 5 Set the values for Start, End and Step by clicking the corresponding input boxes and typing in the values.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-23
6 If necessary, repeat steps 4 and 5 to insert another loop level. Under Nest Level select a different type of bracket for each level to nest the loops. There are four types of bracket available. 7 Click on the Settings button to set input and output parameters for the loop. The Settings dialog box appears on the screen. 8 Perform the steps described in Entering Parameters and Formulas on page 14-15 and click on OK to confirm and terminate your entry. This returns you to the Loop Interface window.
NOTE
hss
You can define only one break condition per loop. 9 If necessary, enter a break condition in the box provided for the purpose. 10 Click OK to save the loop and close the window. You have now defined the loop. It will be executed in the next CNC run. To ensure that something happens each time the loop is run, you have to use the loop variables LOOPi (i = 1,...,4) in the characteristic and / or in the features to vary the measurement run. For example, you could multiply the loop variable with a constant offset in order to increase an X value step by step.
How to Include Features in Loops

Loops are used primarily in measurement plans in which identical or similar features are arranged in regular patterns (as is the case, for example, with a perforated plate). If you defined a loop by a characteristic, the data of the associated feature have to be varied in each loop run in order to ensure that the loop can be executed correctly. You accomplish this by using the loop variables in the definition of the feature, or incorporating a pattern into the feature. To incorporate a pattern into a feature: 1 Open the list of features. 2 Double-click on the name of the feature in question. The feature template is opened.
14-24
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
3 In the Nominal Definition picklist, select the Pattern command. The Selection (Pattern) dialog box opens.
4 Activate the New radio button and check the Edit check box. 5 Select the way in which you want to specify the pattern (Polar Pattern Offset, 1-D Linear Pattern, 2-D Linear Pattern, Rotational Pattern (use for scallop)). 6 Click OK to confirm your choice. The dialog box for defining the pattern of your choice appears on the screen.
7 Enter the values for the pattern. Make sure that the value of Actual Number corresponds to the number of loop runs resulting from the loop placed around the characteristic. 8 Click OK to confirm and close the window. 9 Click OK to close the feature template.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-25
The loop is executed as soon as you start an automatic measurement run (see Running a Measurement Plan on page 8-1).
Use of Loops in Alignment according to RPS

You can place a loop around a base alignment. If you do this, the alignment is repeated for the defined number of loop repetitions unless the abortion condition is satisfied beforehand. RPS alignment, for example, works only with the aid of a loop. The effect of this loop is to repeat alignment until it achieves your userdefined fit. The illustration below shows the definition of the loop.
The abortion condition baseSystem().valueA<0.1 (for syntax, see baseSystem (Base Alignment) on page 14-57) means that once measuring has commenced, the measuring process will continue until the Best Fit Value valueA is less than 0.1.
Points to Note about Nest Level

The form of brackets in the Nest Level box defines the nesting of loops: you set these brackets when you define the loop in the Loop window. Nested loops required different brackets for each level. You can use round brackets ( and ) for loop1, and angle brackets < and > for loop 2. Calypso has four types of bracket for four loop levels.
14-26
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
The type of bracket can also be important for non-nested loops, however. You have to use brackets of different types in independently defined loops if: you align two or more coordinate systems iteratively and features with the same name are used in this context. The example below is based on the assumption that a part alignment was created after RPS alignment (see How to Use an Alternative Alignment Method on page 4-55).
Example
If, for example, coordinate system A uses the feature called 3-d straight _1 and coordinate system B also uses a feature of this name, 3-d straight_1 is not measured again when coordinate system B is measured if you used the same type of brackets whey you defined the two iterations in the Loop window. Calypso assumes that the straight has already been measured and that it does not have to be measured again. You have to use brackets of a different type to ensure that the 3-d straight_1 is measured again when coordinate system B is aligned. You could do this, for example, by selecting round brackets ( and ) in loop 1 and angle brackets < and > in loop 2.
Points to Note about Multiple Measurements

If you want to use a loop to measure one and the same feature more than once or repeat probings, you must use the LOOP1 loop variable in the definition template of the feature. Calypso remembers that it has already measured a feature and simply recalls the measured value instead of probing for a second time. Under these circumstances, however, this does not produce the desired effect. You can use a workaround to avoid this difficulty. In the nominal definition insert a formula in which you add the product 0*LOOP1 (to the X value, for example). This means that the X value remains the same every time the loop is run, but Calypso perceives each iteration as a new calculation and a new probing.
Basics about Input and Output Parameters in PCM

Input and output parameters can be set for each characteristic and feature, and for each condition and loop. The settings in the input and output parameters can be used to set temporary variables, print values in the default printout, and trigger functions.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-27
Input and output parameters are defined in the Settings window.
You can define input and output parameters for the following objects in Calypso: entire measurement plan, a characteristic, a feature, a condition, a loop. The entire PCM syntax is at your disposal for defining input and output parameters. You will find more information on the Settings dialog box in in the Calypso Online Help.
Notes on Evaluating Input and Output Parameters

The commands and value assignments you enter as input parameters are evaluated before the object in question is executed or evaluated. The commands and value assignments you enter as output parameters are evaluated after the object in question has been executed or evaluated.
14-28
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
An object, in turn, can consist of two or more other objects or be superior to these lower-order objects, so this means that under certain circumstances the input parameters and then the output parameters of the lower-order objects might be evaluated first. If the object in question is a condition and the condition leads to omission of the characteristic or cancellation of the CNC run, the output parameters of the condition are not evaluated.
How to Enter Input and Output Parameters

In Calypso you can set input and output parameters for each feature and each characteristic, and for each condition or loop and for the entire measurement plan. To do so, use the Settings window. To enter input and output parameters: 1 To open the window for the entire measurement plan: Open the list of characteristics and make sure that no characteristics are highlighted. Right-click and select Parameter from the shortcut menu. 2 To open the settings for a specific characteristic: Highlight the characteristic in the list of characteristics. Right-click and select Parameter from the shortcut menu. 3 To open the settings for a specific feature: Highlight the feature in the list of features. Right-click and select Parameter from the shortcut menu. 4 To open the window for a condition: In the Condition window, click on Settings. 5 To open the window for a loop: In the Loop window, click on Settings. The Settings dialog box appears on the screen. 6 Enter the input parameters in the box at the top and the output parameters in the box at the bottom. 7 Click on OK. The dialog box closes and your settings are accepted.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-29
Basics about the Point Generator

The point generator has the same characteristics as a loop. You can enter a variable in each input box by right-clicking, opening the Formula window and selecting the variable:
You will find more information on this dialog box in Points Generator in the Calypso Online Help. You can use the point generator to define a curve if the mathematical description of the curve is known. You can use the point generator to load parameter values into a curve. In this process, another point on the curve is defined in each successive step.
How to Work with the Point Generator

You can define a curve with the aid of a point generator. The point generator acts like a loop in which another point on the curve is defined in each successive step. The loop variable used by the point generator is index.
14-30
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
1 In the definition template of the curve, select Nominal Definition and then select the Parameter Data function. 2 The Points Generator dialog box will appear.
3 Enter the Start Index, the End Index and the Increment. Each input box also accepts a formula. If you want to enter a formula, right-click in the box, select Formula from the shortcut menu and use the Formula Interface window to enter the formula. 4 Enter the point to be defined in the step in the Point box. If the mathematical description of the curve is known, you can enter it here in the form of a formula. If the points are stored in a file, you can enter the name of the file here and import the points. Right-click in the box, select Formula from the shortcut menu and use the Formula Interface window to enter the formula or the statement. 5 You can also enter an optional comment indicating the nature of the curve. This comment appears only in Calypsos table file. You can activate output to the table file by selecting Prerequisites Results to File in the Results to File dialog box. 6 Click OK to close the Point Generator window. You have now defined the nominals of the curve.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-31
How to Test a PCM Printout

You can test a PCM printout in order to ascertain whether the results are in line with your expectations or whether the PCM printout requires improvement. To test a PCM printout: 1 Make sure that the Settings window is open with the PCM printout.
!
hss
Caution Note that movement commands are executed by the CMM and that collisions could result. Move the CMM slowly and stop in good time if necessary. 2 Highlight the PCM printout in question and right-click. 3 Select Compute from the shortcut menu. The highlighted printout is computed or executed on the basis of the currently valid values of the variables. If an error is encountered or parameters for variables have not been defined, messages to this effect are issued.
14-32
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Examples for PCM
Examples for PCM

The examples below illustrate the versatility at your disposal using PCM with Calypso. Using Variables Condition with alternative Principle of parameterization Loading parameter values into a curve Defining curve using cosine function Rechecking characteristic after tolerance excursion Parameterizing coordinate system Loading a PCM file via dialog Defining loop with linear offset Nested loop for field (array) Parts family and variant control ASCII parameter file
Example for PCM: Using Variables

This example shows how to define variables, how to access them, and how to use them in computations or other operations. The measurement plan contains the following variables: P1=10 hugo=vector(10,20,30) hugo_1=point(10.1,20.5,30.02,0,0,1) text_1=This is a text in the text_1 variable Parameter accesses to the vector hugo: hugo.x hugo.y hugo.z => => => return value is 10 return value is 20 return value is 30
Parameter accesses to the point hugo_1: hugo_1.x hugo_1.y hugo_1.z hugo_1.nx hugo_1.ny => => => => => return value is 10.1 return value is 20.5 return value is 30.02 return value is 0 return value is 0
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-33
hugo_1.nz
=>
return value is 1
Examples for calculations with variables: Pnew = P1 *2. The return value is 20 Pnew = (hugo.xhugo_1.z)/2. The return value is 10.01 r=type051_n0.x/2 zdelta=(r1-r)/tanphi norm=(nx4*nx4)+(ny4*ny4) Examples for output in the default printout:
NOTE
hss
The Print command is not executed unless you have activated the Test printout check box in CNC Measurement Plan Functions PCM Test settings. print(Radius_1 has the value: ,Radius_1) Calypso outputs the following string (example): Radius_1 has the value: 26.2655 print(r1 = ,r1,, r = ,r,,tanphi = ,tanphi) Calypso outputs the following string (example): r1= 23.5, r = 46, tanphi = 0.7874
Example for PCM: Condition with Alternative

You can enter conditions with alternatives (IF - ELSE) in the input and output parameters. The syntax is:
Meaning: If CONDITION is satisfied, DEFINITION1 is processed; if not satisfied, DEFINITION2 is processed. DEFINITION1 and DEFINITION2 can be formulas, value assignments, functions or other conditions of your choice, always with line breaks as separators. The example below shows how this syntax is used:
message(Test if with PCM) P1 = 1 message(Value is: ,P1) //----------------------------------------------------------
14-34
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Examples for PCM
if P1 == 1 then message(is equal. Value was: ,P1) endif if P1 < 1 then message(is less than 1: value was: ,P1) else if P1 > 1 then if P1 > 5 then message(is greater than 5: value was: ,P1) endif message(is greater than 1: value was: ,P1) endif endif //--------------------------------------------------------test = point(1,2,3,0,0,1) message(X ,test.x, Y,test.y, Z,test.z, nx,test.nx, ny ,test.ny, nz ,test.nz) if test.x == 1 then message(X value is: ,test.x) endif
Example for PCM: Principle of Parameterization

The example below illustrates the principle of parameterization: 1 You begin by compiling an ordinary measurement plan: Take a perforated plate, define the base alignment at the top left front and take two probings in -Z. For the two probing points point_A and point_B, define the two corresponding features Z-value_A and Z-value_B. 2 Define the variables so that the positions of the probing points can be parameterized: Select CNC Measurement Plan Functions Parameter, and enter the following:
X_value_point_A Y_value_point_A Z_value_point_A X_value_point_B Y_value_point_B Z_value_point_B = = = = = = 10 25 0 30 40 0
Click on OK to terminate input. The positions of probing points point_A and point_B can now be parameterized. 3 You do this by substituting variables for the fixed X, Y and Z coordinates:
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-35
Open probing point point_A, click in the input field for the X value and select Formula from the shortcut menu. Click on Settings. The variables you defined beforehand are listed. Click on X_value_point_A. Instead of X the measurement plan now contains a variable with 10 as its parameter value. Repeat the entire procedure for the Y and Z values of A. Parameters have now been substituted for the fixed X, Y and Z values of probing point point_A. Proceed in precisely the same way to substitute parameters for the fixed X, Y and Z values of probing point point_B. 4 Run the measurement plan. The CMM moves to the coordinates. If you now assign other parameters to the variables
X_value_point_A Y_value_point_A Z_value_point_A X_value_point_B Y_value_point_B Z_value_point_B = = = = = = 18 37 0 44 23 5
and restart the measurement plan, the CMM will move to the new coordinates.
14-36
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Examples for PCM
Example for PCM: Loading Parameter Values into a Curve

This example illustrates how to generate a curve from 12 individual points, using the point generator. 1 Create the following parameter file:
type103[1]=point(-65.386, -46.674, 139.666, -0.019, -0.022, 1.0) type103[2]=point(-81.733, -58.343, 139.007, -0.026, -0.028, 0.999) type103[3]=point(-98.08, -70.011, 138.154, -0.034, -0.033, 0.999) type103[4]=point(-114.426, -81.68, 137.101, -0.043, -0.039, 0.998) type103[5]=point(-130.773, -93.348, 135.821, -0.053, -0.046, 0.998) type103[6]=point(-147.12, -105.017, 134.29, -0.063, -0.054, 0.997) type103[7]=point(-163.466, -116.685, 132.499, -0.073, -0.061, 0.995) type103[8]=point(-179.813, -128.354, 130.44, -0.084, -0.069, 0.994) type103[9]=point(-196.159, -140.023, 128.113, -0.094, -0.077, 0.993) type103[10]=point(-216.593, -154.608, 124.829, -0.107, -0.087, 0.99) type103[11]=point(-220.679, -157.525, 124.122, -0.109, -0.089, 0.99) type103[12]=point(-224.766, -160.442, 123.4, -0.112, -0.092, 0.99)
These lines define the 12 points from which the curve will be generated. If you want to include a comment for each curve point, add the following lines to the parameter file:
name103[1] = type103_n1_p1 name103[2] = type103_n2_p2 name103[3] = type103_n3_p3 name103[4] = type103_n4_p4 name103[5] = type103_n5_p5 name103[6] = type103_n6_p6 name103[7] = type103_n7_p7 name103[8] = type103_n8_p8 name103[9] = type103_n9_p9 name103[10] = type103_n10_p10 name103[11] = type103_n11_p11 name103[12] = type103_n12_p12
You must also open the Point Generator dialog box (see below) and define the variable name103[index] in the Comment box. 2 Open the Curve feature definition template. 3 Go to Nominal Definition and select Parameter Data. The Point Generator dialog box appears on the screen. 4 Enter the following values in the Point Generator dialog box: Start Index = 1 End Index = 12 Increment = 1
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-37
5 Click on the Point input field and use the shortcut menu to open the Formula dialog box. 6 Enter the following variable name:
type103[index]
You have now entered a changeable variable name. The point generator replaces [index] with the current value of the loop counter in each step, starting with the start index. 7 Close the window.
Example for PCM: Defining Curve Using Cosine Function

You can use the point generator to define a curve by its mathematical description. This example, by way of illustration, shows how to define a curve with the aid of the cosine function. When you do this you are using implicit variable definition and value assignment by means of a formula. To define a curve, for example: 1 In the point generator, enter 1 as the Start Index, 50 as the End Index, and 1 as the Increment. 2 Right-click in the Point input box to open the Formula Interface window. 3 Enter the following:
point(index*10,50*cos(index*10),0,0,0,1)
This formula defines a series of 50 points with changing X and Y values, all situated on the plane Z=0 and having the same vector (0,0,1). point(x,y,z,nx,ny,nz) defines a point variable. Use the index loop counter of the point generator as the argument in the cosine function. In each of the points the x value is index*10, the y value is 50*cos(index*10), and the z value is 0. 4 Close the window.
Example for PCM: Rechecking Characteristic after Tolerance Excursion

You can use PCM to recheck a characteristic in the event of an excursion past a tolerance limit. This is useful, for example, if the excursion is due to the presence of foreign matter. Once the foreign matter has been removed by cleaning, a repetition of the measurement will furnish the actual values.
14-38
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Examples for PCM
The characteristic in this example is the roundness of a hole. If the characteristic goes out of tolerance, you want to remove foreign matter from the hole and repeat the measurement. To accomplish this using PCM functions: 1 Place a loop with 6 repetitions around the characteristic. 2 Point to the Break Condition field, open the shortcut menu and select Formula... . The Formula dialog box appears on the screen. 3 In the Boolean Expression (Yes / No Test) field, define status_5==1 as the abortion condition and click on OK. 4 Write the following program code into the field for the output parameters of the characteristic:
//************************************************************************************************ // Measure Circle hole_5 , check roundness; if out of tolerance, interrupt CNC and request next // task: repeat feature or measure next feature or terminate CNC run. //************************************************************************************************ // Defining starting conditions status_5 = 2 hole_5 = getActual("DIN Round_hole_5").actual // If out of tolerance, open a window and inquire CNC End, Continue or Repeat if hole_5 > 0.01 then message("DIN Roundness of hole_5 is:" ,hole_5) status_5 = inquire("1=CNC End, 2=Continue, 3=Repeat. Enter a number") message(status_5,"Is your entry correct?", "DIN Roundness of hole_5 is", hole_5) if status_5 == 2 then message("CNC run will be continued") status_5 = 2 endif endif
if status_5 == 1 then message("The CNC run will be terminated due to excess tolerance in Circle hole_5.") cncBreak() endif
if status_5 == 3 then message("The measurement of the circle will be repeated.") if LOOP1 == 5 then message("CNC run will be terminated due to too many loop runs in feature hole_5.") cncBreak() endif endif print("Status ist",status_5, "DIN Roundness of hole_5 is", hole_5)
5 You can now run the measurement plan.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-39
Example for PCM: Parameterizing a Coordinate System

You can parameterize the angle of rotation of a system of coordinates. This entails creating the angle as a value of a variable in radian measure. You can also parameterize the offset of a system of coordinates. In this example, the system of coordinates has to be rotated 180 or 0 degrees, depending on the value of a variable. You accomplish this by assigning a variable, for example PartRotationActive a value of 0 or 1 in the input parameters at the applicable points in the measurement plan. 1 Open the base alignment. 2 Select Change active Base Alignment and click on Special. 3 In the Special Functions window, click Rotate by an angle. 4 Right-click in the input field for the angle to the shortcut menu, open the Formula dialog box and enter the following:
3.14159265359 * PartRotationActive
In radian measure 180 corresponds to the number = 3.14159265359. The result of the formula depends on the variable PartRotationActive: When PartRotationActive=0 is set, the formulas return value is 3.14159265359 * 0 = 0. The base alignment is not rotated. When PartRotationActive=1 is set, the formulas return value is 3.14159265359 * 1 = 180. The base alignment is rotated 180.
Example for PCM: Loading PCM File Using Dialog

You can manually load a PCM file for the current measurement plan by clicking CNC Measurement Plan Functions Parameter. With the command readPCMFile, you can have the same function run automatically. If you are using character chain functions and polls, you can ask for the required file name in the dialog.
14-40
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Examples for PCM
With the following lines, you can implement a poll for the desired parameter file and the loading of the relevant file:
// Select file PCM_PARA=inquireText("Which file do you want?",cr(),"File1=1",cr(),"File2=2",cr(),"File3=3") // Compose file name PCM_Filename="Parameterset_"+PCM_PARA // Specify path for files path=C:/home/om/PCMFILES // Load PCM file readPCMFile (PCM_filename)
Example for PCM: Defining Loop with Linear Offset

Let us assume that you want to parameterize a hole pattern with linear offset in X. You can use the Pattern function or PCM to accomplish this task. The PCM is illustrated here. You must parameterize the X, Y and Z coordinates, along with the diameter and the offset in X. 1 Select CNC Measurement Plan Functions Parameter and enter the following values:
Circle_position = point(20.5,15.5,-5,0,0,1) OffsetX = 10 Circle_diameter = 50
2 Parameterize the circle: Define the base alignment. Define the circle with measurement strategy. Open the feature definition template for a circle and enter parameters in the Formula Interface window. Input box X: circle_position.x Input box Y: circle_position.y Input box Z: circle_position.z Input box D: circle diameter 3 Define the Diameter characteristic and place a loop over it. If more than one characteristic is needed, e.g. X value, Y value and diameter, you have to parameterize the nominals for all characteristics. Then combine the characteristics in a group and place the loop around the group. 4 Parameterize the nominal.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-41
5 Place a loop over the characteristic: Start = 1. End = 5 Increment = 1. The next step is to update the feature with loop counter and offset parameter. 6 In the Curve definition template, select Formula from the shortcut menu opened by right-clicking in the X Nominal field. The field for the X value contains the variable circle_position.x. You want to increment this value by the offsetX value each time the loop is run. Enter the following in the formula:
circle_position.x + ((LOOP1 1) * offsetX)
LOOP1 is the loop variable of the 1st loop; you can transfer it into the formula by clicking on Loop. The start index for LOOP1 is the value from the Start input box for the loop. 7 Run the measurement plan. The loop is run. The expression for the X value assumes the following values one after the other: 20.5, 30.5, 40.5, 50.5, 60.5.
Example for PCM: Nested Loop for Field (Array)

In this example a perforated plate is to be parameterized. The number of holes and the positions of the holes are both randoms. Build up the circles as an array (field) and use a loop in the measurement plan which you use to pass through the array index. An array can be obtained by indexing a variable with square brackets. The array will, of course, have to be set as a parameter for the actual processing process. In this case, use the Loop index LOOP1.
14-42
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Examples for PCM
1 Create the following ASCII file for PCM:

// Circle coordinates as points with values for x,y,z // CirclePos[1] = point(10,20,-5,0,0,1) CirclePos[2] = point(15,30,-5,0,0,1) CirclePos[3] = point(22,28.3,-5,0,0,1) CirclePos[4] = point(40.5,30.8,-5,0,0,1) Circle_diameter[1] = 70 Circle_diameter[2] = 50 Circle_diameter[3] = 25 Circle_diameter[4] = 22 Number_circles = 4 // Comment strings for each circle textCircle[1] = This is circle A textCircle[2] = This is circle B textCircle[3] = This is circle C textCircle[4] = This is circle D
The ASCII parameter file can be generated using the Notepad in Windows NT. 2 Save this file as perplate_A.para. 3 Create a measurement plan with base alignment and a circle. The elements of the base alignment can also be parameterized. They are omitted here for the sake of clarity. 4 Define a circle with measurement strategy. 5 Define each of the variables contained in the parameter file described above as an array (with square brackets and the loop variable LOOP1) and read in the parameter file perplate_A.para. The parameters from the file are assigned to the variables. 6 Open the feature definition template for the circle. In the X nominal input box, enter CirclePos[LOOP1].x. In the Y nominal input box, enter CirclePos[LOOP1].y. In the Z nominal input box, enter CirclePos[LOOP1].z. In the D nominal input box, enter Circlediameter[LOOP1]. Open the commentary field with Formula in the Name/Comment window and enter the text parameter textCircle[LOOP1]. 7 Define the characteristics X Value, Y Value and Diameter. The nominal values are parameterized using Formula. 8 Combine the characteristics in a group. 9 Place a loop over the group: Start = 1. End = NumberCircles
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-43
You can import the NumberCircles variable into the End field using the Formula Interface window. Increment = 1. 10 Start the measurement plan. Depending on the content of the parameter file, you can use this measurement plan to measure different numbers of circles with different positions and diameters.
Example for PCM: Parts Family and Variant Control

PCM enables you to measure different variants of a workpiece using a single measurement plan. Let us assume, for example, that a workpiece has two variants, A and B. Variant B has three extra holes with a diameter of 10 mm. 1 Generate a complete measurement plan, complete with the three holes. 2 Combine all characteristics of the three holes in the group called Additional hole pattern variant B. Selection of the variant is controlled by means of a PCM parameter as a switch. 3 Select CNC Measurement Plan Functions Parameter and enter the following:
// Measure additional hole pattern variant B when parameter is 1 MeasureAdditionalHolePatternActive = 1
4 Highlight the Additional hole pattern variant B group and set a condition: Select Condition from the shortcut menu. Click in the input box for the condition to open the shortcut menu and open the Formula Interface window. In the Formula Interface window, click on Settings. Confirm the MeasureAdditionalHolePatternActive variable. Insert == 1 as an additional entry. The condition is now defined: the Additional hole pattern variant B group is measured only when the variable MeasureAdditionalHolePatternActive is equal to 1. 5 Run the measurement plan. The Additional hole pattern variant B group is measured. 6 Select CNC Measurement Plan Functions Parameter and enter the following:
14-44
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Examples for PCM
// Measure additional hole pattern variant B when parameter is 1 MeasureAdditionalHolePatternActive = 0
7 Run the measurement plan again. The Additional hole pattern variant B group is not measured in this run.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-45
Example for PCM: ASCII Parameter File

Example of an ASCII parameter file (*.PARA file):
// Text-Parameters ------------------------------------------who = File generated by ZEISS-IMT Training Center nameOfCircle_1 = Circle_1 nameOfCircle_2 = Circle_2 nameOfCircle_3 = Circle_3 text1 = type034_n2_p2 nextText = This is in Front // Text-Parameters as an array --------------------name101[1] = type101_n1_p1 name101[2] = type101_n2_p2 name101[3] = type101_n3_p3 name101[4] = type101_n4_p4 name101[5] = type101_n5_p5 name101[6] = type101_n6_p6 name101[7] = type101_n7_p7 name101[8] = type101_n8_p8 name101[9] = type101_n9_p9 name101[10] = type101_n10_p10 // Numeric-Parameters -----------------------------Partnumber = 10 PartRotationAktiv = 1 CREATION_DATE = 950516 CREATION_TIME = 0000 DESIGN_DATE = 950516 NUMBER = 772209709750 PART_HEIGHT = 316.000 PLACE = 2 X_Circle_1 = 10 Y_Circle_1 = 20 Z_Circle_1 = 15 D_Circle_1 = 40 X_Circle_2 = 250 Y_Circle_2 = 40 Z_Circle_2 = -15 D_Circle_2 = 25 X_Circle_3 = -12 Y_Circle_3 = -20 Z_Circle_3 = 50 D_Circle_3 = 12 // Numeric-Parameters as an array type vector ------------------type086[1] = vector( 10.0, 0.0, 0.0 ) type086[2] = vector( 0.0, -20.0, 0.0 ) type086[3] = vector( 30.0, 20.0, 10.0 ) type086[4] = vector( 17.5, 13.8, 50.0 ) // Numeric-Parameters as an array type point -------------------CurveFront[1] = point( 216.023, 0.0, 69.698, 0.984, -0.0, 0.176 ) CurveFront[2] = point( 206.34, 0.0, 102.988, 0.916, -0.0, 0.401 ) CurveFront[3] = point( 180.14, 0.0, 141.726, 0.707, -0.0, 0.707 ) CurveFront[4] = point( 130.593, 0.0, 181.254, 0.575, -0.0, 0.818 ) CurveFront[5] = point( 107.046, 0.0, 197.639, 0.57, -0.0, 0.822 ) CurveFront[6] = point( 80.825, 0.0, 216.02, 0.557, -0.0, 0.83 )
14-46
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
PCM Quick Reference
PCM Quick Reference

You need the following information in order to program with PCM: PCM Syntax on page 14-47 Variables in PCM on page 14-48 Arithmetic and Comparative Operators in PCM on page 14-49 Overview of PCM functions: Mathematical functions Contains the syntax for mathematical functions such as sine, cosine, etc. Character chain functions Contains the syntax for functions using character chains such as asc, chr, len, etc. Input and output Contains the functions that control screen input and output. File commands Contains the functions that are required to work with files and directories. Measurement-specific functions Contains the functions that process measured values generated by a measurement plan run and that read probe properties. CMM movement commands Contains the functions that control the CMM. Use custom printout Contains the functions for activating and deactivating the custom printout. Overview of the various types of condition (IF-instructions)
PCM Syntax
Like the programming languages Basic, C, Fortran and so on, PCM uses a functional syntax with the following rules: Definitions and value assignments as follows: variable_name=value Blanks are not permitted in names and formulas; the syntax is case-sensitive, so it distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters. Multiplication and division precede addition and subtraction when formulas are resolved.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-47
The decimal separator is the period (example 3.85). In functions, the function parameters (the arguments) are in parentheses and separated by commas. In commands (procedure calls) the function parameters (the arguments) can be omitted. Example: getActual(). Comments can be entered in each line: everything following the // string is ignored.
Variables in PCM
There are four types of variable in PCM. The type of variable is defined implicitly by the value assignment: Variable type number Examples of value assignments pi=-3.141529 hugo=2.0 P1=80 Axis=vector(10,12,0) CylinderB=point(-10,12.5,0,0,0,1) Text_1=Circle Text_2=Enter the number:
vector point string
Arrays
Arrays can also be defined with variables using special value assignments with square brackets. Example:
hugo[1] = point(-10,12.5,0,0,0,1) hugo[2] = point(-12,12.5,0,0,0,1) hugo[3] = point(-14,12.5,0,0,0,1) hugo[4] = point(-16,12.5,0,0,0,1) In this case, hugo is an array consisting of 4 variables of the type point. The array index in square brackets can also be specified by a variable (of type number, as an integer). You can therefore define an array of any length in a single loop instruction. Example: for I = 1 to numberTeeth type[I] = inquireNumber("Which tooth type is in position number ",I) next I
14-48
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
PCM Quick Reference
You can gain direct access to a specific element in an array by specifying the array index. Example: Length = output values[4]
Arithmetic and Comparative Operators in PCM

You can use the following arithmetic operators in PCM: Operator + * / Result Sum Difference Product Quotient
You can use the following comparative operators for conditions in PCM: Operator < > <> == >= <= Result Truth value of a<b Truth value of a>b Truth value of a not equal to b Truth value of a=b Truth value of a greater than or equal to b Truth value of a less than or equal to b
Mathematical functions in PCM

Angle Conversions
You can use the following functions to convert angle values in PCM: Function rad (angular degree) deg (radian angle) Result Radian value of angle degrees Gon angle value of radian angle
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-49
Angle Functions
PCM supports the following angle functions: Function sin (angular degree) cos (angular degree) tan (angular degree) arcsin (value) arccos (value) arctan (value) arctan2 (dividend,divisor) Result Sine value Cosine value Tan value Arcsine in degrees Arccosine in degrees Arctangent in degrees Arc tangent from the quotient
Other Functions
Other mathematical functions are available: Operator squared(value) sqrt(value) exp(value) ln(value) log(value) mod(value1,value2) int() abs(value) Result Value squared Square root of value evalue Natural logarithm of value Common logarithm of value Value1 modulo value2 Integral proportion of value |Value| (=absolute value of the value)
round(value[,figures]) Value, rounded to the given number of places; if specification of number of places omitted: 0 places sign([value1,]value2) Sign of value2 times value1: Value1, if value2<0 0, if value2=0 + value1, if value2>0
Examples: squared(3) = 9 sqrt(225) = 15 exp(0) = 1 ln(1) = 0
14-50
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
PCM Quick Reference
log(10000) = 4 mod(22,8) = 6 int(34.5674) = 34 abs(-35.335value) = 35.335 round(35.335,2) = 35.34 sign(-12,-34) = 12 sign(-12) = -1
Character Chain Functions in PCM

You can use the following character chain functions in PCM: Function asc(character) chr(number) format(number) val(character chain) len(character chain) inStr([startIndex,] character chain1, character chain2) Result ASCII code (number) of specified character Character with the specified ASCII code Character chain consisting of the figures and characters of the number Number represented by the character chain Length of the character chain Position of the first occurrence of character chain2 within character chain1 after the startIndex-th character or the first character
mid(character chain,startIndex[,length]) Character chain, consisting of the characters from the startIndex-th character to the end of the character chain or to the (startIndex+length-1)-th character strElement(n,char,character chain) The n-th element of the character chain, when char is regarded as a separator between the elements
Examples: asc("8") = 56 chr(111) = "o" format(3278,45) = "3278,45" val("3278,45") = 3278,45 len("This is a character chain") = 25 inStr(3,"Manna","a") = 5 inStr("Manna","a") = 2 mid("PCM Functions",1,3) = "PCM"
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-51
strElement(4,",","hello,here,we,are,again") = "are" strElement(4,"e","here,we,are,again") = "ar"
PCM Functions: Input and Output

inquireNumber
The inquireNumber command can be used to create a dialog for querying a numeric value. The syntax is:
variablename = inquireNumber("poll text for workpiece number")
or
variablename = inquireNumber("line1"[,cr()],"line2"[,cr()],...,"lines")
Here the optional elements cr() each cause a line break on the screen. Example 1:
P1 = inquireNumber(Enter 1 to continue measuring) if P1 == 1 then message(You entered 1 so I will continue measuring) endif else if P1 <> 1 then message(You do not want to continue measuring.) endif endif
Example 2:
hugo = 10 P1 = inquireNumber("Last word was: ",hugo,cr(), "Enter new number:") message("You have entered the number:",P1)
Example 3:
type = inquireNumber("Cone tooth = 1", cr(), "Cylinder form tooth = 2", cr(), "Long cylinder tooth = 3", cr(), "Spherical form tooth = 4", cr(), "Please enter number")
inquireText
The inquireText command can be used to create a dialog for querying a character string. The syntax is:
variablename = inquireText("text line")
or
variablename = inquireText("text line1"[,cr()],"text line2"[,cr()],...,"text lines")
14-52
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
PCM Quick Reference
Here the optional elements cr() each cause a line break on the screen. Examples:
string1 = inquireText(Enter the name)
inquireList
The inquireList command can be used to create a menu for querying a character chain. The syntax is:
variablename = inquireList("menu title","menu item1","menu item2",...,"menu itemn")
The command causes the appearance of a menu with the given title line on the screen. As a value, the variable is assigned the character chain of the menu item which has been selected with a mouse click or the arrow keys and confirmed with OK. Examples:
NameForPrintoutheader = inquireList("Name for printout header","Test printout","Default printout",)
inquire
Corresponds to the inquireNumber command, but is supported by PCM only for the sake of upwards compatibility. The syntax is:
variablename = inquire("Dialog text for poll")
message
Outputs the current values of one or more variables. The syntax is:
message(variable,variable,variable,...)
Inserting cr() instead of a variable causes a line break on the screen. Example:
message("The value of variable P1 is: ", P1, cr(), "The value of variable P2 is: ", P2)
print
Prints the current values of one or more variables in the printout. The syntax is:
print(variable;variable;variable;...) NOTE
hss
The print command will not be active unless you have activated the Activate print command check box after selecting CNC Measurement Plan Functions PCM Test Settings in the PCM Test Functions window. This means you can use the command for test purposes.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-53
Examples:
print(Print this dialog text in the printout) print(Print the value of variable P1 in the printout; P1)
PCM Functions: File Commands

addToFile
Adds a line to a file. If the file does not exist, it will be specially created. The syntax is:
addToFile(file name,value1,...)
Whenever the file name or path name is used, this function will access the directory of the current measurement plan. If the name of the drive is missing, the current directory will be used. Example: addToFile(wd+"\info.txt","line",1) Here wd is a variable, which contains a path specification.
deleteFile
Deletes the specified file. The syntax is:
deleteFile(file name)
Whenever the file name or path name is used, this function will access the directory of the current measurement plan. If the name of the drive is missing, the current directory will be used.
getActualInspectionDir
Returns the directory of the current measurement plan. The syntax is:
getActualInspectionDir()
getWD
Returns the current directory. The syntax is:
getWD()
Example: wd = getWD()
readPCMFile
reads in a PCM file. The syntax is:
readPCMFile (file name)
Whenever the file name or path name is used, this function will access the directory of the current measurement plan. If the name of the drive is missing, the current directory will be used.
14-54
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
PCM Quick Reference
The new parameters which are read in will, in each case, overwrite the current parameters of the same name.
NOTE
hss
The parameters which were available before the CNC run will only be temporarily overwritten. The original start setting will be used for the next CNC run. The file name can also be entered in the form of several parameters. The parameters will, depending on the type, be put together to form a string. Example1:
readPCMFile("testparameter.para ")
Example2:
P1 = "c:" P2= "\calypso\home\om\ "+"test.para " readPCMFile(P1,P2)
Example3:
readPCMFile("c: ", "\calypso\home\om ", "test.para ")
PCM Functions: Measurement-specific Functions

getActual
In conjunction with an argument returns a certain current value of a feature. The syntax is:
NOTE
hss
Coordinate values returned by getActual and getNominal always refer to the base alignment of the current feature.
getActual(feature_name).characteristic
The "feature_name" can be indexed directly or with a variable (for example, a loop variable):
getActual("cone",3).x
characteristic is a dummy for the following: Function x y z a1 Return value X value of the reference point Y value of the reference point Z value of the reference point Angle 1
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-55
Function a2 inclinationAngle rotationAngle diameter radiusD2 radius angle len sigma form coordPolRadius coordPolAngle coordPolHeight apexAngle apexAngleHalf
Return value Angle 2 Angle of inclination Angle of rotation Diameter Radius 2 Radius Angle Length Scatter Form error Polar coordinate, radius Polar coordinate, angle Polar coordinate, height Cone angle Half cone angle
Used without an argument, it returns the current value of the characteristic. The syntax is:
getActual()
getNominal
Returns a certain nominal of a feature. The syntax is:
getNominal(feature_name).characteristic
See the table above for the possible values of characteristic.
getProbe
Returns characteristics of the probe. The syntax is:
getProbe(probe_name,plate_name).characteristic
Probe name and plate name must be strings enclosed in straight quotes ("). The possible values of characteristic are: radius or probeName. The current probe name can be omitted. Examples: Command / assignment getProbe().radius getProbe(probe_+Y).radius Return value / effect The current probe radius is returned. The probe radius of probe_+Y is returned.
14-56
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
PCM Quick Reference
Command / assignment getProbe(probe_+Y,plate_A).radius ProbeDiameter= getProbe(probe_+Y,plate_A).radius
Return value / effect The radius of probe_+Y is returned from plate_A. The variable ProbeDiameter receives the radius of probe_+Y from plate_A.
getRecordHead
Returns the current value of a printout-header variable. The syntax is:
getRecordHead(printout header variable)
You will find a complete list of all printout header variables in The Printout Header Data (Reference) on page 9-21.
setRecordHead
Sets the value of a printout header variable. The syntax is:
setRecordHead(printout header variable,value)
You will find a complete list of all printout header variables in The Printout Header Data (Reference) on page 9-21.
baseSystem (Base Alignment)

Returns characteristics of the base alignment. The syntax is:
baseSystem().characteristic
Possible values of characteristic are: x, y, z, valueA, euler1, euler2 and euler3: Function baseSystem().x baseSystem().y baseSystem().z baseSystem().valueA baseSystem().euler1 baseSystem().euler2 baseSystem().euler3 Return value X value of base alignment Y value of base alignment Z value of base alignment valueA value of base alignment euler1 of base alignment in rads (angle of inclination) euler2 of base alignment in rads (angle of inclination) euler3 of base alignment in rads (angle of inclination )
The formula for calculating the plane angle of the base alignment is:
plane angle = (euler1 euler3) * 180 /
Example: result=baseSystem().x
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-57
The X value of the base alignment is written into the result variable.
date
Returns the current date and the respective country language. The syntax is:
date()
dateAndTime
Returns system date and time. The syntax is:
dateAndTime()
Example: date=dateAndTime(). Date and time are written into the date variable (of type string) in the format defined by the system.
PCM Functions: CMM Movement Commands

positionCMM
Moves the probe head to the specified position (in machine coordinates). The CMM moves in Z first, then X, and finally Y. The syntax is:
!
hss
Caution This is a direct movement command addressing the CMM. Risk of collision. The head moves directly to the position, the clearance planes are ignored.
positionCMM(X,Y,Z)
Use: For example, you can define movements to pickup positions in the output parameters of the measurement plan. Example: positionCMM(500,-100,-200) The CMM moves first in Z to -100 mm, then in Y to -200 mm and then in X to +500 mm in the machines system of coordinates.
searchDistance
Sets the search distance. The syntax is:
searchDistance(distance)
In this case distance is the distance traveled by the probe head before nominal probing. This value must be entered in 0.1 mm. It applies until it is overwritten or canceled by a reset (stop light goes from green to red and then back to green). Examples:
14-58
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
PCM Quick Reference
searchDistance(10.000) => Search distance before nominal probing is
1 mm
searchDistance(60.000) => Search distance before nominal probing is
6 mm
cncBreak
Breaks off the CNC run. The syntax is:
cncBreak()
The CNC run is broken off, the stop light changes to red.
systemCall
Calls system commands. The syntax is:
systemCall(filename)
The file filename is called and executed immediately. filename must be an executable file, e.g. a batch file or a program. You can use this function to copy results to another computer, for example. Example: systemCall(D:\home\om\philips\main\help.bat) The statements in the help.bat file are executed.
systemCallWithWait
Calls system commands and waits for them to be processed. The syntax is:
systemCallWithWait("filename")
The file filename is called and executed. Calypso will wait until the file filename has been processed. filename must be an executable file, e.g. a batch file or a program. Example: systemCallWithWait("D:\home\om\philips\main\help.bat") The statements in the help.bat file are executed. Calypso will wait until the batch file has been processed.
PCM Functions: Custom Printout

presentationOn
Switches on a custom printout. The syntax is:
presentationOn()
presentationOff
Switches off a custom printout. The syntax is:
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-59
presentationOff()
Example: You want a graphic to appear only when certain characteristics are measured. To accomplish this you define a custom printout with a graphic. You switch off the custom printout by default in the start parameters of the measurement plan. You then request the custom printout for the characteristics in question by opening the Settings window and specifying presentationOn() in the input parameters.
Overview: Conditions in PCM

The Simple Condition
The syntax of the simple condition is as follows:
if CONDITION then DEFINITION endif
Meaning: If CONDITION is satisfied, DEFINITION is processed. If CONDITION is not satisfied, DEFINITION is not processed. DEFINITION can be formulas, value assignments, functions, conditions or loops of your choice, always with line breaks as separators.
The Condition with Alternative

The syntax of the condition with alternative is as follows:
Meaning: If CONDITION is satisfied, DEFINITION1 is processed. If CONDITION is not satisfied, DEFINITION2 is processed. DEFINITION1 and DEFINITION2 can be formulas, value assignments, functions, conditions or loops of your choice, always with line breaks as separators.
14-60
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
PCM Quick Reference
Example of a Condition with Alternative
message(Test if with PCM) P1 = 1 message(Value is :,P1) //---------------------------------------------------------if P1 == 1 then message(is equal. Value was: ,P1) endif if P1 < 1 then message(is less than 1: Value was: ,P1) else if P1 > 1 then if P1 > 5 then message(is greater than 5: Value was: ,P1) endif message(is greater than 1: Value was: ,P1) endif endif //---------------------------------------------------------test = point(1,2,3,0,0,1) message(X ,test.x, Y,test.y, Z ,test.z, nx ,test.nx, ny ,test.ny, nz ,test.nz)
Overview: Loops in PCM

The Defined Loop
The defined loop has the following syntax:
for index=start to end [step] DEFINITION next index
The following must be inserted: for index the name of the loop variables (random), for start, end and step full figures (integers), for DEFINITION random formulas, value assignments, functions or other conditions or loops of your choice, always with line breaks as separators. Meaning: the functions or commands under DEFINITION are processed (end - start + 1)/step times, whereby step is set to 1 if no other specification is made. At the same time, the specific value for index is always entered in DEFINITION: at first start, then start+step, start+2*step etc. up to end. With next i, the loop index is incremented by the step each time.
Example for i=1 to 4 message(i,". step: ",step[i]) next i 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-61
The Conditional Loop

The conditional loop has the following syntax:
repeat DEFINITION until CONDITION
Meaning: 1.) DEFINITION is processed. Then CONDITION is tested. 2.) If CONDITION is fulfilled, the loop is ended. 3.) If CONDITION is not satisfied, DEFINITION is processed again and CONDITION is tested again. Continues with 2.). The CONDITION can be set up as a logical combination of several subconditions. The DEFINITION can be formulas, value assignments, functions or other conditions or loops of your choice, always with line breaks as separators. As the condition is only tested after the first run, a conditional loop must run at least once.
!
hss
Caution Please note that infinite repetitions are possible with the conditional loop, if the condition is never fulfilled.
14-62
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Tips and Tricks for Working with PCM
Tips and Tricks for Working with PCM

The PCM programming language provides you with a wide choice of functions and commands that you can use to automate many of the routine procedures in Calypso. There is also a possibility of Calypso becoming slower when you program with PCM. Debug functions are useful for locating bugs in programs (see How to Test PCM Commands on page 14-63).
Enhancing the Speed of Calypso

You will be able to use Calypso's speed to best effect if you bear the following in mind: When you perform local calculations required only for a particular feature or characteristic, you should always try to define new variables. If you re-use existing variables, there is a possibility of Calypso becoming slower because the old variables always have to be overwritten. Defining new variables is more efficient. Use the PCM command getActual sparingly in theoretical elements. Activate the print command only for test purposes.
How to Test PCM Commands

The procedure for testing PCM commands is as follows: 1 Select CNC Measurement Plan Functions PCM Test settings. The PCM Test Functions dialog box appears on the screen.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
14-63
2 Select PCM Test Printout to log the execution of each formula. Each time a value is assigned or a variable calculated, the new value is output in the default printout. Bear in mind that PCM Test Printout makes the program run more slowly. 3 Select Activate print command to activate the print commands in your PCM inputs. The print command is not executed unless this check box is activated. In this way you can print the current values of the variables at any point in your measurement plan. 4 Click on OK. The dialog box closes. The settings are used the next time the measurement plan is run.
Two-button vs. Three-button Mouse

The descriptions in this documentation are based on a two-button mouse. If you have a three-button mouse: click the middle button to open shortcut menus. Two-button mouse Left button Right button Ctrl + right button Alt + right button Three-button mouse Left button Middle button Right button Alt + right button
14-64
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15
15
.................................................................................................................................
Chapter
Geometric features such as circle, line, plane etc. can easily be measured with the basic version of Calypso. To measure freely formed part surfaces, special measuring techniques are required. The 2D curve and 3D curve measuring options and the Curve form feature are for measuring and evaluating known and unknown open and closed 2D and 3D curves. Curve measuring is one of Calypsos optional features. You can license this functionality and have it enabled in your system if it would be of use to you. Contact your Carl Zeiss Service for more information. This chapter assumes that you are familiar with the procedures for defining features (see and characteristics).Defining Features on page 5-2 Defining Characteristics on page 6-7

Basics about Curve Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2 Defining the Curve Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5 Defining Tolerances for a Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26 Using Curves in the CAD Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-31 The Measuring Strategy for the Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-33 Scanning a Known Contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-38 Defining Curve Form Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-43 Working with the Results of Curve Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . 15-46
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15- 1
Basics about Curve Measurement

Because curves are geometric elements, there are some important things you should know about how Calypso evaluates their form and location.
Definition and Display of Curves

In Calypso a curve is defined by a finite set of points. Calypso uses spline functions to interpolate between the curve points in order to display the curve as a continuity in the CAD window. Both the specifications and the actual values of the curve points are each defined by 6 values: 3 point coordinates (X, Y, Z) 1 normal vector (U, V, W) or its 3 direction cosines (NX, NY, NZ). The three curve types which can be measured and calculated by Calypso are presented in the following examples. These examples will help you to understand the principles. Flat curve (2D curve) Flat curves are produced when a plane (imaginary) intersects with a body. Flat curves occur, for example, on workpieces such as camshafts, which exhibit two-dimensional curves. All the points which constitute a flat curve are on a single plane that can (also) have any orientation in space. The normal vectors of the curve points, too, consequently, are all in the measuring plane.
Z Y
15-2
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Basics about Curve Measurement
Spatial curve (3D curve) Spatial curves (3D curves) have three degrees of freedom: theoretically, they are not constrained in any direction. You can measure and test 3D curves with Calypso.
Lift curve (face curve) Lift curves, also known as face curves, are special threedimensional curves, which run across cylinder sections. A lift curve maintains a constant distance from the axis of the cylinder, so only two values are variable: namely the deviation of the curve in a given direction (the X axis in our example) and the angle of rotation on the surface of the cylinder. Like the 2D curve, therefore, the lift curve has only two degrees of freedom. Lift curves in Calypso are special forms of the 3D curves.
Z
Y X
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15-3
Performing Curve Measurement

The procedure for curve measurement is no different from that for other measurements. The procedure for performing measurements is described in Running a Measurement Plan on page 8-1 You can measure a complete measurement plan, a mini-plan, or a single characteristic or feature.
15-4
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Defining the Curve Feature

The definition of a curve feature differs from the definition of other features. Within the curve feature definition template, Calypso offers four ways of defining nominal data. You can import a file (in VDA, ASCII, PAB or DXF format), define the curve with the point generator, digitize a curve from measurements, use the keyboard to enter the nominal data of the curve, adopt the nominal data of the curve from the CAD model. As with other features, you use a definition template to define twodimensional and three-dimensional curves. You will already be familiar with most of the buttons and input fields from the other definition templates, but this template includes some elements that are new.
You will find more information on this definition template under Definition Template (Curve) in the interactive Calypso reference in Online Help.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15-5
2D Curves, 3D Curves and Lift Curves The Differences

The definition templates for both types of curve are, broadly speaking, the same: they differ only in a small few points: The definition template for the 3D curve (lift curve) contains the menu Projection. The definition template for 3D curves (not lift curve) has no Projection menu, because the curve does not have to be embedded in a plane. For all practical purposes, the deviation for 3D curves can be calculated only in the actual vector direction and the normal vector direction. The Move Parallelcurve option in the Evaluation menu is not available for 3D curves.
How curves are displayed
In the CAD window curves are displayed as continuous lines; they are calculated as approximations with the aid of splines. You have the option of mapping a tape coupled to the curve, in order to highlight the spatial component of a 3D curve. You can set the width of this tape using Evaluation Tape width. 0 means: no tape.
Marking and demarking lift curve

Lift curves are 3D curves which are projected onto a cylinder section. You can see here that the menu Projection Lift Curve is contained in the definition template of the lift curve in addition to the features of the 3D curve. You can mark 3D curves as lift curves (while generating the lift curve) or cancel the marking again. To mark a 3D curve as a lift curve, you have two options: In the window Change nominal values, select the option In vector direction, activate the check box Lift curve and specify the radius and axial direction of the cylinder. In the menu Evaluation Lift curve in the window Parameter Data, activate the check box Lift curve. To cancel the marking of a 3D curve as a lift curve, you have two options: In the window Change Nominal Values, select the option In vector direction, deactivate the check box Lift curve and enter 0 explicitly for the Length and Cylinder radius. In the menu Evaluation Lift curve in the window Parameter Data, deactivate the check box Lift curve.
15-6
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Defining Nominal Data for a Curve

When defining a curve feature, you first need to define the nominal data of the curve you want to measure.
NOTE
hss
You can use neither automatic feature recognition nor the technology macros for this purpose. To define the nominal data, you can: Import an existing file. The file format must be one of the following: VDA (Cons, Curve, MDI, PSET, POINT, CIRCLE), ASCII, PAB or DXF. For ASCII files, the values are read in the following sequence: x-nominal, y-nominal, z-nominal, u-nominal, v-nominal, wnominal, x, y, z, u, v, w. Use the point generator to define the curve points: either to define the curve points mathematically or to import external files with a different format. Digitize a curve. You generate the nominal values of an unknown outline by probing. Enter the curves nominal data by means of the keyboard, for example taken from a technical drawing. Extract the nominal data from the CAD model: using the popup menu CAD modification and clicking with the mouse. Once the nominal points have been defined by one of these methods, you can proceed with processing them and thus changing the position and the shape of the curve.
!
hss
Risk of collision! Always check the normal vectors after defining the curve points, and make sure that the vectors do not point into the material (risk of collision).
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15-7
How to Import the Files for Nominal Definition of a Curve

Calypso supports import of the following file formats: VDA (the points in a VDA file must be described as Cons, Curve, MDI, PSET, POINT or CIRCLE), ASCII (for more information on ASCII files, see Defining Nominal Data for a Curve on page 15-7), PAB (a format used by SOM), and DXF (created by ScanWare DXF converters, creates only 2D curves). To import a file in one of these formats: 1 Make sure you have the curve feature template open and displayed on your screen, and that the chosen coordinate system fits to the curve to be imported. 2 Select Nominal Value Definition Read Nominal Values. A file selection window is opened.
3 Select the desired format. The Scanware converter must be installed on your system if you want to import a DXF file created by a ScanWare DXF converter. This option is not available for 3D curves.
15-8
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4 Select the desired file: Enter the complete path in the input field. If you do not know the path, click on the small arrow. You can select the file in the Explorer window that now opens. 5 If you want to load a VDA file selectively, click on the button Properties. The VDA import settings dialog box appears on the screen.
6 Enter the criteria for selecting the points for import in the curve and click on OK to confirm. 7 Click on OK. The data will now be read from the file. If you specified selection criteria before importing from a VDA file, the data in the file is imported selectively into the curve feature in accordance with these criteria. The sequence of the curve points derives from the sequence of the points in the VDA file. The type and name of the converted features are written into the Comment for the curve. You have now defined the curve with its nominal data. Always remember to check the direction of the normal vectors (see Checking the Normal Vectors of a Curve on page 15-24).
How to Generate a Curve with the Points Generator

Calypso supports the VDA, PAB and DXF file formats. If the data you need is in some other file format, you can program formulas to import the information and convert the data to Calypso curve data. You can also use the points generator to compute the points of the curve freely from mathematical formulas.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15-9
To generate a curve using the points generator: 1 Open the curve feature definition template. 2 Select the Parameters Data command from the Nominal Definition picklist. The Points Generator dialog box appears on the screen.
3 You can enter formulas and parameters to suit the necessary conversion in the Start Index, End Index and Increment input fields. See Entering Parameters and Formulas on page 14-15. 4 Click on OK, when you are finished programming. Calypso evaluates the points according to your entries and loads them into the definition template.
Creating Nominal Values of a Curve by Digitizing

You use digitalization when you do not have nominal data for a curve. Digitalization means obtaining the nominal data of a curve by a series of probings (i.e. probing an unknown contour).
!
hss
Caution Automatic stylus radius correction does not take place when you digitize. See Defining Tolerances for a Curve on page 15-26 and How to Change the Nominal Points of a Curve on page 15-22, Step 3, for instructions on how to implement radius correction.
15-10
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Take the probings on a workpiece that can be used as a pattern (master workpiece), in other words a precision-manufactured part. The actual values obtained by probing are subsequently converted into nominal data. In this way, you use a master workpiece to obtain the nominal data for other, identical curves. You have two options: either take individual manual probings to define the curve, or scan the curve. To scan 2D curves, select the procedure 2D section (see How to Scan an Unknown Contour using the Unknown Cut Method on page 15-12) To scan a 3D curve, you have two options: the 3D curve method you have to run three scans so that Calypso can compute the transverse curvature of the threedimensional curve (see Digitizing a 3D Curve on page 15-14) the Lift curve method (see How to Scan an Unknown Contour using the Unknown Circle Method on page 15-16)
How to Generate the Nominal Values of a Curve by Manual Probings

To digitize a curve by means of individual probings: 1 Open the definition template of the curve. 2 Click on the Nominal Definition picklist. 3 Select the command Digitizing on. The place of the Nominal Definition picklist is now taken by a red button labeled Digitizing off. 4 Click on the Open/Closed Curve button to select an open curve. 5 If you want to project the nominal points, select a projection plane from the Projection picklist. 6 Now start with taking the measuring points into the workpiece. Every probe point is shown directly in the definition template and in the CAD-window. As soon as you have probed three points, Calypso will calculate the curve. The entire curve is recalculated for every new point you probe. 7 As soon as you have defined the curve by probing, click on the Digitizing off button. 8 Click on OK to save the values and close the definition template. You have now determined the nominal values for an unknown curve. Note that these values refer to the stylus center. In order to correct the stylus radius, please read .Working with Curve Nominal Data on page 15-22
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15-11
How to Scan an Unknown Contour using the Unknown Cut Method

To scan an unknown contour as an unknown cut: 1 Open the 2D curve feature definition template. 2 In the Nominal Definition picklist, select the Digitizing on command. The place of the Nominal Definition picklist is now taken by a red button labeled Digitizing off. 3 Click on the Strategy button. The Strategy dialog box appears on the screen.
4 Select the Free planar section method to measure the curve as a free planar section. The entry Unknown contour 1 appears in the dialog box.
15-12
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
5 Double-click on the entry. The Segment dialog box appears on the screen.
6 Enter the parameters: Enter the coordinates of the start point in the Start Point field, or else probe the workpiece to define the start point. Enter the coordinates of the end point in the End Point field, or else probe the workpiece to define the end point Probe a Direction Point so that Calypso knows the reference direction of the plane, or use the Reference Axis picklist to select an axis normal to the scanning plane. If necessary, click on the button to change the Direction. 7 Enter a speed for the CMM in the Speed field or select the requisite accuracy. 8 Enter a pitch between points in the Step Distance field or define the number of points. Once all the parameters have been defined in full, the red Execute button appears and you can click it to start scanning. 9 Check that the CMM is ready to move and that there is no risk of collision.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15-13
10 Click on the red Execute button to start scanning the unknown contour. The CMM starts scanning the contour.
Digitizing a 3D Curve
When you digitize a 2D curve using the unknown cut method, the normal vectors are calculated by Calypso by definition, they are in the plane of the cut. A single digitization is not enough to probe a 3D curve with transverse curvatures on the workpiece, because in this case the orientation of the normal vectors is unknown. When you digitize a 3D curve, therefore, you have to scan an unknown contour in such a way as to obtain three cuts each a certain distance above and below the 3D curve as such. Calypso then uses this information to compute the normal vectors and thus the transverse curvature of the 3D curve. Start the process by clicking on the Digitize 3D Curve button in the Strategy window for 3D curves.
NOTE
hss
If the feature does not have any nominal values, you will have to select the item Digitizing On under Nominal Definition before you open the Strategy window.
15-14
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
In the Segment dialog box, go to Travel Path Definition and define the three tracks, then click on Execute to start digitization.
Track specification by probing
To specify the start and end points of the three tracks by probing with the CMM, first probe the three start points of the tracks (points 1 to 3), then probe the three end points of the tracks (points 4 to 6). When traveling along the three tracks, the CMM moves in a meandering style: the direction of movement alternates from one track to the next.
Directions during travel
Digitizing 3D Curve in Area

Using the 3D Curve feature you can also digitize a three-dimensional curve over an entire area. Calypso employs the technique of probing surfaces along intersection lines to effect a meander-formed probing of an entire surface area and in this way creates a 3D curve. It will be necessary here to enter the four edges of surface that is to be digitized. These four points must more or less form a rectangle. Start the process by clicking on the Digitize 3D Grid button in the Strategy window for 3D curves.
NOTE
hss
If the feature does not have any nominal values, you will have to select the item Digitizing On under Nominal Definition before you open the Strategy window.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15-15
In the Segment window, go to Travel Path Definition and define the number of tracks, then click on Execute to start digitization.
Directions during travel
When traveling along the three tracks, the CMM moves in a meandering style: the direction of movement alternates from one track to the next.
How to Scan an Unknown Contour using the Unknown Circle Method

To scan an unknown contour as an unknown circle: 1 Open the 3D curve feature definition template. 2 In the Nominal Definition picklist, select the Digitizing on command. The place of the Nominal Definition picklist is now taken by a red button labeled Digitizing off.
15-16
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
3 Click on the Strategy button. The Strategy dialog box appears on the screen.
4 Select the Unknown Circle method in order to measure the curve as an unknown circle along an annular surface (cylinder circumference). The Unknown Circle entry appears in the window.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15-17
5 Double-click Unknown Circle. The Segment dialog box appears on the screen.
6 In the Travel Path Definition list, select Point or Angle as the means of defining the travel path. 7 If you select Point: Enter the coordinates of the start points in the Start Point field, or else probe the workpiece to define the start points. Enter the coordinates of the end points in the End Point field, or else probe the workpiece to define the end points. If necessary, click on the button to change the Direction. To specify the start and end points of the three tracks by probing with the CMM, first probe the three start points of the tracks (points 1 to 3), then probe the three end points of the tracks (points 4 to 6). 8 If you select Angle: Enter the start angle in the Start Angle field. Enter the range for scanning in the Angle Range field. If you do not select a reference feature, enter the center in the Center field and the radius of the unknown circle in the Radius field.
15-18
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
If there is a suitable reference feature, select it from the Reference Feature list. The Center and Radius fields are filled automatically.
NOTE
hss
Check the entered values and make sure that the unknown circle is probed on an area along the cylinder section, so that the specified radius is accordingly always greater than the radius of the reference feature. The center must also be at the central point of the unknown circle. Usually, the automatically entered center is in the center of a base area of the reference feature. 9 Enter a speed for the CMM in the Speed field or select the requisite accuracy. 10 Enter a pitch between points in the Step Distance field or define the number of points. Once all the parameters have been defined in full, the Execute button appears and you can click it to start scanning. 11 Check that the CMM is ready to move and that there is no risk of collision. 12 Click on the red Execute button to start scanning the unknown contour. The CMM starts scanning the contour.
How to Enter Nominal Data of the Curve Point by Point

You also have the option of defining a curve by entering the nominal data directly into the definition template. Bear in mind, however, that the volume of data produced in this way can rapidly become very large. 1 Make sure you have the curve feature template open and displayed on your screen. The nominal fields for entering the X, Y and Z coordinates and the direction cosines NX, NY and NZ are on the left. 2 In the Nominal Data picklist, select Nominal Input. You have two options for input: point by point or with the aid of the nominals editor. You can use the buttons to toggle back and forth between the two display modes in the curve definition template. If you use point by point input you begin by entering the first point number and continue by entering the coordinates.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15-19
Then enter the next point number or click on the arrow to increment the number by one, and enter the coordinates of this point. Click on the button if you want to use the Nominal Editor. The tabular list is an overview in which you can use edit, copy, paste and delete functions. Click on the button to toggle back to the normal display mode. 3 Click OK to confirm your entries. Note that each point on the curve must have a normal vector. See How to Change the Nominal Vectors of the Curve on page 15-21.
How to Adopt Nominal Data of the Curve from the CAD Model.
You can also adopt nominal data for a curve from the CAD model. How to adopt nominal data of the curve from the CAD model: 1 Select CAD Modification Modify CAD Entities. The Modify CAD Model dialog box appears. 2 To generate a 2D curve: select a line in the CAD model. 3 Under Points, enter the desired number of points and click on the symbol for the curve. The 2D curve is generated and entered into the measurement plan. This can take a few seconds to complete. The vector normal to the plane of intersection is automatically calculated for each point on a 2D curve 4 To generate a 3D curve: Switch the CAD model to rendering mode and select an area on which the curve should be positioned. All edges you select subsequently will refer to this face, until you select a different face. 5 Then change to normal mode and select one or more edges (with the CTRL key). 6 Under Points, enter the desired number of points and click on the symbol for the curve. The 3D curve is generated and entered into the measurement plan. This can take a few seconds to complete. The curve's vectors will be taken from the CAD surface that you clicked on: For a cylindrical face, the vectors are calculated perpendicular to the cylinder axis. For a conical face, the vectors are calculated perpendicular to the cone axis rotated around the opening angle (from the plane).
15-20
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
For a planar edge, the vectors are positioned parallel to the plane vector. 7 When transfer is completed, confirm by clicking on Close. You have now transferred the features curve defined in the CAD model to your measurement plan. You can edit the curve in the usual way.
How to Change the Nominal Vectors of the Curve

Each curve point is determined by three point coordinates and a normal vector. For each curve you can work in Calypso the normal vectors of the nominal points are in the same direction. (See Basics about Curve Measurement on page 15-2). The direction of the normal vectors can be changed as follows: Vertical to the axis of a reference element Parallel to the axis of a reference element Rotated through a given angle about the tangent of the curve or Manual entry The procedure is similar for all these paths: 1 Open the definition template of the curve. 2 Select Nominal Definition Edit Vectors. You define the direction in the Curve Nominal Vector Input window.
3 Select the option to edit the normal vector Perpendicular To or Parallel To a reference feature.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15-21
4 Select the feature to be used as reference for the movement from the list. The normal vector of this feature will be shown as Reference Vector. 5 If you want to define a reference vector, go to Reference Vector and enter the directional components NX, NY and NZ. 6 If you want to rotate the vectors about the tangent of the curve: Mark the Rotation about tangent radio button. Enter the angle of rotation in the Angle field. 7 Click on OK to confirm. The new direction for the normal vector will be taken over from these values.
Working with Curve Nominal Data

If the nominal values for a curve have already been determined, you have the following possibilities for editing the nominal values: Change nominal points: Here you can move the curve in various ways, including rotating and shifting. Checking normal vectors.
How to Change the Nominal Points of a Curve

You can transform the nominal values of a curve in order to move the curve to a position of your choice. For example, this could be necessary for curves whose value you have read from a file and whose position you would like to modify on your workpiece. Or perhaps you have received a 3D curve by digitizing and you want to convert it into a lift curve.
NOTE
hss
You must transform the nominal values if you want to perform stylus radius correction after digitizing a curve. The nominal values can be transformed in several ways: Move in direction of the normal vectors (offset curve, especially for correcting stylus radius) Project in the direction of the cylinder axis on to the cylinder section, in order to get a lift curve Move and/or turn in axis direction Modify the number of points (for instance, with a very large number of points, which would lead to very slow probing).
15-22
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
!
hss
Caution If you modify the number of points and confirm with OK, you will create new nominal values for the curve. The original curve can not be recreated again. For this reason, it is important that you use the Simulation function to check the result beforehand. Only use this function with great care and after careful thought. To edit the nominal points: 1 Open the definition template of the curve. 2 Select Nominal Definition Change Nominal Points. The Change Nominal Points dialog box appears on the screen. The entry boxes of the dialog box change depending on the set option.
3 If you want to move the curve points in the direction of the normal vectors, activate the in Vector Direction radio button. Enter the value by which you wish to move the curve under Length. When you have the measurement values of the curve from the digitalization, click on the Stylus Radius button. The radius of the used stylus is entered in the input field. If you want to project the points of a curve on to a cylinder section, activate the check box Unknown circle and enter the radius and axis of the cylinder.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15-23
Please note that the reference axis or the axis of the reference feature must always pass through the center of the unknown circle. The origin of the base alignment must also lie on this axis. 4 To move or rotate the curve in the direction of the coordinate axis, select the option Coordinate axes direction. Enter the value for the move and/or rotation. 5 To modify the number of nominal points, select the option Number. Enter the desired value for the Step Distance, the Chord Height or the Number. Please note that the nominal points of the curve are then recalculated internally. Applying this function again may accidentally change the form of the curve. 6 Click on OK to confirm. The nominal points are modified immediately.
Checking the Normal Vectors of a Curve

In Calypso, the curve is only defined by points and directions. Therefore, after defining the curves nominal data, you should check two important things concerning the normal vectors: Is there a normal vector defined for each curve point? If there are no normal vectors for some (or all) points, you can enter them manually (see How to Change the Nominal Vectors of the Curve on page 15-21). Is the direction of the normal vectors OK? The normal vectors must always look away from the part. A normal vector must never point into the material of the part.
!
hss
Caution If a normal vector has the wrong direction, this result in collision because the approach direction of the CMM will be wrong. To check the normal vectors, you can: Check out the vectors in the CAD window this is the quickest way, and the most reliable. You can display each curve point with its normal vector (refer to Show/Hide Vectors on page 15-31). You choose this way especially for checking the vectors direction. If you just need to change the directions of all normal vectors at once, you can also use the Change Direction button.
15-24
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Checking the Clearance Planes of a Curve

When you define a feature, Calypso assigns clearance planes to the feature. In the case of curve measuring, you should check this automatic assignment to make sure that the clearance planes really guarantee a safe approach for the CMM. If the approach is not safe, make the requisite changes as described in Editing the Probe Routes on page 7-22.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15-25
Defining Tolerances for a Curve

There are two ways of entering tolerances for the Curve feature: For the whole curve For individual curve segments You can also define the curve jump tolerance for the entire curve here.
NOTE
hss
These entries in the definition template do not automatically define any measurement characteristics, which are added to the list of characteristics.
How to Define Tolerance for the Whole Curve

The entry of the measuring tolerance refers to the nominal-actual comparison of the curve points. You can enter an upper and/or lower tolerance.
upper tolerance nominal curve
lower tolerance
15-26
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
To enter tolerances for the whole curve: 1 Open the definition template of the curve. 2 Click on the button for tolerances. The definition template of the curve is extended.
3 Activate the Curve check box. This cuts out the chart for the tolerances of individual segments. 4 Enter a value for the Upper Tolerance and/or Lower Tolerance. 5 Click on OK to close the definition template. The tolerance you entered will be checked the next time the curve is measured. The curve jump tolerance is out put in the default printout.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15-27
How to Define Tolerances for Individual Segments

The entry of the measuring tolerance refers to the nominal-actual comparison of the curve points. You can enter an upper and/or lower tolerance for each segment you have defined.
upper tolerance nominal curve
lower tolerance
To set tolerances for individual segments: 1 Open the definition template of the curve. 2 Click on the button for tolerances. The dialog box shown below is opened. In the right half of the window you see a chart for the tolerances of the segments.
3 Select the segment for which you want to enter the tolerances by clicking on the column to the left of the segment name.
15-28
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
4 Now click on the input field of the tolerance you want to enter and enter a value for the Upper Tolerance and/or Lower Tolerance. 5 If you want to determine tolerances for further segments, repeat the last two steps. 6 Click on OK to close the definition template. The tolerances you entered will be checked the next time the curve is measured.
How to Define Jump Tolerance for the Whole Curve

The curve jump tolerance refers to the differences between the nominal-actual deviations of the curve points. So this is, so to speak, a second derivative the difference of the differences. The curve jump tolerance indicates the amount by which the curve form may deviate within a reference distance. It is generally independent of the curve form tolerance. In Calypso, the curve jump tolerance is always measured between two neighboring points. The curve is out of tolerance if the difference between the deviations of the two actual points from the respective nominal point is greater than the specified value.
Nominal curve Actual curve
Jump tolerance
In the illustration, the differences between the nominal-actual deviations from one point to the next are shown as shaded columns. As you can see, the curve jump may be greater than the actual deviation.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15-29
To enter the jump tolerance for the whole curve: 1 Open the definition template of the curve. 2 Click on the button for tolerances. The definition template of the curve is extended.
3 Activate the Curve jump tolerance check box. The entry box then appears. 4 Enter the value for the Curve jump tolerance. 5 Click on OK to close the definition template. The tolerance you entered will be checked the next time the curve is measured.
15-30
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Using Curves in the CAD Model
Using Curves in the CAD Model

The principles for using the CAD model in measuring curves are the same as those described in Working with the CAD Window on page 3-1. There are, however, a number of other, useful commands for working with curves. You access these commands by means of a shortcut menu.
NOTE
hss
These additional commands are available only when you have the curve definition template open.
The Commands in the Shortcut Menu for Curves

Show/Hide Nominal Points
Choose this command to view the individual nominal points. Each point is represented by a cross. Choose Hide if the nominal points are visible but you want to hide them.
Show/Hide Vectors
Choose this command to view the individual nominal vectors. This is an easy way of checking the directions of the vectors. Choose Hide if the tolerances are visible but you want to hide them.
Act-Points Show/Mask Out

Choose this command to view the individual measured points. Each point is represented by a cross. This command is not available until after the curve has been measured. Choose Hide if the nominal points are visible but you want to hide them.
Show/Hide Act Curve

Choose this command to view the measured curve. The curve is displayed as a continuous line. This command is not available until after the curve has been measured. Choose Hide if the curve is visible but you want to hide it.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15-31
Show/Hide Deviations
Choose this command to view the calculated deviations between nominal and actual points. This command is not available until after the curve has been measured. Choose Hide if the deviations are visible but you want to hide them.
Show/Hide Tolerance Lines

Choose this command to view the tolerance lines of the curve. These lines are displayed along with the curve. Choose Hide if the deviations are visible but you want to hide them.
Show Point Numbers

Choose this commend to view the point numbers. Choose Hide if the point numbers are visible but you want to hide them.
2D View
Choose this command if you want to view the curves plane (2D curves only).
Scaling
Choose this option when you want to see the curve heightened. When you highlight the Curve Magnification command and keep the mouse button pressed, you can select the factor of magnification.
15-32
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
The Measuring Strategy for the Curve

There is no difference in layout between the Strategy window for the curve and the Strategy window for the other features (see Defining a Measurement Strategy on page 5-62). The only difference is in the point list, which has an extended function in itself and in connection with creating segments. Consequently it is described separately for the curve option.
Options for Displaying Points

As this illustration shows, the point list of a curve contains more functions in the Group section.
Each nominal point of the curve is listed with its point number and its X,Y and Z coordinates. You can use the Normal Vector, Actual Point and Deviation buttons to decide which additional information will be listed. Normal Vector: Each nominal point is listed with the direction components of its normal vector.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15-33
Actual Points: Each nominal point is compared with the calculated actual point. If no actual points have been measured, the actual points are represented by zero. Deviation: Each nominal point is listed together with the deviation of the actual points in the direction of the normal vector and its direction component. New segment: See How to Divide a Curve into Segments on page 15-39. The other elements of the point list correspond to the description in The Points List on page 5-64.
How to Work with the Point List

You can view the points of a curve in the points list and process them. The tasks you can undertake in the points list are as follows: Divide the curve into segments (see How to Divide a Curve into Segments on page 15-39). Select display options for points (see Options for Displaying Points on page 15-33). Save and print the point list (see How to Save and Print the Point List on page 15-36). The point list has to be open if you want to use any of these functions.
15-34
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
How to open the point list: 1 Open the curve feature definition template. 2 Click on the Strategy button. The Strategy dialog box appears on the screen.
3 Click on the Points List button. The list will show all points defined in the measuring element curve.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15-35
How to Save and Print the Point List

To save or print the point list: How to open the point list: 1 Open the curve feature definition template. 2 Click on the Strategy button. 3 Click on the Point List button. The Point List dialog box appears on the screen.
4 Click on the button with the printer icon to print the point list. The list is sent to your printer. 5 Click on the button with the diskette icon to save the point list. A dialog box opens and you can define the parameters and format for saving the list.
Activate the check boxes to define the data to be saved in the point list.
15-36
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Activate the VDA File check box if you want to save the point list as a VDA file. The list is saved as an ASCII file if this check box is not activated. Click on OK to save. 6 Click on OK. The point list closes.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15-37
Scanning a Known Contour

Curves are scanned along the segments of a curve whose points were defined beforehand in the feature. The procedure for defining the scanning method for curves differs slightly from that of the other scans. You must begin by defining the parts (segments) of the curve you want to scan. Defining a scanning method is a three-step procedure: Check the parameters for the scanning method (see Scanning Methods for Curves on page 15-38). The parameters for scanning were defined beforehand when the segments were defined. Define a segment (see How to Divide a Curve into Segments on page 15-39). Define the general settings (see General Settings for the Path Generation Method on page 5-70). These settings are the same in all scanning methods.
Scanning Methods for Curves

The scanning method for curves employs nominal values and segments, but points can also be interpolated between the nominal points. You can also define and represent the entire curve as a single segment.
Segments of a curve
You can measure a segment automatically with a CMM that has CNC capability. You can divide any curve into any number of segments and assign tolerances to each segment. A segment contains any number of points on an existing curve: These points can be selected as sequential points, adjacent points, or freely selected points from the list of points. A segment always has a defined start point and a defined end point. A given point can be used in the definition of different segments.
Pre-/Post-scanning
The following problems can arise at the beginning and at the end of the measuring path in the case of curve measurement and curve evaluation: The controller must adjust accordingly. The calculation of the spline functions and the corresponding vectors is difficult at the open ends of a curve.
15-38
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
To reduce the effects of these problems, you can define a pre-/postscan in the file curveparameter.txt. This file can be found in the directory Calypso\home\om\. The relevant parameter is called distExtraPolScan; it is set to 0 as standard.
Entry box for scanning curves
The dialog box for scanning of curves is shown below.
How to Divide a Curve into Segments

The Strategy window offers you two ways of defining a segment of an existing curve: Specify start point and end point (consecutive points) Specify individual points (free choice)
Consecutive points
To define a segment from consecutive points: 1 Click on the button of the curve-segment scanning method. A new (as yet undefined) segment is added to the technology list.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15-39
2 Mark the new segment, right-click and select Edit from the shortcut menu. The Segment dialog box appears on the screen.
3 Enter start point, end point and segment name, and click OK to confirm. The segment appears in the technology list.
Freely selectable points
To define a segment from freely selectable points: 1 Click on the Point List button. You will see the point list in which you define segments. 2 To select adjacent points for a segment: Click on the point with which the segment should start. Push down and hold the shift-key and click on the ending point.
15-40
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
All points between the first and the last point you have clicked on are marked with an arrow.
3 To freely select distributed points for a segment: Click on the point in the first column with which the segment should start. Press and hold the Ctrl key and click on all other points that the segment should include. All points you have clicked on are marked with an arrow.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15-41
4 Click on the Create Segment button. This opens the Segment Definition window.
5 Change the name of the segment if the suggested name is not suitable. 6 If you want to define a tolerance for the segment, enter the values in the fields Upper and/or Lower Tolerance. 7 Click on OK to close the definition of the segment. The segment is automatically added to the strategy list.
15-42
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Defining Curve Form Characteristics

For curves, too, you can define the features for tolerance in the definition template of the curve (see Defining Tolerances for a Curve on page 15-26). Curve Form is another feature you can use for measuring the curve. This feature enables you to measure the shape of the entire curve or individual curve segments. The basics of defining Curve Form characteristics are common to the other characteristics recognized by Calypso. If you are not familiar with defining characteristics, refer to Defining Characteristics on page 6-7.
About the Curve Form Template

Whenever you define a Curve Form characteristic, the following template is displayed. To open the definition template: Select Form and Location Curve Form.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15-43
The following table describes the buttons and fields that are not common to other characteristics: Element Curve jump tolerance Function The curve jump tolerance is checked when this check box is activated. The curve jump tolerance indicates the amount by which the curve form may deviate within a reference distance. It is generally independent of the curve form tolerance. In Calypso, the curve jump tolerance is always measured between two neighboring points. The curve is out of tolerance if the difference between the deviations of the two actual points from the respective nominal point is greater than the specified value. Shows the maximum deviation in the positive direction of the normal vector (too much material). Shows the maximum deviation in the negative direction of the normal vector (too little material). Shows the difference range between upper and lower deviation.
Deviation upper Deviation lower Range
15-44
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
How to Define Tolerance for Segments Separately

After defining individual curve segments you can also assign them separate tolerances with the curve form characteristic. Proceed as follows: 1 Define a feature for the characteristic as you have done with other characteristics. When you have correctly defined the feature, the following chart for the segments appears in the definition template of the characteristic.
The chart contains all defined segments. 2 Select the desired segment by clicking into the left column of the relevant line. An arrow appears in this column. 3 In the same line, enter the tolerances in the Upper Tol. and/or Lower Tol. fields. 4 Click on OK. The settings are saved and the definition template is closed.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15-45
Working with the Results of Curve Measurement

After measurement, the actual values are displayed in the actuals fields of the curve definition template. In contrast to most other definition templates, the curve template enables you to perform additional operations with the results. You have the following options for evaluating measuring results: Calculation and display of deviations Optimization of coordinate system with best-fit alignment. Fit actual values to nominal values. Define or restrict the alignment. Determining a reference curve. Specifying search distances. Smoothing the curve display. Sorting the measured points. Excluding measured points from the evaluation. Eliminating outliers.
Basics about Curve Deviations

Deviation in Nominal Vector Direction
Deviation in nominal vector direction is measured in the direction of the normal vector at each nominal point.
Deviation in Actual Vector Direction

Deviation in the actual vector direction is calculated from each actual point along the normal of the corresponding nominal point on the nominal curve.
Space Point Evaluation (2D Curves Only)

Calculating deviation with space point evaluation employs the curve functionality to determine the point on the measured spline (before radius adjustment) in the nominal vector direction. The point obtained in this way is radius-adjusted in the same way as the Space Point feature.
15-46
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Deviation in Grid Coordinates (2D Curves only)

This deviation is the distance between the actual points and the nominal points in grid direction, where the direction of the normal vectors is defined.
Radial Deviation (2D Curves only)

The deviation is calculated in the radial direction towards a point of reference of a reference element as the distance from the nominal points.
nominal curve
Fn
Fn
Fn
actual curve measured curve reference point
How to Calculate the Deviations of a Curve

The deviation between the measured and specified values for a curve can be calculated in a number of ways (see Basics about Curve Deviations on page 15-46). To calculate deviation: 1 Open the definition template of the curve. 2 Select the mode of calculation you want from the Nominal to Actuals picklist. Calculation will be carried out immediately if there already are actual values. If not, calculation will commence as soon as actual values are available.
How to Display Deviations

The actual values refer to the workpiece coordinate system. When dealing with a curve, however, the deviation in the coordinates X,Y and Z between the nominal and the actual values can be of greater interest. To obtain this deviation: 1 Open the definition template of the curve. 2 Activate the Deviation check box.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15-47
The actual values on the right side of the definition template now refer to the nominal data of the curve.
How to Optimize the Coordinate System with Best-Fit Alignment

Inaccurate coordinate systems produce inaccurate measured values. This, in turn, means incorrect form errors following a nominal/as-is comparison. To eliminate this positional offset, Calypso automatically performs best-fit for standard geometric features when it measures form characteristics. You have the option of defining automatic best-fit following every measuring run. Calypso can also correct the current coordinate system by applying the rotational and translational components of the best-fit result. To optimize measurement of form characteristics: 1 Open the definition template of the curve. 2 Click on the Evaluation picklist.
15-48
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
3 Select Best Fit Coordinate System from the picklist. Calypso will create a coordinate system. You can see the Best Fit window in which Calypso shows the translation and rotation of the element coordinate system with reference to the part alignment.
4 If you want to change the shown values, click in the relevant field and enter the values of your choice. 5 Click on Accept to accept the local element coordinate system. The Enter Name dialog box appears on the screen. 6 Enter a name for the local element coordinate system. 7 Click on OK to close the dialog box.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15-49
How to Calculate the Curve's Center of Mass

With the center of mass the location of the curve is evaluated. The coordinates of this point can be displayed. To show the center of mass: 1 Make sure you have the curve feature template open and displayed on your screen. 2 Click on the box in front of Center of mass to place a checkmark. The coordinates of the center of mass are displayed in the nominals and actuals fields in the middle of the template. The center of mass is also displayed in the CAD window.
How to Obtain a Best Fit

What is understood as best fit is the mathematical separation of form and location. You may use best fit to make a mathematical correction of the positive deviation referring to the applicable nominal curve. The actual values of the curve are shifted and/or rotated until the sum of the deviation squares reaches a minimum (Gaussian best fit). This operation leaves only the curve's form deviation. To obtain a best fit: 1 Make sure you have the curve feature template open and displayed on your screen. 2 Activate the Best Fit check box. Calypso performs the fit, without changing the form. All coordinate transformations are usually employed to fit the measured curve to the nominal curve. You can restrict or specify the fit if you want to exclude certain transformations (see How to Define a Best-Fit Alignment of a Curve on page 15-50).
How to Define a Best-Fit Alignment of a Curve

When you activate the Best Fit check box to have the curve aligned, Calypso separates form deviations from positional deviations for the purposes of computation. For this purpose, only the LSQ Best Fit (3D alignment) is used.
15-50
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
You have several options to influence this alignment: You have the option of restricting the alignment for certain movements: you can prevent translation toward or rotation about axes of your choice. This restriction applies to best fit of the measured curve to the nominal curve and to best fit of a coordinate system. You can determine that certain points are not taken into account during the alignment by masking them. The masked points are also not shown in the representation in the CAD window. For the alignment, the medium deviation between actual and nominal is minimized. Here, every curve point is compared with a calculated curve section (a section connects two neighboring points). This can take a long time if the curve has a lot of sections. Usually, it is quite sufficient to compare some sections near the point. You can enter the size of the area that is to be considered. To define the alignment: 1 Open the definition template of the curve. 2 Click on the Evaluation picklist and select the command Best Fit. The Best Fit dialog box appears on the screen.
3 Under Translation and Rotation, deactivate the check boxes where you do not want to permit the respective movement during the alignment. All the check boxes are activated by default.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15-51
4 Under Masking points and under the list of points, click on the button Use nominal data or Use actual data, to load the required data into the list. 5 Under Masking points, click on the points which you wish to mask and so which will not be taken into account during the alignment. Another click will cancel the selection. You can also click on the list of points with the right mouse button and select a rule for the use of points:
NOTE
hss
If you have used the SHIFT or CTRL key for multiple selections, you can refresh the display in the CAD window by clicking on Update graphic. 6 Under Max. Search Distance, enter the area to be considered in the field For Best Fit in millimeters or click on Default, if you wish to use the standard Calypso value. This default is derived from the doubled sum of tolerance and probe radius. 7 Click on OK to apply the definition. The alignment of the coordinate system or of the curve feature into the nominal feature is then only possible in the authorized directions, with the specified points and in the entered search distance.
How to Define a Reference Curve

With Calypso you can add the deviation of a measured curve C1 (the reference curve) to a curve C2. In this way you can determine the second curve if the same curves reoccur in different places on the workpiece. To determine a reference curve: 1 Open the definition template of the curve to which the deviation of a reference curve should be added.
15-52
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
2 Click on the Evaluation picklist and select the command Move Parallelcurve. You can see the window Reference Feature in which all defined curves are listed.
3 Highlight the name of the curve you want to use as a reference curve. 4 Click on the OK button. Calypso will convert the deviation of the reference curve to the current curve immediately.
How to Limit Search Distances during Curve Evaluation

Distance evaluation
Depending on the form of the curve, there may be several intersection points between the splines and normals in the case of distance evaluation. This may affect the computing time.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15-53
To prevent this, you can define the maximum permissible length of the distance from the actual pint to the curve. 1 In the definition template of the curve, click on the Evaluation picklist and select the item Max. Search Distance. A window opens in which you can see the maximum search distance.
2 Under For Distance Evaluation, enter the maximum distance which will presumably suffice in millimeters or click on Default, if you wish to use the standard Calypso value. 3 Click OK to save your entry and close the dialog box. The search distances are taken into account the next time the curve is calculated.
Smoothing a Curve
In order to display a curve in a CAD window, Calypso lays spline functions through the nominal points of the curve. As a result, all nominal points will lie on the curve that is calculated in this manner. In the case of some default values (e. g. when measured actual values are used as nominal values) the presentation of the curve may well be relatively rough. This can, if necessary, be smoothened. While doing so, the spline functions are only set in the close proximity of the points and do not actually pass through the individual points. The degree of approximation or smoothing can be defined with a number between 0 and 1: If 0 is selected, the splines nestle up to all points so that no distinction can be made to other methods. 1, on the other hand, will produce the maximum smoothening of the curve.
15-54
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
1 In the definition template of the curve, click on the Evaluation picklist. 2 Select the item Approximation from the selection list. The Approximation window for entering the approximation parameter will be displayed.
3 Select whether you wish to smoothen the presentation of the calculated curve or the nominal curve. 4 Activate the check box cnc if you wish all the curves in the measurement plan that have been measured to date to be smoothened in accordance with the entries below. 5 Enter a Smooth Factor between 0 and 1 by dragging the slider with the mouse. To check the result, click on the Simulation button the result will immediately be displayed in the CAD window. 6 If necessary, select a method for redefining the curve points under Grid. If you select Keep number of points, the number of points of the default curve will also apply for the newly calculated curves. 7 Click OK to save your entry and close the dialog box. The curve will be recalculated in accordance with your entries. The new nominal curve will be determined on the basis of the calculated values and displayed in the CAD window.
!
hss
Caution As soon as you confirm with OK, you will regenerate the nominal points of the curve. The original curve can not be recreated again. For this reason, it is important that you use the Simulation function to check the result beforehand.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15-55
Sorting the Points in a Curve

When scanning with a high point density or in positions which display a high degree of curvature, it may well be that measured points are not transferred in the right sequence. Normally, this is of no great significance. This is, however, significant when you are measuring curves as the sequence of the points influence the form of the curve. Calypso therefore, sorts the points in a meaningful manner. On the other hand, there may also be curves that actually contain a sharp bend and, consequently, should not be sorted: Sorting curves such as these would alter the form of the curve in a manner not required (see example). For this reason, you can control sorting using an Angle limit. Here, an angle is determined on the basis of the last three points that were calculated (Points 1 to 3 in the example). The points will only be sorted if the calculated angle is smaller than the angle limit. Example: The run of a curve contains a bend.
Bend in curve
3 Curv
The angle of this bend is less than 50. If you set the limit to 50, point 2 will automatically be interchanged with point 3 although this is not required here. The curve would then look as follows:
1 2
In this case, you will have to enter a limit that is less than the angle of the bend, i.e. approx. 45. 1 In the definition template of the curve, click on the Evaluation picklist.
15-56
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
2 Select the item Sort measured points from the selection list. The Approximation window for entering the angle limit will be displayed.
3 Enter the maximum angle that should be accepted or click on the Default button to enter the Calypso default value. If greater angles occur in the curve, the appropriate points will be sorted. 4 Activate the check box cnc if you wish all the curves in the measurement plan that have been measured to date to be smoothened in accordance with the entries. To check the result, click on the Simulation button the result will immediately be displayed in the CAD window. 5 Click OK to save your entry and close the dialog box. The curve will be sorted in accordance with your entries. The new nominal curve will be determined on the basis of the new sequence and displayed in the CAD window.
Limiting the Evaluation of the Curve Values

The following problems can arise at the beginning and at the end of the measuring path in the case of curve measurement and curve evaluation: The controller will have to readjust to the correct nominal path. The calculation of the spline functions and the corresponding vectors is difficult at the open ends of a curve: A slight deviation here has a much greater effect here that in other positions. To reduce the effects of these problems, you can limit the number of points that should be used for the evaluation. A distinction must be made here between basing the calculation on the nominal points on the measuring spline or the measured points on the nominal spline:
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15-57
When evaluating in the nominal vector direction all measured points will be considered. The limitation only applies to the nominal points. When evaluating in the actual vector direction, all nominal points will always be used. Here, the limitation only applies to the actual points. The number of considered points can be limited in the following manner: 1 In the definition template of the curve, click on the Evaluation picklist. 2 Select the item Limit evaluation from the selection list. The Limit evaluation window will appear.
3 Enter the number of points which should not be considered at the start and at the end of the curve in the case of the nominal points and the actual points. 4 Click OK to save your entry and close the dialog box. During the evaluation, a correspondingly fewer number of points will be considered at the start and at the end of the curve.
How to Eliminate Outliers from a Curve

Outliers are geometric points that differ significantly from the geometric form yielded by the other measured points and as such, they can produce a large error when the computed feature is calculated. An error of this nature easily propagates through the actual-value determination of the corresponding characteristic. There are several different points at which you can parameterize and activate outlier elimination for curves:
15-58
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
As defaults for the characteristic groups and the references and alignment elements of the coordinate systems For an individual characteristic For an individual curve feature. This is how to activate outlier elimination in a feature: 1 In the definition template of the curve, click on the Evaluation picklist. 2 Select the item Outlier from the selection list. The Evaluation window will appear. 3 Activate the check box Outlier Elimination and click on the Settings button. 4 In the Outlier Mode dialog box, enter the Factor for Outlier and the Range of Data Reduction and confirm with OK. 5 Click OK to save your entry and close the Evaluation dialog box. During the calculation, the outlier measuring values which fall under the specified criteria are not taken into account.
How to Format the Printout for the Curve

Calypso enables you to map the curve exactly into your printout. The procedure is as follows: 1 Make sure you have the curve feature template open and displayed on your screen. 2 Adjust the curve in the CAD window until it is displayed exactly as you want it in the printout. Use the CAD buttons (see The Buttons in the CAD Window on page 3-4) and/or the commands in the CAD shortcut menu (see The Commands in the Shortcut Menu for Curves on page 15-31) to display the curve exactly as you want it in the printout. When you are ready, click OK in the curve definition template.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
15-59
Graphical Evaluation of Form Deviations for Curves

The formplots available for the curve characteristic are as follows: Curve form linear Curve form 2D Multiple curve form linear Multi-Curve form 2D You call up formplots and display them as described in the section entitled How to Display Variations Graphically on page 9-23. The illustration below shows the Curve form 2D formplot by way of example.
15-60
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
16
16 Qualifying the RDS with CAA (Option) .................................................................................................................................
If you have the RDS-CAA option (Computer Aided Accuracy), you can determine the probe data for all angular positions of an RDS in a single operation, using no more than a small number of probings. Only a few angular settings are actually qualified physically. The data for the other positions is derived using a mathematical model (calculated qualification). As a consequence, the qualification procedure is completed much more quickly and all physically possible angular positions of the RDS are subsequently available for probing the workpiece. Subsequent requalification, too, is faster. The RDS-CAA option is available for both Calypso and CMM-OS. The procedure for both programs is described in this documentation.
Chapter

Basics of RDS-CAA Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2 Qualification of the RDS on the CMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4 Qualifying Probes with RDS-CAA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
16-1
Basics of RDS-CAA Qualification

Given the stepping adjustment of 2.5 degrees, a stylus on the RDS can, in theory adopt 20,736 positions, but, depending on the device geometry, not all of these are physically possible. Without RDS-CAA each position is considered as an individual stylus, which must also be qualified. Conventional qualification has generally been restricted to qualifying a subset of the RDS positions. Calypso/CMM-OS supports this procedure for the RDS with a qualification table in which each of the required positions is entered as a stylus with its own name. If you use the RDS-CAA option, however, you can determine the probe data for all possible angular positions of an RDS with just a small number of probings. Only a few angular settings are actually qualified physically: the values for the other positions are computed using a mathematical model. As a consequence, the qualification procedure is completed much more quickly and all angular positions of the RDS are subsequently available for probing the workpiece. Subsequent requalification, too, is faster.
Three- or four-step procedure
Qualification is a three- or four-step procedure: Qualification of the RDS by Zeiss (factory qualification) Factory qualification involves generating correction files for each individual RDS: these files are a prerequisite for subsequent, computed qualification. The correction files are installed on your system together with the RDS-CAA option. Fitting qualification on the CMM After the RDS is mounted on the CMM, this qualification determines and saves the position of the RDS within the device's coordinate system. Stylus qualification in twelve positions per main stylus (this is the stylus in the direction of the quill). Finally, the required probe and its stylus are inserted into the RDS and qualified in a few positions. Calypso/CMM-OS then calculates the correction values for all of the remaining positions. If the probe has only one stylus, this completes qualification of the RDS.
16-2
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Basics of RDS-CAA Qualification
Qualification of remaining styli on the probe (star probes) If a probe carries multiple styli (star probe), each of the remaining styli is then qualified in four positions. Calypso/CMM-OS calculates the correction values for all the positions of the remaining styli, and this completes qualification of the RDS.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
16-3
Qualification of the RDS on the CMM

After the RDS is mounted on the CMM, this qualification must be performed to determine its position in reference to the device's coordinate system. This is a prerequisite for qualifying the scanning probes and styli on the RDS. This qualification need only be done once for the RDS. The probes and styli used with the RDS can then each be qualified without requalifying the installed RDS every time.
Establishing the Preconditions for Qualification of the RDS on the CMM

Your RDS has been qualified at the factory. In this case, the requisite correction files for the RDS are available.
Reference sphere is defined
A further prerequisite is that the reference sphere is defined. Make sure that Calypso/CMM-OS knows the position of the reference sphere and that the shaft of the sphere points in the direction of 45/45 angular position of the RDS. For a bridge CMM, this is the position with a 135 angle of inclination and a 315 angle of rotation. For a horizontal-arm CMM it is the position with a 135 angle of inclination and a 45 angle of rotation for column 1 and the position with a 135 angle of inclination and a 315 angle of rotation for column 2. If one of the conditions is not met (if the reference sphere's shaft points in a different direction or its position is not known), you must requalify the reference sphere (see Determining the Reference Sphere Position on page 4-24).
The reference probe is inserted
Fitting qualification (RDS on CMM) must be performed with the reference probe. This must be an RST, without extension, with a 40 mm long stylus. (If your reference probe does not meet this requirement, you must first make a reference probe of an RST, without extension, with a 40 mm long stylus.) Select Extras Workroom CMM, go to the Reference Probe tab and make sure that all the requisite parameters have been set. The procedure for installing the CMM's reference probe in the RDS is described in How to Install a Probe on page 4-11.
16-4
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Qualification of the RDS on the CMM
How to Perform Fitting Qualification

You must open a measurement plan before you start fitting qualification in Calypso. To perform fitting qualification: 1 In Calypso click on the Probe button in the prerequisites list. - or In CMM-OS select Probe Stylus Qualification. The Probe Qualification Window dialog box appears on the screen. You will find detailed information on this dialog box in Probe Qualification Window in the Calypso Online Help. 2 If it is not already displayed, select the name of the reference probe from the Probe name selection list. The stylus name and No. (the reference probe possesses only one stylus) are shown in the Stylus name / Number picklist. Under Sphere coverage, 180 is selected. 3 From the Qualification Mode picklist, select Six Points.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
16-5
4 Click on the RDS Fitting Position button. The label on this button changes, depending on the situation: the default label is Probe definition. 5 After you are prompted, move the stylus in towards the reference sphere and probe the sphere with the stylus perpendicular to the contact point on the sphere. (If your stylus is vertical, therefore, position it over the north pole of the sphere and probe once vertically downwards.) In accordance with the selected mode, Calypso/CMM-OS automatically proceeds with qualification, performing probing operations in 12 positions to determine to a high degree of precision the fitted position of the RDS, which it then saves. The results are displayed in the R, S, X, Y and Z fields. 6 Click on OK to return to the User Desk. The position of the RDS has now been successfully determined and you can begin with qualification of the individual styli.
16-6
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Qualifying Probes with RDS-CAA

Even with the RDS-CAA option, the basic procedure for using probes remains the same: When you create a measurement plan, you must always make certain that you have installed the correct probe and that it is qualified. In qualifying a probe, you indicate which probe you are using and then initiate a routine in which the probe measures the reference sphere. (In Calypso the Probe button turns green, if this has already been performed for the displayed probe.) Only a few angular settings are actually qualified physically with RDSCAA, however: the values for all other positions are then computed and are available for measurement.
General Information about Qualification

The probe must be qualified if: If you have installed a new probe that has not been qualified. If you want to requalify a probe that is already installed, for example after a collision or due to thermal changes. To qualify a stylus, instruct Calypso/CMM-OS to use this stylus to probe the reference sphere, mounted on the measurement table, in a special manner (which will be explained in greater detail later). With RDS-CAA, the probe data will be determined automatically for all angular positions of the RDS.
Defining Probes and Styli

In Calypso/CMM-OS, each probe and stylus is given its own name. Styli are also assigned numbers. Calypso/CMM-OS uses the names and numbers to identify the probe and stylus and when saving their data. Consequently, each stylus has to be defined. You cannot qualify the angular positions of a stylus with RDS-CAA until the stylus has been defined. In most cases, a probe has only one stylus. Star probes, as the name suggests, have more than one stylus.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
16-7
How to Define a New Probe for RDS-CAA

To define a new probe: 1 In Calypso click on the Probe button in the prerequisites list. - or In CMM-OS select Probe Stylus Qualification. The Qualification dialog box appears on the screen. You will find detailed information on this dialog box in Probe Qualification Window in the Calypso Online Help. 2 Click on the Define New Probe Name button. The Create new Stylus dialog box appears on the screen.
3 Enter the names for the new probe and the first stylus. Calypso does not distinguish between uppercase and lowercase characters. 4 Tick the RDSCAA check box. 5 Click OK to close the dialog box. The name of the probe and the first stylus are displayed in the Probe name and Stylus name / Number picklists. If the probe has other styli, you now have to add them in Calypso (see How to Add Styli to a Probe on page 16-8).
How to Add Styli to a Probe

If a probe has more than one stylus, Calypso/CMM-OS must be informed of the other styli. After defining a new probe or modifying an existing probe, therefore, you must add the additional styli, if any, and qualify them.
16-8
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
To add a stylus: 1 In Calypso click on the Probe button in the prerequisites list. - or In CMM-OS select Probe Stylus Qualification. The Qualification dialog box appears on the screen. You will find detailed information on this dialog box in Probe Qualification Window in the Calypso Online Help. 2 Click on the Define New Probe Name button. The Create new Stylus window will open.
Under Stylus Number, the next higher number will be displayed automatically. 3 Enter a name for the new stylus in the Stylus field. Calypso does not distinguish between uppercase and lowercase characters. 4 In the Stylus Number field select the number of the stylus. 5 Click OK to close the dialog box. The name of the stylus will now appear in the selection list Stylus name / Number. 6 If you wish to add another stylus, repeat steps 2 through 5. The next step is to qualify each stylus in turn (see Qualifying Probes and Styli with RDS-CAA on page 16-10), and bear in mind that you must proceed in a certain sequence: beginning with the first stylus (the main stylus), and then continuing with the other (star styli).
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
16-9
Qualifying Probes and Styli with RDS-CAA

Qualification of a probe's first stylus is not the same as qualification of the probe's other styli, if any. The first (and possibly the only) stylus is qualified in 12 physical angular positions.
NOTE
hss
The direction of this stylus must match the direction of the quill. Each additional stylus for this probe is qualified in four physical angular positions.
How to Qualify the First Stylus with RDS-CAA

We assume that the probe to be qualified is mounted and that all of its styli are known to Calypso/CMM-OS. To qualify the first stylus (the main stylus, parallel to the quill) of a probe with RDS-CAA: 1 In Calypso click on the Probe button in the prerequisites list. or In CMM-OS select Probe Stylus Qualification. The Probe Qualification Window dialog box appears on the screen. You will find detailed information on this dialog box in Probe Qualification Window in the Calypso Online Help.
2 Select the name of the probe from the Probe name picklist if it is not already shown.
16-10
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
3 Select the name of the stylus to be qualified first from the Stylus name / Number picklist. In the Qualification mode picklist, select the Standard mode. 4 If the styli you use are very short, reduce the value for Taper accordingly. The smaller the taper, the smaller is the section of the surface of the sphere which is probed for qualification. 5 Click on the Probe definition button. Stylus qualification now begins using the 12 angular positions set by RDS-CAA. To start the process you must perform the first probing manually. 6 When prompted, move the stylus in the RDS 0/0 position over the north pole of the reference sphere and then probe the sphere with the stylus perpendicular to the contact point on the sphere. Calypso checks the position of the reference sphere and the length of the stylus (roughly). Afterwards the 12 positions are automatically selected and qualified. The value entered in Sphere coverage is taken into account as a maximum value in the selection of the positions and probing operations. The results are shown in the R, S, X, Y and Z fields (see About the Results of Stylus Qualification on page 4-24). Under the heading Qualification results, you will now see the symbol for a successful stylus qualification and below that the identifier RDS-CAA.
How to Qualify Additional Styli with RDS-CAA

If you want to qualify other styli for this probe (as is the case with star probes), you can do so immediately after qualifying the main stylus. Each additional stylus is measured in four RDS positions in order to achieve the best possible precision. Each of these measurements can either be performed manually or semiautomatically. Requirement: The Probe Qualification dialog box is open and the first stylus of the probe has already been qualified. To qualify the other styli of a probe with RDS-CAA: 1 Select the name of the stylus to be qualified next from the Stylus name / Number picklist.
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
16-11
2 Click on the Probe definition button. This is not the main stylus, so the dialog box shown here is displayed:
3 Select one of two RDS positions under RDS Position (1 to 4). 4 If you wish to estimate which position is more suitable: Click on the Show button. The RDS rotates to the corresponding position. 5 Select the probing mode under Mode: Standard semiautomatic qualification: first probing is manual, all others automatic, Manual manual qualification. 6 Click on OK to start qualification. Calypso/CMM-OS steps you through the rest of the procedure. 7 Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each additional stylus. 8 Click on OK to confirm your entries and close the Probe Qualification dialog.
NOTE
hss
If you do not confirm by clicking on the OK button, all unsaved data from the stylus qualification is lost. It is advisable to close the Probe Qualification dialog box from time to time during the process by clicking on OK, so as to save intermediate states. Calypso/CMM-OS returns to the User Desk. The styli have been successfully qualified. In Calypso the Probe button is now green.
Qualification log
Calypso/CMM-OS generates a log, which you can either print out or save as an ASCII file. The probe and its styli that were qualified together with the RDS can now be used by every user in every RDS position.
16-12
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Index
0-9
3D best fit 4-53 3D curve 5-29 selecting a measuring configuration 12-25 user privileges 12-6 average 6-38 average value construction 5-56 axial runout 6-40
A
add styli 4-15 addToFile 14-54 administrate Auto-Run 12-20 alignment 3D best fit 4-53 delete 6-14 load 6-13 save 6-13 angle 6-40 angle of tilt 6-37 angle point 5-35 angularity 6-40 area specification, recall points 5-41 arithmetic operators (reference) 14-49 arrays 14-48 ASCII files (curve) 9-29 ASCII parameter file (example) 14-46 asynchronous mode 10-2 audiovisual information 7-51 automatic measurement 5-68 automatic probe change 7-49 Auto-Run administrating 12-20 basics 12-2 branches 12-5 CNC parameters 12-17 configuring 12-6 creating branches 12-12 define list of characteristics 12-26 defining desks 12-9 defining sequence 12-19 desks 12-4 end of measurement 12-27 for users 12-23 loading interface 12-24 mapping pallet 12-12 measurement plan icon 12-3 monitoring measuring runs 12-27 pallets 12-5 placing bitmaps on icons 12-11 positioning measurement plan 12-10 preparing for measurement 12-17
B
base alignment adapting in an iterative process with abortion condition (example) 439 basics 4-31 create new 4-34 editing 4-41 loading 4-33 moving 4-43 offsetting 4-43 rotating by distances 4-45 setting 4-30 updating 4-37 baseSystem 14-57 basic concept 1-7 basics Auto-Run 12-2 characteristics 6-2 clearance planes/clearance groups 723 computed alignment 4-31 curve measurement 15-2 probe routes 7-22 probing 5-15 retract planes 7-25 Best Fit 3D best fit (alignment) 4-53 best fit as circumscribed/inscribed feature 65 as tangential feature 6-5 Gaussian 6-5 Tschebyscheff 6-5 best fit of bore pattern 6-43 bore pattern best fit 6-43
C
CAD file, importing 5-6 CAD window 3-1 Calypso starting 1-3
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Index
Calypso User Desk 1-5 canceling measurement plan run 8-13 Cartesian 6-40 change probe assignment 7-50 changing point list 5-64 changing the point list 5-64 characteristic copying properties 6-33 characteristic data constant 9-36 characteristic, details angle of tilt 6-37 characteristics assigning to multiple features 6-18 basics 6-2 best fit methods 6-3 calculation 6-3 color-coding 6-33 copying 7-8 defining 6-7 definition templates 6-8 deleting 7-11 grouping 7-13 moving 7-8 nominals 6-19 rechecking (example) 14-38 renaming 7-13 searching 7-14 tolerances 6-19 ungrouping 7-13 characteristics, details angle 6-40 angularity 6-40 average 6-38 axial runout 6-40 cartesian 6-40 coaxiality 6-39 concentricity 6-39 cone angle 6-37 curve form 6-39 cylinder form 6-38 diameter 6-35 diameter2 6-38 distance 6-37 distance_symmetry point 6-37 feature angle 6-37 flatness 6-38 form 6-39 half cone angle 6-37 length 6-38 length of axis 6-36 parallelism 6-39
polar 2D 6-40 polarposition angle 6-36 polarposition height 6-36 polarposition radius 6-36 position 6-39 profile 6-39 projection angle one 6-36 projection angle two 6-37 radial runout 6-40 radius 6-36 radius 2 6-38 radius measurement 6-36 rotation angle 6-37 roundness 6-38 space point distance 6-37 squareness 6-39 straightness 6-38 symmetry 6-39 width 6-38 X value 6-35 Y value 6-35 Z value 6-35 characteristics, tasks, details on 6-35 characterization file 13-3 checking wall thickness 6-42 circle 5-17 clearance distance 7-31 copying to other features 5-12 clearance groups assigning 7-28 defining 7-26 retract plane in 7-30 clearance plane copying to other features 5-12 clearance planes 1-8 assigning 7-28 closer to workpiece 7-31 clearing after collision 8-13 clearing the CMM 8-13 CMM movement commands (PCM) 14-58 CNC run structure 14-7 starting run 8-8 CNC parameters Auto-Run 12-17 cncBreak 14-59 coaxiality 6-39 collision reaction following ~ 8-13 special aspects with RDS 8-13 color coding Prerequisites 4-6 color-coding characteristics 6-33 features 5-13
Index
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
compact printout 9-3 compact protocol 9-5 comparative operators (reference) 14-49 computed alignment basics 4-31 concentricity 6-39 conditions reference 14-60, 14-61 setting 14-19 cone 5-27 cone addition (construction) 5-57 cone addition construction 5-57 cone angle 6-37 cone angle, half 6-37 configure Auto-Run 12-6 constant characteristic data 9-36 construction edge point 5-56 maximum coordinate 5-59 maximum result 5-59 minimum coordinate 5-59 minimum result 5-60 plane with offset 5-60 constructions 5-39 intersection 5-42 coordinate system copying to other features 5-12 parameterizing (example) 14-40 setting 4-30 copy characteristics 6-18, 7-8 feature 7-8 icon 12-22 measurement plans 7-3 result file 9-31 copying ISO286 6-32 copying lower tolerance 6-32 copying tolerance class 6-32 copying upper tolerance 6-32 coupling measuring ranges (duplex mode) 10-5 current selection 8-2 curve 5-29 ~ characteristic, defining 15-43 defining using function (example) 1438 loading parameters (example) 14-37 curve (3D) 5-29 curve form 6-39 curve jump tolerance 15-44 curve measurement 15-1 3D curve 15-3 basics 15-2 flat curves 15-2
spatial curves 15-3 curve measuring changing normal vectors 15-21 checking clearance planes 15-25 defining nominal data 15-7 defining the curve feature 15-5 deviation in actual vector direction 15-46 deviation in grid coordinates 15-47 deviation in nominal vector direction 15-46 deviation lower 15-44 deviation upper 15-44 digitizing 15-10 digitizing 3D curve in area 15-15 digitizing 3D curves 15-14 editing nominals 15-22 entering nominal data manually 1519 face curve, definition 15-3 formatting printout 15-59 import ASCII file 15-7 importing nominal data from file 158 lift curve,definition 15-3 load VDA file selectively 15-9 measuring strategy 15-33 normal vectors, changing 15-21 outliers 15-58 point list 15-34 radial deviation 15-47 range 15-44 scanning 15-38 segments 15-39 shortcut menu 15-31 using CAD model 15-31 curve measuring, results 15-46 best fit 15-50 calculating deviation 15-47 center of mass 15-50 deviation 15-47 custom header PCM commands 14-59 custom printout 9-4 automatic fields 9-8 customizing 9-7 defining printout output 9-9 global dummies 9-8 local dummies 9-8 result presentation 9-8 structure 9-7 cylinder 5-25 cylinder form 6-38
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Index
D
date 14-58 dateAndTime 14-58 default printout 9-2, 9-4 define clearance groups 7-26 desks 12-9 nominal data for curve 15-7 printout output 9-9 defining characteristics 6-1 features 5-1 probes 4-14 defining inside 5-15 defining outside 5-15 defining printout output 9-9 defining the master probe length 7-39 delete desk 12-21 icons 12-22 toolboxes 7-17 deleteFile 14-54 deleting characteristics 7-11 features 7-11 measurement plans 7-4 part alignment 4-52 desk deleting 12-21 renaming 12-21 desks adding measurement plans 12-9 diameter 6-35 diameter2 6-38 digitizing 3D curve in area 15-15 distance 6-37 distance_symmetry point 6-37 DMIS commands supported 13-2 DMIS files 9-29 DMIS import configuring 13-6 reports 13-11 run 13-8 DMIS measurement plans basics 13-2 dummies global 9-8 local 9-8 duplex mode, basics 10-1 dynalog configuring 2-3 control panel 2-2 display 2-2
function keys 2-2 keyboard 2-2 operating 2-5 touchpad 2-2
E
edit probe routes 7-22 ellipse 5-30 enter nominals 6-19 tolerances 6-19 erosion module 6-11 error report 11-8 evaluation settings copying to other features 5-12
F
feature angle 6-37 feature data variable 9-37 features 1-7 3D curve 5-29 adding 7-7 angle point 5-35 circle 5-17 color-coding 5-13 cone 5-27 copying 7-8 curve 5-29 cylinder 5-25 deleting 7-11 details 5-15 ellipse 5-30 general curve 5-37 general surface 5-36 in loops 14-24 line, 2d 5-22 line, 3D 5-24 measuring individually 8-4 moving 7-8 offset plane 5-32 plane 5-20 point 5-16 radius point 5-34 recall of 5-40 rectangle 5-32 renaming 7-13 searching 7-14 slot 5-31 sphere 5-28 sphere point 5-34 symmetry point 5-33
Index
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
features, defining 5-2 features,defining from CAD file 5-6 using feature recognition 5-5 using templates 5-4 field (array) using loops (example) 14-42 file commands (reference) 14-54 filter activating 6-29 fit methods 6-3 flatness 6-38 form 6-39 form plot 9-23 formula definition 14-10 formulas entering 14-17 functions and operators 14-11 functions (PCM) character chains~ (reference) 14-51 introduction 14-10 mathematical (reference) 14-49 measurement-specific 14-55
horizontal arm CMMs combining measurement plans 7-4
I
icon copying 12-22 deleting 12-22 icons labeling with bitmaps 12-11 icons list 1-5 import files for curve 15-8 measurement plan from DMIS 13-1 import DXF files 15-8 import PAB files 15-8 import VDA files 15-8 importing CAD data 5-6 importing ASCII file for curve 15-7 input/output commands (reference) 1452 input/output parameters 14-29 inquire 14-53 inquireList 14-53 inquireNumber 14-52 inquireText 14-52 installation Calypso, program version 11-3 service pack 11-5 installing probes 4-11 interrupting measurement plan run 8-13 intersection 5-42 introduction 1-1
G
gage correction qualification 5-18 GDT profile basics 6-40 Gear 5-60 general curve 5-37 general surface 5-36 getActual 14-55 getActualInspectionDir 14-54 getNominal 14-56 getProbe 14-56 getRecordHead 14-57 getWD 14-54 group creating 7-13 grouping ungrouping 7-13 groups forming 8-3 renaming 7-13
L
least-material condition 6-22 length 6-38 length of axis 6-36 lift curve demarking 15-6 marking 15-6 line, 2d 5-22 line, 3D 5-24 list of characteristics defining for Auto-Run 12-26 LMC 6-22 load interface Auto-Run 12-24 loading PCM file using dialog (example) 14-40 loading VDA file selectively 15-9
H
Holos 5-60 homing the CMM 4-8 horizontal arm CMM in duplex mode 10-1
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Index
loops alignment according to RPS 14-26 features in ~ 14-24 for multiple measurements 14-27 inserting 14-22 linear offset (example) 14-41 nest level 14-26 nested 14-26 nested for field (example) 14-42
M
main menu options 1-5 manual probe change 4-11 manual run starting 8-9 master measurement plan, horizontal arm CMMs 7-4 MCR20 defining holder positions 7-44 particularities 7-33 measure automatically 5-68 measurement ending, Auto-Run 12-27 running 8-2 starting 8-7 measurement plan basics 4-2 editing 7-19 import from DMIS 13-1 monitoring run 8-11 starting CNC run 8-8 starting manual run 8-9 viewing 7-52 measurement plan area 1-5 measurement plan editor features 4-80 measurement plan features search 7-14 measurement plan group forming 8-3 measurement plan run canceling 8-13 interrupting 8-13 restarting 8-14 measurement plan settings 4-78 Measurement plans open 4-4 measurement plans 1-7 combining (HAM) 7-4 copying 7-3 creating 4-3 deleting 7-4 editing 7-6 integrating user information 7-51
managing 7-2 mirroring 7-9 multimedia information 7-51 opening 4-4 renaming 7-2 running 8-2 saving 7-2 variable 14-4 with variant control (example) 14-44 measurement results copying result file 9-31 printing 9-6 save as ASCII file 9-29 save as DMIS 9-29 save as PROVACS I 9-29 save as PROVACS II 9-29 save as QDAS 9-29 save in merge file 9-29 save in table file 9-29 saving 9-29 measurement strategy 5-62 copying to other features 5-12 measurement, preparing Auto-Run 12-17 measuring configuration, selecting Auto-Run 12-25 measuring curves jump tolerance 15-29 measuring tolerance 15-26 measuring linear offset via loop (example) 14-41 measuring runs, monitoring Auto-Run 12-27 merge file 9-29 message 14-53 MMC 6-22 monitoring measurement plan run 8-11 most-material condition 6-22 mouse with 2 or 3 buttons 14-64 movement commands (PCM) 14-58 multimedia in measurement plans 7-51 multiple measurements with loops 14-27
N
nest level in loops 14-26 net point 5-17 nominal 6-32 nominals defining 6-19 normal vectors, checking 15-24 notational conventions 5
Index
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
O
offset plane 5-32 open measurement plan 4-4 opening Measurement Plan 4-4 output commands (reference) 14-52 output parameters 14-29
P
P6 alignment 4-54 pallet mapping 12-12 parallelism 6-39 parameters ASCII file (example) 14-46 definition 14-9 functions and operators 14-11 input and output parameters 14-29 loading 14-17 loading values into curve (example) 14-37 saving 14-16 part alignment 1-8 basics 4-31 create new 4-34 deleting 4-52 loading 4-33 rotate distance 4-49 rotating 4-44 rotating by distances 4-45 setting 4-30 part alignment systems, basics 4-31 parts data 9-35 parts family, measuring (example) 14-44 path generation circle 5-71 cone 5-71 cylinder 5-71 lines 5-76 measuring range 5-73 planes 5-73, 5-75 PCM debugging and testing 14-63 programming 14-12 syntax (reference) 14-47 testing printout 14-32 variables (reference) 14-48 plane 5-20 plane point 5-16 point 5-16 point generator 14-30
polar 2D 6-40 polar 3D 6-40 polarposition angle 6-36 polarposition height 6-36 polarposition radius 6-36 position 6-39 positionCMM 14-58 prerequisites color coding 4-6 rotary table 4-58 prerequisites, list of 4-5 presentationOff 14-59 presentationOn 14-59 print 14-53 results of measurement 9-6 printout header data entering 8-5 global 8-5 local 8-6 printout header fields defining your own 9-17 printout/protocol text output 6-12 probe adding styli 4-15 copying to other features 5-12 probe changer adding holders 7-40 assigning probes 7-48 automatic probe change 7-49 changing probe assignments 7-50 defining holder positions 7-43 for RDS 7-36 particularities, MCR20 7-33 particularities, SCR200 7-34 setting approach parameters 7-41 setting up 7-38 probe routes basics 7-22 editing 7-22 probes defining 4-14 preparing 4-13 qualifying for RDS with RDS-CAA 161 profile 6-39 projection angle one 6-36 projection angle two 6-37 projection plane copying to other features 5-12 PROVACS 9-32 PROVACS I files 9-29 PROVACS II files 9-29
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Index
Q
QDAS description file 9-32 QDAS files 9-29 QDAS format 9-32 QDAS values file 9-33 QDASCONV.CON 9-34 QDASCONV.EXE 9-32 qs-STAT 9-32
measurement 8-2 measurement plan 8-2 running a measurement plan 8-2 header data for printout 8-5
S
save measurement plans 7-2 measurement results 9-29 parameters 14-16 scanning 5-68 curve 15-38 general settings 5-70 scope of measurement forming group 8-3 individual features 8-4 SCR200 defining holder positions 7-46 particularities 7-34 searchDistance 14-58 searching characteristics 7-14 features 7-14 selecting coupling method (duplex operation) 10-5 self-centering probing 5-66 service pack decompress 11-5 installing 11-5 set up probe changer 7-38 setRecordHead 14-57 settings editor 7-19 shape of zone 6-41 shortcut menus 7-6 slot 5-31 space point 5-17 space point distance 6-37 special feature GEAR 5-60 HOLOS 5-60 sphere 5-28 sphere point 5-34 squareness 6-39 start manual run 8-9 start alignment basics 4-32 create new 4-34 loading 4-33 start measurement manual run 8-9 starting Calypso 1-3 CNC run 8-8
R
radial runout 6-40 radius 6-36 radius 2 6-38 radius measurement 6-36 radius point 5-34 RDS after collision 8-13 creating stylus list 4-16 defining geometry 7-36 loading a stylus list 4-20 qualifying with CAA 16-1 recall 5-40 recall points with area specification 5-41 rectangle 5-32 reference sphere determining 4-24 rename characteristics 7-13 desk 12-21 features 7-13 groups 7-13 renaming measurement plans 7-2 stylus 4-16 restart measurement plan run 8-14 result presentation 9-8 results printing 9-6 retract distance copying to other features 5-12 retract plane 7-30 rotary table definition 4-58 rotate distance 4-49 rotation angle 6-37 rotation in plane 4-31 rotation in space 4-31 roundness 6-38 routes checking 7-25 RPS alignment 4-53 with loop 14-26 run individual features 8-4
Index
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
starting a measurement plan 8-7 statistics program 9-32 stop light window canceling a measurement plan run 813 interrupting a measurement plan run 8-13 stopping measurement plan run 8-13 straightness 6-38 styli preparing 4-13 stylus adding 4-15 copying to other features 5-12 creating list for RDS 4-16 renaming 4-16 symbols 6 symmetry 6-39 symmetry point 5-33 synchronous mode 10-2 system requirements 11-2 systemCall 14-59 systemCallWithWait 14-59
two-button mouse 14-64 types of bracket in loops 14-26
U
user desk CAD symbols 1-6 CAD window 1-6 icons list 1-5 measurement plan area 1-5 menu bar 1-5 user information integrating 7-51 user privileges Auto-Run 12-6 using distance check 6-42 utilities erosion module 6-11 stylus qualification 6-10 textelement 6-12
V
variable feature data 9-37 variables definition 14-9 reference 14-48 variant control (example) 14-44
T
temperature compensation configuring 4-88 general 4-81 textelement 6-12 three-button mouse 14-64 TOL/PROFS 6-40 tolerances defining custom 6-24 entering 6-19 file with custom 6-25 LMC 6-22 MMC 6-22 toolboxes 7-15 creating 7-16 deleting 7-17 moving 7-17 sizing 7-17 true position best fit of bore pattern 6-43
W
width 6-38 window CAD window 3-1 with alternative (example) 14-34
X
X value 6-35
Y
Y value 6-35
Z
Z value 6-35
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)
Index
Index
10
61212-2010102
Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Calypso C-M-M-GUIDE

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Calypso C-M-M-GUIDE

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CALYPSO

Carl Zeiss Industrial Metrology Division D-73446 Oberkochen Germany

Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

The Zeiss Training Block

Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

The Dynalog Control Panel

Working with the CAD Window

Preparing the Measurement Plan

The List of Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Homing the CMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Installing and Qualifying Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Setting the Base / Start Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Prerequisites for the Rotary Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58

Defining the Clearance Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72

Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

How to Close Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77

Edit Measurement Plan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78

Editing the Measurement Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80 Temperature Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81

Details on Specific Part Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Linking Features in Constructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

Defining a Measurement Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

Path Generation Automatically Measuring Features . . 5-68

Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Defining Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Details on Specific Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35

Editing the Measurement Plan

The Toolboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Deleting a Custom Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 Sizing and Moving Toolboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

Editing a Measurement Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

Editing the Probe Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22

Using the Probe Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33

Multimedia User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51

Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Running a Measurement Plan

Monitoring Measurement Plan Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Viewing, Presenting and Editing Measurement Results

Set up Custom Printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

How to Display Variations Graphically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Saving Measurement Results to Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Converting Measurement results for qs-STAT . . . . . . . . 9-32

Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

The Duplex Mode

Using Duplex Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

Installing a Service Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

If a Software Error Occurs the Error Report . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11

The Auto-Run Interface

Auto-Run for System Administrators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6

Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Auto-Run for Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23

DMIS Import (Option)

Parameter-coded Measurements (Option)

Variables, Parameters and Formulas in Calypso . . . . . . . 14-9

Entering Parameters and Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15

Inserting Loops in PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22

Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Examples for PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-33

PCM Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-47

Tips and Tricks for Working with PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-63

Calypso (Rev. 3.5)